The URL can be used to link to this page

Specifications 2019.03.0182 BRIDGE STREET HOUSING NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS VALLEY COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS PROJECT MANUAL Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 55 Frank B. Murray Street, Suite 201 Springfield, MA 01103 September 28, 2018 CONFORMED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Architect’s Project Number 21611 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-i DOCUMENT 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Document 00 15 00 List of Drawing Sheets Document 00 41 00 Bid Form Document 00 52 00 Agreement Form Document 00 61 00 Bonds Document 00 72 00 General Conditions Document 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 00 00 General Requirements Section 01 11 00 Summary Section 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements Section 01 41 00 Air Barrier System Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 01 70 00 Execution Requirements Section 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching Section 01 74 00 Construction and Demolition Waste Management DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03 30 55 Cast-In-Place Concrete (Site) DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04 21 13.13 - Brick Veneer Masonry Section 04 90 00 Masonry Restoration and Cleaning DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Section 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-ii DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Section 06 15 33 Wood Decking Section 06 17 60 Wood Trusses Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry Section 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork Section 06 65 00 Poly-Ash Exterior Trim Section 06 66 20 Manufactured Trim and Ornaments - Urethane DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 01 50.19 Prep For Re-Roofing Section 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation Section 07 27 01 Interior Air & Vapor Control Layer Section 07 30 03 Metal Roof Panels Section 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles Section 07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding Section 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 84 00 Firestopping Section 07 90 00 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 11 00 Fiberglass Doors and Steel Frames Section 08 21 00 Flush Wood Doors Section 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels Section 08 52 13 Aluminum Clad Wood Windows Section 08 53 45 Polymer Windows Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring Section 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories Section 09 65 19 Polyester Composition Tile Flooring Section 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting Section 09 91 00 Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10 14 00 Signage Section 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-iii Section 10 55 00.13 - USPS-Delivery Postal Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Section 11 31 00 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12 21 13 Window Treatments Section 12 35 30 Residential Casework DIVISON 14 – ELEVATORS Section 14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevator DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION Section 21 00 00 Fire Suppression DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 22 10 00 Building Services Piping Section 22 30 10 Plumbing Pumps Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23- MECHANICAL Section 23 20 00 HVAC Piping Section 23 20 10 Natural Gas Piping Section 23 30 00 Air Distribution Section 23 30 10 Ducts and Duct Accessories Section 23 80 00 HVAC Equipment DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section 26 50 00 Interior Luminaires Section 26 50 10 Exterior Luminaires DIVISION 27- COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 00 00 Telephone and Intercommunication Equipment Section 27 05 13 Television Equipment 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-iv DIVISION 28- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm DIVISION 31- EARTHWORK Section 31 00 00 Earthwork/Site Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing Section 31 15 00 Site Demolition Section 31 23 00 Excavating, Filling, and Grading Section 31 25 00 Sediment & Erosion Control DIVISION 32- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 10 00 Bases/Ballasts & Paving Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving Section 32 14 00 Unit Paving Section 32 30 00 Site Improvements Section 32 31 00 Fences and Gates Section 32 90 00 Planting DIVISION 33- UTILITIES Section 33 11 00 Water Distribution System Section 33 20 00 Water Distribution Service Section 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewer Section 33 41 00 Storm Drainage Utilities Section 33 44 00 Storm Drainage Section 33 51 00 Natural Gas Distribution ATTACHMENTS: HAZMAT ASSESSMENT ARBORIST REPORT SOLAR BINDER END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 1 DOCUMENT 000115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS G-000 COVER SHEET G-001 ABBREVIATIONS, DRAWING STANDARDS, AND DRAWING INDEX G-002 CODE REVIEW AND EGRESS PLANS G-003 MAAB ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS G-004 MAAB ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS G-005 ASSEMBLY SCHEDULE G-006 GENERAL NOTES L-001 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN L-100 DEMOLITION PLAN L-200 LAYOUT & PLANTING PLAN L-201 DETAILS L-300 GRADING AND DRAINAGE PLAN L-301 DRAINAGE DETAILS AD-100 BASEMENT DEMOLITION PLAN AD-101 LEVEL 01 DEMOLITION PLAN AD-102 LEVEL 02 DEMOLITION PLAN AD-103 LEVEL 03 DEMOLITION PLAN AD-201 EXTERIOR DEMOLITION ELEVATIONS AD-202 EXTERIOR DEMOLITION ELEVATIONS S-101 PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN S-110 FOUNDATION SLAB & FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S-120 LEVEL 02 & LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-130 LEVEL 03 FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S-170 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-201 STRUCTURAL DETAILS S-202 STRUCTURAL DETAILS S-203 STRUCTURAL DETAILS S-204 STRUCTURAL DETAILS A-100 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN A-101 LEVEL 01 FLOOR PLAN A-102 LEVEL 02 FLOOR PLAN A-103 LEVEL 03 FLOOR PLAN A-170 ROOF PLAN 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 2 A-201 ELEVATIONS A-202 ELEVATIONS A-203 BIKE SHED PLANS & EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-300 BUILDING SECTIONS A-400 WALL SECTIONS A-401 FOUNDATION DETAILS A-410 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-420 ENLARGED UNIT PLANS A-421 ENLARGED UNIT PLANS A-422 ENLARGED ADA PLANS & PUBLIC RESTROOM A-430 FINISH SCHEDULE A-450 STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS & DETAILS A-451 STAIR PLANS, SECTIONS & DETAILS A-460 ELEVATOR PLANS AND DETAILS A-500 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A-501 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A-510 WINDOW SCHEDULE & WINDOW DETAILS A-511 WINDOW DETAILS A-512 WINDOW DETAILS A-520 DOOR SCHEDULE A-521 DOOR DETAILS A-522 STOREFRONT DETAILS A-530 ROOF DETAILS A-531 ROOF DETAILS A-532 ROOF DETAILS A-700 BASEMENT REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A-701 LEVEL 01 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A-702 LEVEL 02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A-703 LEVEL 03 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FP000 FIRE PROTECTION LEGEND FP100 BASEMENT FIRE PROTECTION FP200 FIRST FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION FP300 SECOND FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION FP400 THIRD FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION FP500 FIRE PROTECTION DETAILS FP900 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS P000 PLUMBING LEGEND P100 BASEMENT SANITARY & VENT P101 BASEMENT WATER PLAN P200 FIRST FLOOR SANITARY & VENT P201 FIRST FLOOR WATER PLAN 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 3 P300 SECOND FLOOR SANITARY & VENT P301 SECOND FLOOR WATER PLAN P400 THIRD FLOOR SANITARY & VENT P401 THIRD FLOOR WATER PLAN P500 ROOF PLUMBING PLAN P600 ENLARGED UNIT PLANS P700 PLUMBING DETAILS P701 PLUMBING DETAILS CONTINUED P900 PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS M000 MECHANICAL LEGEND M100 BASEMENT MECHANICAL PLAN M200 FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M300 SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M400 THIRD FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M500 ROOF MECHANICAL PLAN M600 ENLARGED UNIT PLANS M700 MECHANICAL DETAILS M701 MECHANICAL DETAILS M702 MECHANICAL DETAILS M704 SPLIT SYSTEM DIAGRAMS M705 SPLIT SYSTEM DIAGRAMS M706 SPLIT SYSTEM DIAGRAMS M800 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M900 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS M901 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS E000 ELECTRICAL LEGEND E100 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING E101 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS E102 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM E200 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING E201 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS E202 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM E300 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING E301 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS E302 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - FIRE ALARM E400 THIRD FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING E401 THIRD FLOOR PLAN- POWER & SYSTEMS E402 THIRD FLOOR PLAN- FIRE ALARM E500 ROOF PLAN - POWER & SYSTEMS E600 ENLARGED UNIT PLANS - LIGHTING & POWER E601 ENLARGED UNIT PLANS - FIRE ALARM 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 4 E700 RISER DIAGRAM & SCHEDULES E701 SCHEDULES (CONT.) E702 SCHEDULES (CONT.) E703 SCHEDULES (CONT.) E704 FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM E800 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E900 SPECIFICATIONS E901 SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED) ES000 PARTIAL SITE PLAN ES001 SITE DETAILS ES002 SITE DETAILS END OF DOCUMENT 000115 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 00-1 DOCUMENT 00 21 00 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - REVISED 1. Project Name and Location: Sergeant House 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, Massachusetts 2. This document contains instructions to bidders for the project named above. This bidding document is not part of the Contract Documents, unless specifically referenced in the Owner/Contractor Agreement. Additional Instructions to Bidders can be found in the Request for Proposals, General Contracting Services, Sergeant House, dated October, 2018. 3. To obtain bidding documents contact: Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 4. Deposit for Documents: A deposit is required to obtain copies of bidding documents. Deposits will be returned in full if the bidding documents are returned complete and in usable conditions within 7 calendar days after bid due date. Contact the person named above for the amount of deposit and cost and source for additional copies. 5. Equal Employment Opportunity: Minimum minority business enterprise and women owned business enterprise set asides. 6. Submission of Bids: Submit Bid Form before the time and date below. Late submissions will not be considered. Submit bids in sealed and labeled envelopes with the project name and bidder's name on the outside of the envelope. Mark the envelope: "Bid Enclosed - Do Not Open". Submit Bid To: Name: Firm: Room Number: Address: City, State, ZIP: Date and Time of Day: 7. Bids will be opened privately and the results will be released at the sole discretion of the Owner. Bids may not be withdrawn for 30 calendar days after receipt of bids. Announcements of bid results will be made within 14 days after receipt of bids. 8. A Performance and Payment Bond is required. Each bidder shall submit evidence of bondability for the entire value of the work. Bonds must be executed by a surety company licensed to do business at the location of the project. Bond form shall be AIA Document A312. 9. Oral, fax or email modifications to bids will not be considered. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 00-2 10. The Owner reserves the right to reject or accept any or all bids or to enter into negotiations with any bidder. The Owner reserves the right to waive any alleged breach of technicality. 11. The Owner reserves the right to modify the Contract Documents and rebid the project, if necessary, to meet Owner's budgetary requirements. 12. Questions: During the bidding period, submit written questions to the person named below. Questions will be answered in writing and copies distributed to bidders of record. Name: Firm: Address: City, State, ZIP: Telephone: Fax: Email: 13. Site Visit: A site visit is required. Contact the person named above to arrange to visit the site. END OF DOCUMENT 00 21 00 Arboriculture Services 154 Buffam Road □ Pelham, Massachusetts 01002 David C. Hawkins – Consulting Arborist Office/Fax: 413-253-4266 Mobile: 413-237-5106 Email: dhawkufs@comcast.net Web: www.ufstrees.com Carlos Nieto-Mattei August 24, 2018 Landscape Designer The Berkshire Design Group 4 Allen Pl, Northampton, MA 01060 RE: Tree Assessment and Protection Recommendations Report: 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, Mass. Carlos, This report is a follow up to my inspection and assessment of the trees on the grounds of the Sargent House at 82 Bridge Street, Northampton that is proposed for renovation. This inspection was implemented to assess the health and structural integrity of the trees marked for preservation, the impacts the new construction may have on them, and what measures will be needed to protect them during construction. As you recall, I visited the site and met with Berkshire Design’s Chris Chamberland and Laura Baker from Valley CDC on August 17th at which time we discussed the project, reviewed Plans L-101, L -200 and L-300 and identified the trees on site that are to be protected during construction. The following report contains a summary of my findings, photographs of the site and recommendations for further action. Thank you for the opportunity to assist the Berkshire Design Group with this project. Please don’t hesitate to contact me if you have any questions or need additional services. Best regards, David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 2 of 11 Contents Site Illustration ................................................................................................................. 3 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3 Area 1 ............................................................................................................................. 4 Area 1 Photographs ..................................................................................................... 5 Area 2 ............................................................................................................................. 5 Area 2 Photograph....................................................................................................... 6 Area 3 ............................................................................................................................. 7 Area 3 Photographs ..................................................................................................... 8 Area 4 ............................................................................................................................. 9 Area 4 Photograph....................................................................................................... 9 Disclaimer ..................................................................................................................... 10 Certification ................................................................................................................... 11 The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 3 of 11 Site Illustration Plan L-101 with tree locations and approximate protection areas outlined in blue. Note: the blue ‘X’ indicates a tree originally scheduled for protection but removed prior to my site visit. The red ‘Xs’ represent trees recommended for removal Introduction The Sargent House – an affordable living residence, is scheduled for renovation which will involve expansion into some of the landscaped areas surrounding the building. This will result in the removal of some trees and shrubs - mainly in the property’s interior. There are however four areas designated on the property’s edge where trees are to be preserved and protected during the construction process. The four areas were inspected and assessed on August 17th by Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. to determine tree health, construction impact and what protection measures would be needed. The following report lists each area highlighted in the Site Illustration (above), describes the existing conditions, possible construction impacts and recommendations for further action. Area 1 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 4 of 11 Area 1 Location: Southwest edge of property bordering and in existing driveway. Species: American elm (Ulmus americana). 50+ inches DBH; ~ 75 feet tall. Another tree was also marked on the L-101 plan as to be protected. This tree was removed prior to the August 17th inspection. Condition: Fair/Good. Some deadwood and dieback in the upper crown. Two to three large leaders were removed on the southeast side leaving the crown somewhat visually unbalanced. Comments: This is a large, old tree growing next to and under the driveway. The recent pruning was presumably done to accommodate new construction on the abutting property. The top dieback may be a result of root loss, damage or dieback from environmental stress. This dieback appears to be relatively recent and may correlate with the timing of the new construction next door. There is also visual evidence of some root activity in form of some minor asphalt heaving under the existing driveway which is scheduled to be re-paved. Recommendations: • Determine scope of root damage if possible. • Apply a root promoting fertilizer within root zone on both properties • Water root zone during extended dry periods • Prune deadwood • Install 10 foot 2 by 4s in a ‘tepee’ arrangement on the north side of the trunk to protect from incidental equipment contact. Boards should be installed so that only the tops are in contact with the tree. Burlap should be installed between tree trunk and contact point. • Install orange snow fence on outside of 2 by 4 protection to increase visibility. • Lay down steel plates on driveway over heaved areas to distribute weight of construction vehicles during the length of the project • Once construction is completed, remove asphalt over root system with care (using hand tools if necessary) to protect roots under asphalt surface • Monitor tree for health and insect and disease infestations over the next few growing seasons. The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 5 of 11 Area 1 Photographs View looking south at the elm and new construction next door Minor asphalt heaving from the elm’s roots Area 2 Location: North corner of property. Species: ten trees total. Canadian hemlock (Tsuga canadensis); eastern white pine (Pinus strobus); Norway maple (Acer platanoides). Sizes range from 6 inches to 27 inches DBH and 25 to 80 feet in height. Condition: Ranging from poor to good. Three of the 10 trees are poor condition with extensive dieback and/or significant trunk decay. One large pine (35 in. DBH) appears healthy but has a pocket of decay at about 20 feet on the tree’s north side and a ~15- degree lean to the south. Comments: the trees in poor condition consist of one 27-inch hemlock, and a 6 and 9- inch pine. The hemlock is about 85 percent dead and probably will not survive the next growing season. One of the 2 pines is dead, the other has significant trunk decay. The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 6 of 11 The location of the decay and lean on the 35-inch pine may increase the chance of tree failure in severe weather. Construction impact should be minimal and limited to soil compaction in the root zone outside of the TPZ. Recommendations: • Remove the hemlock and two pines • Further inspect the decayed area of the pine, or consider removing tree • Install a semi-permanent 6-foot chain link fence 15 to 20 feet from the remaining group of trees to delineate the tree protection zone (TPZ). Place signage on fence to identify tree protection zone and prohibit fence relocation or storage of materials and equipment inside of TPZ • Install 4 to 5 inches of woodchip mulch in areas of the lawn outside of the TPZ that may be traveled on by construction equipment Area 2 Photograph View looking north with recommended removals identified The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 7 of 11 Area 3 Location: East edge of property opposite building. Species: Hedge row of multiple species growing on or near the property line including invasive vines. Tree species include Norway maple, basswood (Tilia americana) and hemlock. Condition: Ranging from fair to good. One tree is heavily infested with bittersweet. Comments: These trees provide a natural buffer between the two properties. A wooden deck is proposed in the area where the existing fire escape stairs are and will extend to 10 feet of the property line. This will be within the area of the trees’ root systems and recommended TPZ. However, the deck will be construction on pilings which should limit excessive root damage or loss. Prior to the deck’s installation, it is possible the area between the building and trees will be used for equipment access. Soil compaction and root damage is a concern. A row of arborvitaes is proposed within 5 of the hedgerow trees after the deck is constructed. Excavation during the planting process could cause significant root damage. Recommendations: • Remove bittersweet infested tree • Install a semi-permanent 6-foot chain link fence 15 feet west of property line prior to deck’s construction. Place signage on fence to identify tree protection zone and prohibit fence relocation or storage of materials and equipment inside of TPZ • Install 4 to 5 inches of woodchip mulch in area between fence and building to mitigate compaction from construction equipment • Relocate TPZ fence to accommodate deck construction • Deck pilings should be positioned to affect minimal root damage • Consider planting arborvitae hedge on a raised berm to limit root damage or install a privacy fence. The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 8 of 11 Area 3 Photographs Above: view looking south along east property line. Red arrow indicates recommended removal of one tree Below: approximate TPZ location and proposed deck area The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 9 of 11 Area 4 Location: Northeast corner of property near Bridge Street. Species: 3 hemlocks – 9, 12 and 9 inches trunk diameter and one 8-inch diameter yew (Taxus cuspidate). Condition: Hemlocks are in fair condition and the yew is in good condition Comments: these trees also provide a vegetation buffer between the two properties although the effectiveness of the hemlocks is less than the yew due to sparse lower limbs and thin crowns most likely to the Hemlock Wooley Adelgid and Elongated Hemlock Scale. Construction impact should be minimal and limited to soil compaction in the root zone outside of the TPZ. Recommendations: • Install a semi-permanent 6-foot chain link fence 10 feet west of property line prior to Place signage on fence to identify tree protection zone and prohibit fence relocation or storage of materials and equipment inside of TPZ • Install 4 to 5 inches of woodchip mulch in area between fence and building to mitigate compaction from construction equipment Area 4 Photograph Northeast view the hemlock and yew trees The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 10 of 11 Disclaimer By the nature or their size, weight and miscellaneous structure, constant exposure to the weather and the elements, susceptibility to insect’s pest and decay organisms, use as homes to birds and animals and other reasons, trees always pose an inherent degree of hazard and risk from breakage, failure and other causes and conditions. Recommendations made by Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. are intended to minimize, reduce or eliminate hazardous conditions associated with trees. However there is not, and can never be, any guarantee or certainty that these recommendations will totally correct unsafe conditions or prevent failure or breakage of a tree, or that conditions will not change. The recommendations carried out as stated, should reduce the risk but they cannot completely eliminate it (except when the tree is removed), especially in the event of future growth, further deterioration, subsequent insect attacks, extreme weather conditions, eternal factors, (lightning strikes, fallen objects, vehicular damage, act.), storms or other acts of God or man. The Berkshire Design Group Tree Assessment and Recommendations Report: August 24, 2018 Attn: Mr. Carlos Nieto-Mattei Sargent House, 82 Bridge St. Northampton Prepared by: David Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Urban Forestry Solutions, Inc. Page 11 of 11 Certification I certify the statements in this report are, to the best of my knowledge, true, accurate and represent my professional opinion. Date: August 24, 2018 David C. Hawkins, Consulting Arborist Certified Arborist: Mass. Arborists Association MCA#1425 International Society of Arboriculture Board Certified Master Arborist ISA# NE-0541-B Licensed Arborist: Rhode Island Department of Environmental Management RI # 696 Member: American Society of Consulting Arborists The Tree Care Industry Association Mass. Tree Wardens and Foresters Assoc. Executive Board Member; Secretary ss O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun [ A S S O C I A T E S ] EnvironmentalSafetyHealthGeotechnical 293 Bridge Street Suite 500 Springfield, MA 01103 Tel 413 788 6222 Fax 413 788 8830 www.oto-env.com October 19, 2016 J0069-09-01 Valley Community Development Corporation 30 Market Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01060 Attn.: Ms. Laura Baker Re: Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building - 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts Dear Ms. Baker, O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. is pleased to provide this Limited Asbestos Screen (LAS), Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead Based Paint Screen (LBPS) for the residential building located at 82 Bridge Street in Northampton, Massachusetts. Should you have any questions regarding the report, please do not hesitate to call. Very truly yours, O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. Christine D. Arruda Robert Kirchherr Project Manager Principal Attachments: Table 1 – Asbestos Testing Results Table 2 – Lead-Based Paint Screen Results Limitations EMSL Laboratory Analytical Report O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 2 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts VALLEY COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION LIMITED ASBESTOS SCREEN, HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ASSESSMENT, AND LEAD-BASED PAINT SCREEN RESIDENTIAL BUILDING – 82 BRIDGE STREET NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS INTRODUCTION O’Reilly Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. (OTO) has conducted building assessment services at the 15-unit boarding-style residence located at 82 Bridge Street in Northampton, Massachusetts. Building assessment services (conducted on October 6, 2016) included: a Limited Asbestos Screen (LAS) of major building systems, a hazardous materials assessment, and a lead-based paint screen (LBPS) of painted surfaces. We understand the owner of the building (Valley Community Development Corporation (CDC), also the Client) plans to conduct interior renovations and possibly construct an addition to the building. As such, a comprehensive asbestos assessment is required in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) regulation. However, since the building is currently occupied and utilities are active, destructive testing (required by the regulation) is not possible at this time. This report presents the results of a Limited Asbestos Screen (LAS) performed in general accordance with ASTM Standard E2308- 05. A follow-up, comprehensive NESHAP assessment will be required after the building becomes vacant, but prior to the start of planned interior renovations. The LAS included limited sample collection of building materials for laboratory analysis to identify asbestos containing materials (ACM), as well as visual observation of presumed asbestos containing materials (PACM). Samples were collected of accessible building materials suspected to contain asbestos and generally included resilient flooring materials, wall and ceiling materials (plaster), adhesive mastics, and foundation damp- proofing. Analytical results indicate that none of samples collected contain asbestos. Additional evaluation of building materials per EPA NESHAP regulations would be required prior to building renovation or demolition activities. Abatement of ACM or PACM by a Massachusetts licensed asbestos abatement contractor would be required will to renovation or demolition activities. A lead-based paint screen (LBPS) was conducted by analyzing random painted surfaces in the Site buildings to identify possible lead-based paint. Lead concentration results at or above the 1.0 mg/cm2 regulatory standard set by the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD), and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) are considered to be lead-based paint. The building contained interior and exterior painted components in poor condition, showing signs of peeling or flaking. The majority of painted wood surfaces contain lead-based paint concentrations above 1.0 milligrams per square centimeter (mg/cm2). O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 3 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts Various hazardous materials have also been identified that will require the removal, transportation and disposal as part of the renovation project. The contractor should be informed of the materials and location of these asbestos and hazardous materials to ensure they are properly managed as part of the renovation project. The information provided in this report is subject to the Terms and Conditions as part of our original proposal agreement, and the attached Limitations. BUILDING DESCRIPTION According to City of Northampton Assessor’s records, the building is a two-and-a-half- story, wood-framed residential structure with a full brick/fieldstone basement (approximate 1,902 square feet footprint). Assessor’s records indicate the building was constructed in 1900, but information provided by the owner (Valley CDC) indicates the building was likely built in the late 1700s or early 1800s. The building has aluminum siding (covering older wood clapboard siding) and a pitched gabled roof covered with asphalt shingles. The building is serviced by public water and sewer and is heated with a natural gas fired boiler located in the basement. The building is a 15-unit boarding-style residence with common kitchen space on the first floor, and a total of four shared bathrooms located on the first and second floors. The building has a two-bay attached garage (constructed on a concrete slab-on-grade) on the C-Side1 of the building. Interior building finishes generally include various styles of sheet flooring (observed in common areas and a second floor bedroom) or carpeting (observed in a first floor bedroom) presumably over hardwood floors. A bathroom located on the second floor had ceramic floor tiles. Floor finishes in some areas/rooms may be “built-up” or constructed with multiple flooring finishes in place. Walls and ceilings consist of either plaster or gypsum/joint compound systems. In some areas/rooms, wall and ceiling systems are “built-up” or constructed with more than one system in place. In the first floor common hallway, 12-inch by 12-inch cellulose ceiling tiles were observed. In general, windows were observed to be vinyl replacement style windows (no fibrous glazing compounds observed). The building is heated with recirculating hot water baseboard heaters. The boiler for this system (a high-efficiency Lochinvar Knight boiler) is located in the basement of the building and is fueled with natural gas. Heating system distribution lines observed in the basement were insulated with foam or fiberglass, or were uninsulated. LIMITED ASBESTOS SCREEN (LAS) The Limited Asbestos Screen (LAS) was performed in general accordance with ASTM Standard E2308-05 to generally identify locations where asbestos containing materials (ACMs) and Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials (PACMs) may be present within 1 Exterior walls are labeled A through D in a clockwise manner, with A-Side wall parallel to the main road or street (in this case Bridge Street) O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 4 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts the building. The LAS is not intended to fulfill the requirements of an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP). If renovation activities are planned at the Site that would disturb the suspect ACMs and/or PACMs, a comprehensive asbestos survey (according to the EPA NESHAPs regulation) would be required. Confirmed ACM should be removed and disposed of by a Massachusetts licensed asbestos abatement contractor prior to disturbance. The LAS was conducted by Ms. Christine Arruda (MA License #AI073989) and Mr. Andrew Rolinger (MA License #AI000025) on October 6, 2016. The LAS included the basement, common kitchen (first floor), four bathrooms (first and second floors), common hallways (first, second and third floors), one occupied bedroom on the first floor (AB-corner of the building), and one un-occupied bedroom on the second floor (DA- corner of the building). Representative bulk samples were collected of accessible homogeneous materials. Samples were packaged according to appropriate chain of custody procedures, and forwarded to EMSL Analytical Services, Inc. of Cinnaminson, New Jersey for analysis of asbestos fibers by the polarized light microscopy (PLM) method, EPA 600/R-93/116. EMSL is an American Industrial Hygiene Association/National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (AIHA/NVLAP) accredited asbestos laboratory, and is licensed by the Massachusetts Department of Labor Standards (DLS). Materials identified by laboratory analysis as containing asbestos fibers are classified as asbestos containing materials (ACM). Additionally, the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection defines materials containing any amount of asbestos (less than 1%) be handled as an asbestos containing waste. Homogenous building components were visually classified based on color, texture, application and the age of the building component. Destructive sampling techniques were not used during our survey. ACMs may be located in areas not accessible during our survey, such as beneath floors, in hidden wall cavities, and behind kitchen and bathroom fixtures. ACMs in these areas may only become evident during renovation. Samples of accessible building materials suspected to contain asbestos were collected including: top (accessible) layers of resilient flooring, wall/ceiling plaster, wall/ceiling gypsum and joint compound, blown-in insulation, black dampproofing located on an area of basement stone wall, and roofing materials. There was no destructive sampling performed as part of this assessment. As shown in Table 1 (attached), asbestos was not detected in the materials tested. Analytical laboratory results are attached at the conclusion of this report. Additional materials identified as PACM include components (gaskets, refractory material) which may be located in the boiler in the basement, additional (older) layers of exterior siding, interior flooring, interior wall and/or ceiling materials, and insulation on heating system risers which may be located in walls or cavities not accessed during the LAS. Note that other asbestos containing materials may be present in the building hidden in O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 5 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts walls or chases, or underneath flooring or ceiling finishes not disturbed as part of our limited assessment. LIMITED LEAD-BASED PAINT SCREEN We conducted a random screening of painted surfaces to determine the presence of lead based paint. The lead paint assessment will be conducted using a portable, hand- held X-Ray fluorescence analyzer (XRF). The lead paint assessment was not performed with the intent of obtaining a Massachusetts Regulation Certification of Compliance. The limited sampling will provides the client with a general determination that lead paint is present within the site building. This information may be useful for contractors bidding and performing work and may provide them with the necessary information for compliance with the OSHA Lead in Construction Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62 Exterior Painted Surfaces The majority of the building is covered with aluminum siding. Accessible painted surfaces included the front (A-side) and side (B-side) porches, fire escape stairs, garage doors, and trim. In general, the majority of exterior painted surfaces exceeded the 1.0 mg/cm2, with a maximum level of 26.7 mg/cm2 detected on the day of our screen. Interior Painted Surfaces In general, interior painted surfaces inside the building (flat finish painted walls, i.e., non- trim, non-windowsill surfaces) ranged from 0.00 to 0.02 milligram of lead per square centimeter (mg/cm2). Other painted surfaces (base trim, decorative molding/mantelpieces, doors, doorway trim, windowsills, and other glossy finish painted surfaces) generally exceeded the 1.0 mg/cm2, with a maximum level of 29.1 mg/cm2 detected on the day of our screen. Based on our findings, we recommend consulting a licensed Massachusetts Lead Inspector if occupants of the building are to include children under six years of age. We recommend that regardless of lead paint concentration, contractors disturbing painted surfaces should comply and utilize the work practices and engineering controls identified in the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) lead in construction standard (29 CFR 1926.62). HAZARDOUS MATERIALS In addition to Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials, we have identified various hazardous materials that will require special handling and disposal procedures as part of the renovation project. O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 6 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) OTO observed a fluorescent lighting fixture(s) in the basement of the building. These lighting fixtures contain internal components (i.e. ballast) that require special handling and disposal procedures. The majority of the older light ballast contain PCBs. There are two methods currently available for disposal of PCB-containing ballasts including incineration and disposal. Incineration is typically more expensive. Regardless of the method, documentation must be provided that verifies the proper removal, transportation, and disposal (destruction/incineration) at an approved facility. In general, PCB ballasts must be placed in 55-gallon drums which once filled, the drums shall be closed and properly labeled for temporary storage, transport, and disposal in accordance with all applicable regulations. Drums containing PCB ballasts must be transported to an EPA-approved disposal facility (incinerator). Documentation must be provided that verifies the proper removal, transportation, and disposal (destruction/incineration) at the approved facility. Drums containing non-PCB fluids, ballast or capacitors shall be disposed of at a legally permitted disposal facility. Ballasts that are not labeled “No PCBs” must be removed, packaged and disposed of in accordance with EPA’s Green Lights Program (July 1994) for Lighting Waste Disposal and in compliance with governing regulations. Ballasts labeled “No PCBs” must be presumed to contain di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate (DEPH). All light fixture ballast require proper handling, transportation and disposal in accordance with the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (MassDEP) Universal Waste regulations. Mercury OTO personnel also observed fluorescent light bulbs for the fixture located in the building. Fluorescent light bulbs/tubes, thermostats and switches known or presumed to contain Mercury vapor or liquid must be removed, packaged, handled, transported and disposed of in compliance with the MassDEP Universal Waste regulations. Handling and disposal of fluorescent light bulbs and thermostats that contain Mercury liquid or vapor should be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Universal Waste Management Standard (310 CMR 30.1034) as well as EPA’s Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and other governing regulations and requirements. Guidance documents are also available from the EPA (i.e. the 1994 Green Lights Program for Lighting Waste Disposal). If fluorescent lamps become broken or damaged during removal, the broken lamps should be managed as hazardous waste. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) The building does not contain a centralized cooling (air conditioning) system. Rather, window-mounted air conditioning systems would be used for this purpose. Air conditioners, walk in coolers, refrigerators and freezers, and other white good appliances shall have the refrigerants/CFC’s removed before disposal. O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 7 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts The removal and disposal of chlorofluorocarbons is required for all air conditioning units. Removal, transportation and disposal of CFCs must be performed by a qualified and experienced CFC reclamation contractor in accordance with governing regulations (i.e. EPA’s Clean Air Act Amendments) prior to removal and disposal of this equipment. CFC recovery is typically performed by a mechanical or specialty contractor that is licensed by the EPA for CFC refrigerant recycling/recovery. All Federal, state and local regulations must be complied with when abating Freon- containing devices. Reclaimed CFCs must be handled by an EPA-certified refrigerant reclaimer. The name and address of the transporter and the refrigerant reclaimer, the amount of refrigerant recovered and shipped and the date of shipment and date of receipt by reclaimer must be provided at the conclusion of the abatement and demolition project. SUMMARY The LAS included limited sample collection of building materials for laboratory analysis to identify asbestos containing materials (ACM), as well as visual observation of presumed asbestos containing materials (PACM). Samples were collected of accessible building materials suspected to contain asbestos and generally included resilient flooring materials, wall and ceiling materials (plaster), adhesive mastics, and foundation damp- proofing. Analytical results indicate that none of samples collected contain asbestos. Additional evaluation of building materials per EPA NESHAP regulations would be required prior to building renovation or demolition activities. Abatement of ACM or PACM by a Massachusetts licensed asbestos abatement contractor would be required will to renovation or demolition activities. A lead-based paint screen (LBPS) was conducted by analyzing random painted surfaces in the building to identify possible lead-based paint. Lead concentration results at or above the 1.0 mg/cm2 regulatory standard set by the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD), and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) are considered to be lead-based paint. The building contained interior and exterior painted components in poor condition, showing signs of peeling or flaking, with lead- based paint concentrations above 1.0 milligrams per square centimeter (mg/cm2). A minimal amount of hazardous materials was observed in the Site building that would require special handling and disposal per Local, State, and/or Federal guidelines prior to renovation or demolition. These items included fluorescent lighting (bulbs and a fixture, potentially containing mercury and PCBs, respectively), and general household size and quantities of cleaners, paints, and stains. Additionally, window mounted air conditioning units may be utilized during warmer months; these items along with refrigerators contain chlorofluorocarbons. O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 8 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts TABLE 1 ASBESTOS TESTING RESULTS 82 BRIDGE STREET, NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS Sample Description Location Asbestos Content Sampled October 6, 2016 82B-01 Resilient Flooring (12”x12” Blue Pattern) Second Floor, DA2 Corner Room Closet None Detected 82B-02 Wall Plaster (Existing Damage) Second Floor, DA Corner Room Closet None Detected 82B-03 Black Dampproofing Stone Wall DA Corner Basement None Detected 82B-04 Flooring Resilient Flooring (Yellow Square Pattern) Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-04 Mastic Associated Yellow Mastic Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-05 Cove Base Brown Cove Base Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-05 Mastic Associated Tan Mastic Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-06 Wall Plaster (Core) First Floor, Base of Rear Stairwell None Detected 82B-07 Wall Plaster (Core) First Floor Front Hallway None Detected 82B-08 Flooring Resilient Sheet Flooring (Dark Blue Pebble Pattern) First Floor Front Hallway None Detected 82B-08 Mastic Associated Yellow Mastic First Floor Front Hallway None Detected 82B-09 Flooring Resilient Sheet Flooring (Light Blue Pebble Pattern) First Floor Rear (B- Side) Bathroom None Detected 82B-09 Mastic Associated Yellow Mastic First Floor Rear (B- Side) Bathroom None Detected 82B-10 Ceiling Plaster (Existing Damage, Upper Level) First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-11 Loose Blown-in Insulation First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 2 Exterior walls are labeled A through D in a clockwise manner, with A-Side wall parallel to the main road or street (in this case Bridge Street) O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 9 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts 82B-12 Wallboard Gypsum Ceiling Panel (Lower Level) First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-12 Joint Compound Associated Joint Compound First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-13 Gypsum Wallboard Gypsum Ceiling Panel (Middle Level) First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-13 Joint Compound Associated Joint Compound First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-14 Wall Plaster (Core) Second Floor, Rear Hallway None Detected 82B-15 Gypsum Wallboard (Core) Stairwell to Attic None Detected 82B-16 Wall Plaster (Existing Damage) Unfinished Attic Area None Detected 82B-17 Roofing Material Roof Level None Detected O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 10 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts TABLE 2 LEAD-BASED PAINT SCREEN RESULTS 82 BRIDGE STREET, NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS Material Description Location Lead Content (mg/cm2) Exterior White Paint Wood Clapboard (beneath aluminum siding) 26.7 Light Grey Paint Rear/Side Fire Stairs - Tread 0.1 Light Grey Paint Rear/Side Fire Stairs – Handrail 0.1 Light Grey Paint Rear Side Fire Stairs – Riser 0.0 White Paint Exterior Window Trim 26.1 White Paint Exterior Window Trim 22.5 White Paint Front Porch Column (abutting structure) 18.3 White Paint Front Porch – Handrail (top) 1.0 White Paint Front Porch – Decorative Baluster 0.6 White Paint Front Porch – Front Column 20.4 Dark Grey Paint Front Porch – Decking 0.6 White Paint Walkway – Half Masonry Wall 7.7 White Paint Wood Trim – Roofline 23.0 White Paint Wood Trim – Roofline 18.7 White Paint Wood Trim – Roofline 1.7 Basement Brown Paint Stairway – Stringer 6.1 Green Paint Door 5.8 Magenta Paint Walls 0.12 White Paint Ceiling Joists 0.0 White Paint Door 19.7 First Floor White Paint Apt. 2A - Window Trim 20.9 White Paint Apt. 2.A - Window Sill 20.8 White Paint Apt. 2A – Entry Door 11.9 White Paint Apt. 2A – Entry Door Frame 7.9 Light Grey Paint Apt 2A - Wall 0.0 Cream Paint Kitchen – Window Trim 12.6 Cream Paint Kitchen – Window Sill 8.8 White Paint Kitchen – Door 5.3 White Paint Kitchen – Beaded Wainscoting 15.2 Cream Paint Kitchen - Door Frame 13.5 O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun [ A S S O C I A T E S ] E N G I N E E R I N G LIMITATIONS 1. The observations presented in this report were made under the conditions described herein. The conclusions presented in this report were based solely upon the services described in the report and not on scientific tasks or procedures beyond the scope of the project or the time and budgetary constraints imposed by the client. The work described in this report was carried out in accordance with the contract Terms and Conditions. 2. In preparing the report O'Reilly, Talbot, Okun & Associates, Inc. relied on certain information provided by state and local officials and other parties referenced herein, and on information contained in the files of state or local regulatory agencies at the time of the file review. Although there may have been some degree of overlap in the information provided by these sources, O'Reilly, Talbot, Okun & Associates, Inc. did not attempt to independently verify the accuracy or completeness of all information reviewed or received during the course of this assessment. 3. Observations were made of the site and of the structures on the site as indicated within the report. Where access to portions of the site or to structures on the site was unavailable or limited, we render no opinion as to the presence of asbestos containing materials or hazardous materials, or to the presence of indirect information relating to asbestos containing or hazardous materials in that portion of the site. In addition, we render no opinion as to the presence of asbestos containing or hazardous materials, where direct observations of portions of the site where obstructed by objects or coverings on or over these surfaces. 4. Unless otherwise specified in the Report, we did not perform testing or analyses to determine the presence or concentration of hazardous material or oil, or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) at the site or in the environment at the site. 5. Our report was prepared for the exclusive benefit of our client. Reliance upon the report and its conclusions is not made to third parties or future property owners. O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Page 11 [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Valley Community Development Corporation Limited Asbestos Screen, Hazardous Materials Assessment, and Lead-Based Paint Screen Residential Building – 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts Cream Paint Kitchen – Lockers 0.0 Cream Paint Kitchen – Wood Trim 12.3 Cream Paint Kitchen – Cabinets 0.0 Cream Paint Rear Bathroom – Window Frame 10.4 Cream Paint Rear Stairs – Riser 8.8 Second Floor White Paint Apt. 7A – Window Trim 20.1 White Paint Apt. 7A – Window Sill 23.3 White Paint Apt. 7A – Closet Door 28.1 White Paint Apt. 7A – Closet Trim 22.2 White Paint Apt. 7A – Mantle 29.1 White Paint Apt. 7A – Entry Door 26.8 White Paint Apt. 7A – Entry Door Trim 23.5 White Paint Apt. 7A – Ceiling 0.0 Cream Paint Apt. 7A – Wall 0.0 Cream Paint Rear Hall – Baseboard 15.2 Cream Paint Rear Hall – Door Paint 5.1 Cream Paint Rear Hall - Door Trim 10.0 Cream Paint Front Bathroom – Wall 0.0 Cream Paint Front Bathroom - Door Trim (to adjoining room) 1.5 Cream Paint Stairs to 3rd Floor – Tread 0.4 Cream Paint Stairs to 3rd Floor – Riser 1.3 Third Floor White Paint Hallway Wall 0.0 J0069-09-04 October 2, 2018 Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Assessment 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts PREPARED FOR: Valley Community Development Corporation 30 Market Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01060 PREPARED BY: O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. 293 Bridge Street, Suite 500 Springfield, MA 01103 TABLE OF CONTENTS i 1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................... 1 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 1 3.0 SUMMARY OF ASBESTOS ASSESSMENT ........................................................................ 2 4.0 ASBESTOS TESTING RESULTS ........................................................................................ 2 5.0 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................................. 3 5.1 LEAD PAINT SCREENING ........................................................................................... 3 5.2 PRODUCTS CONTAINING PCBs ................................................................................. 4 5.3 PRODUCTS CONTAINING MERCURY ........................................................................ 5 6.0 CONCLUSIONS.................................................................................................................... 5 TABLES Table 1 Asbestos Testing Results Table 2 Asbestos Quantities APPENDICES Appendix A Limitations Appendix B EMSL Laboratory Analytical Results October 2, 2018 J0069-09-04 Valley Community Development Corporation 30 Market Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01060 Attn: Ms. Laura Baker Real Estate Project Manager Re: Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Assessment 82 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts Dear Ms. Baker: O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. is pleased to provide this Asbestos & Hazardous Materials Assessment for the building associated with the above- referenced address in Northampton, Massachusetts. We appreciate the opportunity to assist you on this project. Should you have any questions regarding the report, please do not hesitate to call. Very truly yours, O’Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. Andrew P. Rolinger Christine D. Arruda Senior Project Manager Project Manager/Reviewer Valley Community Development Corporation Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Assessment Residential Building 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA 0069-09-04 1 ASBESTOS & HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ASSESSMENT RESIDENTIAL BUILDING 82 BRIDGE STREET NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS OCTOBER 2, 2018 1.0 INTRODUCTION O’Reilly Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. (OTO) has conducted an asbestos and hazardous materials assessment of the 15-unit boarding-style residence located at 82 Bridge Street in Northampton, Massachusetts. This assessment supplements a Limited Asbestos Screen (LAS) of the building which was previously conducted by OTO in October of 2016. Our previous screening included limited testing for asbestos containing materials and lead paint. This assessment was performed in general accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) regulations to prepare the building for renovations within the front portion of the structure and demolition of the rear portion of the structure. Assessment activities were conducted to generally identify locations where asbestos containing materials (ACMs) and Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials (PACMs) may be present within the building. The information provided in this report is subject to the attached Limitations. 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION According to City of Northampton Assessor’s records, the building is a two-and-a-half- story, wood-framed residential structure with a full brick/fieldstone basement (approximate 1,902 square feet footprint). Assessor’s records indicate the building was constructed in 1900, but information provided by the owner (Valley CDC) indicates the building was likely built in the late 1700s or early 1800s. The building has aluminum siding (covering older wood clapboard siding) and a pitched gabled roof covered with asphalt shingles. The building is serviced by public water and sewer and is heated with a natural gas fired boiler located in the basement. The building is a 15-unit boarding-style residence with common kitchen space on the first floor and a total of four shared bathrooms located on the first and second floors. The building has a two-bay attached garage (constructed on a concrete slab-on-grade) on the C-Side1 of the building. 1 Exterior walls are labeled A through D in a clockwise manner, with A-Side wall parallel to the main road or street (in this case Bridge Street) Valley Community Development Corporation Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Assessment Residential Building 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA 0069-09-04 2 Interior building finishes generally include various styles of sheet flooring (observed in common areas and a second floor bedroom) or carpeting (observed in a first floor bedroom) presumably over hardwood floors. A bathroom located on the second floor had ceramic floor tiles. Walls and ceilings consist of either plaster or gypsum/joint compound systems. In the first floor common hallway, 12-inch by 12-inch cellulose ceiling tiles were observed. In general, windows were observed to be vinyl replacement style windows (no fibrous glazing compounds observed). The building is heated with recirculating hot water baseboard heaters. The boiler for this system (a high-efficiency Lochinvar Knight boiler) is located in the basement of the building and is fueled with natural gas. Heating system distribution lines observed in the basement were insulated with foam or fiberglass, or were uninsulated. 3.0 SUMMARY OF ASBESTOS ASSESSMENT Representative bulk samples were collected of accessible homogeneous materials. Samples were packaged according to appropriate chain of custody procedures, and forwarded to EMSL Analytical Services, Inc. of Cinnaminson, New Jersey for analysis of asbestos fibers by the polarized light microscopy (PLM) method, EPA 600/R-93/116. EMSL is an American Industrial Hygiene Association/National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (AIHA/NVLAP) accredited asbestos laboratory, and is licensed by the Massachusetts Department of Labor Standards (DLS). Samples were collected by Mr. Andrew P. Rolinger (MA DLS Asbestos Inspectors AI 000025). Materials identified by laboratory analysis as containing asbestos fibers are classified as asbestos containing materials (ACM). Homogenous building components were visually classified based on color, texture, application and the age of the building component. The majority of building is currently occupied. As such, limited destructive sampling techniques were used during our survey, where feasible. ACMs may be located in areas not accessible during our survey, such as beneath floors, in hidden wall cavities, in inaccessible areas, and in other enclosed spaces. ACMs in these areas may only become evident during renovation or demolition. In accordance with state and federal regulations, materials that are tested to contain 1% and greater of asbestos will be classified as ACM. Additionally, the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection defines materials containing any amount of asbestos (less than 1%) be handled as an asbestos containing waste. 4.0 ASBESTOS TESTING RESULTS Laboratory analytical results are attached and summarized in Table 1. As indicated, laboratory analysis has identified asbestos fibers in the following materials: • Caulking Materials on Exterior Siding and Window Openings Valley Community Development Corporation Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Assessment Residential Building 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA 0069-09-04 3 Table 2 Approximate Asbestos Quantities MATERIAL QUANTITY Exterior Siding/Window Caulk 150-200 Linear Feet (on Rear Siding Seams), Plus approximately 40 Window Openings Asbestos was not detected in plaster finishes, in gypsum wallboard or associated joint compound materials, in textured ceiling skim finishes, in resilient flooring materials and associated mastics, in suspended or spline ceiling tiles, in blown-in insulation, in cove base materials, in ceramic tile adhesive or grout, in stair treads, dampproofing materials, or in roofing materials. Note that other asbestos containing materials may be present in the building hidden in walls or chases, underneath flooring, or above ceilings not disturbed as part of our assessment. 5.0 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 5.1 LEAD PAINT SCREENING In October of 2016, OTO conducted a random screening of painted surfaces to determine the presence of lead based paint. The lead paint testing was conducted by analyzing painted surfaces with a portable x-ray fluorescence (XRF) analyzer. The lead paint assessment was not conducted by a licensed Massachusetts Lead Inspector, nor was the lead paint screening performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Lead Regulations with the intent of obtaining a Massachusetts Lead Regulation Certification of Compliance. In general, concentrations of lead in paint that exceed 1.0 mg/cm2 are classified as dangerous by the EPA. Exterior Painted Surfaces The majority of the building is covered with aluminum siding. Accessible painted surfaces included the front (A-side) and side (B-side) porches, fire escape stairs, garage doors, and trim. In general, the majority of exterior painted surfaces exceeded the 1.0 mg/cm2 action level, with a maximum level of 26.7 mg/cm2 detected on the day of our screen. Interior Painted Surfaces In general, interior painted surfaces inside the building (flat finish painted walls, i.e., non- trim, non-windowsill surfaces) ranged from 0.00 to 0.02 milligram of lead per square centimeter (mg/cm2). Other painted surfaces (base trim, decorative molding/mantelpieces, doors, doorway trim, windowsills, and other glossy finish painted surfaces) generally Valley Community Development Corporation Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Assessment Residential Building 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA 0069-09-04 4 exceeded the 1.0 mg/cm2 action level, with a maximum level of 29.1 mg/cm2 detected on the day of our screen. Supplemental Lead Paint Screening, September 2018 At the request of Client, OTO conducted supplemental testing of painted fireplace mantles in units 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 6A, and 7A, and a painted mirror in the first floor hallway. In general, painted mantles in Units 2B, 3B, 6A, 7A, exhibited lead concentrations exceeding the 1.0 mg/cm2 action level, with a maximum level of 41 mg/cm2 detected. Painted mantles in Units 2A, 3A exhibited lead concentrations below the 1.0 mg/cm2 action level, with a maximum level of 0.04 mg/cm2 detected. Lead was not detected in the painted hallway mirror located on the first floor. Based on our findings, we recommend consulting a licensed Massachusetts Lead Inspector if occupants of the building are to include children under six years of age. We recommend that regardless of lead paint concentration, contractors disturbing painted surfaces should comply and utilize the work practices and engineering controls identified in the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) lead in construction standard (29 CFR 1926.62). 5.2 PRODUCTS CONTAINING PCBs OTO observed a fluorescent lighting fixture(s) in the basement of the building. These lighting fixtures contain internal components (i.e. ballast) that require special handling and disposal procedures. The majority of the older light ballast contain PCBs. There are two methods currently available for disposal of PCB-containing ballasts including incineration and disposal. Incineration is typically more expensive. Regardless of the method, documentation must be provided that verifies the proper removal, transportation, and disposal (destruction/incineration) at an approved facility. In general, PCB ballasts must be placed in 55-gallon drums which once filled, the drums shall be closed and properly labeled for temporary storage, transport, and disposal in accordance with all applicable regulations. Drums containing PCB ballasts must be transported to an EPA-approved disposal facility (incinerator). Documentation must be provided that verifies the proper removal, transportation, and disposal (destruction/incineration) at the approved facility. Drums containing non-PCB fluids, ballast or capacitors shall be disposed of at a legally permitted disposal facility. Ballasts that are not labeled “No PCBs” must be removed, packaged and disposed of in accordance with EPA’s Green Lights Program (July 1994) for Lighting Waste Disposal and in compliance with governing regulations. Ballasts labeled “No PCBs” must be presumed to contain di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate (DEPH). All light fixture ballast require proper handling, transportation and disposal in accordance with the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (MassDEP) Universal Waste regulations. Valley Community Development Corporation Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Assessment Residential Building 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA 0069-09-04 5 5.3 PRODUCTS CONTAINING MERCURY OTO personnel also observed fluorescent light bulbs in fixtures located within the building. Fluorescent light bulbs/tubes, thermostats and switches known or presumed to contain Mercury vapor or liquid must be removed, packaged, handled, transported and disposed of in compliance with the MassDEP Universal Waste regulations. Handling and disposal of fluorescent light bulbs and thermostats that contain Mercury liquid or vapor should be performed in accordance with the Massachusetts Universal Waste Management Standard (310 CMR 30.1034) as well as EPA’s Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and other governing regulations and requirements. Guidance documents are also available from the EPA (i.e. the 1994 Green Lights Program for Lighting Waste Disposal). If fluorescent lamps become broken or damaged during removal, the broken lamps should be managed as hazardous waste. 6.0 CONCLUSIONS Based on sampling and analytical results, we have identified Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM). These materials must be removed according to federal and state abatement/removal regulations by a licensed Massachusetts Asbestos Abatement Contractor prior to renovation or demolition activities if they are likely to be disturbed as part of these activities. Asbestos containing materials that will not be disturbed does not require removal as part of the asbestos regulations. Table 1 Asbestos Testing Results Sample Description Location Asbestos Content Sampled October 6, 2016 82B-01 Resilient Flooring (12”x12” Blue Pattern) Second Floor, DA1 Corner Room (Unit 7A) Closet None Detected 82B-02 Wall Plaster (Existing Damage) Second Floor, DA Corner Room Closet None Detected 82B-03 Black Dampproofing Fieldstone Wall DA Corner Basement None Detected 82B-04 Flooring Resilient Flooring (Yellow Square Pattern) Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-04 Mastic Associated Yellow Mastic Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-05 Cove Base Brown Cove Base Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-05 Mastic Associated Tan Mastic Kitchen, First Floor None Detected 82B-06 Wall Plaster (Core) First Floor, Base of Rear Stairwell None Detected 82B-07 Wall Plaster (Core) First Floor Front Hallway None Detected 82B-08 Flooring Resilient Sheet Flooring (Dark Blue Pebble Pattern) First Floor Front Hallway None Detected 82B-08 Mastic Associated Yellow Mastic First Floor Front Hallway None Detected 82B-09 Flooring Resilient Sheet Flooring (Light Blue Pebble Pattern) First Floor Rear (B- Side) Bathroom None Detected 82B-09 Mastic Associated Yellow Mastic First Floor Rear (B- Side) Bathroom None Detected 82B-10 Ceiling Plaster (Existing Damage, Upper Level) First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-11 Loose Blown-in Insulation First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 1 Exterior walls are labeled A through D in a clockwise manner, with A-Side wall parallel to the main road or street (in this case Bridge Street) 82B-12 Wallboard Gypsum Ceiling Panel (Lower Level) First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-12 Joint Compound Associated Joint Compound First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-13 Gypsum Wallboard Gypsum Ceiling Panel (Middle Level) First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-13 Joint Compound Associated Joint Compound First Floor D-Side Bathroom None Detected 82B-14 Wall Plaster (Core) Second Floor, Rear Hallway None Detected 82B-15 Gypsum Wallboard (Core) Stairwell to Attic None Detected 82B-16 Wall Plaster (Existing Damage) Unfinished Attic Area None Detected 82B-17 Roofing Material Roof Level (Second Floor, Rear Demo Portion) None Detected Sampled September 26, 2018 82B-18 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring Third Floor, Unit 8B None Detected 82B-18 Mastic Associated Mastic Third Floor, Unit 8B None Detected 82B-19 Skim Coat Wall Skim Coat Attic Area of Third Floor, Unit 8A Closet None Detected 82B-19 Base Coat Associated Wall Plaster Attic Area of Third Floor, Unit 8A Closet None Detected 82B-20 Gypsum Gypsum Wallboard Third Floor, Unit 8A None Detected 82B-20 Joint Compound Associated Joint Compound Third Floor, Unit 8A None Detected 82B-21 Loose Blown-in Insulation Attic Hatchway above Third Floor Common Hallway None Detected 82B-22 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring (Under Carpet) Third Floor, Unit 9A None Detected 82B-22 Mastic Associated Mastic Third Floor, Unit 9A None Detected 82B-23 Sheet Floor Blue Small Pebble Pattern Sheet Third Floor, Common Hallway None Detected Flooring 82B-23 Mastic Associated Mastic Third Floor, Common Hallway None Detected 82B-24 Flooring Brown Slate Pattern Resilient Flooring (Top Layer) Third Floor, Unit 9B None Detected 82B-24 Mastic Associated Yellow Mastic Third Floor, Unit 9B None Detected 82B-25 Gypsum Wallboard Gypsum Wallboard Third Floor, Rear Side of Unit 9A None Detected 82B-25 Joint Compound Associated Joint Compound Third Floor, Rear Side of Unit 9A None Detected 82B-26 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring (Bottom Layer) Third Floor, Unit 9B None Detected 82B-26 Mastic Associated Mastic Third Floor, Unit 9B None Detected 82B-27 2x4 Suspended Ceiling Tile Second Floor, Unit 7B None Detected 82B-28 2x4 Suspended Ceiling Tile Second Floor, Unit 7B None Detected 82B-29 Wall Plaster (Core) Second Floor, Unit 7B None Detected 82B-30 Plaster Ceiling Plaster (Core) Second Floor, Unit 7B (Above Ceiling Tile) None Detected 82B-30 Skim Associated Skim Coat Second Floor, Unit 7B (Above Ceiling Tile) None Detected 82B-31 2x4 Suspended Ceiling Tile Second Floor, Unit 6A None Detected 82B-32 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring Second Floor, Unit 5 None Detected 82B-32 Mastic Associated Mastic Second Floor, Unit 5 None Detected 82B-33 Plaster Wall Plaster (Core) Second Floor, Unit 5 None Detected 82B-33 Skim Associated Skim Coat Second Floor, Unit 5 None Detected 82B-34 Flooring Blue Resilient Flooring (12x12 Tile) Second Floor, Unit 4 None Detected 82B-34 Mastic Associated Mastic Second Floor, Unit 4 None Detected 82B-35 Plaster Ceiling Plaster (Core) Second Floor, Unit 4 None Detected 82B-35 Skim Associated Skim Coat Second Floor, Unit 4 None Detected 82B-36 Flooring Pink/Beige Resilient Flooring Second Floor, Bathroom #3 None Detected 82B-36 Mastic Associated Mastic Second Floor, Bathroom #3 None Detected 82B-37 Flooring Brown Resilient Flooring Second Floor, Unit 6B None Detected 82B-37 Mastic Associated Mastic Second Floor, Unit 6B None Detected 82B-38 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring First Floor, Unit 3A None Detected 82B-38 Mastic Associated Mastic First Floor, Unit 3A None Detected 82B-39 12x12 Spline Ceiling Tile First Floor Unit 3B None Detected 82B-40 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring First Floor, Unit 3B None Detected 82B-40 Mastic Associated Mastic First Floor, Unit 3B None Detected 82B-41 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring First Floor, Unit 1 None Detected 82B-41 Mastic Associated Mastic First Floor, Unit 1 None Detected 82B-42 Textured Skim on Ceiling First Floor, Unit 1 None Detected 82B-43 Textured Skim on Ceiling First Floor, Unit 1 None Detected 82B-44 Gypsum Gypsum Wallboard First Floor, Unit 1 None Detected 82B-44 Joint Compound Associated Joint Compound First Floor, Unit 1 None Detected 82B-45 Ceiling Plaster (Core) First Floor, Apartment 2B, Above Spline Tiles None Detected 82B-46 12x12 Spline Ceiling Tile First Floor Unit 2B None Detected 82B-47 Plaster Wall Plaster First Floor Unit 2B None Detected 82B-47 Skim Associated Skim Coat First Floor Unit 2B None Detected 82B-48 Stair Tread Grey Stair Tread Front Interior Stairwell None Detected 82B-48 Mastic Associated Mastic Front Interior Stairwell None Detected 82B-49 Flooring Beige Resilient Flooring (Top Layer) First Floor, Kitchen None Detected 82B-49 Mastic Associated Mastic First Floor, Kitchen None Detected 82B-50 Flooring Blue Resilient Flooring (Bottom Layer, Under Luan) First Floor, Kitchen None Detected 82B-50 Mastic Associated Mastic First Floor, Kitchen None Detected 82B-51 Cove Base Brown Cove Base First Floor, Kitchen None Detected 82B-51 Mastic Associated Mastic First Floor, Kitchen None Detected 82B-52 Bathroom Ceramic Tile Grout Second Floor, Bathroom #4 None Detected 82B-53 Grey Cove Base First Floor, B-Side Bathroom #2 None Detected 82B-54 Bathroom Ceramic Tile Grout First Floor, B-Side Bathroom #2 None Detected 82B-55 Bathroom Ceramic Tile Adhesive First Floor, B-Side Bathroom #2 None Detected 82B-56 Exterior Caulk (Vertical Bread) B-Side Exterior Siding 6% Chrysotile 82B-57 Exterior Caulk (Vertical Bread) D-Side Exterior Siding 6% Chrysotile 82B-58 Window Glazing Small Garage Window, C-Side of Building None Detected 82B-59 Gypsum Ceiling First Garage Bay None Detected 82B-60 Gypsum Ceiling First Garage Bay None Detected 82B-61 Fiberboard under Exterior Aluminum Siding B-Side, Rear None Detected 82B-62 Roofing Top Layer Asphaltic Shingle C-Side, Demo Portion None Detected 82B-62 Adhesive Associated Black Adhesive C-Side, Demo Portion None Detected 82B-63 Roofing Bottom Layer Asphaltic Shingle C-Side, Demo Portion None Detected 82B-63 Adhesive Associated Black Adhesive C-Side, Demo Portion None Detected 82B-64 Paper Under Asphaltic Shingle C-Side, Demo Portion None Detected LIMITATIONS 1. The observations presented in this report were made under the conditions described herein. The conclusions presented in this report were based solely upon the services described in the report and not on scientific tasks or procedures beyond the scope of the project or the time and budgetary constraints imposed by the client. The work described in this report was carried out in accordance with the contract Terms and Conditions. 2. In preparing the report O'Reilly, Talbot, Okun & Associates, Inc. relied on certain information provided by state and local officials and other parties referenced herein, and on information contained in the files of state or local regulatory agencies at the time of the file review. Although there may have been some degree of overlap in the information provided by these sources, O'Reilly, Talbot, Okun & Associates, Inc. did not attempt to independently verify the accuracy or completeness of all information reviewed or received during the course of this assessment. 3. Observations were made of the site and of the structures on the site as indicated within the report. Where access to portions of the site or to structures on the site was unavailable or limited, we render no opinion as to the presence of asbestos containing materials, lead based paint, or hazardous, or to the presence of indirect information relating to asbestos containing, lead based paint, or hazardous materials in that portion of the site. In addition, we render no opinion as to the presence of asbestos containing, lead based paint, or hazardous materials, where direct observations of portions of the site where obstructed by objects or coverings on or over these surfaces. 4. Unless otherwise specified in the Report, we did not perform testing or analyses to determine the presence or concentration of additional potential hazardous materials, oil, or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) at the site or in the environment at the site. 5. Our report was prepared for the exclusive benefit of our client. Reliance upon the report and its conclusions is not made to third parties or future property owners. EMSL Analytical, Inc. 200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077 Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974 http://www.EMSL.com / cinnasblab@EMSL.com 041628116EMSL Order: Customer ID:ENVI07 Customer PO:0069-09-01R Project ID: Attention:Phone:Christine Arruda (413) 788-6222 Fax:O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc.(413) 788-8830 Received Date:293 Bridge Street 10/11/2016 9:30 AM Analysis Date:Springfield, MA 01103 10/11/2016 Collected Date:10/06/2016 Project:82 Bridge Street Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 82B-01 041628116-0001 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Blue Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 2nd Floor Closet - Resilient Flooring- 12"x12" Blue Recommend TEM. 82B-02 041628116-0002 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 2nd Floor Closet - Plaster Wall 82B-03 041628116-0003 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Basement - Black Damp-Proofing 82B-04-Flooring 041628116-0004 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)75%Cellulose25%White Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Resilient Flooring- Top Layer 82B-04-Mastic 041628116-0004A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Mastic 82B-05-Cove Base 041628116-0005 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Brown Cove Base 82B-05-Mastic 041628116-0005A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Mastic 82B-06 041628116-0006 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)97%Hair3%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Rear Stairs - Plaster Wall 82B-07 041628116-0007 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Front Hall - Plaster Wall 82B-08-Flooring 041628116-0008 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)75%Cellulose25%Blue Fibrous Homogeneous Hall - Resilient Floor- Dark Blue Pebble 82B-08-Mastic 041628116-0008A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Hall - Mastic 82B-09-Flooring 041628116-0009 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)75%Cellulose25%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Rear Bath - Resilient Flooring- Light Blue Pebble 82B-09-Mastic 041628116-0009A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Rear Bath - Mastic 82B-10 041628116-0010 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)97%Hair3%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Front Bath - Plaster Ceiling 82B-11 041628116-0011 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Min. Wool60%Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Rear Bath - Insulation Ceiling 82B-12-Wallboard 041628116-0012 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose Glass 15% 5% White Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Rear Bath - Gypsum Wallboard Initial report from: 10/12/2016 07:18:44 Page 1 of 2ASB_PLM_0008 - 1.71 Printed: 10/12/2016 7:18 AM EMSL Analytical, Inc. 200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077 Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974 http://www.EMSL.com / cinnasblab@EMSL.com 041628116EMSL Order: Customer ID:ENVI07 Customer PO:0069-09-01R Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 82B-12-Joint Compound 041628116-0012A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Rear Bath - Joint Compound 82B-13-Gypsum Wallboard 041628116-0013 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)85%Cellulose15%White Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Rear Bath - Gypsum Wallboard Mid Level Ceiling 82B-13-Joint Compound 041628116-0013A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 1st Rear Bath - Gypsum Wallboard Mid Level Ceiling 82B-14 041628116-0014 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous 2nd Floor Hall - Plaster Wall 82B-15 041628116-0015 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)85%Cellulose15%Brown/Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Staris to 3rd Floor - Gypsum Wallboard 82B-16 041628116-0016 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)94%Cellulose Hair 3% 3% Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Attic - Plaster Wall 82B-17 041628116-0017 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)85%Glass15%Black Fibrous Homogeneous Roof - Roofing Material Analyst(s) Brett Polumbo (5) Keishla Vazquez Caraballo (18) Benjamin Ellis, Laboratory Manager or Other Approved Signatory EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Cinnaminson, NJ NVLAP Lab Code 101048-0, AIHA-LAP, LLC-IHLAP Lab 100194, NYS ELAP 10872, NJ DEP 03036, PA ID# 68-00367 Initial report from: 10/12/2016 07:18:44 Page 2 of 2ASB_PLM_0008 - 1.71 Printed: 10/12/2016 7:18 AM OrderID: 041628116 Page 1 Of 2 OrderID: 041628116 Page 2 Of 2 OrderID: 041628116 Page 1 Of 2 OrderID: 041628116 Page 2 Of 2 EMSL Analytical, Inc. 200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077 Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974 http://www.EMSL.com / cinnasblab@EMSL.com 041829193EMSL Order: Customer ID:ENVI07 Customer PO: Project ID: Attention:Phone:Andy Rolinger (978) 500-0515 Fax:O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc.(413) 788-8830 Received Date:293 Bridge Street 09/27/2018 9:25 AM Analysis Date:Springfield, MA 01103 09/28/2018 Collected Date:09/26/2018 Project:0069-09-04 / 82 Bridge Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 82B-18-Flooring 041829193-0001 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 8C - Beige Resilient Flooring 82B-18-Mastic 041829193-0001A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 8C - Mastic 82B-19-Skim Coat 041829193-0002 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 8A - Wall Plaster 82B-19-Base Coat 041829193-0002A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 8A - Wall Plaster 82B-20-Gypsum 041829193-0003 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)85%Cellulose15%Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 8A - Gypsum Wallboard 82B-20-Joint Compound 041829193-0003A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 8A - Joint Compound 82B-21 041829193-0004 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Cellulose90%Brown Fibrous Homogeneous Attic Areas - Blown-in Insulation 82B-22-Flooring 041829193-0005 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 9A - Beige Resilient Flooring (under Carpet) 82B-22-Mastic 041829193-0005A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 9A - Mastic 82B-23-Sheet Floor 041829193-0006 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous 3F Attic - Blue Pebble Pattern Sheet Floor 82B-23-Mastic 041829193-0006A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 3F Attic - Mastic 82B-24-Flooring 041829193-0007 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)75%Cellulose25%Brown Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 9B - Brown Resilient Flooring, Top Layer 82B-24-Mastic 041829193-0007A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 9B - Mastic 82B-25-Gypsum Wallboard 041829193-0008 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)85%Cellulose15%Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous 3F Reno Areas - Gypsum Wallboard 82B-25-Joint Compound 041829193-0008A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 3F Reno Areas - Joint Compound 82B-26-Flooring 041829193-0009 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 9B - Beige Resilient Flooring Initial report from: 09/28/2018 09:39:02 Page 1 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 9/28/2018 10:22 AM EMSL Analytical, Inc. 200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077 Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974 http://www.EMSL.com / cinnasblab@EMSL.com 041829193EMSL Order: Customer ID:ENVI07 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 82B-26-Mastic 041829193-0009A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 9B - Mastic 82B-27 041829193-0010 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)20%Cellulose Min. Wool 50% 30% White Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 7B - 2x4 Suspended Ceiling Tile 82B-28 041829193-0011 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)20%Cellulose Min. Wool 50% 30% Tan/White Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 7B - 2x4 Suspended Ceiling Tile 82B-29 041829193-0012 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 7B - Wall Plaster (Core) 82B-30-Plaster 041829193-0013 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 7B (Abv Susp Tile) - Ceiling Plaster (Core) 82B-30-Skim 041829193-0013A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 7B (Abv Susp Tile) - Skim 82B-31 041829193-0014 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)20%Cellulose Min. Wool 50% 30% Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 6A - 2x4 Suspended Ceiling Tile 82B-32-Flooring 041829193-0015 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 5 - Beige Resilient Flooring 12x12 82B-32-Mastic 041829193-0015A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 5 - Mastic 82B-33-Plaster 041829193-0016 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 5 - Wall Plaster (Core) 82B-33-Skim 041829193-0016A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 5 - Skim Sample appears to be Paint. 82B-34-Flooring 041829193-0017 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Blue Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 4 - Blue Resilient Flooring (12x12) 82B-34-Mastic 041829193-0017A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 4 - Mastic 82B-35-Plaster 041829193-0018 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 4 - Ceiling Plaster 82B-35-Skim 041829193-0018A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 4 - Skim (Core) 82B-36-Flooring 041829193-0019 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)70%Cellulose Glass 20% 10% Pink/Beige Fibrous Homogeneous Bath #3 - Pink / Beige Resilient Flooring 82B-36-Mastic 041829193-0019A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Bath #3 - Mastic 82B-37-Flooring 041829193-0020 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)70%Cellulose Glass 20% 10% Brown Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 6B - Brown Resilient Flooring Initial report from: 09/28/2018 09:39:02 Page 2 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 9/28/2018 10:22 AM EMSL Analytical, Inc. 200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077 Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974 http://www.EMSL.com / cinnasblab@EMSL.com 041829193EMSL Order: Customer ID:ENVI07 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 82B-37-Mastic 041829193-0020A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 6B - Mastic 82B-38-Flooring 041829193-0021 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 3A - Beige Resilient Flooring 82B-38-Mastic 041829193-0021A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 3A - Mastic 82B-39 041829193-0022 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Cellulose90%Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 3B - 12x12 Spline Ceiling Tile 82B-40-Flooring 041829193-0023 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 3B - Beige Resilient Flooring 82B-40-Mastic 041829193-0023A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 3B - Mastic 82B-41-Flooring 041829193-0024 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 1 - Beige Resilient Flooring 82B-41-Mastic 041829193-0024A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 1 - Mastic 82B-42 041829193-0025 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 1 - Texture Ceiling on Gypsum (Core) 82B-43 041829193-0026 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 1 - Texture Ceiling on Gypsum (Core) 82B-44-Gypsum 041829193-0027 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)85%Cellulose15%Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 1 - Gypsum Wallboard (Core) 82B-44-Joint Compound 041829193-0027A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Unit 1 - Joint Compound 82B-45 041829193-0028 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray/White Fibrous Heterogeneous Apt 2B (Over Spline) - Ceiling Plaster Inseparable plaster/skim coat 82B-46 041829193-0029 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Cellulose90%Brown Fibrous Homogeneous Apt 2B - Spline Ceiling Tile 82B-47-Plaster 041829193-0030 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Hair5%Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Apt 2B - Wall Plaster 82B-47-Skim 041829193-0030A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Tan/White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Apt 2B - Skim 82B-48-Stair Tread 041829193-0031 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Front Interior Stairwell - Grey Stair Tread 82B-48-Mastic 041829193-0031A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Front Interior Stairwell - Mastic Initial report from: 09/28/2018 09:39:02 Page 3 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 9/28/2018 10:22 AM EMSL Analytical, Inc. 200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077 Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974 http://www.EMSL.com / cinnasblab@EMSL.com 041829193EMSL Order: Customer ID:ENVI07 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 82B-49-Flooring 041829193-0032 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)70%Cellulose Glass 20% 10% Beige Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Beige Resilient Flooring (Top Layer) 82B-49-Mastic 041829193-0032A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Mastic 82B-50-Flooring 041829193-0033 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Blue Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Under Luan - Blue Resilient Flooring, Bottom Layer 82B-50-Mastic 041829193-0033A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Under Luan - Mastic 82B-51-Cove Base 041829193-0034 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Brown Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Brown Cove Base 82B-51-Mastic 041829193-0034A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Kitchen - Mastic 82B-52 041829193-0035 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 2F Bathroom #4 - Tile Grout 82B-53 041829193-0036 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous B-Side 1F Bathroom #2 - Cove Base 82B-54 041829193-0037 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous B-Side 1F Bathroom #2 - Tile Grout 82B-55 041829193-0038 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow Non-Fibrous Homogeneous B-Side 1F Bathroom #2 - Tile Adhesive 82B-56 041829193-0039 6% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)94%Gray/White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous B-Side Rear - Exterior Caulk, Vertical Bead 82B-57 041829193-0040 6% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)94%White Fibrous Homogeneous D-Side Rear - Exterior Caulk, Vertical Bead 82B-58 041829193-0041 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Small Rear C-Side Garage Window - Window Glazing 82B-59 041829193-0042 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous Garage Area - Gypsum Ceiling 82B-60 041829193-0043 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)85%Cellulose15%Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous Garage Area - Gypsum Ceiling 82B-61 041829193-0044 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)10%Cellulose90%Brown Fibrous Homogeneous B-Side Rear - Fiberboard over Aluminum Siding 82B-62-Roofing 041829193-0045 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)70%Cellulose30%Tan/Black Fibrous Homogeneous Rear - Top Layer Roofing 82B-62-Adhesive 041829193-0045A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Rear - Adhesive 82B-63-Roofing 041829193-0046 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)65%Cellulose Glass 25% 10% Gray/Black Fibrous Homogeneous Rear - Bottom Layer Roofing Initial report from: 09/28/2018 09:39:02 Page 4 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 9/28/2018 10:22 AM EMSL Analytical, Inc. 200 Route 130 North Cinnaminson, NJ 08077 Tel/Fax: (800) 220-3675 / (856) 786-5974 http://www.EMSL.com / cinnasblab@EMSL.com 041829193EMSL Order: Customer ID:ENVI07 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 82B-63-Adhesive 041829193-0046A None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Rear - Adhesive 82B-64 041829193-0047 None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)40%Cellulose60%Black Fibrous Homogeneous Rear - Paper under Roofing Shingle Analyst(s) Andrew Burke (10) Benjamin Verghese (10) Daniel Fricker (22) Keishla Vazquez Caraballo (31) Benjamin Ellis, Laboratory Manager or Other Approved Signatory EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. The above analyses were performed in general compliance with Appendix E to Subpart E of 40 CFR (previously EPA 600/M4-82-020 "Interim Method"), but augmented with procedures outlined in the 1993 ("final") version of the method. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations . Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. All samples received in acceptable condition unless otherwise noted. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government. EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction for all non-friable organically bound materials prior to analysis. Estimation of uncertainty is available on request. Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Cinnaminson, NJ NVLAP Lab Code 101048-0, AIHA-LAP, LLC-IHLAP Lab 100194, NYS ELAP 10872, NJ DEP 03036, PA ID# 68-00367 Initial report from: 09/28/2018 09:39:02 Page 5 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 9/28/2018 10:22 AM OrderID: 041829193 Page 1 Of 3 OrderID: 041829193 Page 2 Of 3 OrderID: 041829193 Page 3 Of 3 Sergeant House November 5, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM 004113 - 1 DOCUMENT 004113 - BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM 1.1 BIDDER INFORMATION A. Bidder Name: . B. Street Address: . C. City, State, Zip: . D. Phone: . 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Name: Sergeant House, 82 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA 01060. B. Owner: Valley Community Development Corporation, Northampton, MA. C. Architect: Dietz & Company Architects, Inc., Springfield, MA. 1.3 CERTIFICATIONS AND BASE BID A. Base Bid, Single-Prime (All Trades) Contract: The undersigned Bidder, having carefully examined the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, and all subsequent Addenda, as prepared by Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. and Architect's consultants, having visited the site, and being familiar with all conditions and requirements of the Work, hereby agrees to furnish all material, labor, equipment and services, including all scheduled allowances, necessary to complete the construction of the above-named project, according to the requirements of the Procurement and Contracting Documents, for the stipulated sum of: 1. Dollars ($ ). Sergeant House November 5, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM 004113 - 2 B. Alternates: In accordance with the descriptions provided in Section 012300 “Alternates” provide stipulated sums for the following Alternates: No Alternates at this time. Leave this section Blank. C. Unit Price: Provide price for the following Unit Price based on the description in Section 012200 “Unit Prices”: No Unit Prices at this time. Leave this section Blank. D. Proposed Schedule of Values Form: The Proposed Schedule of Values Form provided in Section 004373 shall be completed and submitted with this Bid Form. Failure to compete this form may result in rejection of bid. 1.4 BID GUARANTEE A. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute a contract for this Work in the above amount and to furnish surety as specified within 10 days after a written Notice of Award, if offered within 60 days after receipt of bids. 1.5 TIME OF COMPLETION A. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees hereby to commence the Work of the Contract Documents on a date specified in a written Notice to Proceed to be issued by Architect, and shall fully complete the Work within 300 calendar days (10 months). 1.6 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA A. The undersigned Bidder acknowledges receipt of and use of the following Addenda in the preparation of this Bid: 1. . 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE A. The undersigned further states that it is a duly licensed contractor, for the type of work proposed, in Massachusetts, and that all fees, permits, etc., pursuant to submitting this proposal have been paid in full. B. Construction Supervisor’s License No.: . Sergeant House November 5, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM 004113 - 3 1.8 SUBMISSION OF BID A. Respectfully submitted this day of , 2013. B. Submitted By: (Name of bidding firm or corporation). C. Authorized Signature: (Handwritten signature). D. Signed By: (Type or print name). E. Title: (Owner/Partner/President/Vice President). END OF DOCUMENT 004113 Sergeant House November 5, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SECTION - 004373 - PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM PART 1 - Proposed Schedule of Values Form 1.1 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT A. A completed Proposed Schedule of Values form is required to be attached to the Bid Form. 1.2 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM A. Proposed Schedule of Values Form: Provide a breakdown of the bid amount as per the attached form. END OF SECTION 004373 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM 004373 - 1 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM 004322 - 1 DOCUMENT 004373.01 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM TRADE COST BREAKDOWN FOR BID FORM SERGEANT HOUSE NO. DIV ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR NAME AMOUNT NOTES 1 3 Concrete 2 4 Masonry 3 5 Metals 4 6 Rough Carpentry 5 6 Finish Carpentry 6 7 Waterproofing 7 7 Insulation 8 7 Roofing 9 7 Sheet Metal and Flashing 10 7 Exterior Siding 11 8 Doors 12 8 Windows 13 8 Glass 14 9 Lath & Plaster 15 9 Drywall 16 9 Tile Work 17 9 Acoustical 18 9 Wood Flooring 19 9 Resilient Flooring 20 9 Carpet 21 9 Paint & Decorating 22 10 Specialties 23 11 Special Equipment 24 11 Cabinets 25 11 Appliances PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM 004322 - 2 26 12 Blinds & Shades 27 13 Modular/Manufactured None - 28 13 Special Construction None - 29 14 Elevators or Conveying Sys 30 22 Plumbing & Hot Water 31 23 Heat & Ventilation 32 23 Air Conditioning 33 21 Fire Protection 34 26+27 Electrical 35 Accessory Buildings 36 PV (solar System) 37 Other/misc 38 Subtotal Structural Total lines 1 through 36 39 31 Earth Work 40 33 Site Utilities 41 32 Roads & Walks 42 32 Site Improvement 43 32 Lawns & Planting 44 31 Geotechnical Conditions 45 Environmental Remediation 46 Demolition 47 31 Unusual Site Cond 48 Subtotal Site Work Total lines 31 through 46 49 Total Improvements Total lines 37 and 47 50 1 General Conditions 51 Subtotal Total lines 48 and 49 52 1 Builders Overhead 53 1 Builders Profit 54 Allowance for Security Camera System $10,000 TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT Total lines 50 through 53 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 00-1 DOCUMENT 00 52 00 AGREEMENT FORM See AIA A101, Owner-Contractor Agreement Form - Stipulated Sum, Found in Request for Proposals – General Contracting Services, dated October 2018. END OF DOCUMENT 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BONDS 00 61 00-1 DOCUMENT 00 61 00 BONDS AIA A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Found in Request for Proposals – General Contracting Services, dated October 2018. END OF DOCUMENT 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00-1 DOCUMENT 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA A201, 2017 edition, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Found in Request for Proposals – General Contracting Services, dated October 2018. END OF DOCUMENT 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00-1 DOCUMENT 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Additional Provisions to A101-2007 Found in Request for Proposals – General Contracting Services, dated October 2018. END OF DOCUMENT 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 - 1 SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ENERGY EFFICIENCY STANDARDS A. General: This building has been designed to be zero net energy ready. Building has been oriented for both passive and active solar access and has insulation and air-tightness levels that are expected to exceed EnergyStar Tier III rating. B. HERS Ratings: It is expected that all units shall achieve a HERS rating of 42 or lower without considering a leased photovoltaic system that is proposed for the south-facing roof surface of this building. It is proposed that once the electricity from the leased photovoltaic system is included, a HERS rating for all units of between 0-42 will be achieved. C. Construction Requirements: The building is detailed to minimize air leakage through walls and around windows. This building as a whole as well as each unit shall meet an air tightness minimum of 1.2 air changes per hour at 50 pascals (1.2 ACH 50). This shall be proven by blower door testing at completion. D. Independent Commissioning: Qualified third party commissioning agents will be utilized to confirm energy efficiency levels and air tightness levels required by these specifications. The General Contractor shall bear all costs associated with air tightness testing beyond the final test, which will be paid by the Owner. 1.3 AIR SEALING REQUIREMENTS A. Overview and Location of the Air Barrier: This document provides guidance on how to create an effective pressure boundary around conditioned space. This guide is provided as recommendations and is not to be considered a requirement except that the units all need to meet a maximum air tightness of 1.2 ach at 50 pascals, as verified by testing to be provided by CET near the completion of the project. Building envelopes are to be air sealed at high and low pressure planes to best mitigate stack-effect driven infiltration. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 - 2 B. Attic Areas: In attic areas, the air barrier is to be located at apartment ceiling plane (i.e. floor of the attic) consisting of wood framing and gypsum board. All holes/penetrations of gypsum board and wood framing (top plates, etc.) are to be sealed from the attic space. This shall be installed prior to installation of attic insulation. 1. Top of Building: The air barrier at the top of each building is to be located at ceiling gypsum board fixed to metal furring at the underside of the roof trusses. All holes/penetrations in the ceiling board and associated wood framing including floor and rim joists are to be sealed between finished spaces and attic. 2. Ceilings: At all ceilings, where the ceiling gypsum board meets vertical walls, a layer of ½” Oriented Strand Board (OSB) shall be sealed to the top of the exterior and interior wall top plates and to the back side of the ceiling gypsum board to create an air barrier from the exterior walls to the ceiling plane. The ½” OSB shall be in the same plane as the ½” resilient channels. 3. Penetrations: All penetrations between concrete floor slab and exterior walls and party walls shall be sealed to prevent air movement. C. Sealing Top and Bottom Plates of Exterior and Apartment Perimeter Walls: Air barrier continuity at the perimeter of drywall assemblies is achieved by sealing the edges of the drywall to solid framing materials. This requires a continuous bead of sealant along all apartment perimeter wall bottom and top plates, all top plates at insulated ceilings, and both sides of the first interior stud of partition walls. 1. Locate cracks and gaps in and around top plates of exterior and partition walls. Seal all small cracks with one or two part foam. For gaps larger than ½”, use backer material and foam. 2. For larger gaps/openings use rigid air barrier board and foam or caulk. Cut the board to size accounting for any obstructions (wires, pipes, etc.), attach board to framing using screws/nails, and then seal the perimeter of the board using expandable foam or caulk. 3. Install insulation taking care to ensure insulation is blown evenly and is in continuous contact with gypsum board air barrier. D. Recessed Electrical Penetrations: Recessed electrical junction boxes in insulated ceilings should be both insulation contact (“IC”) and air tight rated. The housing of the recessed box or fixture should also be sealed (with caulk or an effective gasket) to the ceiling gypsum board. 1. Seal holes in and around electrical boxes with fire rated foam or caulk. 2. Seal electrical wire and conduit penetrations through the attic plane; gaps should be sealed with fire rated foam or caulk. For gaps larger than ½”, use backer material and foam. 3. For larger gaps/openings, use rigid air barrier board and fire rated foam or caulk. Cut the board to size accounting for any obstructions (wires, pipes, etc.), attach board to framing using screws/nails, and then seal the perimeter of the board using expandable foam or caulk. 4. Install insulation taking are to ensure insulation is fitted evenly and is in continuous contact with gypsum board and newly improved air barrier. E. Ceilings - Recessed Fixtures (Exhaust Fans): 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 - 3 For exhaust fans, a box enclosure should be made from fire resistant material (fiberglass duct board or drywall). Air seal box joints and holes for conduit/wires with fire rated caulk or mastic. Seal gaps between enclosure and attic plane with fire rated caulk or mastic. Sealant shall not penetrate the box enclosure. Allow enough clearance inside the box for heat to dissipate, minimum 3” to each side and minimum 12” to the top. Contractor to ensure installation complies with all applicable codes. 1. Seal around all duct penetrations at box. Seal all duct seams and joints with duct mastic. 2. Install insulation taking care to ensure insulation is fitted evenly and is in continuous contact with gypsum board air barrier. 3. All ductwork within ceilings are to be sealed with duct mastic at seams and surrounded by 3” of foam insulation, sealing ducts to the top of the ceiling gypsum board where duct runs are parallel to the framing. Encase ducts in foam where perpendicular to ceiling framing. Cover all ducts with full depth of insulation noted. F. Ceilings - Plumbing/Piping Penetrations and Other Large Bypasses: Seal all small gaps around pipes with foam or caulk. For gaps larger than ½” use backer material and foam. 1. For larger gaps/openings use rigid air barrier board and foam or caulk. Cut the board to size accounting for any obstructions (wires, pipes, etc.), attach board to framing using screws/nails, and then seal the perimeter of the board and pipe using expandable foam or caulk. Board can also be friction fit in place or wet set with spray foam; seal around perimeter of board and pipe is to be continuous. 2. Install insulation taking care to ensure insulation is fitted evenly and is in continuous contact with gypsum board air barrier. G. Ceilings - Dropped Soffits: Rigid air barrier board should be used to seal dropped soffit openings. If necessary, add framing to provide adequate support for board materials used when sealing large gaps. 1. Measure the opening and cut board to size allowing for any obstructions (wires, pipes, etc.), attach board to framing using screws/nails, and then seal the perimeter of the board using expandable foam or caulk. Board can also be friction fit in place or wet set with spray foam; seal around perimeter of board and pipe is to be continuous. 2. Install insulation taking care to ensure insulation is fitted evenly and is in continuous contact with gypsum board air barrier. H. Exterior Wall at Sill Plate: Seal between exterior wall/foundation and sill plate with caulk/expandable foam. For gaps larger than ½” use backer material and foam. 1. Seal between sill plate and slab with caulk/expandable foam. For gaps larger than ½” use backer material and foam. 2. For larger gaps/openings between the sill plate and slab, use rigid air barrier board and foam or caulk. Cut the board to size accounting for any obstructions (wires, pipes, etc.), attach board to framing using screws/nails, and then seal the perimeter of the board and pipe using expandable foam or caulk. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 - 4 I. Apartment Perimeter Walls at Sill Plate: Seal gaps between plywood subfloor and sill plate with caulk/expandable foam. For gaps larger than ½” use backer material and foam. 1. Seal between sill plate and slab with caulk/expandable foam. For gaps larger than ½” use backer material and foam. 2. For larger gaps/openings between the sill plate and slab, use rigid air barrier board and foam or caulk. Cut the board to size accounting for any obstructions (wires, pipes, etc.), attach board to framing using screws/nails, and then seal the perimeter of the board and pipe using expandable foam or caulk. J. Penetrations at Fire Rated Walls: Recessed electrical junction boxes in fire rated walls (including unit separation walls and walls between units and corridors) should be both insulation contact (“IC”) and air tight rated. Provide putty pads at all electrical boxes. 1. Offset all electrical boxes at least 2’ when back-to-back in fire rated walls. Back-to-back electrical boxes shall be located in separate stud bays to meet building code for Fire Separation Walls. 2. Seal holes in and around electrical boxes with fire rated foam or caulk. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 00 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SUMMARY 01 11 00-1 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Project Identification: 82 Bridge Street Housing, Northampton, MA. B. Project Summary: New construction: 31 units of Enhanced SRO Housing. • Existing building a three story, wood framed, historic house with a basement, rear wing and sheds. The rear wing and sheds are to be demolished. The original house is to be renovated. The new addition will be three story, wood frame construction over a concrete foundation at “the connector” and slab-on-grade construction under the main addition. A new wood deck will be added to the side of the new addition. A new entry porch and elevator lobby /entrance will be constructed on the driveway side of the addition. • Associated site work, includes excavation, new site utilities, paving, fencing landscaping, site amenities and a new bike shed. C. Building Code Type of Construction: V-B Use Group: R-2, Multifamily Residential Fire Ratings: Exterior walls: 0 hour Exit enclosures: 1 hour Separation walls between units: 1/2 hour Load bearing walls: 0 hour Both new and existing building areas are to be sprinklered with fire alarm system and city connection. D. Particular Project Requirements: 1. Existing site conditions and restrictions: Access to adjacent housing along Bridge Street and surrounding streets must be maintained at all times. Movement and storage of materials and other construction activities shall be secured at all times. 2. Energy efficiency: All buildings in this development have been designed to be near zero net energy. Buildings have been designed to accept active solar system on the roof and have insulation and air-tightness levels that are expected to exceed EnergyStar Tier Three rating. It is expected that all units shall achieve a HERS rating of 40 per unit and a verified air tightness of 1.0 ACH @ 50 pa without considering a proposed photovoltaic system. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SUMMARY 01 11 00-2 3. Independent Commissioning: Qualified third party commissioning agents will be utilized to confirm energy efficiency levels and air tightness levels required by these specifications. The General Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the testing. The Owner will pay costs associated with final energy testing. 4. Bidders should assume that building will be vacant during construction and that the period of vacancy cannot exceed 12 months. 5. Air Tightness: This building shall have requirements for air tightness that will be described in Section 010000, General Requirements. E. Existing Building Envelope: Demolition of the existing building to remain includes: removal of siding and board sheathing, removal of roofing and roof sheathing, removal of masonry chimneys, installation of new rafters (see structural drawings), installation of new cellulose exterior wall insulation, installation of new Zip wall sheathing, 4” of new mineral wool insulation board, new 1x4 strapping and new siding and trim. New rafters shall be sistered to existing rafters and new roof sheathing added. New rafters and new exterior wall insulation will add inches to the exterior walls. New trim shall match existing trim. Existing trim can be re-used or replicated with new trim, but dimensions from outside face of new wall shall match dimensions of existing trim from face of existing wall. F. Permits and Fees: Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, fees, and utility company backcharges required to perform the work. Submit copies to Architect. G. Codes: Comply with applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of inspection reports, notices and similar communications to Architect. H. Definitions: 1. Provide: Furnish and install, complete with all necessary accessories, ready for intended use. Pay for all related costs. 2. Approved: Acceptance of item submitted for approval. Not a limitation or release for compliance with the Contract Documents or regulatory requirements. Refer to limitations of 'Approved' in General and Supplementary Conditions. I. Writing style: Specifications are written in the imperative mode. Except where specifically intended otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the Contractor. For example, 'Provide tile' means 'Contractor shall provide tile.' J. Tax Exempt Status: Bidders shall assume that purchased materials will be tax exempt. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials 1. Contractors should assume that materials purchased will be tax exempt. 2. Contractor shall salvage three fireplaces and surrounds for re-use in different locations within the central Common Area of the first floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SUMMARY 01 11 00-3 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00-1 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 ALLOWANCES A. Lump sum allowances and unit cost allowances are listed below. Amounts shall include all costs including overhead and profit except as specifically noted. B. Coordinate allowances with requirements for related and adjacent work. C. Notify Owner of date when final decision on allowance items is required to avoid delays in the work. D. Furnish certification that quantities of products purchased are the actual quantities needed with reasonable allowance for cutting or installation losses, tolerances, mixing waste and similar margins. E. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual quantities of materials delivered and costs. Indicate amounts of applicable trade discounts. F. Lump Sum Allowances: Include the following amounts in the base bid for materials, installation, overhead, profit and all costs for the following items. G. Unit cost allowances: The following items will be selected at a later date and unit costs below are for materials only. Installation and all other costs are to be included in the base bid. Refer to the Drawings to determine quantities required, multiply by unit cost below, and include total within base bid. 1.02 ALTERNATES A. Provide total price for each alternate in Bid Form. Include cost of modifications to other work to accommodate alternate. Include related costs such as overhead and profit. B. Owner will determine which alternates are selected for inclusion in the Contract. C. Alternates are described briefly in this section. The Contract Documents define the requirements for alternates. D. Coordinate alternates with related work to ensure that work affected by each selected alternate is properly accomplished. E. List of alternates: 1. ((Add alternates.)) PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not Applicable to This Section END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00-1 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide administrative requirements for the proper coordination and completion of work including the following: 1. Supervisory personnel. 2. Preconstruction conference. 3. Project meetings, once per week; distribute minutes. B. Submit daily and special reports. C. Submit progress schedule, bar-chart type, updated monthly. D. Prepare submittal schedule; coordinate with progress schedule. E. Submit schedule of values. F. Submit schedule of required tests including payment and responsibility. G. Perform surveys: 1. Laying out the work and verifying locations during construction. 2. Final site survey. H. Submit and post a list of emergency telephone numbers and address for individuals to be contacted in case of emergency. I. Submit record drawings and specifications; to be maintained and annotated by Contractor as work progresses. J. Submit payment request procedures. K. Clean and protect the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide types of submittals listed in individual sections and number of copies required below. 1. Shop drawings, reviewed and annotated by the Contractor - transparency and two blackline prints. 2. Product data - 4 copies. 3. Samples - 2, plus extra samples as required to indicate range of color, finish, and texture to be expected. 4. Inspection and test reports - 4 copies. 5. Warranties - 4 copies. 6. Survey data - 4 copies. 7. Closeout submittals - 4 copies. B. Comply with project format for submittals. C. Comply with submittal procedures established by Architect including Architect’s submittal and shop drawing stamp. Provide required resubmittals if original submittals are not approved. Provide distribution of approved copies including modifications after submittals have been approved. D. Samples and shop drawings shall be prepared specifically for this project. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and details, including adjacent construction and related work. Note special coordination required. Note any deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Provide warranties as specified; warranties shall not limit length of time for remedy of damages Owner may have by legal statute. Warranties shall be signed by contractor, supplier or installer responsible for performance of warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-1 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY CONTROL A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 1.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. 1.03 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to perform the following as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. 1. Observe site conditions. 2. Conditions of surfaces and installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Test, adjust and balance of equipment. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform quality control during installation. 1.06 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. B. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and no longer needed, remove mock- up and clear area when directed to do so. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00-3 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 01 41 00-1 SECTION 01 41 00 THE AIR BARRIER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for accomplishing an airtight building enclosure that controls infiltration or exfiltration of air. 1. The airtight components of the building enclosure and the joints, junctures and transitions between materials, products, and assemblies forming the air-tightness of the building enclosure are called “the air barrier system”. Services include coordination between the trades, the proper scheduling and sequencing of the work, preconstruction meetings, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 2. The Contractor shall ensure that the intent of constructing the building enclosure with a continuous air barrier system to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space is achieved. The air barrier system shall have the following characteristics: a. It must be continuous, with all joints sealed. b. It must be structurally supported to withstand positive and negative air pressures applied to the building enclosure. c. Connection shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls. 2) Walls and windows or doors. 3) Different wall systems. 4) Wall and roof. 5) Wall and roof over unconditioned space. 6) Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. 7) Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. 3. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration / exfiltration shall be sealed. B. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. C. Requirements of this section relate to the coordination between subcontractors required to provide an airtight building enclosure, customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Continuity of the air barrier materials and products with joints to provide assemblies. Continuity of all the enclosure assemblies with joints and transition materials to provide a whole building air barrier system. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 01 41 00-2 2. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections of the specifications. Requirements in those sections may also cover production of standard products. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that each subcontractor is adequately and satisfactorily performing the quality assurance documentation, tests and procedures required by each section. 3. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 4. Requirements for Contractor to provide an airtight building enclosure is not limited by quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction and are not limited by provisions of this section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 Section Quality Control B. Division 1 Section Schedule C. Division 1 Section Meetings D. Division 3 Section Concrete E. Division 3 Section Precast Concrete F. Division 5 Section Light Gauge Metal Framing G. Division 6 Section Wood Sheathing H. Division 7 Section Roofing I. Division 7 Section Air Barrier J. Division 7 Section Sealants K. Division 8 Section Windows L. Division 8 Section Exterior Doors M. Division 8 Section Curtain Walls N. Division 8 Section Revolving Doors O. Division 8 Section Skylights P. Division 8 Section Storefronts and Entrances. Q. Division 8 Section Loading Dock Rollup-up Doors 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 01 41 00-3 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, Contractor shall provide coordination of the trades, and the sequence of construction to ensure continuity of the air barrier system joints, junctures and transitions between materials and assemblies of materials and products, from substructure to walls to roof. Provide quality assurance procedures, testing and verification as specified herein. Facilitate inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction or by the Owner. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 1. Organize preconstruction meetings between the trades involved in the whole building’s air barrier system to discuss where each trade begins and ends and the responsibility and sequence of installation of all the air-tight joints, junctures, and transitions between materials, products and assemblies of products specified in the different sections, to be installed by the different trades. 2. Build a mock-up before proceeding with the work, satisfactory to the Architect, of each air-tight joint type, juncture, and transition between products, materials and assemblies. B. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Provide access to the Work. 2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples. 4. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. 5. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. C. Duties of the Testing and Inspection Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of air barrier materials, components and assemblies specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 01 41 00-4 D. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compliance Alternatives: 1. Materials: materials used for the air barrier system in the opaque envelope shall have an air permeance not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) (0.02 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. Or, 2. Assemblies of materials and components: shall have an air permeance not to exceed 0.04 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) (0.2 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2357. Or: 3. The entire building: The air leakage of the entire building shall not exceed 0.4 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) (2.0 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa) when tested according to ASTM E 779. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 01 41 00-5 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Air Barrier Testing and Inspection Agencies: Engage air Barrier inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified and that specialize in the types of air barrier system inspections and tests to be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. The Owner will hire a testing and inspection agency to provide [Continuous] [Occasional] observation and inspection during installation of the air barrier system. The testing and inspection agency will provide the following listed services: 1. Qualitative Testing and Inspection: a. Daily reports of observations, with copies to the Owner, Contractor and Architect. b. Continuity of the air barrier system throughout the building enclosure with no gaps, holes. c. Structural support of the air barrier system to withstand design air pressures. d. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions and mortar droppings. e. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates. f. Maximum length of exposure time of materials to ultra-violet deterioration. g. Surfaces are properly primed. h. Laps in material are 2”minimum, shingled in the correct direction (or mastic applied on exposed edges), with no fish-mouths. i. Mastic applied on cut edges. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 01 41 00-6 j. Roller has been used to enhance adhesion. k. Measure application thickness of liquid-applied materials to manufacturer’s specifications for the specific substrate. l. Materials used for compatibility. m. Transitions at changes in direction, and structural support at gaps. n. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) for cleaning, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity and continuity of seal. o. All penetrations sealed. p. ASTM E 1186 “Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Retarder Systems.” 1) Infrared scanning with pressurization/depressurization. 2) Smoke pencil with pressurization/depressurization. 3) Pressurization/depressurization with use of anemometer 4) Generated sound with sound detection 5) Tracer gas measurement of decay rate 6) Chamber pressurization/depressurization in conjunction with smoke tracers 7) Chamber depressurization using detection liquids 2. Quantitative tests: a. Provide written test reports of all tests performed, with copies to the Owner, Contractor and Architect. b. Material compliance for maximum air permeance, ASTM E 2178. c. ASTM E 283, Determining rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. d. Assemblies, ASTM E 2357, test pressure and allowable air leakage rate to be determined by design professional for interior design conditions and location of project. e. CAN/CGSB 1986 Standard 149.10, Determination of the Airtightness of Building Envelopes by the Fan Depressurization Method. f. CAN/CGSB 1996 Standard 149.15 Determination of the Overall Envelope Airtightness of Office Buildings by the Fan Depressurization Method Using the Building’s Air Handling System. g. Whole building, floors, or suites, ASTM E779, Determining Airtightness of Buildings Air Leakage Rate by Single Zone Air Pressurization. h. Windows and connections to adjacent opaque assemblies, ASTM E783 method B i. Tracer gas testing, ASTM E741 j. Pressure test, ASTM E330 k. Bond to substrate, ASTM D4541 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide temporary services and utilities, including utility costs: 1. Water (potable and non-potable). 2. Lighting and power. 3. Heat. 4. Metering. 5. Telephone. 6. Toilet facilities. 7. Materials storage. B. Provide construction facilities, including utility costs: 1. Construction equipment. 2. Dewatering and pumping. 3. Enclosures. 4. Heating. 5. Lighting. 6. Elevator (if necessary for completion of construction). 7. Access on site. C. Provide security and protection requirements: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Site enclosure fence, barricades, warning signs, and lights. 3. Building enclosure and lock-up. 4. Environmental protection. 5. Pest control during and at the end of construction. 6. Snow and ice removal. D. Provide personnel support facilities: 1. Architect's field office with telephone, fax and data connection. 2. Contractor's field office. 3. Sanitary facilities. 4. Drinking water. 5. Project identification sign. 6. Cleaning, trash removal and legal disposal of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-1 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide products from one manufacturer for each type or kind as applicable. Provide secondary materials as acceptable to manufacturers of primary materials. B. Provide products selected or equal approved by Architect. Products submitted for substitution shall be submitted with complete documentation, and include construction costs of substitution including related work. C. Request for substitution must be in writing. Conditions for substitution include: 1. An 'or equal' phrase in the specifications. 2. Specified material cannot be coordinated with other work. 3. Specified material is not acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Substantial advantage is offered to the Owner in terms of cost, time, or other valuable consideration. D. Substitutions shall be submitted prior to award of contract, unless otherwise acceptable. Approval of shop drawings, product data, or samples containing substitutions is not an approval of a substitution unless items is clearly presented as a substitution at the time of submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00-1 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The following are prerequisites to substantial completion. Provide the following: 1. Punch list prepared by Contractor and subcontractors as applicable. 2. Supporting documentation. 3. Warranties. 4. Certifications. 5. Occupancy permit. 6. Start-up and testing of building systems. 7. Change over of locks. 8. Meter readings. 9. Proof that a minimum of 75% of construction waste was recycled over the course of the construction period. B. Provide the following prerequisites to final acceptance: 1. Final payment request with supporting affidavits. 2. Completed punch list. C. Provide a marked-up set of drawings and specifications including changes which occurred during construction. D. Provide the following during project closeout: 1. Submission of record documents. 2. Submission of maintenance manuals. 3. Training and turnover to Owner's personnel. 4. Final cleaning and touch-up. 5. Removal of temporary facilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29-1 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide cutting and patching work to properly complete the work of the project, complying with project requirements for: 1. Structural work. 2. Mechanical/electrical systems. 3. Visual requirements, including detailing and tolerances. 4. Operational and safety limitations. 5. Fire resistance ratings. 6. Inspection, preparation, and performance. 7. Cleaning. B. Do not cut and patch in a manner that would result in a failure of the work to perform as intended, decrease energy performance, increase maintenance, decrease operational life, or decrease safety performance. C. Certification will be required to show that a minimum of 50% of all removed materials have been recycled, by volume. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Match existing materials for cutting and patching work with new materials conforming to project requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Inspect conditions prior to work to identify scope and type of work required. Protect adjacent work. Notify Owner of work requiring interruption to building services or Owner's operations. B. Perform work with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Prepare sample area of each type of work for approval. C. Cutting: Use cutting tools, not chopping tools. Make neat holes. Minimize damage to adjacent work. Inspect for concealed utilities and structure before cutting. D. Patching: Make patches, seams, and joints durable and inconspicuous. Comply with tolerances for new work. E. Clean work area and areas affected by cutting and patching operations. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 00 - 1 SECTION 01 74 00 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section describes the requirements for the Contractor and all subcontractors to minimize construction waste and debris and to reuse, salvage, and recycle to the greatest extent feasible. B. This section includes a statement of the Owner’s Waste Management Goals, requirements for the development of a draft and final Waste Management Plan, a reference to resources to assist in recycling, and steps for Management Plan Implementation. C. This section specifies certain wastes that are required to be recycled. D. This section specifies obligations for Reporting to the Owner weights of materials recycled and materials not recycled or reused throughout the project. 1.02 INTENT AND WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS A. The Owner’s waste management goals include increased recycling and conservation of materials. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Wastes have been identified as a particular target for reuse and recycling, for several reasons: 1. C&D debris typically represents a large volume of material; 2. Many of the waste streams generated during building demolition and construction projects are highly recyclable at reasonable prices; 3. Massachusetts has banned landfill disposal of some C&D debris, and expects to ban other C&D debris in coming years. B. The Owner has determined that reducing, to the maximum extent practicable, the amount of waste disposed of in this project is a high priority. The Contractor and subcontractors shall take steps to generate the least amount of waste possible by minimizing waste due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Of the inevitable waste that is generated, as many of the waste materials as economically feasible shall be segregated for reuse, salvage, or recycling, or recycled as mixed debris. In no case shall material be disposed of in a landfill or incinerator where an approved and less costly recycling or reuse alternative exists. Waste disposal in landfills and incinerators shall be minimized and shall be considered the alternative of last resort. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 00 - 2 D. With regard to these goals the Contractor shall develop, for the Owner’s review and approval, a Waste Management Plan for this Project as described in Section 1.4. 1.03 DRAFT WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Within 14 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Bid, and prior to any waste removal, the Contractor shall submit a Draft Waste Management Plan to the Architect. The Draft Waste Management Plan shall contain, as a minimum: 1. A written analysis of the project wastes expected to be generated, by type and approximate quantity. 2. Disposal options: The name of all landfill(s) and/or incinerator(s) proposed for trash disposal, the respective tipping fee(s) for each of these disposal options including transportation costs, and the projected cost of disposing of all Project waste in the landfill(s). 3. Alternatives to Landfill Disposal/Incineration: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled during the course of the Project, the proposed end use or market for each material, the respective tipping fees for each end use or market (including transportation costs), and the estimated net cost savings or cost increase resulting from recycling each material (versus landfilling or other disposal), taking into account revenue from the sale of recycled or salvaged materials and tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials. 4. The Draft Waste Management Plan shall include, at a minimum, the materials included in Section 1.5 that are required to be reused or recycled. B. Following the submittal of the Draft Waste Management Plan, OWNER and Architect will review the plan and consider the proposed recycling and waste disposal alternatives. The Owner and/or Architect may suggest alternatives to the proposed disposal options in order to increase recycling, reduce costs, or both. 1.04 MATERIALS FOR WHICH RECYCLING IS REQUIRED A. The Owner requires that, as a minimum, the following materials must be considered for recycling, salvage, or reuse during this project: Asphalt Concrete, concrete block, concrete masonry units (CMU), slump stone (decorative concrete block), and rocks Asphalt Concrete Brick Paper, including bond, newsprint, cardboard, mixed paper, packing materials, and packaging Cement Fiber Products, including shingles, panels, siding Paint Rigid Foam 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 00 - 3 Glass Plastics Carpet and Pad Beverage Containers Insulation Gypsum Wallboard Porcelain Plumbing Fixtures Fluorescent Light Tubes, per state and local regulations Green materials (i.e. tree trimmings and land clearing debris). Metals including, but not limited to, stud trim, ductwork, piping, reinforcing steel (rebar), roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. (ferrous and non- ferrous). Soils Wood, including clean dimensional wood, pallet wood, plywood, oriented strand board (OSB), particle board B. The Contractor should be aware that the Commonwealth of Massachusetts has banned the following waste streams from incineration or landfill disposal. These items may not be included in waste destined for incineration or landfills: 1. Lead-acid batteries 2. Leaves and Yard Waste 3. Whole Tires 4. White Goods (Appliances) 5. Cathode Ray Tubes (CRTs) including computer monitors 6. Metal, Plastic and Glass Containers 7. Recyclable Paper 1.05 RESOURCES FOR DEVELOPMENT OF WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN The following sources may be useful in developing the Draft Waste Management Plan: 1. Recycling Haulers and Markets: An extensive list of Massachusetts haulers and markets for recyclable materials is available on-line at the following URL: www.wastecap.org/wastecap/rsd2003. This list is provided for information only and may not comprehensive; other haulers and markets may also be available. 1.06 FINAL WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Once the Owner has considered the draft Waste Management Plan and made appropriate suggested modifications, the Contractor shall submit, within 14 Calendar days of receiving such suggested modifications, a Final Waste Management Plan, incorporating the Owner’s input. The Final Waste Management Plan shall contain the following: 1. Analysis of the proposed jobsite wastes to be generated, including types and approximate quantities. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 00 - 4 2. Disposal options: The name of all landfill(s) and/or incinerator(s) proposed for trash disposal, the respective tipping fee(s) for each of these disposal options including transportation costs, and the projected cost of disposing of all Project waste in the landfill(s) 3. Alternatives to Landfilling: A list of the waste materials from the Project that will be separated for reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Markets: A list of the market(s) or other on-site or off-site end use(s) that will be used for each material that will be separated for reuse, salvage, or recycling. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: A description of the means to be employed in separating and recycling the materials identified in item (3) above consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities, including the means by which such materials will be protected from contamination. 6. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and hauled to designated markets, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a hauler and removed from the site and later separated for recycling). 7. Cost of Reuse, Salvage, or Recycling. An estimate of the cost, including separation, transportation, and marketing, to reuse, salvage, or recycle the materials identified in item (3) above. 8. Meetings: A description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management. Refer to Article 5.4 of the General Conditions of the Contract and DHCD’s Construction Handbook. 1.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: The Contractor shall designate a specific party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers in recycling and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the Project. B. Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the Job Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner, and the Architect. C. Instruction: The Contractor or his designated waste manager shall provide on- site instruction regarding appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and/or return methods to be used by all involved parties at the appropriate stages of the Project. D. Separation facilities: As appropriate during each stage of the Project, the Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area(s) to facilitate separation of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse, and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 00 - 5 E. Hazardous wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated and disposed of according to Section 02080. 1.08 REPORTING REQUIRED AT TIME OF INVOICING A. Application for Progress Payments: The Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress Payment a Summary of Waste generated by the Project. Failure to submit this information shall render the Application for Payment incomplete and shall delay Progress Payment. The Summary shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the following information: 1. The amount (in tons) of material landfilled from the Project, the identity of the landfill, the total amount of tipping fees paid, transportation costs (if separate) and the total disposal cost. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipt, and invoices. 2. For each material recycled, reused, or salvaged from the Project, the amount (in tons or cubic yards), the date removed from the jobsite, the receiving party, the transportation cost, the amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. Attach manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 2 F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: G. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing materials. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives. 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials. H. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 3 F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary”. 4. ACI 305, “Hot Weather Concreting”. 5. ACI 306, “Cold Weather Concreting”. G. Mockups: Cast concrete slabs-on-grade mockup to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockups approximately 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction. 4. If Architect determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish and remove them from the site and cast another until the mockup is approved. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes. c. Ready-mix concrete producer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 2. Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 4 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum unless shown otherwise on Contract Drawings. E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, and as follows: 1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. D. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 5 E. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. F. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, deformed-steel wire. G. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. H. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, deformed steel. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer- coated wire bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars. D. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 755M. E. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed zinc. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. B. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag cement. C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 6 except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm) sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3 mm). D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick: 1. Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. 2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils (0.18 mm) thick. B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. C. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.7 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment at Trash Rooms and other areas where interior floor slabs are exposed to view in the finished work: Clear, chemically reactive, solvent based material; colorless; that penetrates, hardens and densifies concrete surfaces. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 7 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. H. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Evaporation Retarder: a. Cimfilm; Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Finishing Aid Concentrate; Burke Group, LLC (The). c. Spray-Film; ChemMasters. d. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Sure Film; Dayton Superior Corporation. f. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. g. Vapor Aid; Kaufman Products, Inc. h. Lambco Skin; Lambert Corporation. i. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. j. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. k. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries. l. Rich Film; Richmond Screw Anchor Co. m. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation. n. Finishing Aid; Symons Corporation. o. Certi-Vex EnvioAssist; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc. 2. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: a. Klear Kote WB II Regular; Burke Chemicals. b. Safe-Cure & Seal 20; ChemMasters. c. High Seal; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Safe Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corporation. e. Aqua Cure VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 8 f. Vocomp-20; W. R. Meadows, Inc. g. Kure-N-Seal WB; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. 3. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: a. Klear-Kote Cure-Sealer-Hardener, 30 percent solids; Burke Group, LLC (The). b. Polyseal WB; ChemMasters. c. UV Safe Seal; Lambert Corporation. d. Lumiseal WB Plus; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Vocomp-30; W. R. Meadows, Inc. f. Metcure 30; Metalcrete Industries. g. Vexcon Starseal 1315; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm). 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 9 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. 2. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi . 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump. D. Slab-on-Grade and Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi . 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). E. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water permeability. H. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete exposed to deicers or subject to freezing and thawing while moist. I. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for corrosion protection of steel reinforcement in concrete exposed to chlorides from deicing chemicals, salt, saltwater, brackish water, seawater, or spray from these sources. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 10 J. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2 to 4 percent, unless otherwise indicated. K. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. L. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. M. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. N. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 11 B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm). D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete where required by Contract Drawings. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 12 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 72 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301. 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 13 B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy- coated reinforcement and epoxy coated chairs to support epoxy coated slab reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect and Engineer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 4. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 14 C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-third of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 15 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. Provide temporary heat as required to prevent any and all movement of concrete including interior slabs on grade from frost penetration. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 16 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 17 C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 18 B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Coordinate size and location with Architectural; Mechanical and Electrical drawings. Set anchor bolts for equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Stairs: Provide concrete fill for stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 19 a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. E. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semi-rigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 20 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form- tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 21 F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive- strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and three at 28 days. a. Test one field-cured specimens at 7 days and three at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 22 D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. Costs for additional testing which is required as a result of work of Contractor or his Sub-Contractors shall be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 1 SECTION 033055 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE (SITE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included Cast-in-place concrete required for this Work is indicated on the Drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Exterior flatwork 2. Concrete footings B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Earthwork (Site) ............................................................. Section 31 00 00 2. Building Earthwork………………………………………….Section 31 20 00 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Workmen 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in placing the types of concrete specified, and shall direct all Work under this Section. 2. For finishing of exposed surfaces of the concrete, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeymen concrete finishers. B. Codes and Standards 1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations of "Structural Concrete for Builders", publication ACI 301-66 of the American Concrete Institute. 2. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with these Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall govern. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 2 1. Within 15 days after award of Contract and before any concrete is poured on the job site, submit to the Landscape Architect the name and address of transit-mix concrete supplier. B. Transit-Mix Deliver Slip 1. Keep a record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, together with transit-mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour. 2. Make a record available to the Landscape Architect for his inspection upon request. 3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the delivery slips to the Landscape Architect. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect cast-in-place concrete materials before, during and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Contractor to make every effort to conduct concrete pours in early morning hours to allow sufficient time for hardening. Scratches and graffiti will not be approved or accepted. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. General All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Landscape Architect, shall be transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C-94. Concrete for flatwork shall be Class D. Concrete for wall and footings shall be Class A. Color is subject to approval by the Landscape Architect. B. Quality 1. All concrete shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at 28 days and shall be proportioned within the following limits: EXTERIOR SLABS LOCATION OF CONCRETE & SITE WORK Min. psi @ 28 days 3000 Max. size of aggregate 3/4 inch Min. sacks of cement/CY 5.50 Max. slump in inches 4 2. Concrete that is subject to freezing temperatures while wet shall have a water-cement ratio not exceeding six gallons per sack and shall contain entrained air. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 3 C. Cement All cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Type I, and shall be the product of one manufacturer. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 150 deg. F. Color shall match existing concrete. D. Aggregates 1. All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33-71, except as modified herein. 2. When used as a fine aggregate for cement concrete, sand shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, durable, and impermeable particles resistant to wear and frost, inert to cement and water, reasonably free from structurally weak grains, organic matter, loam, clay, silt, salts, mica, or other fine materials that my affect bonding of the cement paste. Sand shall be taken from a natural deposit and shall be relatively spherical in shape and shall have gritty surfaces. The sieve analysis of the sand shall show it to be well graded and conforming to the following table. Size of Percent by Weight Percent Passing Sieve Minimum Maximum 3/8" 100 --- #4 95 100 #16 55 80 #50 10 25 #100 2 8 #200 0 2 3. Coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall consist of crushed rock or screened gravel and shall be composed essentially of clean, hard, strong, and impermeable particles, resistant to wear and frost, and free from deleterious amounts of organic matter, loam, clay, salts, mica, and soft, thin, elongated, laminated or disintegrated stone, and it shall be inert to water and cement. Where finishing of the concrete is to be done by hammering or any other method that breaks the surface of the concrete, only crushed rock shall be used for coarse aggregate. When tested by U.S. Standard laboratory sieves, coarse aggregate for cement concrete shall be blended from stone sizes to meet the gradation requirements for each designation listed of variation for general application and are minimum and maximum in each case. To insure uniformity of material used on any one job or project, the range of variation may be reduced to 1/2 of the master range upon determination of the character and source of the materials that the Contractor proposes to furnish. Designation No. C-1 No. C-2 No. C-3 Nominal Size 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/8" Sieve Size | Min. Max. | Min. Max. | Min. Max. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 1/2 inch | 90 100 | -- -- | -- -- 3/4 inch | 35 60 | 90 100 | -- -- 1/2 inch | -- -- | -- -- | 90 100 3/8 inch | 10 25 | 20 50 | 30 70 No. 4 | 0 5 | 0 10 | 0 15 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 4 No. 8 | -- -- | 0 5 | 0 5 E. Water All water shall be clean and free from deleterious matter. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES Cement concrete shall be composed of specified proportions by weight of cement, aggregates, water and additives to form a homogeneous composition. Cement concrete shall be specified according to the classification defined in the following table. The classes of concrete to be used shall be designated on the plans or in the Specifications for the particular work. CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE MIXES Min. Min. 28 Days Coarse Maximum Class Cement Compressive Aggregate Aggregate % Air Concrete Strength* Designation Size ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- A 560#/CY 3000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 B 500#/CY 2500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 C 440#/CY 2000 psi C-1 1 1/2" 4.5 D 620#/CY 3000 psi C-2 3/4" 5.0 DE 680#/CY 3500 psi C-2 3/4" 6.0 E 720#/CY 3000 psi C-3 3/8" 7.0 F 610#/CY 3500 psi C-1 1 1/2" 6.0 * As evaluated under ASTM C94-74. All mixes above used for the Work will conform to one or more of the above mixes. Prior to actual mixing, the Contractor shall submit design mixes for each mix to the Landscape Architect for approval, as mentioned on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. 2.03 EXPANSION AND ISOLATION JOINTS Expansion and isolation joints shall be 3/8" x 4" preformed ethylene vinyl acetate or closed cell polyethylene foam material. Hold joint filler material down a sufficient distance to allow for the installation of retainer and sealant. Refer to details on drawings and the sealant manufacturer's standard instructions. 2.04 JOINT SEALANT At all construction and expansion joints, joint sealant shall be gray in color as: A. "790 Building Sealant" by Dow Corning; B. "Rubber Caulk 230 Sealant" by Products Research Chemical Corp.; C. "Perma-Joint", two component polyditremzene sealant by Tremco, or approved equal. 2.05 SEALANT RETAINER Sealant retainer shall be closed cell polythelen foam cord by the following manufacturers: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 5 A. Progress Unlimited Inc., New York City, NY; B. Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI; C. Products Research Corp., Gloucester City, NJ, or approved equal. 2.06 OTHER MATERIALS All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of cast-in-place concrete shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that all items to be embedded in concrete are in place. 3. Thoroughly wet the forms (except in freezing weather) or oil them; remove all standing water. 4. Thoroughly clean all transporting and handling equipment. B. Forms 1. Side forms and transverse forms for sidewalks shall be smooth, free from warp, of sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape, of a depth to conform to the thickness of the proposed walk, and of a type satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. 2. All mortar or dirt shall be completely removed from forms that have been previously used. The forms shall be well staked and thoroughly braced and set to the established lines with their upper edge conforming to the grade of the finished walk which shall have a sufficient pitch to the edge of the walk to provide for surface drainage, as shown on the drawings, 2% cross-slope typical. 3. All forms shall be oiled before placing concrete. C. Notification Notify the Landscape Architect at least 48 hours before placing the concrete. 3.02 PLACING CONCRETE A. Method 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 6 1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that will prevent separation and loss of materials. 2. For chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete, use only equipment of such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without loss or separation of materials. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling and flowing. 4. Place concrete as dry as possible consistent with good workmanship, never exceeding the maximum specified slump. B. Rate of Placement 1. Place concrete at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily between bare bars. 2. When placing is started, carry it on as a continuous operation until placement of the panel or section is complete. 3. Do not pour an area at one time that cannot be finished without checking; this is particularly important during hot or dry weather. 4. Do not, in any case, pour a slab greater than 18 feet without construction joints. 5. Exterior pavement slabs shall be placed in alternating sections not exceeding 18 feet in length. C. Compaction 1. Thoroughly consolidate all concrete by suitable means during placement, working it around all embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. 2. During placement, thoroughly compact the concrete by hand tamping and by mechanical vibration. D. Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be placed at 24 foot intervals maximum or as shown on plans. E. Isolation Joints Isolation joints shall be placed against buildings, around street light footings, or as directed by the Landscape Architect. They shall be a preformed foam material with joint sealant identical to the approved expansion joints. F. Acceptability Do not use retempered concrete or concrete that has been contaminated by foreign materials. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Location 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 7 Make and locate construction joints so as to not impair the strength of the structure. B. Approval Obtain the Landscape Architect's approval of location of all control joints and construction joints in the Work prior to the start of concrete placement. 3.04 LEVELING AND FINISHING A. General 1. Tamp slabs with a jitterbug to depress the rock and then pushfloat with a bulfloat as necessary. 2. Take care that the wet slab meets the screeds accurately and does not rise above or lower below them. 3. Carefully provide slab depressions as required for the finishes indicated on the Drawings. B. Finishing 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, make all slabs even and uniform in appearance, and where no slope is required, level within plus or minus 1/8" in 10'. 2. Score lines shall be as shown on the plans. Depth of scoring shall be 1/4 inch deep. 3. No finishing operation shall be performed while free water is present. Finishing operations shall be delayed until all bled water and water sheen has left the surface and the concrete has started to stiffen. 4. After edging and jointing operations, the surface shall be floated with a wood float. Immediately following floating, the surface shall be steel troweled. C. Exterior Finishes Where "broom finish" is indicated on the Drawings and where no other exterior slab finish is indicated on the Drawings, finish the exposed concrete surface by lightly combing with a medium stiff broom after troweling is complete. 3.05 CURING A. During the entire period the concrete is being placed, cured and hardened, the Contractor shall provide protection to the concrete from damage by underground water, rain, frost, or sun in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. An approved curing method providing full saturation and protection of the concrete against drying shall be performed for a minimum period of three days. B. In cold weather (below 50 deg. F), concrete placing shall be done only within properly built enclosures capable of retaining heat or without such structures if the temperature is above 50 deg. F. The temperature within these enclosures must reach 65 deg. F before placement of concrete may begin. Only those openings required for the proper placing of concrete will be allowed in the enclosure. After the conclusion of concrete placement, the minimum temperature within the 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 8 enclosure shall be 50 deg. F for a five day period and 65 deg. F for a three day period. The method of heating shall in no way cause a reduction in the available water content of the concrete. C. In hot and dry weather and as directed, all new concrete shall be kept shaded from the sun, shielded from the wind, kept wet with water, or protected by other approved methods to retain moisture in the concrete throughout the curing period. Manual wetting down of a particular area shall cause the area to be continually wet and not allow periods of drying to occur. Plastic roll material or impregnated paper may be utilized during the installation of the concrete, and must be thoroughly wetted at least once each day. These materials are to be placed as soon as possible upon the completion of finishing of concrete in such a fashion that the surface will not be damaged or disturbed. D. All curing methods employed shall be practical for the curing situation involved, and all methods shall be subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect. No curing compounds of any kind shall be permitted, unless approved by the Landscape Architect. 3.06 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Placement 1. Do not use concrete with a placing temperature that will cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. 2. Maintain a concrete temperature during placement of less than 90 deg. F. 3. Use all means necessary to avoid drying the concrete prior to finishing operations. B. Protection 1. Provide and use all required raincovers, sunshades, fog sprays, and other devices to protect the concrete. 2. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop, and all available personnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering. 3. The Contractor shall have on hand at the paving site sufficient burlap, plastic, or paper to cover at least 6,000 square feet of freshly laid pavement as a protection against sudden thundershowers or heavy downpours of rain. 4. Any part of the pavement damaged by pedestrian traffic or other causes occurring prior to its final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor, in a manner satisfactory to the Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall protect the pavement against both public traffic and the traffic caused by his own employees and agents. The pavement shall be so protected until the beam test shows a strength of at least 550 pounds per square inch or a minimum of 7 days. 3.07 DEFECTIVE WORK 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE (SITE) 03 30 55 - 9 A. Inspection 1. Immediately after forms have been removed, inspect all concrete surfaces and patch all pour joints, voids, rock pockets, and other imperfections before the concrete is thoroughly dry. 2. Do not patch until concrete has been inspected by the Landscape Architect. B. Patching 1. Minor Defective Areas a. Chip away to a depth of about one inch, leaving edges perpendicular to the surface. Wet the area to be patched and a space of at least 6" wide around it to prevent water being absorbed out of the mortar. b. Coat the area to be patched with a cement wash consisting of neat cement and a solution of one part "Konset", or equal approved by the Landscape Architect, to four parts water; apply patching mortar immediately. c. Patching mortar shall consist of one part cement to three parts water to a consistency as dry as is possible within the requirements of handling and placing; thoroughly compact the mortar by ramming it into place. d. Screed off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than surrounding surfaces; leave undisturbed for a period of 1-2 hours to permit initial shrinkage, and then perform final finishing. e. Finish the patch to match adjacent surfaces and keep wet for at least seven days; provide and install all required protective coverings. 2. Major Defective Areas If the defects are serious or affect the strength of the structure or if patching does not satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface, the Architect may require the concrete to be removed and replaced, completely in accordance with the provisions of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 COMPENSATION Measurement -- All work relating to paving and surfacing as described in this Section and on the Contract Drawings shall be measured complete-in-place. In addition to the paving and surfacing items, related work including excavation, grading, gravel base course and compaction shall be paid for in this Section. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 13.13 - 1 SECTION 04 21 13.13 BRICK VENEER MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal grid system for thin brick at two chimneys on existing house to remain. Provide brick chimneys to re-create two brick chimneys to be demolished, including corbels. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. C. Section 06 16 00 - Sheathing. D. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. E. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale); severe weather grade kiln-fired brick. 2. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; specially formulated mortar mix. 3. ASTM C 1088 - Standard Test Method for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made From Clay or Shale; severe weather grade kiln-fired brick. 4. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions, showing required preparation and installation procedures. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Cleaning and maintenance instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings prepared by the applicator/contractor showing the wall layout, typical details, connections, expansion joints, plus the installation sequence shall be submitted shall be submitted to the architect upon request. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Submit elevations, sections and details of assembly components; indicate 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 13.13 - 2 locations, configurations, large scale plans. 2. Show sequence of installation, attachment details, and weather sealing. 3. Show location of members, other items of work and related work of other Sections to be coordinated with work of this section. 4. Submit detail drawings depicting proper installation and flashing techniques. Coordinate locations with those found on the Contract Drawings. D. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Copies of test reports by independent laboratories verifying the performance of the system shall be submitted to the Architect upon request. 2. The certified applicator/contractor shall submit a copy of his current ' Certificate of Trained Applicator' from Brick-It to the architect prior to the application of the Brick-It Metal Grid Panel System. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 12 inches (305 mm) by 12 inches (305 mm), representing actual products, styles, colors, patterns, and textures. F. Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Requirements: Provide primary and secondary components required for installation of thin brick systems from a single source. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 20 years’ experience manufacturing similar products. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Received instruction by manufacturer's personnel in the installation of the thin brick system and received a ' Certificate of Trained Applicator' from manufacturer. 2. Experienced and competent in the installation of brick type materials. 3. If requested, submit a list of recently completed projects using similar materials. D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. The mock-up shall demonstrate the proposed range of color, texture, and workmanship to be expected in completed work. 2. Locate mock-up on site in location as directed by Architect. Clean the sample panel installation using the same materials and tools as planned for the final construction. 3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-up before start of work. 4. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, style, pattern, and texture are approved by Architect. 5. Modify mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 6. Remove mock-up at the completion of the work. 7. Mock-up may be incorporated into the work. E. Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify all products, application procedures, site conditions and warranty terms. Conduct in accordance with Section 01 31 16 - Multiple Contract Coordination. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 13.13 - 3 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the location in unopened factory containers. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for damage and manufacturer informed of any discrepancies. Deficient materials shall not be used. B. Materials shall be stored in a protected location and safeguarded from damage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The ambient air temperature shall remain at 36 degrees F (2.2 degrees C) or greater for at least 72 hours after the application of mortar. B. Flashing and sealants shall be installed immediately after completion of the system. For outdoor application, provide temporary protection as needed from precipitation, wind, airborne dust and debris, and similar items. C. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of brick panel systems. 1.8 COORDINATION/SCHEDULING A. The work in this section requires close coordination with related specifications sections and trades. Sufficient labor and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation satisfactory to the architect. B. Coordinate installation of brick panel systems with related wall elements, including, windows, doors, louvers, ducts, signage, flashings, sealants, weather resistive barrier, sealant tapes and membranes, supporting wall framing and sheathing, surface mounted objects, and similar items. 1. Coordinate with installation of flashing, coping and sealants to ensure that materials are installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Coordinate with installation of surface-mounted objects to ensure that watertight seal is provided. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. At completion of project, deliver to Owner extra stock of materials used on project as follows: 1. Minimum 10 percent of attic stock for each brick type specified. B. Store in location as directed by Owner. Ensure materials are boxed and identified by manufacturer, type, and color. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Standard 20 year limited warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Brick-it, 17 Central Ave. Unit 3; Hauppauge, NY 11788; Tel: 631-244-3993; Web: www.brickit.com, or Architect approved equal. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 13.13 - 4 B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 BRICK PANEL SYSTEMS A. Brick Panel Systems: System for aligning and locking thin brick to a substrate that does not depend on adhesive for its performance. 1. System Type: Brick-It Designer Metal Grid System. 2. System Type: Brick-It Metal Grid System with Read Drainage and Moisture Control. B. Metal Grid System Panels: Galvanized steel metal components formed to align brick courses and to support and ensure a mechanical bond of each brick in place. 1. Panels shall be chem-dry treated, and be a minimum 0.014 inch (0.36 mm) thickness with continuous carrying brick ledges (every course of brick) with minimum thickness per ledge: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm). 2. Panels shall have a continuous interlock every third course, minimum thickness, 0.042 inch (1.07 mm). 3. Panels shall be able to fold out corners, door and window sections, and have a continuous linear array of holes to receive adhesive and have a continuous array of mortar receptors to lock in mortar mix. 4. Panels shall be designed to carry brick load evenly on entire wall surface without the use of footings, starter angles or special corner sections. 5. Size: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard size options. 6. Brick Configuration: Staggered, standard. C. Brick: Kiln-fired brick 1/2 to 1 inch (13 mm to 25 mm) nominal thickness, meeting ASTM C 216 and ASTM C 1088 severe weather requirements, minimum compression strength of 1000 PSI per ASTM C 513, passes freeze/thaw test per ASTM C 666. 1. Brick Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard available color options. D. Mortar: Premixed mortar supplied by manufacturer, ASTM C 270. 1. Mortar Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard available mortar color options E. Fasteners: Non-corrosive ribbed nails, screws or staples, designed for applicable substrate. F. Adhesives: High solid, solvent based adhesive that remains flexible and unaffected by freeze-thaw cycles, as supplied by thin brick manufacturer. G. Water: Shall be clean, potable, and free of all foreign matter. H. Cleaner: ProSoCo SureKleen 600 or approved equal. I. Masonry Sealer: Manufacturer's recommended sealer, applied to brick and mortar joints. J. Sealant Systems: Acceptable to thin brick manufacturer, color as selected by Architect. Joint design and surface preparation shall be based on sealant 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 13.13 - 5 manufacturer's recommendation and project conditions. K. Flashing: Refer to Section 076000, Flashing and Sheet Metal, for flashing from behind brick system over roofing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation, examine substrate for conditions including soundness, tightness of connections, crumbling or looseness of surfaces, and projections. Verify substrate is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction prior to installation of the work of this Section. B. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might adversely affect the installation to the Contractor. Do not start work until deviations are corrected. 3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate to be flat, within 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) within any 4 foot (1.2 m) square area. Cover plywood sheathing with self-adhered Ice and Water Shield prior to installing grid. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions as applicable to each type of substrate required. Install bricks to specified pattern and mortar. B. Metal Grid: Apply to substrate surface in the true level rows, interlock at every panel. Install such that panel does not extend 1/4 inch (6 mm) below the face of the brick. 1. Offset vertical grid joints and leave 1/4 inch (6 mm) between joints. Install for brick to extend past grid by 1/2 inch (13 mm) at grid ends. 2. Fasten grid system to a sound substrate or wall with a non-corrosive fastener; minimum penetration of substrate is 1 inch (25 mm). Concrete and masonry walls require fasteners and adhesive on rear of metal grid. 3. Install fasteners on an average of 3 per square foot (0.1 square meters) and at top and bottom courses vertically and a maximum of 16 inches (406 mm) on center horizontally. C. Adhesive: 1. Brick shall be spaced to insure that the head joints do not exceed 5/8 inch (16 mm) or fall below 1/4 inch (6.5 mm). The optimum head joint size is 7/16 inch (11 mm). 2. Use adhesive supplied by manufacturer. For exterior installations, apply 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) vertical dabs. For interior applications, apply 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) beads over adhesive holes as shown in manufacturer's literature. 3. Do not use excessive adhesive as this will cause bricks to tilt away from grid. Check periodically and repress to grid. 4. Allow adhesive 24 hours to dry before mortaring. D. Brick Placement: 1. Applications Requiring Corners: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 13.13 - 6 a. Start with corner brick, or a corner brick at each corner if there are corners at both ends. b. Install bricks adjusting vertical joints for fit or cut brick as required. E. Mortar: 1. Allow adhesive to fully cure before mortaring joints. 2. Use clean, cold water to mix mortar. Flush hoses regularly; especially during warm weather. 3. Slightly dampen bricks before mortaring; especially during hot weather. 4. Mix properly and test a sample area. 5. Do not apply mortar to brick panel system when the ambient outdoor temperature is below 36 degrees F (2.2 degrees C) unless temporary protection and heat can be provided for a minimum of 36 hours after installation. 6. Apply mortar into horizontal joints first, then vertical joints. Over fill joints with sufficient mortar to avoid leaving any voids. When mortar attains a firm consistency joints shall be tooled. 7. Use the joint tool supplied with the mortar kit to strike joints. Press the tool against the joint and strike joint to fill and seal mortar to edges of brick. Strike the vertical joints first than horizontal joints. Provide concave finish. Fill voids. F. Sealer: Apply only after mortar joints are thoroughly cured. Allow a minimum of 2 weeks prior to application. 1. Seal exterior applications in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Seal interior applications in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Arrange and pay for project inspection by thin brick manufacturer or its authorized representative to confirm warranty will be provided. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of inspection. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: As recommended by manufacturer. Do not begin cleaning until mortar joints are properly cured. Allow a minimum of 24 to 72 hours. Soak bricks and mortar joints before applying cleaner. 1. Thoroughly flush wall after cleaning. 2. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces of all foreign materials resulting from the work of this Section. B. Protection: 1. Protect installed materials from water impinging on the visible surface, chinking, sealants joints, and from behind. 2. Protect installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing, damaged, spilled materials, and continuous high humidity until they are fully dry. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION 04 90 00-1 SECTION 04 90 00 MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL A. SUMMARY A. Provide masonry restoration. 1. Point deteriorated masonry joints at locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Repair cracked or spalled clay and stone masonry units at locations shown on the Drawings. 3. Clean all exposed exterior masonry areas. B. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Mortar Mix: Submit mortar mix proposed for use. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform test cleaning to demonstrate/select appropriate cleaning materials, mixes, and methods. B. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for at least three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Mock-Ups: Provide 6’ x 6’ mock-up of re-pointing and 6’ x 6’ of cleaning method as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship for each type of repointing and cleaning. D. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect persons and property from injury and damage from cleaning operations. Do not work when winds prevent control of sand, cleaners or rinse water. Dispose of run-off in a legal manner. For chemical cleaning, clean only when ambient 40 degrees F temperature and above will be maintained during cleaning and seven days after. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS A. Repointing Mortar: As specified in Section 04800. B. Patching Materials: Compatible with existing materials; visual matching. C. Pressure Washing Unit: Medium pressure water; max pressure 1,000 psi with flow rate of 4 gal/min. Use 45 degree fan tip. D. Cleaning Materials: Alkaline prewash cleaner, chemical paint remover, and chemical cleaner. 1. Manufacturers: Diedrich Chemical Restoration Technologies, Hydrochemical Techniques, National Restoration, ProSoCo or approved equal. E. Restoration Materials: Masonry repair anchors and stone consolidation treatment. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION 04 90 00-2 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Chemical Cleaning: 1. Comply with cleaning chemical manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and precautions. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces with masking agent or other effective means. 3. Clean surfaces in strict conformance with approved field tests and match mock-up panels. 4. Provide uniform final appearance. B. Repointing: 1. Obtain materials from one source to maintain color/texture/quality consistency. 2. Work only when ambient 40 degrees F to 80 degrees F temperature will be maintained until 72 hours after completion. 3. Remove old mortar by hand chisel and mallet, unless Contractor can demonstrate that power tools will not damage masonry. 4. Rake-out old mortar to depth equal to 2-1/2 times joint width and in no case less than 1/2" or depth required to expose sound mortar. 5. Do not damage masonry units. 6. Rinse joints and install pointing mortar in 1/2" deep layers. 7. Tool joints to match existing and cure mortar for not less than 72 hours. 8. After pointing, clean masonry using Tampico fiber brushes and running water. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES A. Masonry workmanship shall comply with all applicable recommendations of the Brick Industry Association except as modified below. Report any damage to new or existing flashing within the work area to the Designer, and provide for repairs by appropriately skilled mechanics, at no cost to the Commonwealth. B. Conduct all masonry work in a neat and workmanlike manner, to prevent staining any surface with mortar or other spills. Avoid dropping mortar on completed masonry work or other elements of the building. If mortar drops or spills, spot-clean immediately using a sponge and clean water. C. Hot Weather (above 90°F): Do not use mortar when masonry surface temperature is above 90°F. At air temperatures over 80°F, protect the mortar from direct sunlight and exposure to wind to prevent rapid evaporation of water in the mortar before, during, and after installation. D. Cold Weather (below 40°F): Do not work in average daily temperatures below 40°F without providing cold weather protection as described in ACI 530 and outlined in the table below. Continue to operate heaters overnight with appropriate supervision as outlined. Do not use heaters that produce oily deposits on the masonry. If any oily deposits occur, consult with the Designer to determine how best to remove oily deposits, and remove at the Contractor's expense. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION 04 90 00-3 Temperature WORK IN PROGRESS COMPLETED WORK Mortar Assemblage Assemblage Above 40°F No Requirements. No Requirements. No Requirements. 40°F to 25°F Heat during mixing to between 40°F and 120°F. Maintain above freezing while in use. No Requirements. Protect masonry with a weather- resistive cover for 24 hrs after construction. Completely cover masonry when temp. is less than 32°F. 25°F to 20°F Heat during mixing to between 40°F and 120°F. Maintain above freezing while in use. Use heat sources on both sides of wall. Provide wind breaks when velocity is over 15 mph. Completely cover with insulated blanket for 24 hrs after construction. Below 20°F Heat during mixing to between 40°F and 120°F. Maintain above freezing while in use. Provide an enclosure and use heat sources to maintain temp. above 32°F within the enclosure. Provide an enclosure and use heat sources to maintain temp. above 32°F within the enclosure. E. Mix mortar using sufficient quantity of water to ensure good workability in accordance with BIA recommendations. For each batch, measure cement and lime by volume or equivalent weight. Measure material with an approved device. Measure sand by weight or in calibrated containers, with allowance made for moisture content, bulking, and consolidation. Do not use shovel measurements. Mix by machine only, for at least 3 min., but not more than 5 min. Use mortar within 2 hrs of mixing at temperatures over 74°F, and 2-1/2 hrs at temperatures between 50°F and 74°F. Discard hardening mortar. F. Where required, cut masonry with a motor-driven saw to obtain true, even, and undamaged edges. G. Lay all masonry plumb and true, with uniform and level joints. Coursing and patterns shall match the original pattern and the approved shop drawings. Periodically check coursing against control to avoid accumulated errors. At exposed infill locations, tooth brick masonry into adjacent masonry. H. Lay full bed of mortar and immediately set masonry to prevent drying out. Do not furrow bed joints. Completely butter the ends and head of each unit with mortar and shove the unit into place so that mortar squeezes out of the top of the head joint and bed joint. Cut off and scoop out the mortar that extrudes from bed and head joints on outer and inner faces of the wythe. Do not disturb, tap, shove, or push unit once they are laid in their final position. Set large units such that their weight is supported by shims, not the mortar bed. If shims are used, recess at least 1 in. from the face to permit adequate mortar coverage. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION 04 90 00-4 I. Strike exterior of mortar joints flush during laying. When mortar is thumbprint-hard on exposed surfaces, tool joints concave with a cylindrical pointing tool slightly larger than the masonry joint to compact the mortar thoroughly. 3.03 MORTAR REMOVAL A. Procedure for removing existing mortar shall be decided upon successful completion of a mockup and approval by the Designer. B. Remove existing mortar by cutting down the center of the joint with power tools and then removing remaining mortar with hand tools. To prevent joint enlargement, do not chip or cut into adjacent masonry. Do not overcut into masonry. C. Remove mortar from joints scheduled for pointing to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths, but not less than 5/8 in. Leave no cavities in the existing mortar, and remove all deteriorated mortar. D. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and exposed masonry sides for contact with pointing mortar. 3.04 MORTAR MIXES A. Measurement: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Measure materials with an approved device, not by shovel. B. For pointing only, use pre-hydrated mortar prepared as follows: Mix materials in a clean mechanical batch mixer. Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 60 min. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar of desired consistency (somewhat stiffer than bed mortar) is reached. Use within 60 min. of final mixing. Mortar color must match approved mockup mortar color. C. Do not use admixtures in mortar, unless specifically approved by the Designer. 3.05 MASONRY POINTING A. Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time application of rinsing so that, at time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off, and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. B. Apply mortar in successive layers until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint-hard before applying next layer. Allow at least 24 hrs to pass between successive stages of mortar application to allow for mortar shrinkage between stages. C. After joints are filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in successive layers of no greater than 1/2 in. depth until flush with exterior face of stone. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint-hard before applying next layer. Where 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION 04 90 00-5 existing stones have rounded edges, recess final layer slightly from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges and onto exposed face. D. When mortar at exterior face is thumbprint-hard, tool to form a concave joint, flush with the face of the stone. Use a cylindrical tool slightly larger than the joint size to compact mortar against stone joint surface. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. E. If shrinkage cracks develop because of too fast of a curing, cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for not less than 72 hrs. Keep tiles covered with tarpaulins and use a fog spray periodically to maintain moist conditions under the cover. Do not wash the newly pointed mortar with a stream of water. 3.06 FINAL CLEANING A. GENERAL PROCEDURES 1. Test any cleaning compounds in a small inconspicuous area before beginning full- scale mock-up. 2. Cover all existing exposed metal, glass, and other areas as required before cleaning the masonry with any cleaning compounds. Do not use metal scrapers to clean the masonry. Rinse repeatedly with clean water after cleaning to remove all traces of mortar and debris. Protect all exterior finishes, including glass, aluminum, and completed metal flashing work from any damage or staining caused by this work. 3. Perform pH testing of the masonry surface before and after the use of chemical cleaning products to ensure that the masonry surface is left in a pH-neutral state. 4. If using pressure-washing equipment, use pressure washers at minimum pressure required. Hold the nozzle away from the surface. Do not inadvertently etch the masonry. 5. Brush loose debris and dust off surfaces before applying cleaners. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 1 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 3. Division 9 Painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD- service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 2 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 5. Shear stud connectors. 6. Shop primers. 7. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has a minimum of five years experience with projects of similar size and difficulty. Submit evidence and references for three projects which provide assurance of these qualifications. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 3 E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50. B. Channels, Angles, S -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: as indicated on drawings. 2. Finish: Black. G. Welding Electrodes: E70xx, comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 4 A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible-washer type. a. Finish: Plain. B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 , Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type, plain. C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold- finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. Configuration: Straight or Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 5 B. Galvanizing Repair Paint ASTM A 780. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 6 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Slip critical. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2.8 GALVANIZING 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 7 A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123. 1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 8 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage- resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 9 G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Slip critical. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 10 A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide the following metal fabrications: 1. Rough hardware. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ferrous Materials: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786. 3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or A 501. 4. Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611 or A 570. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 or A 569. 6. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90. 7. Steel Pipe, Black Finish: ASTM A 53. 8. Steel Pipe, Galvanized Finish: ASTM A 53. 9. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 10. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal. 11. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type. 12. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS specifications. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-2 13. Zinc-Coating: Hot-dip galvanized coating for materials in exterior assemblies or exterior walls. B. Fasteners: 1. Bolts and Nuts: Hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head, FS FF-B-561. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. 5. Plain Washers: Round carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 6. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325. 7. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588. 8. Lock Washers: Spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 9. Zinc-Coating: Fasteners in exterior assemblies or exterior walls. C. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: CE CRD-C621. 2. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: CE CRD-C621. 3. Interior Anchoring Cement: Hydraulic expansion cement. 4. Exterior/Interior Anchoring Cement: Erosion-resistant hydraulic expansion cement. 5. Shop Primer: Alkyd primer, FS TT-P-645, compatible with topcoats. 6. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC - Paint 20. 7. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt mastic, SSPC - Paint 12. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job; allow for cutting and fitting if field measurement not practical. B. Form work true to line with sharp angles and edges. Weld continuously, grind flush and make smooth on exposed surfaces. C. Install work plumb and level with hairline joints and ground flush welds. D. Lintels: Provide sizes indicated with 8" bearing at each end. E. Touch-up damaged coatings with shop primer and galvanize repair paint. F. Paint items scheduled in accordance with painting section. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 FIXED ALUMINUM WALL LADDERS Section 05 51 33.13 - 1 SECTION 05 51 33.13 FIXED ALUMINUM WALL LADDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Aluminum Fixed Vertical Ladder including ladder, aluminum security door and floor mounting brackets. B. Products required, but not supplied under this section. 1. Required fasteners. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system is an aluminum ladder designed to attach to a wall. Floor mounting brackets are required at ladder bottom, at floor level. A safety cap at the top of the stringers is required. Standard riser height is 12”. Ladder shall be able to withstand 1,500 lb. loading without failure. B. Welded hasp for security door lock shall be included. Hinges for security door shall be installed with ss carriage bolts, supplied by mfr. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Examine ladder when it arrives on site. Notify the carrier and manufacturer of any damage. B. Store ladder until installation under roof, if possible; or, if stored outside, under suitable cover. 1.4 WARRANTY A. The ladder carries a limited warranty of five (5) years against defective material and workmanship, covering parts only, no labor or freight. Defective parts, if deemed so by the manufacturer, will be replaced at no charge, freight excluded, upon inspection at manufacturer’s plant which warrants same. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Under normal usage, the ladder shall require no preventive maintenance. B. No “spare parts” shall be required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER Precision Ladders, LLC, Morristown, TN, Phone: (800) 225-7814. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 FIXED ALUMINUM WALL LADDERS Section 05 51 33.13 - 2 2.2 MATERIALS A. LADDER 1. Stringers (Siderail) a. Aluminum channel. (6005-T5) b. 2 1/2” x 1 1/16” x 1/8”. c. 1/8” molded polyurethane safety caps provided at top. 2. Treads a. Extruded aluminum (6005-T5) b. 1/4” x 3/4” x 1/4”. c. Treads deeply serrated for safety. 3. Mounting Bracket a. 8 1/2” x 4 1/2” x 3” aluminum wall bracket b. 1/2” x 2” x 3” floor bracket. B. SECURITY DOOR 1. 1/8” aluminum door (3003-H14) with welded hasp. C. MANUFACTURED UNITS 1. The Fixed Vertical Ladder is a Model FL–118.5. (118.5 = Total level to level in inches) D. ACCESSORIES None E. FABRICATION 1. The ladder shall be completely fabricated and ready for installation before shipment to the site. 2. Security door shall be completely fabricated and ready for field attachment to the ladder before shipment to the site. F. FINISHES 1. Mill finish on aluminum ladder components. PART 3 EXECUTION 1.1 INSTALLATION A. Install per the manufacturer’s installation instructions. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing February 8, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Post-Bid Addendum #6 DECORATIVE METAL 05 70 00 - 1 SECTION 05 70 00 - DECORATIVE METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnishing stainless steel backsplash shields in unit Kitchens. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 12 35 30 "Residential Casework" for installation of stove shields around cabinets. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative metal. 1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details. 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 8, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Post-Bid Addendum #6 DECORATIVE METAL 05 70 00 - 2 1. Build mockups for the following types of decorative metal: a. Stainless steel backsplash shields in units. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store decorative metal in a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with decorative metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Use materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Use materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL A. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching decorative metal items to other work unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 8, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Post-Bid Addendum #6 DECORATIVE METAL 05 70 00 - 3 B. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. E. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. F. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Weld and braze behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 1. Where welding and brazing cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no evidence of a welded joint. 2.5 CUSTOM RECYCLING CHUTES A. General: Fabricate to designs indicated from stainless steel sheets of sizes and profiles indicated. Form indicated shapes by bending, forging, coping, mitering, and welding. B. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304, 22 gauge. C. Anchors: Provide anchors or glue to connect recycling chutes to countertop. 2.6 STAINLESS STEEL BACKSPLASH SHIELDS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Commerce Metal Sales Stainless Steel Backsplash in the following configuration: 1. Pattern: Embossed 4 inch by 4 inch squares with pattern running vertically and horizontally. 2. Thickness: 22 gauge. 3. Size: 24 inches wide by length of exposed wall over counter at all units. See kitchen elevation drawings. 4. Steel: Type 304 Stainless steel. 5. Edges: Hemmed on left and right. 6. Mounting: Contact cement adhesive mounting. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 8, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Post-Bid Addendum #6 DECORATIVE METAL 05 70 00 - 4 B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Square Finish: t304. C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative metal. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place construction. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative metal. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting, welding, and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of decorative metal, restore finishes to eliminate evidence of such corrective work. D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses. F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be performed at same location. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 8, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Post-Bid Addendum #6 DECORATIVE METAL 05 70 00 - 5 1. Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from similarly finished items to preclude non-uniform oxidation and discoloration. G. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths. B. Protect finishes of decorative metal from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by decorative metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. C. Restore new finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05 70 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 1 SECTION 05 73 00 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum decorative railings at rear deck. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for installation of anchors into concrete, pouring concrete stair treads and landings. 2. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for building in of anchors into masonry walls. 3. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 4. Section 06 20 13 "Exterior Finish Carpentry" for wood railings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection. 1.4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not meet structural performance requirements. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 2 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Welded connections. 4. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts responsible for their preparation. 1. Provide calculations for loading and stresses for all railings (handrails and guardrails) bearing the Professional Structural Engineer’s seal. Show how design load requirements and other performance requirements as required by the Massachusetts State Building Code have been satisfied. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. D. Preconstruction test reports. E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 3 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches in length. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. General: Notify the Architect where conflicts apply between referenced standards and existing materials, and existing methods of construction. 1. Galvanizer’s tagging: The galvanizer shall mark all lots of material with a clearly visible stamp or tag indicating the name of the galvanizer, the weight of the zinc coating, and the applicable ASTM Specification Numbers. D. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator/Installer: Minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer. 2. Welders: Utilize only qualified welders employed on the Work. Submit verification that Welder’s are AWS D1.1 and D1.4 qualified within the previous 12 months. 3. Licensed Professionals: Provide the services of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts to design and certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the performance requirements specified in this section and as required by Massachusetts State Building Code. a. Prepare Shop Drawings for railings and handrail brackets under direct supervision of a same Engineer experienced in design of this work. E. Railings shall comply with 780 CMR Massachusetts State Bjuilding Code and 521 CMR Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Requirements. 1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups. Payment for these services will be made by Contractor. Retesting of products that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. 2. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mockups will be tested. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 4 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum Decorative Railings: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gilpin Ornamental Iron, Summit Aluminum Railings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Architectural Metal Works. b. Architectural Railings & Grilles, Inc. c. Avalon Aluminum Railing by RDI d. ATR Technologies, Inc. e. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. f. J. G. Braun Company. g. CraneVeyor Corp. h. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. i. Livers Bronze Co. j. Newman Brothers, Inc. k. R & B Wagner, Inc. l. Sterling Dula Railings; KaneSterling. m. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. 2. Basis of Design: A. Gilpin Ornamental Iron, Summit aluminum railing with powder-coated finish. 42" installed rail height, 2-1/4" wide top rail, 5/8" square spindles, 4" spindle spacing. For step or platform application installed with fittings, flanges, mounting brackets, swivel brackets, or installation spindles. Provide all necessary newel posts, brackets, flanges, rivets, rivet covers and installation spindles as needed for a complete installation of design as noted. B. Material: Aluminum, Style: Summit, Color: Black. C. Contractor’s option: Provide custom fabricated railings to match Drawings. Provide all necessary materials, brackets and installation spindles as needed for a complete installation of design shown. All welds and connections to be ground smooth. No connections shall be easily disconnected with common hand tools. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 5 3. Locations: Provide metal guardrails where noted on rear deck. Provide guardrails and handrails at stairs of front porch down to grade. B. Steel and Iron Decorative Railings: 1. Refer to the Drawings for location and details of steel stairs and railings (handrails and guardrails) to be furnished and installed hereunder. Verify heights shown in Drawings comply with referenced codes and regulations. 2. Sizes of all headers, stringers, and other structural members; and gauges and configurations of all railings and posts shall be as indicated on the approved shop drawings, and in accordance with the standards of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. 3. Fabrication - General: a. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust pitting; well-formed and finished to shape and size, true to details with straight, sharp lines, and angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall be to true radii. Exposed sheared edges shall be eased. b. Shop fabricate items wherever practicable, accurately fitting all parts and making all joints tight. Do not fabricate materials until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Architect. c. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of anchor bolts and other hardware and for attachment of work by other trades. All such work shall be done prior to hot-dip galvanizing of the various components. d. Grind all edges of bars and plates completely free from nicks and machine marks, prior to galvanizing and/or shop priming. e. Weld all permanent connections, make all welds in a continuous manner; tack-weld only where specifically indicated on the Drawings. Grind all exposed-to-view welds completely f. Smooth and flush to the surface plane of the base metals. Perform welding work prior to galvanizing in all cases, except where field welding is necessary, in which case, completely coat all such welds with two coats of specified liquid zinc coating, after performing grinding operations. g. Use screws and bolts only where welding cannot be performed, of sufficient size to ensure against loosening from normal usage of miscellaneous metal items furnished hereunder. 1) Countersink all screw heads and bolt heads as far as practicable. Use not less than two screw, bolts, or other anchorage items, at each connection point. 2) Draw up all threaded connections tightly, after buttering same with pipe joint compound, to exclude water. h. Carefully coordinate the installation of metal fabrications with the work of trades responsible for the installation of interfacing work, and for the installation of work into the various assemblies furnished hereunder, and permit the installation of the related materials to be made at the appropriate times. i. Fit and assemble metal fabrications in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 6 1) Galvanized assemblies: Where size of assembly is too large for galvanizing kettle, galvanize components prior to fabrication and assemble after galvanizing. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95. 2. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall comply with 780 CMR Massachusetts State Building Code and withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Verify heights shown on Drawings comply with referenced codes and regulations. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 7 1. Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. 3. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set screws on bottom of bracket. 2.4 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below. B. Extruded Bars and Shapes, Including Extruded Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52. C. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832. 2.5 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: [ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed)] [or] [ASTM A 513]. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Welded-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 1inch welded wire mesh, made from PVC Coated galvanized 0.135 inch nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510/A 510M. 2.6 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Aluminum Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where exposed. 3. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 4. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless otherwise indicated. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 8 1. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 9 G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded nonwelded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds; no evidence of a welded joint. I. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. As detailed. K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 10 Q. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from PVC coated galvanized woven-wire mesh sandwiched between factory painted galvanized 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4 thick welded galvanized angles and 1-1/2" x 1/4" thick galvanized bars. Weld to posts with 1-1/2" x 1/4" mounting tabs as shown on Drawings. Color to be selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range. 1. Make wire mesh and frames from galvanized steel. 2. Orient wire mesh with wires horizontal and vertical. 2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Surface preparation prior to galvanizing: Pickle steel prior to galvanizing in conformance with SSPC-SP8. Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign matter. 2. Hot-dip galvanizing: Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-dip process “Deltagalv by Duncan Galvanizing, Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards. a. Wherever possible, perform galvanizing after assembly of items. b. Galvanized items shall be straightened to remove all warpage and distortion caused by the galvanization process. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 11 c. Touch-up all breaks on hot-dip surfaces caused by cutting, welding, drilling or undue abrasion with liquid zinc coating as specified herein above. Apply liquid zinc by brush or spray on all damaged areas in two coats to a total dry film thickness of not less than 3 mils. Apply first coat within two hours after damage to hot-dip film to prevent undue oxidation of exposed surface. On all welds remove weld spatter by power wire brushing or equivalent before applying liquid zinc coating. Repair material should extend at least 3 inches beyond all edges of the damaged galvanized area as possible to assure continuity of galvanic protection. d. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with aerosol spray, silver paint, bright paint, brite paint, or aluminum paints is not acceptable. B. FINISHES - SHOP APPLIED COATINGS 1. For hot-dipped galvanized steel items scheduled for shop applied coating: a. Touch-up all breaks on hot-dip surfaces caused by cutting, welding, drilling or undue abrasion with liquid zinc coating as specified above under the Article entitled “Galvanized Railings”. b. Finish: Provide factory-applied polyurethane color coating, 2.5 mils dry film thickness minimum, COLORGALV by Duncan Galvanizing or equal. Apply coating within 12 hours after galvanizing at the galvanizer's plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable environmental regulations, and as recommended by coating manufacturer. Engage the services of a galvanizing facility which will assume single-source responsibility for galvanizing and finish coating. 1) Touch-up finish in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide touch-up such that repair is not visible from a distance of 6 feet. c. Alternate finish: An acceptable alternate to specified “Colorgalv” finish; aliphatic acrylic polyurethane enamel shop applied coating system, within 12 hours of galvanizing as follows: 1) Preparation: Mechanically abrade all surfaces. 2) Acid etch coat, if recommended by paint manufacturer: a) Courtaulds/International Polyvinyl Butyral Primer “Interprime Etch Primer฀at 3) 0.4 to 0.5 mils DFT. 4) First Coat: (epoxy intermediate) a) Courtaulds/International “Intergard 475” at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. b) Tnemec Series 27 “F.C. Typoxy฀at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. 5) Second Coat: Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane, Gloss Finish a) Courtaulds/International “Interthane 870” at 4.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. b) Tnemec Series 74 “Endura Shield฀at 4.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 13 B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material. D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For aluminum railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. 2. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. 3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections. C. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in the completed Work. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with performance requirements. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 14 B. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and comply with specified requirements. C. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry. B. Clean by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry. C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. 3.8 SCHEDULES A. General: Items listed herein below provide further description of those already indicated in the Drawings. This list does not represent a complete list of miscellaneous metal components or types required to complete the Work. 1. Carefully review all Drawings and furnish and install metal fabrications required by the various trades, whether or not specifically listed herein, such as miscellaneous clip angles, miscellaneous steel bracketing, and other miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings, reasonably implied therefrom, or reasonably necessary for the thorough completion of the work. B. Exterior galvanized steel railings with infill panels: Galvanized angles, bars, pipe railings, tubes/posts, and mounting tabs as detailed on the Drawings. Fabricated assemblies shall be hot-dipped galvanized, shop primed and shop finished typical. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 00 - 15 1. Pipe Railings: To prevent unnecessary damage to the galvanized coating by field welding, provide slip-fit method of connecting pipe railings. Fabricate pipe railing from mechanical steel tubing internally vented with holes 3/4 the size of the pipe's internal diameter. C. Exterior Aluminum Railings: Shop primed and shop finished. END OF SECTION 05 73 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide rough carpentry: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. 4. Wood furring. 5. Backing panels. 6. Sheathing. 7. Subflooring. 8. Underlayment. 9. Air infiltration barrier. 10. Sheathing overlay/rainscreen mechanism. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Lumber Standards and Grade Stamps: U.S. Product Standard PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard and inspection agency grade stamps. C. Construction Panel Standards: PS 1, U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood; APA PRP-108. D. Wood Framing Standards: NFPA House Framing Manual. 1. Exterior Wall Framing: 2 inch by 8 inch nominal studs, 16 inches on center. 2. Interior Wall Framing: 2 inch by 4 inch studs, 16 inches (40 cm) on center. E. Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2 for lumber and AWPA C9 for plywood; waterborne pressure treatment. Provide for wood in contact with soil, concrete, masonry, roofing, flashing, dampproofing and waterproofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Dimension Lumber: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-2 1. Light Framing: No. 2 grade. 2. Structural Framing: No. 2 grade. 3. Species: Any species of grade indicated. B. Miscellaneous Lumber: 1. Moisture Content: 19 percent. 2. Grade: Standard grade light framing. C. Engineered Wood Products: 1. Laminated Veneer Lumber: Laminated wood veneers with exterior type adhesive; design stresses for use intended. 2. Prefabricated Wood I Joists: Stress-graded lumber bonded to APA performance rated panel with exterior type adhesive; design stresses for use intended. D. Construction Panels: 1. Combination Subfloor: ¾” APA Sturd-I-Floor, Exterior. 2. Underlayment: 3/8” APA rated underlayment, as recommended by flooring mfr. 3. Wall Sheathing: Zip Sheathing, Exterior. 4. Roof Sheathing: APA Sheathing, Exterior. 5. Plywood Backing Panels: APA C-D Plugged Exposure 1 with exterior glue, fire- retardant treated. 6. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: APA Underlayment Exterior. 7. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: APA Underlayment Exposure 1. E. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Air Infiltration Barrier: Zip System sheathing with taped seams on all wall and roof sheathing. 2. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated, installed between sealant. 3. Joint Sealants: Joint sealants shall be provided by Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.” Coordinate schedule and substrate requirements as required for a complete installation. 4. Framing Anchors and Fasteners: Non-corrosive, suitable for load and exposure. Drywall screws are not acceptable. 5. Building Wrap: Spun bonded polyethylene scrim that prevents bulk water penetration and acts as a drainage plane to drain any moisture that enters the rainscreen without allowing it to pass through to the sheathing. Use sealant tape as recommended by the manufacturer. Lap product to allow for water drainage in all locations. 6. Siding: Fiber Cement Siding. See Section 074600. 7. Rainscreen Mechanism: Mineral Wool insulation with 1x4 Install strapping over Building Wrap and sheathing. 8. Flexible Flashing at all wall sheathing joints to create a continuous air barrier system: Self-adhesive, flashing product by Siga Fentrim F, or equal, as approved by architect. 9. Provide wood blocking for grab bars in ALL bathrooms for potential future installation. All bathrooms shall have blocking for future grab bars, where possible. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wood framing: Comply with recommendations of NFPA Manual for House Framing, NFPA Recommended Nailing Schedule, and NFPA National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. B. Plywood: Comply with recommendations of APA Design and Construction Guide - Residential and Commercial. C. Provide nailers, blocking and grounds where required. Set work plumb, level and accurately cut. D. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with other work. E. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials. F. Ventilate construction fully after exposure to water so that the wood dries completely for a minimum of 10 days, or provide proof of moisture reading in wood is 19% or below if less than 10 days have elapsed. G. Air Infiltration: Provide a minimum of two Blower door tests on a minimum of 20% of each unit type. One test shall be performed before insulation is complete and one after insulation and air barriers are installed. A final Blower Door Test shall be conducted by the Owner’s Energy Consultant when construction is substantially complete. Each unit shall achieve a maximum rating of 1.2 air change per hour @ 50 pascals. H. Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD DECKING 06 15 33 - 1 SECTION 06 15 33 WOOD DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic decking. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 25 00 "Weather Barriers" for flexible flashing used with wood decking. 2. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing used with wood decking. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal in thickness and 2 inches nominal or greater in width. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD DECKING 06 15 33 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For plastic decking and wood decking. 1. For plastic decking and wood decking. Include installation instructions and maintenance instructions. B. Samples: For plastic and wood decking, not less than 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of decking, including surface texture. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Plastic decking. 2. Wood decking. 3. Expansion anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. Lumber Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Handle and store plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC DECKING A. Plastic Lumber, General: Products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction with current model code evaluation reports that show compliance with building code in effect for Project for indicated type of construction. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD DECKING 06 15 33 - 3 1. Allowable loads and spans, as documented in evaluation reports or in information referenced in evaluation reports, shall not be less than design loads and spans indicated. B. Composite Plastic Lumber: Solid shapes made from a mixture of cellulose fiber and polyethylene or polypropylene. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Trex Company, Inc., Select Composite Decking or comparable product by one of the following: a. AZEK Building Products, Inc. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. GAF Decking Systems, LLC. d. GAF Materials Corporation. e. TAMKO Building Products, Inc. f. TimberTech. g. Trex Company, Inc. h. Universal Forest Products, Inc. i. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Decking Standard: ICC-ES AC109. 3. Decking Size: 1-1/4 by 6 nominal, 1 by 5-1/2 inches actual. 4. Configuration: Provide product with grooved edges designed for fastening with concealed decking fasteners. 5. Surface Texture: Woodgrain. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Attachment: Camo hidden deck fasteners using Marksman pro tools for installation. a. Use only 316 stainless steel or ProTech coated screws. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For plastic decking, use stainless-steel fasteners where fasteners are exposed to view. B. Nails: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70. D. Wood Screws and Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.1, or ICC-ES AC233. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD DECKING 06 15 33 - 4 E. Carbon-Steel Bolts: ASTM A 307with ASTM A 563hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers all hot-dip zinc coated. F. Stainless-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; with ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Post-installed Anchors: Stainless-steel, chemical anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Secure decking to framing with screws. E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD DECKING 06 15 33 - 5 G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of members or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners. 2. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code. 3. "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. I. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that do not fully penetrate members where opposite side is exposed to view. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. J. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced and with adjacent rows staggered. 3.4 ELEVATED DECK JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists where framed into wood supporting members by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. Do not notch joists. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. C. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams or girders not less than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 06 17 60 - 1 SECTION 06 17 60 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood roof trusses, and girder trusses. 2. Wood truss bracing. 3. Wood floor trusses 4. Metal truss accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal- plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. B. TPI: Truss Plate Institute, Inc. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 06 17 60 - 2 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span. b. Floor Trusses: Vertical live load deflection of 1/480 of span. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and sealed by that Engineer. Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 4. Indicate locations of strong backs for floor trusses and required connection details. 5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates. 6. Show splice details and bearing details. 7. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. C. Qualification Data: For metal-plate manufacturer, professional engineer, fabricator, and Installer. D. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Metal-plate connectors. 2. Metal truss accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 06 17 60 - 3 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation and sealing of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third- party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 06 17 60 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 3. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Grade and Species: For truss chord and web members, provide dimension lumber of any species, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2.2 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company. 3. CompuTrus, Inc. 4. Eagle Metal Products. 5. Jager Building Systems, Inc. 6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 7. Robbins Engineering, Inc. 8. TEE-LOK Corporation; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 9. Truswal Systems Corporation. B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 coating designation for interior locations and G90 coating designation for exterior locations; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 1. Use for interior and exterior locations. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 06 17 60 - 5 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.4 METAL TRUSS ACCESSORIES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. 3. KC Metals Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. USP Structural Connectors. C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads as published by manufacture that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 or G90 coating designation as required. 1. Use for interior and exterior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 06 17 60 - 6 E. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to both sides of truss, top plates, and one side of stud below. F. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load- bearing walls, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Section 06 17 60 - 7 F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. H. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. 1. Install bracing to comply with Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. J. Do not cut or remove truss members. K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Do not alter trusses in field. 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Exterior architectural woodwork: 1. See Section 06 40 00, Architectural Woodwork. B. Provide interior architectural woodwork: 1. Standing and running trim and rails. a. Where necessary to accommodate installation of new windows. Replace any broken or damaged trim as necessary to replicate complete trim surround. Windows shall have new sills and aprons, as shown on drawings. b. At new building (Connector & Addition): Windows shall have sills and aprons, only, with gwb returns. 2. Shelving and closet specialties. 3. Wood Base Trim: Provide WM 623; 9/16” x 3 ¼” primed, finger-jointed pine trim base molding by Woodgrain Millwork, or approved equal. a. Provide in the following locations: All rooms except Basement Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Maintenance Rooms and Front Elevator Vestibule. At those locations, provide 4” vinyl base. Provide wood base in locations noted, even if vinyl base is shown on drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Standards: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." C. Preservative Treatment: Nonpressure method, exterior type, NWWDA I.S. 4. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-2 D. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: 1. Particleboard: NPA 8 compliance. 2. Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9 compliance. 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE compliance. E. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship of each type of architectural woodwork. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Interior Standing and Running Trim and Rails: 1. Species for Opaque Finish: Ponderosa Pine. 2. Grade: Finger jointed and primed. 3. Schedule: a. Base: See Section o9 65 13, Resilient Base and Accessories. b. Door casings: Brosco 8627, 2 ½” eased edge. c. Window sills: MDF with bullnose edge. d. Apron below sill: 1x4 pine, painted. B. Shelving and Closet Specialties: 1. Shelving: PVC coated wire shelving system. 2. Closet Rods: PVC coated wire closet rod system. C. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Screws: FS FF-S-111. 2. Nails: FS FF-N-105. 3. Anchors: Type required for secure anchorage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide work to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated. Install work to comply with quality standards referenced. Back prime work and install plumb, level and straight with tight joints; scribe work to fit. B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Use non-corrosive fasteners for exterior work. Coordinate with work of other sections. C. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials. D. Repair minor damage, clean and protect. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-1 SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide exterior architectural woodwork: 1. Exterior standing and running trim and rails. 2. Decorative Porch Railings. 3. Porch Roof Beadboad. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Standards: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." C. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship of each type of architectural woodwork. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior Standing and Running Trim and Rails: 1. Species for Opaque Finish: Boral Tru Exterior Trim, pre-primed (referred to as Engineered Wood Trim on Drawings). 2. Finish: Paint. 3. Window Cap Trim: See Section 06 66 20 for Urethane Trim over historic windows. 4. Railings at deck facing driveway and front deck facing street: Measure and document existing guard rails, moldings and trim. Create new guard rails, moldings and trim to match existing, with new dimensions, as noted on Drawings. Fasten to porch columns with hidden fasteners. Paint. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-2 a. Material: Clear, vertical grain Douglas Fir or clear Mahogany. 5. Railings at second floor deck over front deck facing street: Repair existing railings and cap. Rebuild, as necessary. Scrape and add three coats of paint. 6. Porch Ceilings: At deck facing driveway and front deck facing street and second floor deck above first floor deck facing street. a. Material: Cellular PVC 4”x1/2” 3TL beadboard by Certainteed Corp. Use PVC cement or Bond & Fill or TrimTight glues, where needed. Install as per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide work to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated. Install work to comply with quality standards referenced. Back prime work and install plumb, level and straight with tight joints; scribe work to fit. B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Use non-corrosive fasteners for exterior work. Coordinate with work of other sections. C. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials. D. Repair minor damage, clean and protect. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 Poly-Ash Exterior Trim 06 65 00 -1 SECTION 06 65 00 POLY-ASH EXTERIOR TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Poly-ash exterior trim. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 09 91 13 Exterior Painting: Field painting poly-ash siding with topcoat. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org): 1.ASTM D 570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 2.ASTM D 1037 – Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials. 3.ASTM D 1622 – Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 4.ASTM D 6109 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastic Lumber and Related Products. 5.ASTM D 6341 – Standard Test Method for Determination of the Linear Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Plastic Lumber and Plastic Lumber Shapes Between –30 and 140°F (–34.4 and 60°C). 6.ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including installation instructions. C.Samples: Submit manufacturer’s sample of poly-ash siding. 1.Sample Size: Minimum 6 inches by 6 inches. D.Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. E.Test Reports: Submit manufacturer’s test reports from testing performed by qualified, independent testing laboratories. F.Product Evaluation Reports: Submit manufacturer’s product evaluation reports from accredited, evaluation service. G.Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 Poly-Ash Exterior Trim 06 65 00 2 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Storage and Handling Requirements: 1.Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2.Store poly-ash siding on flat, level surface, raised above floor or ground, with adequate support to prevent sagging. 3.Keep poly-ash siding covered and free of dirt and debris until installation. 4.Protect materials and finish during storage, handling, and installation to prevent damage. 1.6 WARRANTY A.Warranty Period for Poly-Ash Siding: 20 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturer: Boral Composites Inc., 200 Mansell Court East, Suite 305, Roswell, Georgia 30076. 888-926-7259. Website www.boraltruexterior.com. E-mail: info@truexterior.com B.Substitutions: Allowed if approved by Architect after meeting all requirements noted in Division 1. 2.2 POLY-ASH TRIM A.Poly-Ash Siding: “Boral TruExterior” trim boards. 1.Material: Polymeric blend, fly ash, and glass fibers. 2.Formed in continuous process, cut to 16-foot lengths, and milled to give a surface profile. 3.Width: As noted on Drawings. 4.Nominal Thickness: As noted on Drawings. 5.Exposed Texture: Smooth. 6.Nonstructural material. B.Recycled Content: 1.Post-Industrial Recycled Content: Minimum 70 percent, by weight. 2.Post-Consumer Recycled Content: Minimum 2 percent, by weight. C.Properties: 1.Density, ASTM D 1622: 40 to 50 pcf. 2.Flexural Strength, ASTM D 6109: Greater than 1,600 psi. 3.Coefficient of Linear Expansion, ASTM D 6341: Less than 1.40 E-05 in/in/degree F. 4.Impact Resistance, ASTM D 1037: Grater than 50 inches. D.Performance: 1.Fungi Rot, AWPA E10: a.Brown Rot: Negligible loss. b.White Rot: Negligible loss. 2.Termite Resistance, AWPA E1: Greater than 9.0 (10 being best). 3.Water Absorption, ASTM D 570: Less than 1.5 percent. 4.Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E 84: 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 Poly-Ash Exterior Trim 06 65 00-3 a.Flame Spread Index: Less than 35. b.Smoke Developed Index: Less than 450. 2.3 FABRICATION A.Manufacturing Tolerances: 1.Width: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 2.Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 3.Length: Plus 2 inches, minus 0 inch. 2.4 FINISHES A.Primer: 1.Acrylic based. 2. Low VOC. 3.Factory applied. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners: 1.Minimum 8d by 2-1/2-inch-long stainless steel ring-shank nails. 2.In accordance with local building code. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine wood framing members to receive poly-ash siding. B.Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation. C.Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install poly-ash siding in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings. B.Do not install poly-ash siding in structural or load-bearing applications. C.Install poly-ash siding plumb, level, square, and true to line. D.Fastening: Install fasteners in accordance with local building code. E.Painting: 1.Apply topcoat of exterior paint over factory-applied primer: a.Within 150 days of installing poly-ash siding. b.As specified in Section 09 91 13. 2.Ensure poly-ash siding is clean and dry before painting. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 Poly-Ash Exterior Trim 06 65 00-4 3.3 ADJUSTING A.Repair minor damages to poly-ash siding in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Architect. B.Remove and replace with new material, damaged poly-ash siding that cannot be successfully repaired, as determined by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A.Protect installed poly-ash siding to ensure that, except for normal weathering, siding will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MANUFACTURED TRIM AND ORNAMENTS- URETHANE 06 66 20- 1 OF 5 SECTION 06 66 20 MANUFACTURED TRIM AND ORNAMENTS-URETHANE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS: A. All contract documents apply to work of this section; this includes but is not limited to: Drawings, Instructions to Bidders, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One Administrative Sections of the specifications. B. Related Sections: 1. 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 2. 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 3. 01 60 00 – Product Requirements 4. 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry 5. 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry 6. 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Section includes furnishing and installing all selected Urethane Foam Manufactured Trim and Ornament Products, including but not limited to: 1. Head Trim over windows in existing house to remain and over double front door facing street. 1.3 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Finished surfaces shall be free from cracks, pits, chips, voids, depressions, bumps, ridges waves, scratches, discoloration or other defacements. B. Products in this section shall be designed, engineered, fabricated and installed to conform to project drawings and specifications. C. Consult the local building code AHJ to determine suitability of Fypon products to meet project and code requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer’s Data for each product to be used, including: storage and handling requirements and recommendations; preparation instructions and recommendations and installation instructions. C. Shop drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing location, profiles and product components, including but not limited to anchorage requirements, 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MANUFACTURED TRIM AND ORNAMENTS- URETHANE 06 66 20- 2 OF 5 accessories and provisions for achieving desired finishes. Submit one set of CAD files for approval. D. Product Samples: Submit duplicate samples for each product component specified, representing the actual profiles, products, patterns and finishes specified. One approved sample will be returned to contractor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have not less than 10 years successful experience in producing the type of prefabricated components required for project applications equivalent to the requirements for this project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing products of similar type and scope as those specified in this section. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas as designated by Architect. 2. Include mock-up for each profile combination indicated on the drawings. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color and sheen are approved by Architect. 4. Rework mock-up areas as required to produce acceptable work. 5. Mock-up may remain as finished work if approved by Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver all materials in original packaging, unopened with no visible damage. B. Label each package with product contents and stock number of contents, with warranty, installation, handling and storage recommendations enclosed, available on-line or on packaging. C. Allow for receiving, unloading, handling and movement to approved storage areas within project, and final movement to point of installation. D. Store and protect all materials in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements for environmental and physical protection. Keep temporary protective coverings in place. E. Store products on flat level surface to prevent warping. F. Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MANUFACTURED TRIM AND ORNAMENTS- URETHANE 06 66 20- 3 OF 5 install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Allow at least 24 hours for materials to adapt to conditions at project site prior to installation. 1.8 WARRANTY: A. Upon completion of work, provide a written Manufacturer’s Limited Warranty for products installed as part of this project to the Original Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fypon, LLC. 1750 Indian Wood Circle, Maumee, Ohio 43537 Phone: 800/446-3040; http://www.fypon.com B. Substitutions: As approved by Architect, only. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Manufactured polyurethane trim and ornaments: 1. Window and Door Trim: 9” Crosshead. WCH35X9 with bottom trim. Sized to fit door opening. Prime coated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES: A. Sealant: Use a compatible urethane-based adhesive. B. Fasteners: Use corrosive-resistant fasteners. C. Filler: Use a compatible filler putty. 2.4 FINISHES: A. Manufacturer supplied protective barrier coat primer, resistant to UV degradation, providing interim UV protection of products which is suitable for field application of 100% acrylic latex finish paint on all urethane foam products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Site Verification of Conditions: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MANUFACTURED TRIM AND ORNAMENTS- URETHANE 06 66 20- 4 OF 5 1. Prior to the start of installation, inspect all preceding work to ensure that there are no conditions which will cause an unsatisfactory installation of work involving polyurethane foam products. 2. Notify Architect in writing of any unacceptable conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent performance of this product. 3. Do not install any work involving polyurethane foam products until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and acceptable for proper installation of work. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for correcting or replacing all unacceptable work involving urethane products, which were installed over unsatisfactory conditions at no cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Protect surrounding and adjacent work as required preventing damage to preceding work during execution of this work. B. Perform all preparation necessary for a successful installation of products as specified in manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. Obtain Manufacturer’s instructions for successful installation of work to be performed and become knowledgeable with all material handling and installation recommendations. B. Ensure full compliance with Manufacturer’s instructions in all aspects of tasks required by this work. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the drawings. C. Coordinate all work with other project trades to assure proper installation and provide proper accommodations for following work by other trades. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. After installation, check all work for flaws and defects. C. Repair all defective work. C. Remove and replace all damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Project Architect. 3.5 PROTECTION: A. Install temporary protective materials necessary to prevent damage to materials installed in this work until final acceptance of the project. 3.6 CLEANING: A. Remove all protection materials. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. MANUFACTURED TRIM AND ORNAMENTS- URETHANE 06 66 20- 5 OF 5 B. Clean all surfaces following manufacturer’s recommendations prior to final project completion. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish. C. Dispose properly of all debris generated by this work, protection materials and cleaning materials. END OF SECTION PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 1 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07 01 50.19 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Full tear-off of entire roof. 2. Removal of base flashings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for reroofing preparation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section. B. Full Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing roofing system from deck or concrete fill. C. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose off-site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not indicated to be removed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Temporary Roofing Submittal: Product data and description of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof remains in place, include surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing manufacturer, PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 2 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. stating acceptance of the temporary roof and that its inclusion does not adversely affect the roofing system's resistance to fire and wind. C. Fastener pull-out test report. D. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins. E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes, such as asbestos-containing materials, by a landfill facility licensed to accept them. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer, including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing, including installers of roof deck, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. b. Rooftop worker and school occupant safety measures. c. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that are to remain. d. Existing roof drainage during each stage of reroofing. e. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. f. Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. g. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing. h. HVAC shutdown and sealing of vents. i. Shutdown of any fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. j. Discovery of asbestos-containing materials and notification procedures. k. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. l. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 3 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Roofing System: Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations. 1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust and water-leakage covers over finishes to remain, shut down HVAC and fire- alarm or -detection equipment if needed, from below work area. C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations. D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent homes and property. E. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building. 1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately notify Architect of any blockages or restrictions. B. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed. C. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork. D. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain. E. Maintain roof drains (gutters and leaders) in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 4 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast. 1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding or excessive erosion of soil, below. 3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day. B. Remove existing roofing and other roofing system components down to the structural deck or concrete fill. 1. Remove existing fasteners from deck. 2. At the end of each work day, make roof water tight, so finishes and framing below are unaffected by roof demolition and construction. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all water damage during construction. 3.3 DECK PREPARATION A. Roof deck shall be removed in its entirety. B. If broken or loose fasteners that secured deck panels to structure are observed, remove any and all fasteners that will affect new construction or create dangerous work conditions for workers. C. Provide additional deck securement as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL A. Remove all existing flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet materials, dirt, and debris. 3.5 DISPOSAL A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted. B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property. END OF SECTION PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 1 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07 01 50.19 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Full tear-off of entire roof. 2. Removal of base flashings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for reroofing preparation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section. B. Full Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing roofing system from deck or concrete fill. C. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose off-site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not indicated to be removed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Temporary Roofing Submittal: Product data and description of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof remains in place, include surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing manufacturer, PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 2 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. stating acceptance of the temporary roof and that its inclusion does not adversely affect the roofing system's resistance to fire and wind. C. Fastener pull-out test report. D. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins. E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes, such as asbestos-containing materials, by a landfill facility licensed to accept them. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer, including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing, including installers of roof deck, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. b. Rooftop worker and school occupant safety measures. c. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that are to remain. d. Existing roof drainage during each stage of reroofing. e. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. f. Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. g. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing. h. HVAC shutdown and sealing of vents. i. Shutdown of any fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. j. Discovery of asbestos-containing materials and notification procedures. k. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. l. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 3 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Roofing System: Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations. 1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust and water-leakage covers over finishes to remain, shut down HVAC and fire- alarm or -detection equipment if needed, from below work area. C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations. D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent homes and property. E. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building. 1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately notify Architect of any blockages or restrictions. B. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed. C. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork. D. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain. E. Maintain roof drains (gutters and leaders) in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 4 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast. 1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding or excessive erosion of soil, below. 3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day. B. Remove existing roofing and other roofing system components down to the structural deck or concrete fill. 1. Remove existing fasteners from deck. 2. At the end of each work day, make roof water tight, so finishes and framing below are unaffected by roof demolition and construction. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all water damage during construction. 3.3 DECK PREPARATION A. Roof deck shall be removed in its entirety. B. If broken or loose fasteners that secured deck panels to structure are observed, remove any and all fasteners that will affect new construction or create dangerous work conditions for workers. C. Provide additional deck securement as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL A. Remove all existing flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet materials, dirt, and debris. 3.5 DISPOSAL A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted. B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-1 SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide bituminous dampproofing on new concrete foundation walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cold-Applied Cut-Back Asphalt Dampproofing at Foundation Walls at full basements, only: 1. Materials and Application: Trowel grade, ASTM D 4586, Type I. 2. Materials and Application: Semimastic grade, ASTM D 4479, Type I. 3. Materials and Application: Spray grade, ASTM D 4479, Type I. 4. Protection Course: Compatible with dampproofing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Begin work only after substrate construction and penetrating work is complete. B. Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means acceptance of substrate. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations including restrictions on existing and forecasted weather conditions. Trowel dampproofing at least 60 mils thick over surfaces to be dampproofed. Install cant strips, asphalt felt reinforcing strips and other accessories as recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. D. Clean and prepare substrate; prime if recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. Protect adjacent work and surfaces from spillage, migration, and damage. E. Provide protection board on all foundation walls and other surfaces subject to backfilling. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13-2 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide building insulation as noted on plans and within this specification section. B. See Section 07 27 01, Interior Air/Vapor Control Membrane for interior membrane to act as containment for wall-installed cellulose. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Submit for approval test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Board Insulation: 1. Vapor Retarder: Integral vapor retarder as required for application. 2. Application: Foundation walls. 3. Application: Under slabs-on-grade. 4. Type: Extruded polystyrene, rigid, ASTM C 578. B. Foundation and Under Slab Insulation: Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation, ASTM C578 Type VI, ASTM C518 R-5 per inch, minimum 40 psi, as provided by the following manufacturers: 1. DiversiFoam Products. 2. Dow Chemical Company. 3. Owens Corning. 4. Pactiv Building Products Division. C. Rigid Board Insulation at Walls and Foundation Walls: Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 518, ASTM D1621, minimum 30 psf, thickness as shown, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively as manufactured by the following Manufacturers: 1. DiversiFoam Products. 2. Dow Chemical Company. 3. Owens Corning. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-2 D. Spray-Applied Loose Fill and Dense-Pack Cellulose Insulation: 1. Application: Thermal insulation in attics. 2. Type: ASTM C 518, cellulose, R value 3.8 per inch. All-Borate fire retardant. 3. Application: Spray applied cellulose in walls. 4. Type: ASTM C-739 and ASTM C-1149 standards. All-Borate fire retardant. E. Spray-Applied Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation (for areas inaccessible with cellulose) (ocSF): 1. Application: Thermal insulation at exterior foundation walls, band joists and where rafters do not allow room for cellulose in attic. 2. Type: ASTM C 518, open cell, low-Density Polyurethane Foam, R value 3.8 per inch, minimum. In-place density of .5 lbs. per cubic foot. F. Spray-Applied Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation (for areas called out as closed cell spray foam on plans) (ccSF): 1. Application: Thermal insulation at exterior foundation walls, band joists, as noted on drawings. 2. Type: ASTM C 518, closed cell, high-Density Polyurethane Foam, R value 6 per inch, minimum. In-place density of 2 lbs. per cubic foot. G. Mineral Wool: 1. Application: Thermal insulation, applied over exterior wall sheathing in 2” thick boards with staggered joints. 4” total thickness. Total R-value to be R-16, min. and in other locations as noted on Drawings. Also within stud cavities in exterior walls and at exterior walls in basement, as shown on Drawings. H. Semi-rigid Mineral Wool or Rock Wool Insulation: Non-combustible complying with ASTM E2307. 1. Manufacturers: Roxul CavityRock, Johns Manville Building Insulations; Thermafiber, Inc.; or Thermal Design. 2. Application: Thermal insulation within stud cavities in exterior walls, as exterior continuous insulation board, over sheathing and at exterior walls in basement, as shown on Drawings. 3. Type: Unfaced mineral fiber or rock wool. 4. Standard: ASTM C 665, Type I (unfaced). 5. Mineral wool shall be UL Listed, non-combustible, passing ASTM E 136 and in compliance with ASTM C 612 and ASTM C 411. 6. Mineral wool shall have a flame spread of 5 (max) and smoke developed rating of 0 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 7. Mineral wool shall be tested to comply with an approved NFPA 285 assembly. 8. Mineral wool shall have a moisture resistance of 0.01% in accordance with ASTM C 1104, shall not support growth of fungi or mold, shall not sustain vermin and shall not be corrosive to steel or aluminum per ASTM C 665. 9. Minimum R-value at 75°F of 4.2 per inch. I. Accessories: 1. Adhesives and mechanical anchors and clips. 2. Spray foam crack sealers and tapes for vapor retarder. 3. Insect screening. 4. Aluminum flashing. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-3 5. Screws of size required to provide a minimum of 2” of embedment into studs or solid blocking after penetrating ½” plywood sheathing, 4” of mineral wool and ¾” of strapping. J. Auxiliary Insulating Materials: 1. Mechanical fasteners in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s written recommendations. 2. Insulation Clips: in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations. 3. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 4. Polyurethane Foam Sealant: Two-component low expansion polyurethane foam, E-84, class 1, containing no urea-formaldehyde, no CFC’s, for sealing gaps airtight between joints in insulation, around fenestration openings, louvers and where indicated on Contract Drawings. Foam shall be as manufactured by the following Manufacturers 5. Handi Foam by Fomo Products, Inc. 6. Touch and Foam Professional by Convenience Products 7. Great Stuff PRO or Froth Pack by Dow Chemical Company 8. Other product approved by air barrier membrane manufacturer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Performance standards and insulation levels: Provide the following levels of insulation: 1. Attic: 20” of loose fill cellulose insulation. R-72. 2. Exterior walls and band joists: Existing Construction: existing 2x5 studs (est.), filled with Mineral Wool (Rock Wool) with 4” mineral wool exterior board (R-16). Total R-36. New Construction: 2x6 studs, 24” o.c., filled with Mineral Wool batts (R-23) with interior air barrier/smart vapor retarder + 4” mineral wool on exterior (R-16) over plywood sheathing and air/water barrier. Total R-42. 3. Floor slabs: 4” Formula-R rigid foam board insulation, R-20. 4. Slab perimeters: 3” Formula-R rigid foam board insulation, R-15. 5. Band Joists: 6” high density, closed cell spray foam. Total R-39. 6. Acoustic Treatment in walls and floors at all units: 7.5” of acoustic fiberglass insulation. 7. Installation of cellulose: a. Cellulose insulation must be installed by a certified applicator in accordance with manufactures specifications. b. In flat attics: Loose-fill cellulose to provide the rated R-value and depth at manufacturers’ settled density. c. In enclosed framing: Dense pack cellulose to a minimum installed density of 3.5 lbs/cu ft using the tube insertion method. In existing building to remain, install cellulose from exterior after new wall sheathing is applied, or install from inside and fully patch plaster to completely mask holes and blend into adjacent wall. d. Dry application in open wall framing: Dense pack cellulose behind lnsulweb fabric or interior air / vapor control membrane. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-4 e. Install to a minimum installed density of 3.5 lbs/cu.ft. Insulated areas to be rolled flat by installer after insulation. B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. Provide full thickness in one layer over entire area, tightly fitting around penetrations. C. Pour loose insulation into cavities indicated; provide uniform coverage at correct density and thickness. D. Install Interior Air/Vapor Control Membrane over entire area of inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as indicated. Seal all seams and around perimeter and penetrations with tape to form a continuous vapor retarder free of holes. E. Protect installed insulation and Interior Air/Vapor Control Membrane. F. Provide blower door testing at completion of insulation and again at completion of exterior envelope. END OF SECTION INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER 07 27 01 1 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07 27 01 INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER, including surface preparation. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07200 – Thermal Protection. B. Section 07270 – Weather Resistive air tight membrane C. Section 07272 – Airtight tapes 1.3 REFERENCES A. ISO 9972:2006 / EN 13829 -– Determination of air permeability of buildings, Fan pressurization method B. ASTM E779 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization C. ASTM E84 - Standard test method for surface burning characteristics of of building materials. D. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test method for. Air Permeance of Building Materials E. AATCC 127 – Hydrostatic pressure test F. ISO 12572 - Hygrothermal performance of building materials and products G. EN 1849-2 - Flexible sheets for waterproofing - Determination of thickness and mass per unit area H. EN 12114 - Thermal performance of buildings - Air permeability of building components and building elements I. EN 1931: Determination of water vapor transmission properties 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. C. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples. 1. Membranes: minimum size 6”x8” 2. Tapes: minimum length 5” 3. Gaskets, adhesives, accessories: one each 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance target: Targeted airtightness level for this project is 1.0 air changes per hour (ACH50). Minimum acceptable air-tightness level is 1.2 ACH50 (1.5 Air Changes per Hour at 50 Pascals). B. Installer Qualifications: Comply with one of the following requirements: 1. The (sub-) contractor installing the interior airtight layer shall have as minimum experience with at least two buildings that was independently tested below 1.2 INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER 07 27 01 2 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ACH50. 2. The (sub-) contractor has completed the “Make it tight” training with 475 High Performance Building Supply. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of installation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Prior to installation of airtight layer, mock up airtight layer as follows to verify details and to demonstrate connections to adjoining construction elements, and other termination conditions. 2. Install mockup of airtight layer in location designated by Architect. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and application technique are approved by Architect. 4. Construct typical interior walls and ceiling to create one room that can be sealed and Blower Door tested, illustrating materials interface and connections (tape, adhesives, gaskets), incorporating specified options including but not limited to the following: a. junctions of walls, foundations, ceilings, floors and roof, b. corner conditions c. window and doorframe connections, and d. blow-in insulation seals/battens. D. Cooperate and coordinate with the owner's inspection and (blower door) testing agency. Do not cover (with sheetrock, blocking, mechanical equipment or other elements that would restrict access to the airtight membrane) any components of the mock up (installed airtight layer membrane or other airtight elements) until it has been inspected, blower door tested and approved. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Preconstruction Meeting: Convene a meeting with all subcontractors affected by the Work of this Section a minimum of one week prior to commencing work of this section. Agenda shall include materials, details of construction, compatibility of materials, sequencing of construction/installation of membranes, the airtightness goal and emphasize that the success during the blower door test is dependent on the collaboration of all subcontractors. B. Coordinate Work with other subcontractors (plumbers, electricians, carpenters, HVAC), operations and installation of finish materials to install correct-sized gaskets on pipes, ducts and cable when these elements pass through the interior airtight layer, and to avoid damage to installed materials. Before they commence work on site, provide each effected trade with sufficient gaskets. C. After meeting, post the following warning in a prominent location at all building entrances and top of each stair – 1/2” letter height minimum for header, 1/4” for all other text Translate into additional languages if required/as appropriate. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AIRTIGHT BUILDING No drilling, airtight construction: no cutting, airtight membranes Report all penetrations to supervisor INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER 07 27 01 3 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Store materials on pallets. in clean and dry areas, not exposed to direct sunlight and in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. Store adhesives and primers at temperatures at or above 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 degrees Celsius) to facilitate handling. C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage, puncturing or contamination. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) as per manufacturers recommendations. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Minimize exposure of airtight membranes to direct sunlight. Use blinds or covers over window openings to block direct sunlight to prevent UV damage to membranes, if membranes will not be covered by sheetrock within 2 weeks or use exterior grade products. C. Minimize exposure to water. If exposure is likely, expected or cannot be avoided, use exterior grade version of the same products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pro Clima/Moll bauökologische Produkte GmbH, 68723 Schwetzingen Germany. Imported by 475 High Performance Building Supply, 334 Douglass street, Brooklyn NY, Tel: 718-622-1600; Email; info@foursevenfive.com; Web: www.foursevenfive.com www.foursevenfive.ca B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 AIRTIGHT LAYER SYSTEMS A. INTELLO Plus 1. Description: Intelligent vapor retarder (Hydrosafe) made from polyethylene copolymer membrane with polypropylene reinforcement grid. 2. Air barrier/smart vapor retarder is protected with PP cover fleeces on top and bottom 3. Class A rated material per ASTM E84 (Flame spread: 0, SDI:35) 4. Airtight material per ASTM E2178: 0.00005cfm/sf 5. Appearance: Translucent white 6. Weight 0.36 oz/sf ±15 g/m² (110g/m2) EN1849-2 7. Thickness: 16 mils (0.4 mm ±0.1 mm) EN1849-2 8. Perm rating: 13.20 to 0.13 (Sd value from 0.25m to >25m) ISO 12572 9. Temperature exposure limits: -40 to 176 degrees F (-40 to 80C) 10. Tensile Strength (EN13859-1) a. 350 N/50 mm MC b. 290 N/50 mm DC 11. Elongation (EN13859-1) a. 15% (MC) 15% (DC) 12. Nail Tear Resistance: 200N/200N (MC/DC) EN 13859-1 INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER 07 27 01 4 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 13. Permeability consistent after artificial age testing: Pass – DIN EN 1296/1931 14. Living Building Challenge Declare label – red list free B. Airtight interior tape: TESCON VANA: 1. Solid Acrylic tape with PP carrying fleece 2. Perm rate: 8 (sd-value 0.4m) DIN EN1931 3. Adhesion (ASTM D3330): 4.45Lbs/lin.inch INTELLO, 3.34lbs/lin/inch OSB 4. Artificial age test: 100 years (per DIN 4108-7) 5. Living Building Challenge Declare label – red list free 6. Free of VOCs C. Airtight interior corner tape: TESCON Profil or TESCON Profect, Solid Acrylic tape with PP carrying fleece and split release paper: Living Building Challenge Declare label – red list free, free of VOCs D. Airtight window tape: CONTEGA SOLIDO SL(-D): vapor retarding window tape with multiple release papers for specific or blind taped window airsealing. H. Airtight adhesive: CONTEGA HF (contains VOC’s/bio-ethanol) or CONTEGA Classic (VOC free), CONTEGA MULTIBOND (pre-cure adhesive on roll): non- embrittling adhesives for membrane connections to concrete, plywood floors and very rough/split wood. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. PRESSFIX tape pressurization tool. B. Primer: TESCON Primer RP (for concrete): 1. Acrylic-copolymer based primer 2. Application Temperature: Above 15 degrees Fahrenheit (-10 degrees Celsius) 3. VOC free C. Pipe, duct, cable sealing: ROFLEX and KAFLEX gaskets 1. EPDM gaskets per specific pipe sizes 2. Tape with TESCON VANA to airtight layer D. Outlet sealing (recessed): INSTAABOX / LESSCO boxes 1. Self-sealing airtight outlet box 2. Tape with TESCON VANA to airtight layer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates/surfaces have been properly prepared and cleaned from dust, silicones, oils and grease. Before installation, verify substrate is free of splinters, nails or other objects that could puncture membranes. B. If window or door opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. If there are unexpected pipes, ducts or wires in the installation area/airtight layer or these penetrations do not have ROFLEX/KAFLEX gaskets around them, notify architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. D. If floor, walls or ledger boards have been built that interfere with the airtight layer and a drawn/planned preinstalled airtight membrane was not installed as per sequencing plan, notify architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. E. If long term exposure to UV or liquid water is likely or can be expected – USE INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER 07 27 01 5 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. INTELLO X or SOLITEX membranes only. F. Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning of installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive air/vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines. B. All surfaces must be clean, smooth and dry and must be clean of oil, dust, and silicone. C. Batt installation: install membrane immediately after batt insulation is installed in winter. D. Properly ventilate space or use dehumidifier to prevent high humidity conditions after concrete pours, sheetrock compounding and tile work. Monitor humidity if needed to ensure it stays below 60% relative humidity. E. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply airtight layer/vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install membranes taut and without creases along the substrate. C. Overlap subsequent courses of membrane. Use the printed lines on the membrane as a guide. D. Battens for service cavities (if specified elsewhere) for dense packing should be spaced less than 20” o.c. and be perpendicular to the direction of the structure behind. Or other means should be employed to mechanically fix the membrane sufficiently to the substructure to long term support the weight/force exerted by the insulation. E. If battens are not specified, membrane shall be mechanically fastened to the studs with upholstery staples, installed parallel to the studs, at ¼” spacing. F. Tape all overlaps. Use a PRESSFIX tape pressurization tool to ensure there is sufficient back-pressure when applying the pressure sensitive Pro Clima tapes. Make sure that tape joints are not permanently under stress, ie are supported by a batten or by cross taping the taped joint with 12” long pieces of tape every 12” G. Overlap the membrane a minimum of 2” over dissimilar airtight materials (concrete, plaster). H. Use CONTEGA HF (for below 0 degree F application) or CONTEGA classic (VOC free) or MULTIBOND to adhere membranes to concrete, brick, plaster or rough OSB. Leave some slack in the membrane to allow for expansion and contraction between these dissimilar materials. Prime substrates with TESCON Primer RP if necessary. I. If taping to membrane to porous or unknown substrates, they should be free of oil, silicone and dust. Do an adhesion test when in doubt. Primer recommended for application to brick, concrete, wood fiber insulation board and certain OSB brands. J. Cut membrane with a utility knife in detail around penetrations. K. Seal membranes to windows, joist and beams with TESCON Profil or CONTEGA line of airtight window tapes. Follow application guides of specific tapes. L. Seal all penetrations with gaskets (ROFLEX or KAFLEX) taped with TESCON VANA airtight tape to airtight layer. Air seal around pre-existing penetrations (pipes, ducts or cables) with TESCON VANA tape in step like fashion, avoiding creases in tape. M. Apply blown in insulation directly after installing interior airtight membranes. N. Inspect membrane before blower door test and/or dense-packing insulation. Ensure: INTERIOR AIR AND VAPOR CONTROL LAYER 07 27 01 6 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 1. each overlap is taped and has been pressurized 2. staples applied at appropriate intervals 3. counter battens at recommended distances (if specified) 4. tears and punctures repaired with Pro Clima tape 5. adhesives (CONTEGA HF or classic) have had 48 hours to set up before test. O. All bays must be filled with cellulose and pressurized to a minimum of 3.5 psi, minimum. P. All bays are to be rolled flat, free of bulges that could affect installation of gypsum wall board. 3.4 TESTING A. Do a blower door test as soon as the airtight layer is completely installed. During the test search for any detectible leaks with hands, IR or smoke pencils. B. Document any leaks, and repair with Pro Clima tapes, adhesives and accessories. C. Repeat test until building complies with project airtightness (ACH50) goal, but at a minimum better than 1.2ACH50. D. Re-do blower door test if more than 3 holes/penetrations are made following completion of blower door test above, or at the request of the architect. E. Provide a minimum of two Blower door tests on a minimum of 20% of each unit type. One test shall be performed before insulation is complete and one after insulation and air barriers are installed. A final Blower Door Test shall be conducted by the Owner’s Energy Consultant when construction is substantially complete. Each unit shall achieve a maximum rating of 1.2 air change per hour @ 50 pascals. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Repair tears, punctures or burns (e.g. from sweating copper pipe) and/or replace damaged products before covering materials. Re-do blower door test if more than 3 holes are made or by request of architect. C. To protect interior airtight layer/membranes, apply service cavity insulation and sheetrock as soon as possible, and not later than specified exposure limit of used materials. Use tarps or other means of blocking UV if exposure times will be exceeded to protect membranes. 3.6 FINAL TEST A. Blower door test the installed membrane/interior airtight layer when: 1. All penetrations have been made and sealed. 2. Sheetrock and other finishes on exterior walls have been installed. B. Find and repair leaks. C. Repeat testing and repairs until the project complies with the project airtightness goal. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. METAL ROOF PANELS 07 30 03-1 SECTION 07 30 03 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENdfERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide manufactured roof panels at porch roof at each side porch on building. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. Include labor and materials to repair or replace defective materials. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Wind Uplift: UL 580 for Class 1-75 wind uplift resistance. C. Fire Resistance Rating: UL Fire Resistance Directory, 2 hour assembly rating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. METAL ROOF PANELS 07 30 03-2 a. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester- enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat. 4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS C. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. D. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UnaCLad UC-6 by Firestone Building Products Company or comparable product by one of the following or approved equal: a. Berridge Manufacturing, Inc. b. Englert, Inc. c. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. d. Modern Metal Systems, Inc. e. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. f. Smith Steelite. g. Ultra Seam Incorporated. h. VICWEST; Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products. 2. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 24 gauge nominal thickness. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. METAL ROOF PANELS 07 30 03-3 a. Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer, metallic finish. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Batten: Same material, finish, and color as roof panels. 4. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: 0.064-inch- nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 5. Panel Coverage: 18 inches. 6. Panel Height: 2.0 inches. 1.2 METAL ROOF PANEL ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin- foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.032 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION C. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. D. Restore damaged components and finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 1 SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Asphalt shingles. A. Underlayment. B. Related Sections: Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing. A. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for roof sheathing. B. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vent and exposed valley lining indicated. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected: Asphalt Shingle: Full size. A. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. B. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- long Sample. C. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches square. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 2 D. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle required, from the ICC. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft of each type and color, in unbroken bundles. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vents felt underlayment and self-adhering sheet underlayment from single source from single manufacturer. C. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 3 Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturing defects. a. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a reasonable time. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first five years nonprorated. B. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds up to 60 mph for five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Algae-Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Roofing Installer's Warranty, or warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering the Work of this Section, in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt shingle roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Multitab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Owens Corning Oak Ridge Shingles or comparable product by one of the following: Atlas Roofing Corporation. a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. GAF Materials Corporation. c. IKO. d. Malarkey Roofing Products. e. PABCO Roofing Products. f. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. Tab Arrangement: Three tabs, regularly spaced . B. Cutout Shape: Square. C. Butt Edge: Straight cut. D. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. E. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. F. Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. a. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. b. Henry Company. c. Johns Manville. d. Owens Corning. e. Polyguard Products, Inc. f. Protecto Wrap Company. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 5 2.3 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide following: Cor-A-Vent, Inc. a. GAF Materials Corporation. b. Lomanco, Inc. c. Mid-America Building Products. d. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated. e. Owens Corning. f. RGM Products, Inc. g. Trimline Building Products. Minimum Net Free Area: 18 square inches per linear foot. B. Width: 12". C. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter. 2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Sheet Metal: Aluminum, baked enamel finished. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 4 inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 6 vertical surface. A. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 5 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. B. Open-Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 1-inch- high, inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of 12 inches. C. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof-deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge. D. Kick-Out Flashings: Fabricate with a 45 degree kick-out at the bottom of all roof slopes along adjacent vertical walls or surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. A. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 4 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 6 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet underlayment. A. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch o.c. C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 7 Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches (minimum) and a minimum of 24” beyond interior face of exterior wall. A. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches (minimum) and beyond interior face of exterior wall. B. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. C. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. D. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. E. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches, and return vertically against sidewall not less than 36 inches. F. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. G. Low Slope Roofs: Where roof slopes are shallower than 4:12, provide two layers of self-adhering sheet underlayment, and as recommended by the asphalt shingle manufacturer. D. Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of 36-inch- wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches. Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with felt underlayment roofing nails. Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches. 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Open-Valley Flashings: Install centered in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof deck beneath overlap. Secure hemmed flange edges into metal cleats spaced 12 inches apart and fastened to roof deck. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 8 A. Adhere 9-inch- wide strip of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to self-adhering sheet underlayment. E. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. F. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing. 3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes. A. Install starter strip along rake edge. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses. E. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of sixroofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. A. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. F. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. A. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open-valley flashings. G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 9 H. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. 3.5 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. A. Address: <Insert address>. B. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. C. Address: <Insert address>. D. Area of Work: <Insert information>. E. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. F. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. G. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: Lightning; a. Peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert wind speed> mph; b. Fire; c. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; d. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; e. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and f. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 10 expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. B. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. C. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. D. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. E. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. F. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. A. Name: <Insert name>. B. Title: <Insert title>. END OF SECTION 073113 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-1 SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER CEMENT SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide fiber cement siding: 1. In all areas as indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fiber Cement Lap Siding: 1. Manufacturers: Hardipanel by James Hardie Building Products 2. Type: Portland cement, sand, and cellulose fiber composite panels. 3. Size: 5/16 inch thick, 5 ¼” wide by full-length boards for 4” exposure. 4. Surface: smooth finish 5. Finish: Pre-painted. Color to be chosen by architect from full range of colors available. 6. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 50 year for material, 15 year for paint finish. B. Fiber Cement Panel Siding: 1. Manufacturers: Hardipanel by James Hardie Building Products 2. Type: Portland cement, sand, and cellulose fiber composite panels. 3. Size: 5/16 inch thick, 4 foot wide by 8, 9 or 10 foot sheets 4. Surface: smooth finish 5. Finish: Pre-painted. Color to be chosen by architect from full range of colors available. 6. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 50 year for material, 15 year for paint finish. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Allow for expansion and contraction. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. New construction: Exposed joints. Fasten through siding onto vertical wood battens, spaced 16 inch on center over plywood sheathing. C. Restore damaged components. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 1 SECTION 07 54 19 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All criteria established within Specification 07 00 02 shall apply to this section unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Install new wood blocking at designated roof penetrations and roof perimeters, as required to properly terminate the new roofing and flashing systems. 2. Install new fully adhered thermoplastic roof membrane, coverboard, insulation systems, vapor retarder, baseboard, and associated components and sequence work such that the roofing installation is a complete and air-tight roof assembly. 3. Install new flashing membrane as shown on the Contract Drawings, and as required to properly terminate the roof system. 4. Install new sheet metal flashings. 5. Install new. 6. Install tapered insulation crickets to shed water toward the drainage system. 7. Connect new mechanical equipment as required to provide 8-inch minimum flashing height. 8. Coordinate installation of new roof access hatch. 9. Coordinate the installation of new combination roof drains/overflow drains. 10. Install new walkway pads at locations designated on the Contract Drawings and Solar Array Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 62 00 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. A sample roofing system warranty. B. A letter from the roofing manufacturer that the insulation system has been approved for this project. C. A letter from the roofing manufacturer identifying the attachment rates and adhesive rates that are required to place the approved insulation system, and multi-ply roof membrane. Specific attention related to the field, perimeters and corners shall be provided in the letter 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 2 to identify the securement pattern, and distance from the roof edge to meet their specific uplift requirements. D. A letter from the roofing manufacturer outlining how the roof inspections will be performed in accordance with the specifications. Inspector resumes will be required at the submittal phase to confirm compliance with the specifications. Refer to the warranty section of this document for additional information. E. Shop Drawings: For roofing system, include plans, elevations, sections, details in compliance with performance requirements, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 4. Insulation fastening patterns. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. G. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. H. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system manufacturer. B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with the Project Manager, Designer, User Agency's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect the roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 3 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with the manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location, and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Coordinate the work in this Section with the work by other trades to ensure the orderly progress of the work. C. All surfaces to receive new vapor retarder, insulation, membrane or flashings shall be thoroughly dry. Should surface moisture such as dew exist, the Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment to dry the surface prior to application. No open flames shall be permitted on the roof at any time. D. Equipment required to hoist materials to the roof and to remove debris from the roof shall be supplied, maintained, and operated by the Contractor. E. Remove rubbish and debris from the project site daily; do not allow accumulations inside or outside of the buildings. F. The Contractor shall remove only as much roofing, flashing and associated components, and other exterior waterproofing components as can be completely replaced in a given day’s work, including all flashings and associated components as required to maintain the roof in a watertight, secure condition throughout the duration of the project. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 4 G. Materials which have a temperature other than the application temperatures of the manufacturer shall not be applied. H. During removal operations, the Contractor is responsible for the containment of all dust, dirt, debris, overspray and run-off resulting from the work. The Contractor shall collect and contain all materials and repair any resulting damage to adjacent surfaces, site fixtures or personal property. Specific attention is drawn to the use of chemicals and cleaners. I. The Contractor shall provide protection of entrance ways, sitework, plantings, landscaping, building surfaces and similar items to protect from damage. Items damaged as a result of the work in this section shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor to the satisfaction of and at no additional cost to the Owner. J. The Contractor is cautioned that oil and penta based materials and preservatives are not compatible with thermoplastic membranes. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Roofing Contractor’s Warranty: The roofing contractor shall supply the Owner with a minimum two (2) year workmanship warranty for the roof, starting at the date of Substantial Completion. In the event any work related to the roofing, flashing, or metalwork is found to be defective within two (2) years of substantial completion, the roofing contractor shall remove and replace such at no additional cost to the Owner. The roofing contractor’s warranty obligation shall run directly to the owner, and a copy the roofing signed warranty shall be sent to the roofing system’s manufacturer. 1. The duration of the Roofing Contractor’s two (2) year warranty shall run concurrent with the roofing system’s manufacturer’s twenty (20) year warranty. B. Roofing Systems Manufacturer’s Warranty: The roofing manufacturer shall guarantee the roof to be in a watertight condition, for a period of twenty (20) years, starting at the date of Substantial Completion. The warranty shall be a twenty (20) year, no dollar limit (NDL), non-prorated total system labor and material warranty, for wind speeds up to 75 miles per hour. Total system warranty shall include all roofing materials, related components and accessories including, but not limited to the vapor retarder, insulation board, coverboard, roofing membrane, membrane flashings, fasteners, adhesives, metal roof copings, metal roof edges and termination metals and roof drain assemblies. The manufacturer shall repair defects in materials and workmanship as promptly after observation as weather and site conditions permit. C. Roofing Systems Manufacturer’s Roof Inspections: The Owner has requested that the roofing system’s manufacturer provide a minimum of one (1) site visit per week while roofing work is ongoing, or as required to monitor the roof and flashing installations, during the construction duration to monitor the project operations, and provide comment on the activities that are taking place. The roof system’s manufacturer will be required to provide written reports for each field day noting the work conditions and acceptance of the work that was performed. This coverage shall include, but not be limited to, all material installations that will be covered under the manufacturer’s warranty requirements, including the perimeter edge metals. The inspector will be subject to approval, and may be one of the following: 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 5 1. A technical representative who is employed full time by the manufacturer 2. A Registered Roof Observer (RRO) as certified by RCI, Inc. 3. An employee under direct supervision of a Registered Roof Consultant (RRC) as certified by RCI, Inc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SALVAGED MATERIALS AND ITEMS A. All building materials, equipment, and debris of whatever nature from the portions of the existing structure removed under this project and not designated to be reused or reinstalled shall become the property of the Contractor and legally disposed of off-site. 2.2 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING AND FLASHING MEMBRANES A. Roofing membrane for installation of a fully adhered roof assembly over new insulation areas shall be a Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) based Thermoplastic product such as: 1. The 72-mil Sika Sarnafil 2. The 72-mil minimum thick Duro-Last membrane as manufactured by Duro-Last 3. Elvaloy based Thermoplastic product such as the Seaman Corporation’s Fibertite 45-SM (45 mils) sheet membrane meeting ASTM D6754. B. Submission of substitute membranes that meet the requirements will be reviewed and approved for this project provided they meet the minimum testing values described in this section. Documentation of equivalence shall be provided with any such membrane submissions. 1. Exposed Face Color: selected by architect (high albedo) C. The polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall have the following physical properties: Minimum Thickness ASTM D638 0.072 Color N/A White/gray Tensile Strength ASTM D638 1500 psi Elongation at Break (machine x transverse) ASTM D638 250% x 220% Seam Strength ASTM D638 75% of tensile strength Tearing Resistance ASTM D1004 10 lbf Dynamic Puncture Resistance D5635 D5602 7.3 ft-lb 33 Bf D. The Elvaloy shall have the following physical properties: Minimum Thickness ASTM D751 0.045 Color N/A White/gray Tensile Strength ASTM D882 8500 psi 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 6 Breaking Strength ASTM D751- Grab 375x350lbs Seam Strength ASTM D751 100% of fabric strength Tear Strength ASTM D751 100 lbs Dynamic Puncture Resistance D5635 20 oules E. Flashing membrane for installation of fully adhered flashings shall be a minimum 0.072” thick thermoplastic or as manufactured by the roofing membrane manufacturer for their specific warranty requirements. Color to match the field of roof membrane. The manufacturer’s fleece backed membrane will be considered for this project as a separation layer if needed but is not required unless specified by the manufacturer. F. All materials and accessories used to install the roofing and flashing membrane systems shall be as manufactured or supplied by the membrane manufacturer. These materials include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Bonding adhesive (as recommended by the roofing manufacturer) 2. Prefabricated heat-weldable flashing components, including but not limited to, pipe flashing and caps, inside and outside corner flashing, curb flashings. 3. Membrane termination strips, peel stops, bars, fasteners and plates. 4. Fluid-Applied, reinforced coatings for flashing conditions. Shall be compatible with roof membrane and associated components. G. All membrane manufacturer's required details shall be considered a part of this project and incorporated into the project. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDER A. Self-Adhering Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 1970, minimum 40-mil- thick film laminated to a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive, or as required by the manufacturer for their specific warranty; maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm; cold-applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. B. Provide primer when recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. C. Vapor retarder shall be a minimum 6-mil polyethylene sheeting, or as required by the manufacturer to meet the wind warranty. 1. Butyl tape as required by the manufacturer to seal between laps and to the perimeter wood blocking. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Flat stock and tapered polyisocyanurate insulation shall be skinned with factory-applied fiberglass bituminous felt as manufactured by Celotex, Johns Manville, or as supplied by 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 7 the membrane manufacturer as required to meet membrane manufacturer’s requirements. 1. The polyisocyanurate insulation shall have an area weighted aged R-Value of 30 to meet the Long Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) value in accordance with ASTM C518 and the Massachusetts State Building Code. Minimum insulation thickness at outer perimeter of drain sump shall be 6-inches. 2. Tapered insulation shall be required to provide a minimum 1/2" per foot at crickets, saddles, drain sumps (4’x4’), and around mechanical equipment. All other tapered insulation shall be sloped a minimum of 1/4” per foot toward to drains. 3. The polyisocyanurate insulation board shall conform to ASTM Specification C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi minimum). 4. Flat stock insulation shall have a maximum board size of 4’ x 8’, or as required by the manufacturer if the membrane manufacturer calls for lesser size boards. 5. Tapered insulation shall have a maximum board size of 4’ x 4’, or as required by the manufacturer if the membrane manufacturer calls for lesser size boards. 6. Insulation fillers shall be of the thickness required to match surrounding insulation when step tapering tapered edge strips. 7. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be approved in writing by the insulation and membrane manufacturer that the methods of attachment are covered under the membrane manufacturer’s labor and material warranty. Copies of the written acceptance shall be forwarded to the Engineer. C. Wood fiberboard insulation for use as tapered edge strips: 1. Fiberboard shall be high-density, non-asphalt impregnated and conform to ASTM C208-72 Specifications. 2. Tapered edge strips shall be 18” wide and 1-5/8” thick, tapering to a feathered edge. 3. Fiberboard insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer. A copy of the written acceptance shall be forwarded to the Engineer. 2.5 COVERBOARD A. Unless designated otherwise by the manufacturer, coverboard insulation shall be High Density polyisocyanurate coverboard. Coverboard shall be ½” minimum thick, glass mat faced high density polyisocyanurate insulation board as required by the roofing manufacturer. The boards shall be a maximum of 4’ x 4’ in size and approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer. Coverboard insulation shall conform to ASTM C1289 Type II specifications. Compressive strength shall be greater than 90 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM D 1621. Dimensional stability shall be less than 0.5% in accordance with ASTM D 2126. Water Absorption shall be 3.0% or less in accordance with ASTM C 209. Should the manufacturer require another form of coverboard, specific 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 8 to their warranty requirements, such as a moisture resistant gypsum product, it shall be submitted as part of their assembly letter, and at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.6 COLD ADHESIVE FOR COVERBOARD BOARD SECUREMENT A. Adhesive to adhere the insulation boards and coverboard systems shall be a two component, cold-process, asbestos free, low-rise polyurethane foam adhesive conforming to ASTM D276, D2556, D1875, D429, D816, D1876, D412 or as required by the membrane manufacturer. Adhesive shall meet the projects uplift rating and shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer and included as part of the warranty coverage. Adhesive shall be I.S.O. stick as manufactured by Firestone, Insta-Stik Professional Roofing Adhesive as manufactured by Insta-Foam Products, Inc., or Olybond by Olympic. 2.7 FASTENERS A. In general, fasteners, straps and other hardware shall be stainless steel, galvanized steel or fluorocarbon coated steel. Galvanizing shall be hot dip in accordance with ASTM A153 specifications. Electro-galvanized items shall not be used. B. All accessories, including, but not limited to nails, screws, clips, fastening strips, etc. shall be completely compatible with the material being fastened to prevent galvanic reaction and premature deterioration. C. Nails for membrane termination shall be stainless steel, large head annular ring roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate the wood blocking 1-1/4" minimum. D. Nails for flashing securement at metal deck and wood substrates shall be No. 12 Stubbs gauge, large head, threaded shank, hot dip galvanized nails, of sufficient length for 1- 1/4” embedment. E. Unless designated otherwise by the manufacturer, fasteners for securement of new roof insulation shall be #15, self-drilling, self-tapping screws of sufficient length to penetrate the metal roof decking by 1 inch., with a fluorocarbon coating in conformance with FM 4470 specifications, installed through minimum 3-inches diameter (nominal), 26-gauge galvalume coated steel stress plates, as recommended by the insulation and membrane manufacturers or an accepted substitute. F. Fasteners for terminating roof membrane at concrete or masonry substrates shall be minimum 1-1/2" long by 1/4” diameter removable stainless-steel drive pins in zinc sheaths as manufactured by Star, Rawl or equal. Embedment into substrate shall be 1- 1/4” minimum. G. Fasteners for securing membrane sheeting shall be as approved by the manufacturer for the substrate and depth and shall meet the project’s requirements/wind uplift rating. 2.8 POURABLE SEALER POCKET COMPONENTS A. Inorganic filler for pourable sealer pockets shall be a pre-mixed spray applied polyurethane foam such as Froth-Pak by Insta-Foam Products, Inc., as required by the 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 9 membrane manufacturer for their appropriate warranty requirements, or an approved equal. B. Pourable sealer for boxes shall be two-part, fluid applied polyurethane based material of 100% solids as manufactured by the membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A. Do not deliver to site or install any material or system that has not been approved. Materials installed without approval may be required to be removed. B. The prepared roof deck surface must be dry, clean and smooth. Provide dryers, if necessary, to dry deck surfaces prior to installing new work. Open flame devices shall not be used. C. Maintain temporary protection of the new and existing roof system to prevent contamination from staining or damaging the new roof system. Personnel shall be free of bitumen contaminants when installing the new roof to prevent staining of the roof membrane. The roof system will be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer prior to final payment. All areas of stained membrane will be cut out and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions and these Specifications for all renovations and associated work. E. Flashings shall be installed along with the membrane to assure weathertight termination. F. Partial or unmarked cans or rolls of materials cannot be used. G. Handle materials to prevent damage to building components and project site areas. H. Do not cut any material with a solvent or diluting agent unless approved by the Engineer in writing prior to use. I. Keep covers tightly sealed on all canned and evaporative products to prevent premature curing. J. Do not store rolls of membrane or flashings on the roof without the written consent of the Engineer and Owner’s representative. K. The Contractor is cautioned to investigate all existing conditions and materials of construction. 3.2 DECK PREPARATION A. Ensure that unsuitable or deteriorated roof deck components have been repaired. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 10 B. Allow moist deck sections to dry prior to application of roof system. Open flames are strictly prohibited from the roof areas. C. Ensure that deck surface and joints are clean of all debris and roofing materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BASEBOARD AND INSULATION SYSTEM A. The baseboard and multi-layered isocyanurate insulation system shall be installed on properly prepared clean, dry surfaces. B. Allow moisture on roof surfaces to dry prior to application of roof insulation. Open flames are strictly prohibited from the roof areas. Ensure that roof surfaces are clean of all debris. C. Insulation boards shall be free of defects including but not limited to, broken corners, improperly adhered facers, excessive moisture, dimensional irregularities and the like. Defective insulation boards shall be marked and immediately removed from the site. D. The minimum dimension on cut baseboard and insulation boards shall be 12” with a minimum surface area of 2 square feet. Only full-sized insulation boards shall be used at roof perimeters and corners. E. All baseboard and insulation boards shall be installed tightly butted to adjacent insulation, roof to walls or wood blocking. If gaps greater than 1/8” exist between boards the board shall be cut out and replaced. F. It is the intent of these specifications that the roof system is to be installed in compliance with Factory Mutual FM 1-105 uplift rating, note that the owner does not insure with FM Global and will not undergo FM Global inspections or testing. Specific manufacturer’s requirements to be followed. Mechanically fasten baseboard insulation, and crickets atop the properly prepared designated roof decks using the specified and recommended fasteners through distribution plates. Fasteners shall be installed at a rate of one fastener per two square feet of area, or as required by the membrane manufacturer to meet the required warranty for 140 MPH wind speeds at 300-feet elevation, and as described in FM Data Sheet I-28 for insulation fastening pattern. Refer to the submittal paragraph of this section related to the required installation patters required for this project. Be sure all heads and discs lie flat to the insulation. Fastener patterns shall typically increase at corner and perimeter locations per the manufacturer’s requirements; confirmation of fastening patterns must be submitted to the engineer prior to the installation of the roof coverboard system. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COVERBOARD SYSTEM A. The coverboard system shall be installed on properly prepared clean, dry surfaces. B. Allow moisture on roof insulation to dry prior to application of coverboard. Open flames are strictly prohibited from the roof areas. Ensure that roof surfaces are clean of all debris. C. Coverboard shall be free of defects including but not limited to, broken corners, excessive moisture, dimensional irregularities and the like. Defective coverboard shall be marked and immediately removed from the site. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 11 D. The minimum dimension on cut coverboards shall be 12” with a minimum surface area of 2 square feet. Only full sized coverboards shall be used at roof perimeters and corners. E. All coverboards shall be installed tightly butted to adjacent insulation or wood blocking. If gaps greater than 1/8” exist between boards the board shall be cut out and replaced. F. Apply polyurethane adhesive for coverboard attachment to the insulation as recommended by the adhesive and roof membrane manufacturer, to achieve the required 75 MPH wind uplift resistance warrantee. Install the cover board system and immediately “walk” the layer into place to spread the adhesive for maximum contact. Stagger all end joints to the middle of the long dimension of adjacent boards and stagger coverboard over insulation layer to reduce thermal bridging. Continue to “walk” on the coverboards every 5 to 7 minutes until the insulation is firmly attached. Ballast the coverboards to prevent cupping. Redistribute ballast to ensure full bonding of the system. Note, all corners of coverboards must be adhered in place and provide no more than 1/8” displacement when walked on after curing. G. Remove a section of newly installed coverboard to confirm adhesion to the roof insulation. The Contractor shall have the manufacturer’s representative on site for a minimum of two days after the start of construction to confirm application rates and compatibility of the products. 3.5 ADHERED MEMBRANE INSTALLATION NOTE: It is the intent of this Specification Section to provide the Owner with a new, fully adhered membrane, 100% bonded to the insulation, of sufficient bond strength to resist normally anticipated forces of a 140 MPH wind speed, which is intended to meet the attachment methods of the specified FM rating approval, including wind uplift pressures as defined in FM Data Sheet 1-28, current edition and to which meets requirements of a UL Class A roof system. Confer with the membrane manufacturer for cold weather installation and alternates as required to install the membrane. A. Refer to Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry, concerning the installation of the wood blocking, nailers and similar accessory woodwork. Be sure all loose or deteriorated substances are removed prior to installation. B. Inspect surface of insulation prior to installation of roof membrane. Insulation surface shall be clean and smooth with no excessive surface roughness. Contaminated surfaces or unsound surfaces such as broken or delaminated boards or insulation voids shall be removed and disposed of. Cover boards shall be swept and blown clean of all dust prior to applying bonding adhesives. C. Fully adhere thermoplastic roof membrane system in accordance with the recommendations and requirements of the membrane materials manufacturer, as amended in these Specifications. Follow manufacturer requirements concerning application rates for cleaners, solvents, adhesives and similar materials. The application rates for these items given in these Specifications are to be considered nominal and the actual rates will vary manufacturer to manufacturer. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 12 D. Do not apply any bonding adhesive to lap areas that are to be welded to flashings or adjacent sheets. Apply all sheets in the same manner, lapping all sheets as required by welding techniques. E. Apply bonding adhesive to the insulation and membrane at the manufacturer's recommended application rates. Bonding adhesive shall be applied in strict accordance with the environmental limitations required by the manufacturer. F. Press the bonded sheet firmly in place with a large foam-covered lawn roller. Fold back the remaining unbonded half of the sheet and repeat the bonding procedure. G. Comply with Owner testing and verification of welded seams, repair any seam damage incurred during testing. 3.6 HOT AIR WELDING OF MEMBRANE OVERLAPS A. All seams to be hot air welded. Seam overlaps to be a minimum two (2) inches wide, or as required by the membrane manufacturer. Welding equipment shall be provided or approved by the membrane manufacturer. All workers intending to use the equipment shall have completed a training course by the manufacturer’s representative prior to initiating roof replacement operations. Certification of trained welders is required. Manufacturer to supply confirmation of welder training. Comply with owner testing and verification of welded seams, repair any seam damage incurred during testing. B. All field seams exceeding ten (10) feet in length shall be welded utilizing an automatic welder. All seams to be clean and dry. Remove foreign materials from seams (dirt, oils, etc.) with MEK, Acetone, or authorized alternative. Use clean white cotton cloth and allow five minutes for solvents to dissipate prior to initiating welding. C. All seams to be welded in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. The job foreman or supervisor shall inspect all completed seams on a daily basis. Inspection shall include, but not limited to, the probing of all field welded seams with a blunted pointed instrument to assure quality of the application and ensure that any operator or equipment deficiencies are immediately resolved. One (1) inch wide cross section samples of welded seams shall be taken at least four times daily. Correct welds display failure from shearing of membrane prior to weld separation. Each patch shall be patched by the Contractor at no extra charge to Owner. Each weld will be forwarded to the Owner’s representative with approximate roof location and date labeled on each. D. Hand welded seams shall be completed in two stages. Warm up equipment for at least one minute prior to welding. 1. Weld the back edge of the lap with a thin, continuous weld to prevent loss of the hot air during the final weld. 2. Insert the hot air nozzle into the lap, keeping the welding equipment at a 45 degree angle to the side lap. Once the material starts to flow, apply the hand roller at a right angle to the welding gun and press lightly. For straight laps, use the 1-1/2" wide nozzle. Correct weld speed will complete approximately 20"/minute. The hot air weld equipment shall have temperature adjustments to provide this proper speed and weld. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 13 E. The manufacturer’s automatic lap welding machine will be used for seams in excess of ten feet. Follow the manufacturer's strict requirements, instructions and local codes for electric supply, grounding and overcurrent protection. The automatic weld machines power requirement is 218 to 230 volts at 30 amps. The availability of this voltage shall be verified at the work site on the roof before using the automatic welding machine. The use of portable generators is required at no additional cost to the Owner. Prior to utilizing the automatic weld machine on the roof, detailed instructions and operating procedure shall be obtained from the manufacturer’s technical representatives. F. Secure the membrane at all perimeters, and penetrations once all welding of adjacent sheet seams is completed. Extend membrane over and beyond all wood blocking as detailed. The membrane at all perimeter and flashings locations shall be anchored at 6" on center maximum with the specified fasteners through continuous bars or specified fasteners should the installation of edge sheet metal not be installed on the same working day. 3.7 WATERSTOPS A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to achieve a watertight condition as the work progresses. When a situation arises where a break in the day's work occurs in the central area of a roof, a temporary waterstop shall be constructed to provide a 100% watertight seal utilizing a raised temporary waterstop. Sweep back and totally clean the existing roof and set a 2" x 4" stud atop the prepared area in roof cement as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Where stopping work on the new system, maintain the stagger of the insulation joints by installing partial fillers. B. Carry the new membrane up and over 2" x 4" waterstop. Seal the edge of the membrane in a continuous heavy application of roof cement. Weight the membrane down in the sealant with a 2" x 10" wood member with ballast on top. Ballast should be approximately 20 lb./l.f. When restarting work, remove all sealant, membrane, insulation fillers, etc. from the work area. Do not reuse any of the material in the new work. Cut off contaminated PVC membrane and dispose of immediately. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Contractor shall provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a water tight condition. 3.8 MEMBRANE FLASHING All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a watertight condition as the job progresses. No temporary membrane flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner. Approval, if given, will only be for specific locations on specific dates. A. Ensure that all air intakes and air handling units have been shut off or temporary protected to prevent adhesive fumes from infiltrating the building. B. Ensure that all substrates are free from contaminates prior to the installation of the new flashing membranes. Install the manufacturer’s buffer or protection sheets as required. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 14 C. Follow the membrane manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations and these specifications. Do not proceed with work until all shop drawings and submittals are reviewed. D. Flashing shall be fully adhered to compatible, smooth, dry and solvent resistant surfaces. Reinforced/flashing sheets shall be used for flashing purposes as much as practical. Prefabricated components are to be used where practical at vent pipes, inside/outside corners, seams in sheet metal flashings or at any other location where forming of membrane flashings is required. E. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be hot air welded. All flashing shall use longest possible lengths of flashing membrane. Over cap vertical seams and field membrane as required by manufacturer for hot air welding. F. Install membrane securement disks and fasteners into structural deck(s) or vertical walls at the base of penetrations. Securement disks and fasteners may be required by the membrane manufacturer at the base of tapered edge strips, ridges or other transitions. Contractor to comply with manufacturer’s requirements if more stringent than these specifications. G. Apply bonding adhesive to surface of wood, metal, or other material or surface to be flashed and allow adhesive to dry to the touch. Do not allow adhesive to cure for more than one (1) hour prior to applying flashing membrane. Position flashing sheet and apply bonding adhesive to flashing membrane making sure bonding adhesive is not applied to overlap area of flashing and using longest possible lengths of flashing membrane. Apply bonding adhesive using rollers or brushes 100% to all surfaces at a smooth, uniform rate, free of holidays, light spots, globs or similar irregularities, all at the manufacturer’s application rate. Allow membrane flashing surface of adhesive to dry to a tacky condition, such that adhesive strings occur when touched with a dry finger. After bonding adhesive becomes tacky on membrane flashing surfaces, roll flashing onto surface carefully to prevent wrinkles, fishmouths, bridging or similar flaws. Unless otherwise detailed, top of membrane flashings must be minimum 8” above the surface of the roof membrane, 3” minimum above the bottom of metal counterflashing, and minimum 3” past the limits of nail heads or other fasteners. Membrane flashings shall extend the full width of horizontal metal flashing flanges (i.e., gravel stops). After setting, roll membrane into place using a padded roller and heavy hand pressure. Roll 100% of the surface to assure total adhesion with no wrinkles or bridging. After rolling, hot air weld vertical, side, and field membrane overlaps, laps of flashing sheet using minimum 4” wide overlaps. After hot air welding of the flashing sheet and overlaps, check all welds with blunted instrument and re-weld deficiencies. H. Inside and outside corners and other changes in direction of flashing sheets shall not be butt-type splices at the point of direction change. All flashing sheets shall be jointed past the change in direction. Prefabricated corners to be utilized where suitable. Outside vertical corners, such as around curb units, shall extend a minimum of 2” around the corner for each flashing sheet. Adhere flashing sheets in place with light pressure. All field fabricated interior/exterior corners and miters shall be cut an hot air welded in place. All flashings shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s instruction, unless amended. Flashings shall be turned up and over the tops of curbs as much as practical. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 15 I. Vent pipe flashings can utilize prefabricated or field fabricated components. Prior to installation of flashings, Contractor is to remove all bituminous contaminants or apply an approved separation layer to pipe as a barrier against membrane contamination. Vent pipe flashing to utilize membrane cap which turns into vent pipe. In lieu of membrane cap termination, provide a continuous bead of sealant between membrane and pipe and install a stainless steel hose clamp at top of flashing sheet. Install a buffer strip of membrane behind hose clamp to protect flashings. J. Membrane flashing terminating on a vertical surface shall be mechanically fastened to the substrate. 3.9 WALKWAY PROTECTION PADS A. Install manufacturer’s walkway pad as indicated on the Contract Drawings and the Solar (PV) array plans. B. Weld and/or adhere the walkway pad to the membrane roofing in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s printed instructions. Walkway pads shall be continuous except for gaps between sections to allow for drainage and inspection of seams, and to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.10 CLEAN-UP A. All floor and adjacent areas, both interior and exterior, damaged or stained by the installation of the roofing work shall be repaired and cleaned of all dust, debris and any other materials to the Owner’s satisfaction. B. The Contractor shall not demobilize the site until the completed work is toured by the Owner and Engineer. Any unsatisfactory items observed will be reported in “punch-list” form. These items shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor prior to demobilization from the job site. Final payment will not be made until all punch list items are complete and guarantees have been received. C. All scaffolding, barriers, temporary facilities and the like shall be removed upon completion of the work. Areas damaged as a result of the Contractors equipment shall be restored to their original condition, all to the satisfaction of the Owner. D. Refer to the Close-Out Procedures described in Division One for additional information. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING 07 54 19 - 16 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-1 SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide flashing and sheet metal. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Applications: 1. Metal counterflashing and base flashing. 2. Exterior wall flashing and expansion joints. 3. Built-in metal valleys. 4. Gutters and downspouts (only where shown on drawings). 5. Exposed metal trim and fascia units. 6. Elastic flashing. 7. Laminated composition flashing. 8. Sheet metal accessories. 9. Ridge vents. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: 1. Sheet Aluminum: Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, unless otherwise indicated. All fascia and trim metal to be brake formed. Color to be determined by Architect from full range of color options. 2. Extruded Aluminum: 6063-T52, clear anodized, 0.080 inches for primary legs of extrusion. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-2 C. Flexible Sheet Membrane Flashing: Non-reinforced flexible black elastic sheet, 50 to 65 mils thick, butyl synthetic rubber. D. Laminated Composition Sheet Flashing: 5 ounce copper sheet laminated between 2 layers of bituminous impregnated Kraft paper or saturated fabric. E. Fabricated Units: Compliance with SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual. F. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Bituminous isolation coating. 2. Mastic and elastomeric sealants. 3. Epoxy seam sealer. 4. Rosin-sized building paper slip sheet. 5. Polyethylene underlayment. 6. Gutter and conductor head guards. 7. Asphaltic roofing cement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Follow recommendations of SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual. Allow for expansion. Isolate dissimilar materials. B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. C. Install gutters and downspouts only in areas shown and as needed to avoid sheets of rain water directly above entrances and entrance walks. All other roof areas shall have gravel splash strips at ground level, adjacent to building walls, creating a pervious surface to allow for immediate recharge of the water table and to minimize splash back on the building walls. D. Restore damaged components and finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 ROOF HATCHES 077233 - 1 SECTION 077233 ROOF HATCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide factory-fabricated roof hatch for ladder access to flat roof from rear stairway. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including profiles, accessories, location, adjacent construction interface, and dimensions. C. Warranty: Submit executed copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing similar products. B. Installer: A minimum of 2 years experience installing similar products. C. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2008 Quality Standards including in-house engineering for product design activities. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original packaging. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area. Inspect product upon receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 ROOF HATCHES 077233 - 2 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty. Materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Type F-50TB Roof Hatch by The BILCO Company, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Web: www.bilco.com. 2.2 ROOF HATCH A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal roof hatch Type F-50TB, size width: 48" (1219mm) x length: 48" (1219mm). Length denotes hinge side. The roof hatch shall be single leaf. The roof hatch shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer. B. Performance characteristics: 1. Cover and curb shall be thermally broken to prevent heat transfer between interior and exterior surfaces. 2. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf (195kg/m2) with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or 20 psf (97kg/m2) wind uplift. 3. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. 4. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. 5. Entire hatch shall be weather tight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb. C. Cover: Shall be 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum with a 5” (127mm) beaded flange with formed reinforcing members. Interior and exterior surfaces shall be thermally broken to minimize heat transfer and to resist condensation. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb. D. Cover insulation: Shall be 3” (75mm) thick polyisocyanurate with an R-value = 20.3 (U=0.279 W/m2K), fully covered and protected by an 18 gauge (1mm) aluminum liner. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 ROOF HATCHES 077233 - 3 E. Curb: Shall be 12” (305mm) in height and of 11 gauge (2.3mm) aluminum. Interior and exterior surfaces shall be thermally broken to minimize heat transfer and to resist condensation. The curb shall be formed with a 5-1/2” (140mm) flange with 7/16” (11mm) holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, that features the Bil-Clip® flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6” (153mm) on center, to be bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place. F. Curb insulation: Shall be 3” (75mm) thick polyisocyanurate with an R-value = 20.3 (U=0.279 W/m2K). G. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe welded to the curb assembly. H. Hardware 1. Heavy stainless steel pintle hinges shall be provided 2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles 3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps. 4. The latch strike shall be a stamped component bolted to the curb assembly. 5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open arm equipped with a 1” (25mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing. 6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. [For installation in highly corrosive environments or when prolonged exposure to hot water or steam is anticipated, specify Type 316 stainless steel hardware]. 7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space. I. Finishes: Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 ROOF HATCHES 077233 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved. 2. Repair finishes damaged during installation. 3. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer which will not damage finish. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-1 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide firestopping at locations required by code. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Submit for approval test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fire Performance: ASTM E 119, ASTM E 814, and local regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide systems designed for use required, of one or more of the following types: 1. Intumescent latex sealant, putty and wrap strips. B. Fire-Resistive Elastomeric Joint Sealants: 1. Single-component, neutral-curing, silicone sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Review extent of work with authorities having jurisdiction and obtain approval of installation thicknesses and methods. B. Sequence work to avoid need for removal of firestopping by work of other trades. C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Securely anchor insulation with safing clips. Install firestops without gaps or voids. D. Protect, inspect and repair work until final acceptance. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00-1 SECTION 07 90 00 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide low VOC joint sealers at interior and exterior vertical and horizontal joints. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1. Include manufacturer’s full range of color and finish options if additional selection is required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Each joint type. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Compliance Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s certification that joint sealant products comply with the California Bay Area AQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Urethane Elastomeric Joint Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Pecora Corp., Sika Corp., Tremco or approved equal. 2. Type and Application: Multi-part nonsag urethane sealant, ASTM C 920: a. Application: For joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces. b. Exterior use. B. Silicone Elastomeric Joint Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Dow Corning, GE Silicones, Tremco, or approved equal. 2. Type and Application: One-part nonacid-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, modulus as required for application: a. Application: For joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces. b. Exterior and interior use. C. One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, for sanitary applications, interior use. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00-2 D. Latex Joint Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Pecora Corporation, Polymeric Systems, Inc., Sonneborn Building Products, Tremco, or approved equal. 2. Type: Acrylic-emulsion, ASTM C 834. 3. Application: Interior joints in vertical and overhead surfaces with limited movement. E. Compression Seals: 1. Type: Preformed hollow neoprene gasket, ASTM D 2628. 2. Application: Wide exterior joints in vertical surfaces. F. Specialty Sealants: 1. Type and Application: Synthetic rubber for acoustical sealant for concealed joints. G. Paving Joint Fillers: 1. Type: Bituminous fiber. 2. Application: Filler for exterior paving joints. H. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Plastic foam joint fillers. 2. Elastomeric tubing backer rods. 3. Bond breaker tape. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means acceptance of substrates. B. Provide sealants in colors as selected from manufacturer's standards. C. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Clean and prime joints, and install bond breakers, backer rods and sealant as recommended by manufacturers. D. Depth shall equal width up to 1/2" wide; depth shall equal 1/2 width for joints over 1/2" wide. E. Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged sealants. Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage. END OF SECTION EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 1 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SECTION 07 95 00 EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Architectural joint systems for building interiors. Expansion joint cover plate to be installed at first floor Elevator Lobby, where wood framing meets slab-on-grade at first floor. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for liquid-applied joint sealants. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities. B. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities. C. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between widest and narrowest widths of a joint. D. Nominal Joint Width: The width of the linear opening specified in practice and in which the joint system is installed. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide the following for each joint system specified and obtain approval prior to fabrication and shipment of materials to the job site: 1. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, entire route of each joint system, and attachments to other work. Where joint systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s latest published literature for materials EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 2 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are fabricated and delivered to the site. Data to clearly indicate movement capability of cover assemblies and suitability of material used in exterior seal for UV exposure. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of joint system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the standard range of finishes available for exposed metal and elastomeric seal material. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer and having experience installing joint systems that are similar in design complexity. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all architectural joint systems through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of architectural joint systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Loading Characteristics: Standard loading refers to covers that are capable of withstanding up to 500 lb. point loads. Heavy duty refers to covers that are capable of withstanding up to 2000 lb. point loads. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural joint system and fire-barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 and/or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire rating not less than the rating of adjacent construction. F. Manufacturer to provide 5 year warranty for all joint covers. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall joint systems with roof expansion assemblies to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, for sheet and plate. 1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials. 2. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish): nonspecular as fabricated; (0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 3 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 B. Elastomeric Seals: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal frames. C. Compression Seals: ASTM D2000; preformed rectangular elastomeric extrusions having internal baffle system and designed to function under compression. D. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling, designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to meet performance criteria for required rating period. E. Moisture Barrier: 7-ply laminate reinforced Polyethylene. F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. General: Provide architectural joint systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. While specified joint systems establish the function and aesthetic intent, it may be necessary for the manufacturer to modify the joint systems to accommodate the movement requirements as scheduled in the contract documents. Such modifications should be made without significant changes to the aesthetic or functional intent of the joint systems. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics: 1. Maximum Joint Width: 1” 2.03 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS A. Construction Specialties, Inc., 6696 Route 405 Highway, Muncy, PA, shall manufacture expansion joint cover assemblies specified herein and indicated on the drawings. Other manufacturers may be accepted as substitutions, as approved by Architect. Substitution requests must be reviewed prior to bid and must include the following information: 1. Details 2. ASTM- E1399 test reports 3. Sample of written 5 year warranty B. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Construction Specialties, Inc. model PCS, or architect approved equal. 2. Type: Glide plate. a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum. 1) Finish: Class II, clear anodic. EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 4 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 3. Cover-Plate Design: Serrated. 4. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors. 5. Load Capacity: Standard duty. 2.04 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and blockouts where architectural joint systems will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout of compressive strength adequate for anticipated structural loadings. C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of joint systems. D. Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems. 1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper joint installation and performance. EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 5 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. 4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. 5. Standard-Duty Systems: Shim to level where required. Support underside of frames continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in service. 6. Heavy-Duty Systems: Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support and to bring frame to proper level. Shimming is not allowed. 7. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c. C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. 1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. D. Compression Seals: Apply adhesive or lubricant adhesive as recommended by manufacturer before installing compression seals. E. Terminate exposed ends of joint assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices. F. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of architectural joint assembly materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. 1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices. G. Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints and where called for on Drawings. Provide drainage fittings where indicated. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. END OF SECTION 07 95 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIBERGLASS DOORS AND STEEL FRAMES 08 11 00-1 SECTION 08 11 00 FIBERGLASS DOORS AND STEEL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide fiberglass doors pre-hung on steel frames at all exterior doors (except storefront) and at apartment entry doors. Apartment entry doors shall have similar specifications to exterior doors, including weatherstripping. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Performance Standards: 1. Fire-Rated Assemblies: NFPA 80, and acceptable testing agency listing. 2. Thermal-Rated Assemblies at Exterior: ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976. 3. Sound-Rated Assemblies at Mechanical Rooms: ASTM E 1408, and ASTM E 413. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Benchmark, or approved equal. B. Fiberglass Doors: 1. Door Type: Standard smooth finish fiberglass doors with insulated composite construction. 2. Exterior Doors Faces: 1/16-inch minimum thickness, fiberglass-reinforced thermoset composite, surface lightly textured with 80-grit brushing, accepts most exterior and interior paints. Color: white. 3. Exterior Door Edges: machinable kiln-dried pine, primed to match color of faces, lock edge reinforced with laminated veneer lumber core, lockset area reinforced with solid blocking for hardware backup. 4. Exterior Door Bottom Edge: moisture-proof and decay-proof composite. 5. Closer Blocking: provide blocking for closers where closers are specified. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIBERGLASS DOORS AND STEEL FRAMES 08 11 00-2 6. Exterior Door Construction: Foamed-in-place polyurethane, CFC-free, density 2.0 pcf minimum, K-factor of 0.14 for minimum thermal transmittance. Standard factory sizes may be edge trimmed or end trimmed in shop, 1-3/4 inches thick. 7. Finish: Factory primed and field painted. C. Adjustable Steel Frames: 1. Exterior Frames: a. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. b. Corners: Mitered or coped. c. Type: Adjustable. d. Frame Thickness: 16 gauge for base frame and 22 gauge for closure frame. 2. Accessories: a. Door silencers. b. Plaster guards. c. Hinges, Strikes: Steel, zinc-plated, brass or chrome finish. Screws plated and finished to match hardware. Minimum hinge size 4 x 4 x .098 inches. Strikes are proprietary adjustable type, permitting in-out adjustment of door in frame, up to 3/16 inch. 3. Weatherstripping and Gaskets: Jacketed thermoset closed-cell foam, press-fit in kerfs at jamb stops in frames. Extruded thermoplastic elastomer, finned and chambered design, press-fit into bottom edge of doors. Corner pads at bottom margin corners from jacketed thermoset closed-cell foam. 4. Finish: Factory primed and field painted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fabricate work to be rigid, neat and free from seams, defects, dents, warp, buckle, and exposed fasteners. Install doors and frames in compliance with SDI-100, NFPA 80, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide thermally improved doors with maximum U-value of 0.24 BTU/hr./sq. ft. degree F (ASTM C 236) for all exterior doors and elsewhere as noted. C. Provide acoustically improved doors with minimum STC of 33 (ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413) where indicated. D. Hardware: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware on final schedule. Provide for 3 silencers on single door frames; 2 on double door frames. E. Shop Finish: Clean, treat and prime paint all work with rust-inhibiting primer comparable with finish paint specified in Division 9 section. Provide asphalt emulsion sound deadening coating on concealed frame interiors. F. Touch-up damaged coatings and leave ready to receive finish painting. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Exterior insulated hollow metal doors in thermally-broken hollow metal frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 3. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames. 11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 2 12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire- resistance rating, and finishes. B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C. 1. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 2. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. D. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. De La Fontaine Industries. 2. CECO Door Products. 3. Curries Company. 4. Steelcraft. 5. Amweld International, LLC. 6. North American Door Corp. 7. Pioneer Industries 8. Security Metal Products Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene. Where indicated, provide doors fabricated as thermal-rated assemblies with a minimum R-value of 7 or better. 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Embossed panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one- piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. 4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1. De La Fontaine, RPD 102 without molding. 2. CECO Door Products Legion Series. 3. Curries Company 707 Series. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of knock down types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (up to 48 inches in width): Minimum 14 gauge (0.067-inch -1.7-mm) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (48 inches and up in width): Minimum 12 gauge (0.081-inch -2.7-mm) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet. 6. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. De La Fontaine Industries b. CECO Door Products SQ/SU/SR Series. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 6 c. Curries Company M/G Series. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of slip-on drywall types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for openings up to 48 inches in width: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.] 5. Frames for openings 48 inches and wider in width: Minimum 14 gauge (0.067- inch -1.7-mm) thick steel sheet.] 6. Frames for Wood Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch-1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 7. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch-1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 8. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products BQ/BU/DQ/DU/BR/DR Series (Drywall Profile). b. CECO Door Products SQ/SU/SR Series (Masonry Profile). c. Curries Company C/CM/CG Series (Drywall Profile). d. Curries Company M/G Series (Masonry Profile). D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated. E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 ENERGY-EFFICIENT HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Thermal Break Frames at Exterior Door: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames, provide where indicated thermally broken frame profiles available for use in both masonry and drywall construction. Fabricate from minimum 16 gauge galvannealed steel, with positive 3/8" vinyl thermal break and integral vinyl weatherstripping. 1. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. De La Fontaine Industries – Thermal Break. b. CECO Door Products - Thermal Break SQT and SRT Series. c. Curries Company - Thermal Break M and C Series. 2.6 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 7 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 UNCOA coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Windstorm Opening Anchors: Types as tested and required for indicated wall types to meet specified wind load design criteria. 5. FEMA 361 Storm Shelter Anchors: Masonry T-shaped, wire masonry type, or existing opening type anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick. C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.7 HOLLOW METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified. D. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 8 3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations. 5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations. 7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. 8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions. 10. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 9 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field- applied coatings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.). C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 10 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar. 4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 21 00-1 SECTION 08 21 00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide flush wood doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. Include labor and materials to repair or replace defective materials. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Quality Standards: NWWDA I.S. 1A, and AWI Architectural Quality Standards. C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Meet ASTM E 152 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Algoma Hardwoods, Eggers Industries, Weyerhaeuser Architectural Doors, or approved equal. B. Interior Hollow Core Doors: 1. Thickness: 1-3/8 inches thick. 2. Construction: Hardboard face, 4 panel embossed design. 3. Core: Solid core particle board with wood blocked edges 4. Finish: Primed. C. Fitting and Finish: 1. Fitting: Pre-machined doors. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 21 00-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NWMA I.S. 1A and specified quality standard. Prefit doors to frames. Premachine doors for hardware listed on final schedules. Factory bevel doors. B. Install doors with not more than 1/8" clearance at top and sides, 1/4" at bottom. Comply with NFPA 80 for rated assemblies. C. Adjust, clean, and protect. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 31 00-1 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide access doors and panels for walls and ceilings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: J. L. Industries, Karp Associates, Milcor, Nystrom, or approved equal. B. Access Doors: 1. Frames: 16 gauge (.0598 inch) sheet steel with flange suitable for adjacent material. 2. Doors: 14 gauge (.0625 inch) sheet steel. 3. Door Type: Flush panel. 4. Locking Devices: Cylinder locks. 5. Fire Rating: NFPA 80. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Install assemblies complete with all hardware, anchors, inserts, supports and accessories. Test and adjust operation. B. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 1 SECTION 08 52 13 ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum Clad Wood Ultimate Double Hung – Next Generation 2.0, Single Hung, Picture window complete with hardware, glazing, certified mulls, weather strip, insect screen, removable exterior and interior grille, simulated divided lite, jamb extension and standard or specified anchors, trim, attachments, and accessories 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 23 – Submittal Procedures; Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. Section 06 22 00 – Millwork: Wood trim other than furnished by window manufacturer C. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealant: Sill sealant and perimeter caulking D. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating: Paint and stain other than factory-applied finish 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. E283: Standard Test method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors 2. E330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Door by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 3. E547: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential 4. E2190: Specification for Sealed Insulated Glass Units B. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association/Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA/WDMA/CSA): 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08, Standard/Specification for windows, doors and skylights 2. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11, Standard/Specification for windows, doors and skylights ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 2 3. AAMA 450-10, Voluntary Performance Rating Method for Mulled Fenestration Assemblies C. WDMA I.S.4: Industry Standard for Water Repellant Preservative Treatment for Millwork D. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 1. 101: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product thermal Properties 2. 200: Procedure for Determining Solar Heat Gain Coefficients at Normal Incidence 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design and Performance Requirements: Product Air Test to PSF Water Tested to psf Structural Tested to psf Certification Rating Design Pressure Clad Ultimate Double Hung Next Generation 2.0 1.57 7.5 75 LC-PG50 DP50 *Tested with the Performance Bracket Removed ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 3 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings. B. Product Data: Submit catalog data. C. Samples: 1. Submit corner section under provision of section 01 33 23 2. Include glazing system, quality of construction and specified finish D. Quality Control Submittals: Certificates: submit manufacturer’s certification indicating compliance with specified performance and design requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements: consult local code for IBC [International Building Code] and IRC [International Residential Code] adoption year and pertinent revisions for information on: 1. Egress, emergency escape and rescue requirements 2. Basement window requirements 3. Windows fall prevention and/or window opening control device requirements 1.7 DELIVERY A. Deliver in original packaging and protect from weather 1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prime and seal wood surfaces, including to be concealed by wall construction, if more than thirty (30) days will expire between delivery and installation B. Store window units in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area above ground to protect from weather. 1.9 WARRANTY Complete and current warranty information is available at marvin.com/warranty. The following summary is subject to the terms, condition, limitations and exclusions set forth in the Marvin Windows and Door Limited Warranty and Products in Coastal Environments Limited Warranty Supplement: ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 4 A. Clear insulating glass with stainless steel spacers is warranted against seal failure caused by manufacturing defects and resulting in visible obstruction through the glass for twenty (20) years from the original date of purchase. Glass is warranted against stress cracks caused by manufacturing defects from ten (10) years from the original date of purchase. B. Standard exterior aluminum cladding finish is warranted against manufacturing defects resulting in chalk, fade and loss of adhesion (peel) per the American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA) Specification 2605-11 Section 8.4 and 8.9 for twenty (20) years from the original date of purchase. C. Factory-applied interior finish is warranted to be free from finish defects for a period of five (5) years from the original date of purchase. D. Hardware and other non-glass components are warranted to be free from manufacturing defects for ten (10) years from the original date of purchase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Aluminum Clad Ultimate Double Hung – Next Generation 2.0 (and related stationary units) as manufactured by Marvin Windows and Doors, Warroad, Minnesota. 2.2 FRAME DESCRIPTION 1. Interior: Non Finger-Jointed Pine 2. Kiln-dried to moisture content no greater than 12 percent at the time of fabrication 3. Water repellant, preservative treated in accordance with ANSI/WDMA I.S.4. A. Frame exterior aluminum clad with 0.050” (1.3mm) thick extruded aluminum B. Frame thickness: 1 25/32” (45mm) head and jambs C. Frame depth: Frame depth had an overall 5 21/32” jamb (144mm). 4 9/16” (116mm) jamb depth from the nailing fin plane to the interior face of the frame for new construction. D. Sill assembly including the sill liner: 2 7/32” (56mm) 2.3 SASH DESCRIPTION ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 5 1. Interior: Non Finger-Jointed Pine 2. Kiln-dried to moisture content no greater than 12 percent at the time of fabrication 3. Water repellant preservative treated with accordance with WDMA I.S.4. A. Sash exterior aluminum clad with 0.050” (1.3mm) thick extruded aluminum B. Sash thickness: 1 3/4” (44mm). Corner slot and tenoned. C. Operable sash tilt to interior for cleaning or removal D. Sash Options: Unequal Sash E. Exterior Cope Profile: Putty F. Interior Sash Sticking 1. Standard: Ogee 2.4 GLAZING A. Select quality complying with ASTM C1036. Insulating glass SIGMA/IGCC certified to performance level CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E2190. B. Glazing method: Insulating glass C. Glazing seal: Silicone bedding on interior and exterior D. TriPane Glass(TG): Tripane Low E3 Krypton/Argon. 2.5 CERTIFIED MULLING A. Directional mull limits: 1 High (can be 2 or more units wide in an assembly) 1. Max mullion span is 71 ½” (1816mm); max tributary width 45 ¼” (1149mm) 2. CUDH NG 2.0 to CUDH NG 2.0 only 3. Certified to Design Pressure 50 B. Directional mull limits: 1 Wide (can be 2 or more units high in an assembly) 1. Max mullion span is 69 ¼” (1759mm); max tributary height 53 19/32” (1361mm) 2. CUDH NG 2.0 over CUDH NG 2.0 only 3. Certified to Design Pressure 50 C. Multiple Wide x Multiple High assemblies with 1” LVL ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 6 1. Max mullion span is 75 11/16” (1922mm); max tributary width is 45 1/4” (1149mm) 2. LVL must be in vertical mull 3. Certified to Design Pressure 50 D. If any units have a lower design pressure the entire assembly will have the lowest design pressure of any unit or mull in the assembly. 2.6 FINISH A. Exterior: Aluminum clad. Fluoropolymer modified acrylic topcoat applied over primer. Meets AAMA 2605 requirements. 1. Aluminum clad color options: Ebony. B. Interior Finish options: 1. Prime: Factory-applied enamel primer. Available on Pine product only. Meets WDMA TM-11 requirements. 2. Painted Interior Finish. Available on Pine product only. Black or Whit, as determined by Architect. Meet WDMA TM-14 requirements. 2.7 HARDWARE A. Locking system that provides locking, unlocking, balancing, and tilting of the sash members B. Lock Actuator Assembly 1. Material a. Zinc die-cast b. Available finishes: Full range of standard finish options. Final option to be determined by Architect. C. Latches 1. Bottom sash latch a. Material i. Bolt: Glass-filled nylon ii. Latch housing: Acetal iii. Sash latch reinforcement: Stainless steel ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 7 2. Top sash tilt latch a. Material i. Bolt: Glass-filled nylon ii. Latch housing: Glass-filled nylon 3. Latches accommodate travel of sash in frame, and tilting into wash-mode 4. Color: Custom color to match interior hardware finish. D. Strike Assembly 1. Material a. Zinc die-cast strike plate and injection-molded Acetal housing and button b. Finishes: Full range of standard finish options. Final option to be determined by Architect. E. Balance System (balance system determined by sash weight) 1. Hybrid spiral balances F. Factory-applied Window Opening Control Device (WOCD) is a sash limiter that prevents the window opening more than 4” vertically. It meets ASTM F2090-10 specifications for window fall prevention standards. The system consists of two single action devices that allows for egress (when applied to an egress size window) by bypassing the 4” stop feature. 1. Material a. WOCD device: zinc die-cast b. WOCD strike plate: nylon 2. 2 WOCD’s applied to each double and single hung window and will be recessed into the stiles of the top sash 3. Default color matches lock handle 4. Strike plate mounted to the bottom sash check rail 5. Strike plate color to match weather strip G. Sash Limiter 1. Bottom Sash Limiter (Acetal) a. Available on all operator configurations, and StormPlus IZ3 ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 8 b. Selectable bottom sash locations, 4", 6" or 8" Net Clear Opening (NCO) c. Non-tilt hardware is default, and a sash removal tool is required in order to by-pass the Sash limiter for sash removal (tilt wash mode) d. Standard application is factory applied. Available for field retrofit applications. e. Color: Will align with the Exterior Weather Strip Package selection 2. Top Sash Limiter (Extruded PVC) a. Available on all operator configurations, with the exception Single Hung configurations. This includes StormPlus IZ3 b. Standard application is factory applied. Available for field applications c. Color: Will align with the Interior Weather Strip Package selection H. Exterior Sash Lugs – Standard Option 1. Standard Profile: Ogee 2. Available on Top Sash 3. Color: Available in all exterior clad color options a. Color shall be the same as top sash clad color 4. Standard application is factory applied. Available for field applications 2.8 WEATHER STRIP A. Operating units: 1. Jambs: Foam-filled bulb 2. Header: Continuous dual leaf 3. Bottom rail and check rail: Hollow bulb B. Stationary units: 1. Jambs: Foam for picture units; foam-filled bulb for transom unit 2. Header and bottom rail: Hollow bulb 2.9 JAMB EXTENSION ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 9 A. Jamb extensions are available for various wall thickness factory-applied up to a 14” (356mm) wide B. Finish: Match interior frame finish 2.10 INSECT SCREEN A. Factory-installed half screen. 1. Screen Mesh: Hi-Tran Fiberglass Mesh B. Aluminum frame finish: 1. Color: Matches exterior aluminum clad color C. Magnum Screen: 1. Extruded aluminum surround with Charcoal Hi-Tran Fiberglass Mesh 2.11 REMOVABLE INTERIOR GRILLES A. 3/4” by 15/32” (19mm x 12mm) wide or 1 1/8” by 15/32” (29mm x 12mm) wide – Pine and Mixed Grain Douglas Fir 1. Pattern: Rectangular, 6 over 6 lite layout 2. Finish: Match interior sash finish 2.12 SIMULATED DIVIDED LITES (SDL) A. 5/8” (16mm) wide, w/out internal spacer bar B. Exterior muntins: 0.050” (1.3mm) thick extruded aluminum C. Interior muntins: Pine D. Muntins adhere to glass with closed-cell copolymer acrylic foam tape E. Exterior sticking: Putty F. Interior Sticking: 1. Standard: Ogee G. Patterns: Rectangular H. Finish – exterior matches exterior aluminum clad colors, interior matches interior wood species and color ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 10 2.13 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM A. Installation Accessories: 1. Factory-installed vinyl drip cap 2. Installation brackets: 15 3/8” (390mm) B. Aluminum Extrusions: 1. Casing Profile: Chosen by Architect, from full range of casing options. 2. Aluminum clad Extrusion: Chosen by Architect, from full range of extrusion options. 3. Finish: Fluoropolymer modified acrylic topcoat applied over primer. Meets AAMA 2605 requirements PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Condition: Before installation, verify openings are plumb, square and of proper dimensions. Report frame defects or unsuitable conditions to the General contractor before proceeding. B. Acceptance of Condition: Beginning on installation confirms acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install window unit(s) according to manufacturer’s instruction and reviewed shop drawing. B. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of unit or assembly in accordance with Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. C. Install accessory items as required. D. Use finish nails to apply wood trim and mouldings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturer’s instruction. ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 ~ 11 B. Unless otherwise specified, air leakage resistance tests shall be conducted at a uniform static pressure of 75 Pa (~1.57 psf). The maximum allowable rate of air leakage shall not exceed 2.3 L/sm2 (~0.45 cfm/ft2). C. Unless otherwise specified, water penetration resistance testing shall be conducted per AAMA 502 and ASTM E1105 at 2/3 of the fenestration products design pressure (DP) rating using “Procedure B” – cyclic static air pressure difference. Water penetration shall be defined in accordance with the test method(s) applied. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturer’s instruction. B. Leave windows and glass in a clean condition. Final cleaning as required in Section 01 74 00. 3.5 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protecting windows from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint or other construction operations that may cause damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 00-1 SECTION 08 53 45 POLYMER WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. At existing house to remain: Provide aluminum clad wood, single hung windows and picture windows, as shown. See Section 08 52 13, Aluminum Clad Wood Windows. B. At new construction at back of existing house (to replace existing rear wing): Provide aluminum clad wood, single hung windows and picture windows, as shown. See Section 08 52 13, Aluminum Clad Wood Windows. C. At all other new construction: Provide upvc vinyl tilt-and-turn and fixed windows, as described herein and as shown. D. All windows to be triple insulated glass low-E, krypton-filled windows, minimum R-5 (U-0.20). E. Provide fully welded steel reinforced polymer windows as listed below. All windows shall be factory assembled, and include all required glass and glazing materials; any internal structural metal reinforcement (stiffeners) that may be required (e.g. to meet design loads, mulling conditions, reinforcement of non-white polymer and/or proper operation); window hardware, weatherstripping and insect screens. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. Include labor and materials to repair or replace defective materials. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years. E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance data, including maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 00-2 B. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. C. Provide windows that are GreenSeal Certified. D. Performance: Comply with AAMA 101 for grade of window required. E. REFERENCES 1. Publications listed below are part of this specification to the extent they are referenced. When publications are cited in these specifications by use of shortened names or by standard number alone, it must be understood that reference is made to the full publication and edition as listed here. 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440–08, Standard/Specification for windows, doors and unit skylights 3. American Society of Civil Engineers: a. ASCE 7 – 10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE/SEI 2010 4. American Society for Testing and Materials a. ASTM E90 -09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements b. ASTM E413-10, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation c. ASTM E1332-10a, Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation d. ASTM E2235-04 (2012), Standard Test Method for Determination of Decay Rates for use in Sound Insulation Test Methods. 5. National Fenestration Rating Council, Inc. a. NFRC 100 – 2014, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U- Factors b. NFRC 200 – 2014, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence c. NFRC 500 – 2014, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Condensation Resistance Values 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s printed literature describing specified products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit dimensioned shop drawings for system. Show materials, anchorage, field connections, sealants and glazing. 2. Drawings shall show scale elevations and sections. Full size sections shall be shown only when needed for clarity. 3. Samples: Provide one full unit of each type specified. 4. Submit color samples displaying manufacturer's standard colors and finishes for initial selection by Architect. Submit actual material samples of colors and finishes available. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 00-3 5. Samples submitted shall be of production type and shall represent quality of finish to be furnished by manufacturer. No work represented by samples shall be fabricated until samples are accepted. 6. Submit certified test reports from an AAMA accredited, independent testing laboratory showing system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and indicating full compliance with specified performance criteria. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: B. A temporary covering shall protect exposed surfaces after completing fabrication of products. C. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: 1. Store windows/elements vertically, inside, in a clean and dry location. 2. Stacking shall be done in a way to prevent bending. 3. Cover stacks in a manner to provide air circulation and to reasonably protect materials from damage. 4. Keep on-site handling to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to finishes. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not proceed with jobsite sealant application when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are not within limits permitted by sealant manufacturer. 2. Sealants shall not be applied when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. 3. Field Measurements: a. Verify dimensions of surrounding construction by field measurements so work will be accurately fabricated, and fitted to structure. Contractor and manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. If the contractor guarantees the dimensions, no field measurements are needed. 1.07 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty signed by both the window fabricator and the installer agreeing to repair or replace defective materials or workmanship, including evidence of early deterioration, weathering or aging of Work, uncontrolled water penetration or air infiltration, glass breakage due to design defects, deterioration of finishes, failure of operating parts to properly function and other deterioration or failure of Work to comply with performance or other requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Windows 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 00-4 B. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Intus Windows. 2. Acceptable alternates, assuming all specifications and requirements are met: Alpen, Klearwall, Mavrik or Architect approved equal. 3. UPVC Vinyl Windows: UPVC tilt and turn and fixed windows complete with hardware, glazing, certified mulls, weather strip, insect screen, and standard or specified anchors, trim, attachments, and accessories. C. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Ventilator opening limit device. 2. Operating hardware. 3. Insect screening. D. Construction: 1. Construction: Triple pane, argon filled, thermal-break type. 2. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Nonmagnetic stainless steel. 3. Window Operation: Single hung windows. 4. Glazing: Triple-pane, Low-E, Krypton or Argon filled, insulating glass. R-5 minimum for whole window. 5. Glazing Color: Clear. E. Basis of Design: Intus Arcade tilt and turn and fixed windows. 1. Windows on this project shall be furnished and installed in the sizes, configurations and quantities as described in the Project Contract Documents and within the allowed parameters in PART 1, Section 1 of this specification. 2. Minimum Outside Nominal Wall Thickness: a. Primary frame and sash extrusions’ exterior walls: 0.106” (2.7 mm) b. Secondary extrusions (e.g. glazing stops and closures): 0.059” (1.5 mm) 3. Face Dimensions (nominal): As indicated on Architectural Drawings 4. Window sash and frame shall be configured to receive glazing beads (stops) that snap in on the interior side of the glass. 2. Reinforcement: 1. If required, custom shaped steel reinforcements for the internal applications in windows and doors must be used. 2. Galvanized steel specified according to EN 10327, Grade DX 51D+Z 100 NA. 3. Galvanized Steel shall be in size, configuration and location within the window as indicated in the test reports and reinforcement Instructions. 4. Reinforcement must be used in all main profiles (such as frame, sash or t-mullion), which are non-white. 5. Reinforcement must be used between windows, which are joined with each other and must be sufficiently sized and anchored according to the structural requirements. 3. Weatherseals: 1. Black or grey polymer (EPDM) replaceable weatherseals: a. Shapes, designs, and thickness as needed to satisfy performance requirements. b. Weatherseals shall be provided in continuous lengths, butted firm to ends of races and to each other when in the same planes. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 00-5 4. Glass: 1. Glass shall comply with requirements of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05, Section 6.2 and the GANA Glazing Manual. 2. Insulating glass panels shall have an overall nominal thickness of: a. 0.94” (24mm) - 1.575” (40 mm) 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Design Requirements. Windows have been tested in accordance with American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA/WDMA) Specifications for Performance Class specified complying with the following performance standards: 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440–08 a. Series/Model: Arcade b. Product Type: Dual Action Window c. Compliance Statement: Class CW-PG50 1200 x 1797 (47 x 71)-DAW d. Design Pressure: ±3120 Pa (±50.13 psf) e. Air Infiltration: <0.2 L/s/m² (<0.03 cfm/ft²) f. Water Penetration Resistance Test Pressure: 400 Pa (8.35 psf) B. Other Performance Requirements: 1. Allow for thermal movement of the window based on site mean temperature +/- 70 °F, window/element size and coefficient of linear expansion of uPVC. 2. If non-white windows are chosen allow for thermal movement of the window based on the solar-heat absorption. a. Thermal Performance. Windows have been tested in accordance with the National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). The products were evaluated in full compliance with NFRC requirements. The windows, including glass and uPVC framing, shall have a thermal transmittance of: Triple Pane FIXED WINDOW TILT TURN WINDOW U factor [0.16 Btu/hr/ft2/°F] [0.18 Btu/hr/ft2/°F] SHGC [0.28] VT [0.43] 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Exposed fasteners shall be selected to prevent galvanic reaction with any reinforcement materials fastened. 2. Above criteria is applicable to screws used to secure internal reinforcement and to fasteners used in window mulling connections, if required. 3. Avoid exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 4. Where exposed fasteners are unavoidable in finished surfaces, use flathead countersunk Phillips head screws. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 00-6 5. Installation anchors must be approved by the responsible engineer/architect for the project. B. Sealants: 1. Sealants shall comply with requirements of AAMA 800. 2.04 SHOP FINISHES A. Laminated Coatings (if applicable): 1. Application of laminated color foils from RENOLIT shall be performed under specification issued by RENOLIT and INTUS WINDOWS. 2. All exterior laminates shall be Renolit FX grade. 3. The laminated surface shall be uniform and free from streaks, blisters, sags, or other surface imperfections. 4. Laminated profiles shall meet requirements of AAMA 303. B. Protection: 1. Provide film to protect exposed finished surfaces during shipment, storage, and installation whenever possible. 2. Film shall not affect factory finish after finished component is installed and film is stripped, no residue, adhesive, or film covering, visual non- uniformity or other deleterious effects or substances shall remain on surfaces. 3. Factory applied protective film must be removed immediately after installation. 4. When cleaning agents/paint etc. are applied to the building the windows must be protected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine window openings and adjacent building structure where windows will be applied for conditions that will prevent proper execution of this portion of Work and endanger permanency. 2. Do not proceed with installation until defects have been corrected. 3. Verify sealant compatibility and adhesion to polymer in conjunction with sealant manufacturer. B. PREPARATION 1. Coordination: a. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. C. INSTALLATION 1. General Requirements: a. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of work. b. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Replace materials that are damaged during installation as directed. c. Set units’ level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. Support units on shims and secure in place by approved installation 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. VINYL WINDOWS 08 53 00-7 anchors/fasteners that properly engage into to supporting structure. d. Insulation must be used around the perimeter of the window in accordance with shop drawings and the insulation manufacturer’s guidelines. Insulation must allow for expansion and contraction of the installed window. e. Flashing and other materials used around window opening shall be corrosion resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding, and compatible with adjoining materials. 2. Erection Tolerances: a. Variations from Plumb: ±1/8” maximum in window height. b. Variations from Level: ± 1/8” maximum in 10’ run, non- cumulative. D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Field Check for Water Leakage: a. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds, but before installation of interior finishes, perform AAMA 502 test. Architect will determine the quantity and type(s) of window(s) to be tested. b. In case of water penetration take corrective action and re-test as necessary until the problem is resolved. E. ADJUSTING 1. Weatherseal contact shall be checked and any required final hardware adjustment made for proper operation and performance of units. F. CLEANING 1. Clean completed system in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass and sealants. Remove excess glazing and joint sealants, dirt, and other substances from finished surfaces promptly after erection. 2. Remove protective material from prefinished surfaces. 3. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. G. PROTECTION 1. Institute protective measures and other precautions needed to assure Work will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Automatic operators. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry”. 2. Division 06 Section “Finish Carpentry”. 3. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 4. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 5. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 6. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C. a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). b. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). C. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: Hardware is to be of type and design as specified and should comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.14. 1. Sliding Bi-Passing Pocket Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of track, hangers, stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated. 2. Bi-folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 125 lb. Provide only Landquist & Son, 3/4" Magic Glide bifolds primed for painting in field, with Grade 304 Satin Stainless Steel T-Bar Door Pull Handles. high-density industrial particle board, 45 lb. density. Standard finish: Thermo-fused primed, paintable melamine. Provide decorative boot at all floor pivot assemblies. Handles shall be brushed stainless steel T bar handles with 5” hole spacing. Handles shall be drilled and installed by Contractor. 3. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb. 4. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Johnson Hardware (JO). c. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 5. Pocket Door Privacy Hardware: a. Trimco #1074-1 (TC). 2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified. 1. Provide flush bolts on one of each pairs of double doors. 2. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor. 3. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 4. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. 5. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 6. Manufacturers: a. Door Controls International (DC). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Manufacturers: a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC). 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard. D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner. F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). 4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2). 5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2). G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 H. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK). J. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 certified. 1. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible. 2. Manufacturers: a. Arrow Locks (AW) – MLX Series. b. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 4600LN Series. B. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 3 (Residential Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 3 certified. 1. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible. 2. Manufacturers: a. Yale Residential (YR) - YE Series. C. Interconnected Locksets: ANSI/BHMA A156.12, Series 5000. Grade 2. 1. Interconnected locksets designed with an interlocking tubular chassis and latchbolt and allow simultaneous retraction of latchbolt and deadbolt with a single motion turning of the lever/knob. 2. Locksets to be UL listed for use on a fire door. 3. Locksets to be field adjustable for center to center dimension. 4. Locksets to be non-handed, and have a 2 3/8" standard backset. 5. Manufacturers: a. Schlage (SC) – H Series. b. Yale Residential (YR) - YH Series. 2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Cylindrical Deadlocks: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, cylindrical type deadlocks to fit standard ANSI 161 preparation and 1 3/8" to 1 3/4" thickness doors. Provide tapered collars to resist vandalism and 1" throw solid steel bolt with hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other locksets. 1. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DL3200 Series. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 480 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - D100 Series. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements. 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current. 6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles. 9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Fabricate latchbolts from cast stainless steel, Pullman type, incorporating a deadlocking feature. 1. Manufacturers: a. Adams Rite (AD) - EX Series. b. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 6000 Series. C. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices, Aluminum Entrances: ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Push bar to be made of extruded aluminum, maximum projection of 3”, available in clad or anodized architectural finishes. Exit device design to fit narrow (minimum 2"), medium, or wide stile aluminum door applications. 1. Manufacturers: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing (AD) - 8000 Series. 2.9 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 8500 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 3500 Series. C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1331 Series. b. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 2700 Series. c. Norton (NO) - 210 Series D. Performance Requirements: 1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. 2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. E. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Operation: Spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, without electrical power. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components. G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. LCN Closers (LC) - 4640 Series. 2. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series. 3. Stanley Security Solutions (ST) – D-4990 Series. 2.10 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS A. Provide automatic door opener at storefront door to Elevator Vestibule. B. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. C. Electrohydraulic Door Operators: Self-contained low-pressure units with rack and pinion design contained within a cast aluminum housing. Door closing speed 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 controlled by independent hydraulic adjustment valves in the sweep and latch range of the closing cycle. Operator is to provide conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Unit is to include an adjustable hydraulic backcheck valve to cushion the door speed if opened violently. Non-handed units for both push and pull side applications. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components. E. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19. 1. Performance Requirements: a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. F. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors. G. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. 1. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated. H. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds. I. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts. J. Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate activation control with electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation switches are standard SPST, with optional DPDT availability. K. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series. 2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC). 2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 2.14 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.15 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17 C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. RO - Rockwood 4. YA - Yale 5. YR - Yale Residential 6. AD - Adams Rite 7. MX - Marks 8. RF - Rixson 9. NO - Norton 10. OT - OTHER 11. SU – Securitron 12. TC – Trimco 13. LA - Landquist Hardware Schedule Set: 1.0 Doors: 114 – Front double wood doors to street 6 Hinge (heavy weight) TA786-ET US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 73 8204 TEMH US26D SA 1 Exit Device DG1 16 73 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Flush Bolt 555/557 (as needed) US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 82 Bridge Street Housing February 8, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Post-Bid Addendum #6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087100 - 1 REVISED HARDWARE SETS Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Description: Door 114 Front Exterior 8 Hinge (heavy weight) TA386 NRP 4-1/2" x 4- 1/2" US32D MK 087100 1 Mullion 3890 628 AD 087100 2 Rim Exit Device 8800 MEC- US32D US32D AD 087100 1 Exit Device Trim 3080E MV 3 5 0 ELX US32D AD 087100 ⚡ 1 Core 1210 GMK VKC2 626 YA 087100 1 Cylinder 1193/2196 Temp Core- 6 pin 626 YA 087100 2 Surface Closer CPS7500 689 NO 087100 1 Threshold 27_x_AFG FHSL14SS- 2 PE 087100 2 Sweep 3452APK TKSP PE 087100 2 Astragal 18041CSB TKSP PE 087100 1 Threshold (flat saddle) 271A MSES25SS PE 087100 1 Gasketing pkg 303AS TKSP8 PE 087100 Notes: Operation Description: •Doors normally closed and locked •free egress permitted at all time through both doors. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 8, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Post-Bid Addendum #6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 087100 - 2 Set: 2.0 Description: Door100 (Storefront) Elevator Vestibule 1 Pivot Set (top and bottom) 147 626 RF 1 Intermediate Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Exit Device Trim 3080E MV 3 5 0 ELX US32D AD 087100 ⚡ 1 Exit Device DG1 16 73 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 73 8204 TEMH US26D SA 1 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 1 Exit Device DG1 16 73 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 1 Threshold (flat saddle) 271A MSES25SS PE 1 ElectroLynx Frame Harness QC- C2500P MK 087100 ⚡ 1 ElectroLynx Door Harness QC-Cxxx LAR MK 087100 ⚡ 1 Card / FOB Reader Provided by Div 28 OT 281300 ⚡ 2 Position Switch DPS-W-XX SU 087100 ⚡ 1 Power Supply AQD3-1R SU 087100 ⚡ Set: 6.0 Description: 114A Double wood doors to front vestibule 8 Hinge (heavy weight) TA786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 087100 2 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 T3HD US32D RO 087100 2 Surface Closer 7500 689 NO 087100 2 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO 087100 1 Threshold 271A MSES25SS PE 087100 2 Astragal 18041CSB TKSP PE 087100 1 Gasketing pkg 303AS TKSP8 PE 087100 END OF SECTION 087100 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 1 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 2 Rim Exit Device 8800 SE M1 628 AD 2 2 Exit Device Trim 8650 628 AD 2 2 Permanent Core LFIC 626 YA 2 2 Cylinder LFICLC Temp Core 26D MX 2 1 Threshold (flat saddle) 271A MSES25SS PE Set: 2.0 Doors: 100 (Storefront) Elevator Vestibule 1 Pivot Set (top and bottom) 147 626 RF 1 Intermediate Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Exit Device DG1 16 73 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 73 8204 TEMH US26D SA 1 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 1 Exit Device DG1 16 73 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 1 Threshold (flat saddle) 271A MSES25SS PE 1 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 1 Set: 3.0 Doors: 115A – French doors to back porch 3 Hinge (heavy weight) TA386-ET NRP US32D MK 2 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold (flat saddle) 271A MSES25SS x 72” PE 1 Gasketing (rigid jamb) 303AS TKSP8 PE 1 Door Bottom 220AV TKSP8 PE N O 6 Hinge TA314-ET NRP US32D MK 2 Storeroom Lock DG1 73 8204 TEMH US26D SA Note: Add extensions to threshold to extend full 12”. Set Threshold in bed of sealant. Set: 4.0 Doors: S3.1A - Exterior door from Stair 3 Hinge TA314-ET NRP US32D MK 1 Dormitory Lock DG1 73 8225 TEMH US26D SA 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 19 1 Threshold (thermal flat) 273x3AFG x LAR MSES25SS PE 1 Gasketing (rigid jamb) 303AS TKSP8 PE 1 Door Bottom 220AV TKSP8 PE Note: Add extensions to threshold to extend full 12”. Set Threshold in bed of sealant. Set: 5.0 Doors: 100 (Storefront) Entry to Elevator Vestibule 1 Pivot Set (top and bottom) 147 626 RF 1 Intermediate Pivot M19 626 RF 1 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 US32D RO 1 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO Note: Add extensions to threshold to extend full 12”. Set Threshold in bed of sealant. Set: 6.0 Doors: 114A - Double wood doors to front vestibule 6 Hinge (heavy weight) TA786-ET US26D MK 2 Exit Device DG1 73 8713 ETMH US32D SA 2 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 2 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO 2 Pull RO 147 US32D RO Set: 7.0 Doors: S1.2, S1.3, S3.1, S3.2, S3.3 – Doors to Stairs 3 Hinge (heavy weight) TA786-ET US26D MK 1 Exit Device (passage) 8815 ETMH US32D SA 1 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO 1 Gasketing (adhesive) S44BL PE Set: 8.0 Doors: 107, 108A, 118, 119, 206, 214, 215, 306, 313, 314 - Maintenance 6 Hinge TA714-ET US26D MK 1 Flush Bolt 555/557 (as needed) US26D RO 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 20 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 73 8204 TEMH US26D SA 2 Overhead Stop 10-X36 (surface) 630 RF 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO Set: 9.0 Doors: S1.1, S2.1 – Basement Stair 3 Hinge TA714-ET US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 73 8204 TEMH US26D SA 1 Door Closer (P)7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO 1 Gasketing (adhesive) S44BL PE Set: 10.0 Doors: 109 3 Hinge TA714-ET US26D MK 1 Office Lock DG1 73 8205 TEMH US26D SA 1 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO Set: 11.0 Doors: 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310 3 Hinge TA714-ET US26D MK 1 Dormitory Lock DG1 73 8225 TEMH US26D SA 1 Door Closer CPS7500 (stop arm) 689 NO 1 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO 1 Gasketing (adhesive) S44BL PE Set: 12.0 Doors: 108 – Public Bathroom 3 Hinge TA714-ET US26D MK 1 Privacy Set 8265 TEMH US26D SA 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 21 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO 1 Coat Hook RM802 US26D RO Set: 13.0 Doors: 106 – Laundry Room 3 Hinge TA714-ET US26D MK 1 Passage Set 8215 TEMH US26D SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO Set: 14.0 Doors: A1 1 Pocket Door Track PF28200A USD26D PE 1 Privacy Set 1074 Series ADA US26D TR Set: 15.0 Doors: A2 1 Sliding Door Hdwr LA Bi-Fold kit with floor boot LA 1 Handles 853 US26D RO Set: 16.0 Doors: A3, A5, A6 2 Sliding Door Hdwr LA Bi-Fold kit with floor boot LA 2 Handles 853 US26D RO END OF SECTION 087100 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 29 00-1 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide gypsum board assemblies: 1. Interior walls, partitions and ceilings with tape and joint compound finish. 2. Cementitious backer units for application of tile. 3. Installation of access panels in gypsum board assemblies. 4. Wall Construction Between Units: 2x6 wood studs with 2 layers of 5/8” Type C gypsum board on one side and 5/8” Type C gypsum board on 5/8” resilient channels on other side. Al joints to be sealed with acoustic sealant. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Tolerances: Not more than 1/16 inch difference in true plane at joints between adjacent boards before finishing. After finishing, joints shall be not be visible. Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet deviation from true plane, plumb, level and proper relation to adjacent surfaces in finished work. C. Fire Resistance for Fire-Rated Assemblies: ASTM E 119. D. Performance: Fire, structural, and seismic performance meeting requirements of building code and local authorities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers of Gypsum Board: Domtar Gypsum, Georgia-Pacific Corp., National Gypsum Co., United States Gypsum Co., or approved equal. B. Gypsum Board: 1. Gypsum Wallboard for Tape and Joint Compound Finish: ASTM C 36, regular, moisture-resistant, foil-backed, and fire-rated types as required: a. Typical Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Kitchen area walls, laundry room and Bathrooms: Non-paper faced, mold- resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630, regular and fire-rated types as required: a. Typical Thickness: 5/8 inch. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 29 00-2 3. Joint Treatment: ASTM C 475 and ASTM C 840, 3-coat system, paper or fiberglass tape. C. Cementitious Backer Units: 1. Type: ANSI A 118.9, cement-coated Portland cement panels. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch nominal. D. Trim Accessories: 1. Material: Metal or plastic trim. 2. Types: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints. E. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Gypsum board screws, ASTM C 1002. 2. Gypsum board nails, ASTM C 514. 3. Fastening adhesive. 4. Concealed acoustical sealant. 5. Mineral fiber sound attenuation blankets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wood framing in compliance with Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. Install with tolerances necessary to produce substrate for gypsum board assemblies with tolerances specified. Include blocking for items such as railings, grab bars, casework, toilet accessories and similar items. B. Install gypsum board for tape and 3-coat joint compound finish in compliance with ASTM C 840 and GA 216, Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. Install gypsum board assemblies true, plumb, level and in proper relation to adjacent surfaces. C. Provide fire-rated systems where indicated and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Install boards vertically. Do not allow butt-to-butt joints and joints that do not fall over framing members. E. Provide insulation full height and thickness in partitions at toilet rooms, between different occupancies, and where required. F. Provide acoustical sealant at both faces at top and bottom runner tracks, wall perimeters, openings, and control joints. G. Install trim in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. H. Repair surface defects. Leave ready for finish painting or wall treatment. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 1 SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications. 4. Crack isolation membrane. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 00 02 "Tile" for Trade Bid requirements. 2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 2 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 24 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Deliver 2 boxes of each type, composition and color, provide two extra thresholds installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish 2 bags of grout for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: A full unit mockup will be provided. Build tile mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 3 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof membrane and crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. B. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Stone thresholds. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 4 B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed porcelain tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. b. Daltile. c. Florida Tile, Inc. d. Seneca Tiles, Inc. 2. Basis of Design for Unit Bathroom Floors: Crossville, Color Blox. a. Face Size: 6 x 6 inches for floors. 6x12 inches for walls. b. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 3. Face: Plain with square edges. 4. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. See Room Finish Schedules and Finish Plans for range and quantity of colors and sizes required. 6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cap: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. External Corners: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. 2.4 THRESHOLDS A. Slate Thresholds: ASTM C 629/C 629M, Classification I Exterior, with fine, even grain and honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform stone and unfading, color as selected by Architect. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 5 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, which complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch nominal thickness. 2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.4 or better for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch nominal thickness. C. Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16-inch nominal thickness. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Schluter Systems L.P, DITRA. 2.7 SETTING MATERIALS A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. e. MAPEI Corporation. f. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 6 c. Custom Building Products. d. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. e. MAPEI Corporation. f. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 3. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.8 GROUT MATERIALS A. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. TEC / H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. B. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 7 a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. b. Custom Building Products. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 8 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 9 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Porcelain Tile at Common Areas: 3/16 inch. 2. Porcelain Tile at Unit Bathrooms: 3/16 inch. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in improved modified dry-set mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. J. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it. Demonstrate the testing to the Owner’s agent. C. Extend waterproofing membrane in unit bathrooms 6 inches up the walls, behind the gypsum wallboard and extend into the door opening under the threshold. D. CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION E. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. F. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 10 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 24 hours after grouting is completed. Provide protection sufficient to allow foot traffic after 24 hours. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113A; thinset mortar. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Porcelain Tile at Existing Concrete Floors. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Crack Isolation Membrane: Polyethylene Sheet. d. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout. 2. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F122A; thinset mortar on waterproof membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Porcelain Tile at Unit Bathrooms. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Standard unsanded grout. 3. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F128; On ground young concrete. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Porcelain Tile on new concrete. b. Bond Coat: Cementitious mortar. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RFI#1 Response CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 11 c. Uncoupling Membrane: Corrugated polyethylene. d. Grout: Cementitious grout. 4. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F131; water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy; epoxy grout. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Quarry Tile. b. Bond Coat: Epoxy mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION 09 30 13 Sergeant House RFI#1 Response February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD FLOORING 09 64 00 - 1 SECTION 09 64 00 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Factory-finished wood flooring. 2. Acoustic Pad Underlayment (to be installed on second and third floors, only). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor assembly and accessory. Include plans, sections, and attachment details. Include expansion provisions and trim details. A. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, approximately 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work and showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for wood flooring. Include Samples of accessories involving color and finish selection. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood flooring and accessory, with stain color and finish required, approximately 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work and showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Wood Flooring: Equal to 1 percent of amount installed for each type, color, and finish of wood flooring indicated. Sergeant House RFI#1 Response February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD FLOORING 09 64 00 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. A. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC- accredited certification body. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. A. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet-work is complete and dry. B. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weathertight location. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period. 1. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as, space where it is to be installed. a. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring into spaces in which it will be installed. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. B. Install factory-finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Sergeant House RFI#1 Response February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD FLOORING 09 64 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FloorScore Certification: Wood floors shall be certified under the RFCI FloorScore program. Floor finishes shall comply with requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1113, "Architectural Coatings." Low-Emitting Materials: Wood flooring system elements shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." A. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NWFA A500 for species, grade, and cut. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NWFA grade stamp on each bundle or piece. White Oak Flooring: Comply with applicable MFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut. Certification: Provide flooring that carries MFMA mark on each bundle or piece. Softwood Flooring: Comply with WCLIB No. 17 grading rules for species, grade, and cut. 2.2 FACTORY-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING Solid-Wood Flooring: Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content; tongue and groove and end matched; with backs channeled. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bellawood, Natural White Oak Flooring or comparable product by one of the following: a. Anderson Hardwood Floors. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Boen Hardwood Flooring Inc. d. Carlisle Wide Plank Floors. e. Kentucky Wood Floors. f. Yesteryear Floorworks Company. g. AAcer Flooring, LLC. Species: White Oak. 2. Grade: Natural. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches . 5. Lengths: Lengths required to form pattern indicated. 6. Edge Style: Square. 7. Finish: UV-cured urethane, low luster. 8. VOC content: Zero VOC floor finish at time of installation. Sergeant House RFI#1 Response February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD FLOORING 09 64 00 - 4 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. ACOUSTIC PAD UNDERLAYMENT (to be installed on second and third floors, only) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Proflex 90, 90 mil composite underlayment between wood flooring and plywood subfloor, consisting of a rubberized membrane laminated to a reinforcing fabric on top side and a silicone-based release sheet on its adhesive (bottom) side. a. Dimensions: 3 ft. x 33.3 ft. b. Thickness: 0.09 in. c. Weight: 64 lbs. d. Coverage: 100 s.f. e. Quantity per unit: 1 Roll f. STC Rating: 72 g. Impact Insulation Class (IIC) rating: 68 2. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. a. Perimeter expansion of 1/4” minimum must be maintained for warranty. b. Substrate must be primed with PROFLEX™ Primer (PR11 Water Based Primer). Protect Primers from freezing. c. Installation: Roll out product, measure and cut, then peel the protective backing and place. Use heavy roller to properly bond the sound control membrane to the sub-flooring. No waiting time for the installation of wood flooring is required. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS Wood Subfloor: 2 layers of 5/8” plywood, glued and screwed, on first floor where installed over new concrete slab. Float first layer of plywood over vapor barrier. Glue and screw second layer with offset joints. Install over vapor retarder. On second and third floors, install over 3/8” plywood underlayment on ¾” plywood subfloor. A. Vapor Retarder over new concrete slab: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene sheet not less than 8.0 mils thick. Tape all seams and ends. No penetrations. B. Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers for application indicated. VOC Content: Not more than 100 g/L. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement- based formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines." D. Thresholds and Saddles: To match wood flooring. Tapered on each side. Meet ADA and MAAB guidelines for maximum height and lip. Sergeant House RFI#1 Response February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD FLOORING 09 64 00 - 5 E. Transition/Reducer Strips: To match wood flooring. 2-3 inches wide, tapered, and in thickness required to match height of flooring. Meet ADA and MAAB guidelines for maximum height and lip. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Concrete Slabs: Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not install wood flooring less than 60 days from concrete pour. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. b. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3.2 PREPARATION Concrete Slabs: Grind high spots and fill low spots to produce a maximum 1/8-inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. 1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 2. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that are incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Sergeant House RFI#1 Response February 18, 2019 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WOOD FLOORING 09 64 00 - 6 3.3 INSTALLATION Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines." A. Wood Underlayment: Install according to requirements in Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing." B. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 3/4 inch. C. Vapor Retarder: Comply with the following for vapor retarder installation: Wood Flooring Nailed to Wood Subfloor over Concrete: Install a layer of polyethylene sheet over concrete slab according to flooring manufacturer's written instructions. D. Silicone Underlayment: Install under wood flooring per Manufacturer's instructions. Tape all seams and ends. No penetrations. E. Solid-Wood Flooring: Blind nail flooring to substrate. 3.4 PROTECTION Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered wood flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. 3.5 ATTIC STOCK A. Provide 250 sf of additional attic stock to match installed wood flooring. Store in location on-site, to be determined by Owner. END OF SECTION 09 64 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-1 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide resilient flooring and floor preparation. B. Schedule: 1. Common Areas: Polyester Composition Tile. See Section 096519, Polyester Composition Tile. 2. All Apartment Units (except bathrooms): Vinyl Plank (LVP) 3. Bathrooms: Sheet Vinyl. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. C. Extra Stock: Submit extra stock equal to 2% of total used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Performance: Fire performance meeting requirements of building code and local authorities. C. Provide materials and adhesives which do not contain asbestos. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Azrock Industries, Tarkett or approved equal. 2. Vinyl Composition Tile: ASTM F 1066, Composition 1, nonasbestos formulated: a. Class 1. 3. Size: 12 by 12 inches. 4. Thickness: 1/8 inch. B. Vinyl Plank Flooring: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-2 1. Manufacturers: Shaw Industries Group, Inc. Largo Floorte Plank or approved equal. 2. Sheet Vinyl with Backing: ASTM F 1303: a. EVP - Residential. 3. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 4. Plank: 7.99” x 72”. C. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: 1. Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Rejuvenations Ambigu or approved equal. 2. Sheet Vinyl with Backing: ASTM F 1303: a. Commercial grade. 3. Wearing Surface: Smooth, wood visual. 4. Seams: Heat welded. D. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Edge strips and terminations. 2. Leveling compound. 3. Adhesives: Use only low-VOC adhesive products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Install in proper relation to adjacent work. B. Prepare surfaces by cleaning, leveling and priming as required. Test adhesive for bond before general installation. Level to 1/8" in 10' tolerance. C. Tile Flooring: Install tile with tight joints and with one-way pattern. Layout to prevent less than 1/2 tile units. D. Sheet Flooring: Install sheets with tight joints and pattern in adjoining areas running in the same direction. Layout to minimize seams as approved. Coordinate location of seams with Architect and heat weld. Caulk all seams to plumbing fixtures and wall base. E. Clean, polish, and protect. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13-1 SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide resilient wall base and accessories in kitchens and bathrooms. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. C. Submit extra stock equal to 2% of total used. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Performance: Fire performance meeting requirements of building code and local authorities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: AFCO Rubber Corp., Johnsonite, Roppe, VPI Floor Products, or approved equal. B. Resilient Wall Base: 1. Vinyl Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, Type II. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inches thick. 3. Height: 4 inches. C. Installation Accessories: 1. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type. 2. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland- cement-based formulation. 3. Stair Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound. 4. Adhesives: Water-resistant type. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Install in proper relation to adjacent work. B. Install base and accessories to minimize joints. Install base with joints as far from corners as practical. C. Install 4” vinyl base at base of all Kitchen and Bathroom cabinerts. D. Clean, polish, and protect. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-1 SECTION 09 65 19 - POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING Part 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flooring and accessories as shown on the drawings and schedules and as indicated by the requirements of this section. B. Related Documents 1. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.02 References A. Armstrong Technical Manuals 1. Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source 2. ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring 3. ASTM F 1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring 4. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 5. ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 6. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes 7. ASTM F 2982 Standard Specification for Polyester Composition Floor Tile 1.03 System Description A. Performance Requirements: Provide flooring which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to performance criteria certified by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure. B. Administrative Requirements 1. Pre-installation Testing: Conduct pre-installation testing as follows: a. Moisture test and pH test on concrete substrate. C. Sequencing and Scheduling 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-2 1. Install flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring. 2. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until they are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended bond, moisture tests and pH test. 1.04 Submittals A. Tech Data Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, coving details, and manufacturer's technical data, installation and maintenance instructions (latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061. for flooring and accessories. B. Samples Submit the manufacturer's standard samples showing the required colors for flooring and applicable accessories. C. MSDS Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) available for flooring products, adhesives, patching/leveling compounds, floor finishes (polishes) and cleaning agents. D. Closeout Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Responsibility Single-Source Responsibility: provide types of flooring and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives. B. Select Installer Select an installer who is competent in the installation of Armstrong resilient polyester composition tile flooring. 1. Engage installers certified as Armstrong Commercial Certified Installers C. Fire Performance Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient composition tile flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class I 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-3 2. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less 1.06 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Comply-D1 Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections B. Comply-Manufacturer Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Deliverability Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. D. Storage Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. 1.07 Project Conditions A. Temperature Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65°F (18°C) and a maximum temperature of 100°F (38°C) for at least 48 hours before, during, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55°F (13°C) in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances. Refer to the Armstrong Guaranteed Installations Systems manual, F-5061 for a complete guide on project conditions. 1.08 Warranty A. Resilient Resilient Flooring: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace resilient flooring that fails within the warranty period. B. Warranty Period Warranty Period: 5 years C. Rights The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-4 concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Validation For the Warranty to be valid, this product is required to be installed using the appropriate Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System. Product installed not using the specific instructions from the Guaranteed Installation System will void the warranty. 1.09 Maintenance A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package extra material with protective covering for storage and identify with appropriate labels. 1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of flooring units equal to 5% of each color installed. 2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with owner’s requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra material. Part 2- Products Specifier Note 2.01 Manufacturer A. Company Resilient tile flooring, wall base, adhesives and accessories: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., 2500 Columbia Avenue, Lancaster, PA 17603, http://www.armstrong.com/commflooringna/ 2.02 Resilient Sheet Flooring Materials A. Products Provide : BioBased Tile® with BioStride® Flooring manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 1. Description: Tile Plank composed of polyester resin binder, fillers and pigments with colors and pattern dispersed uniformly throughout its thickness. 2. BioBased Tile shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 2982 Standard Specification for Polyester Composition Floor Tile. Note: STRIATIONS BBT® and MIGRATIONS® unique binder systems does not contain polyvinyl chloride resins and plasticizers. Striations - Java - 24 x 12 x 1/8 Striations – Forest Floor - 24 x 12 x 1/8 Striations - Tea Time - 24 x 12 x 1/8 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-5 2.03 Wall Base Materials A. WBA Top Set For top set wall base: Provide 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) thick, 4 in. (10.16 cm) high Armstrong Color-Integrated Wall Base with a matte finish, conforming to ASTM F 1861, Type TV - Vinyl, Thermoplastic, Group 1 – Solid, Style B - Cove. 2.04 Adhesives A. Full Spread For Tile Installation System, Full Spread: Provide Armstrong S-525 Clear Thin Spread BioBased Tile Adhesive under the tile and Armstrong S-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. B. High Moisture For Tile High-Moisture Installation Warranty, Full Spread: Provide Armstrong S-525 Clear Thin Spread BioBased Tile Adhesive under the tile and Armstrong S-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. 2.05 Accessories A. Patching For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete), provide Armstrong S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment. B. Sealing For sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Transition Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials. D. Threshold Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings. E. Resilient Edge Strips Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available. Part 3 - Execution 3.01 Manufacturer's Instructions A. Compliance 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-6 Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation and maintenance procedures as needed. 3.02 Examination A. Site Verification Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. moisture tests, pH test). B. Visual Inspection Visually inspect flooring materials, adhesives and accessories prior to installation. Flooring material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim. C. Examine Subfloors Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material. D. Inspect Subfloors Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew. E. Reporting Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. F. Failure Warning Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation. 3.03 Preparation A. Smooth Surfaces Subfloor Preparation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with Armstrong S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Refer to Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring for additional information on subfloor preparation. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-7 B. Subfloor Cleaning Subfloor Cleaning: Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents. Refer to the Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring for additional information on subfloor preparation. C. Standard Moisture Test Moisture Testing: Perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F 2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in- situ Probes or ASTM F 1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride and Bond Tests as described in publication Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained. D. pH Test Concrete pH Testing: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of their age or grade level. All test results shall be documented and retained. E. Wood Subfloor Wood subfloors: 1. Refer to the Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061 and ASTM F 1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring for additional information. F. Surface Cleaning Surface Cleaning: Vacuum or broom-clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials. 3.04 Installation of Flooring A. F5061 Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061. Failure to comply may result in voiding the manufacturer's warranty listed in Section 1.08 B. Wall-to-Wall Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings. C. Pan-type 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-8 If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers. D. Scribe Scribe, cut, and fit to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in furniture and cabinets. E. Adhesive When installing tile be sure that all tile is firmly seated into the adhesive. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams. Roll with a 100-pound (45.36 kilogram) roller in the field areas. Hand-roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams to assure adhesion. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer. F. Tools Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times. 3.05 Installation of Accessories A. Top Set Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped. Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. B. Voids Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates. C. Resilient Edge Strips - Butted Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring, and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.06 Cleaning A. Initial Maintainance Perform initial and on-going maintenance according to the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061. 3.07 Protection A. Protection 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. POLYESTER COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING 09 65 19-9 Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. (See Finishing the Job in the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems manual, F-5061.) END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing February 14, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 1 SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes modular carpet tile for walk-off mats. A. Related Requirements: Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. a. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. b. Review subfloor preparation procedures. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 1. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. Sustainable Design Submittals: Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For flooring products, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 14, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 2 Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following: Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern of installation. 8. Pattern type, location, and direction. 9. Pile direction. 10. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 11. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 12. Transition details to other flooring materials. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 13. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of carpet tile. Include Samples of exposed edge, transition, and other accessory stripping involving color or finish selection. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 14. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. B. Sustainable Product Certification: Provide ANSI/NSF 140 certification for carpet products. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For Installer. A. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 14, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 3 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 1. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.11 WARRANTY Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 14, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 4 Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. a. Dimensional instability. b. Excess static discharge. c. Loss of tuft-bind strength. d. Loss of face fiber. e. Delamination. Warranty Period: Lifetime Warranty from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE: ENTRY CARPET – In Elevator Vestibule, In Vestibule 114 at front door and as a 4’x6’ inlay in LVT inside both exterior doors of Common Area 116, as shown on Sheet A-101. A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC., Lees Tuff Stuff II, First Step II Tile Walk Off B. Color: As chosen by Architect from full color range.. C. Pattern: Quarter Turn. D. Fiber Type: Duracolor Premium Nylon. E. Pile Characteristic: Performance loop pile. F. Density: 6739 oz./cu. yd. G. Pile Thickness: .203-inches for finished carpet tile according to ASTM D 6859. H. Stitches: 8.5 stitches per inch. I. Gage: 5/32 ends per inch. J. Face Weight: 38 oz./sq. yd. K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: EcoFlex ICT. L. Size: 24 by 24 inches. M. Applied Treatments:Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 14, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 5 Sustainable Design Requirements: Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." Performance Characteristics: Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 3.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 1. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. A. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 1. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. A. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 14, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 6 a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. b. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile. A. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. B. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. C. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. A. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. C. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 82 Bridge Street Housing February 14, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 7 E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 2. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations." B. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 3.5 EXTRA STOCK 1. Extra Stock: Submit 50% of square footage of carpet tiles in place for extra stock to Owner. Carpet shall be new, in boxes and signed off by Owner’s representative on site. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 1 SECTION 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Fiber-cement board siding and panels. 2. Fly Ash Trim 3. Steel and iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Plastic. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 20 00 "Finish Carpentry" for priming and painting interior architectural woodwork. 2. Section 06 40 00 “Architectural Woodwork” for priming and painting of exterior Woodwork. 3. Section 06 66 20 “Manufactured Trim” for priming and painting urethane trim and architectural components. 4. Section 06 65 00 “Poly-Ash Siding” for treatment of factory-primed exterior trim. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 5 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 3 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Behr Process Corporation. 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. California Paints. 3. Conco Paints. 4. Coronado Paint; Benjamin Moore Company. 5. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel. 6. Duron, Inc. 7. Glidden Professional. 8. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc. 9. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 10. Pratt & Lambert. 11. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. 12. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 13. Zinsser; Rust-Oleum Corporation. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 4 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For field applications, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Twenty percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. A. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 1. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 2. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. B. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. C. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: SSPC-SP 3. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 6 Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 7 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Cement Board Substrates: Latex System MPI EXT 3.3J: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. CMU Substrates: Latex System MPI EXT 4.2A: e. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. f. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 - 8 Steel and Iron Substrates: Water-Based Light Industrial Coating SystemMPI EXT 5.1C: Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. h. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #161. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Latex System MPI EXT 5.3H: Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. i. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. j. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Latex System MPI EXT 6.8A: k. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. l. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. 3.7 FINISH SCHEDULE A. See Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting for Finish Schedule END OF SECTION 09 91 13 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1 SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 1. Steel and iron. 2. Wood. 3. Gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming structural steel. 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. Sustainable Design Submittals: Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 5 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Behr Process Corporation. 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. California Paints. 3. Coronado Paint; Benjamin Moore Company. 4. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel. 5. Duron, Inc. 6. Glidden Professional. 7. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc. 8. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 9. Pratt & Lambert. 10. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. 11. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 12. Zinsser; Rust-Oleum Corporation. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. VOC content: Use only no-VOC paints at interior applications. D. Low-Emitting Materials: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, 90 percent of paints and coatings shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Twenty percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. 2. Colors: Assume one wall color, one trim color and one door frame color per floor. Window sills and aprons shall be one color throughout. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 1. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 2. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. A. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 2. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. B. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. C. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6 SSPC-SP 3. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. D. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work where exposed on first, second and third floors: Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: Equipment, including panelboards. a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 7 d. Metal conduit. e. Plastic conduit. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Other items as directed by Architect. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE CMU Substrates: Latex System MPI INT 4.2A: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. Steel Substrates: 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 8 Latex System, Alkyd Primer MPI INT 5.1Q: d. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. e. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and Doors. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI INT 6.3T: g. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. h. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. Gypsum Board Substrates: Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M: j. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. k. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. l. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. For all walls in units except kitchens and bathrooms. For all public spaces, except restrooms and community room. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. For kitchens and bathrooms in units. For restrooms and community room. 3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Drywall Walls – All walls, except as noted below: 1. Gloss: a. Eggshell 2. System: a. 1 coat latex primer b. 2 coats latex finish B. Gypsum Drywall Walls and Ceilings in Bathrooms, Kitchens and Wet Areas: 1. Gloss: a. Semi 2. Characteristic: a. Anti-mildew 3. System: a. 1 coat latex primer 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 9 b. 2 coats latex finish C. Gypsum Drywall Ceilings: 1. Gloss: a. Flat 2. System: a. 1 coat latex primer b. 2 coats latex finish D. Wood for Painted Finish: 1. Gloss: a. High Gloss 2. System: a. 1 coat interior alkyd enamel undercoat b. 2 coats alkyd enamel E. Exterior Wood and engineered trim for Painted Finish: 1. Gloss: a. Flat 2. System: a. 1 coat exterior primer b. 2 coats latex enamel F. Ferrous Metals: 1. Gloss: a. Semi 2. System: a. 1 coat rust-inhibiting primer b. 2 coats alkyd enamel G. Galvanized Metal: 1. Gloss: a. Semi 2. System: a. 1 coat galvanized metal primer b. 2 coats alkyd enamel H. Urethane Ornamental Trim: 1. Gloss: a. Semi 2. System: a. 2 coats paint type recommended by Trim Manufacturer I. END OF SECTION 09 91 23 Highland Woods September 8, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 100% Conformed Set SIGNAGE 101400 - 1 SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Dimensional characters. 2. Panel signs. 3. Apartment numbers. 4. Construction Project Identification Sign 5. Permanent Project Sign B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs. 2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 3. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. 4. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 5. Division 14 Section 142400 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS for code-required elevator signage. 6. Division 26 Section 260001 - ELECTRICAL WORK for illuminated exit signs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." B. MAAB: Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Regulations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Highland Woods September 8, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 100% Conformed Set SIGNAGE 101400 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following: 1. Acrylic sheet. 2. Polycarbonate sheet. D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1 and MAAB. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Highland Woods September 8, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 100% Conformed Set SIGNAGE 101400 - 3 a. Deterioration of polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). B. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating: 1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. per ASTM D 256, Method A. 2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 638. 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 790. 4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F at 264 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 648. 5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division 2. A. R. K. Ramos. 3. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 4. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 5. Charleston Industries, Inc. 6. Gemini Incorporated. 7. Grimco, Inc. 8. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 9. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 10. Mills Manufacturing Company. 11. Mohawk Sign Systems. 12. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 13. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 14. Southwell Company (The). B. Cast Numbers for Building Addresses and Apartment Unit Numbers: 1. Finish: Acrylic urethane enamel, colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 2. Material: Cast aluminum. 3. Schedule: Highland Woods September 8, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 100% Conformed Set SIGNAGE 101400 - 4 a. Address letters and numbers for building in one location: Metal Arts #106 Helvetica Medium, 8” high. 1) Assume 13 letters and 2 numbers. 2.3 PANEL SIGNS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 3. Allen Industries Architectural Signage 4. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 5. APCO Graphics, Inc. 6. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 7. Best Sign Systems Inc. 8. Gemini Incorporated. 9. Grimco, Inc. 10. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 11. InPro Corporation 12. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 13. Mills Manufacturing Company. 14. Mohawk Sign Systems. 15. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 16. Seton Identification Products. 17. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 18. Supersine Company (The) B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. Melamine plastic laminate sheet, 1/8 inch thick with contrasting core color. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Rounded to ½” radius. 4. Mounting: Unframed. a. Wall mounted with two-face tape. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Tactile Characters: Characters in Helvetica and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors. a. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. C. Panel Sign Schedule: Highland Woods September 8, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 100% Conformed Set SIGNAGE 101400 - 5 1. Sign Sizes: a. Room function signs: 2” x length as required. b. Restroom signs: 8” x 8” with 4” accessibility symbol, gender symbol and verbal description placed directly below followed by Grade 2 Braille. 2. Sign Schedule (# of signs required): 1) Property Manager 2) Laundry 3) Bathroom 4) Exit Stair (6 5) Utility Room (2) 6) Maintenance (7) 7) Elevator Machine Room 8) Sergeant House Common Room 9) In addition, provide one 4” accessibility symbols, at each floor of the building’s elevator. D. Construction Identification Sign a. Provide 4’x8’ MDO sign, painted all sides and edges in white with letters and graphics provided by Architect. Assume 200 - 6” black painted letters and 6 painted graphic logos, approximately 12” square, each. Each with 3 color graphics. b. Secure in ground with 2 Pressure treated posts, 4’ minimum into grade with base of 24” of concrete from 4’-6’ deep. Top of sign shall be 8’ above grade. E. Permanent Project Sign a. Provide 3’x5’ MDO sign, painted all sides and edges in white with letters and graphics provided by Architect. Trim edges with 1x2 PVC trim. Assume 40 - 12” black painted letters, 30 - 6” black painted letters and 2 painted graphic logos, approximately 12” square, each. Each with 3 color graphics. b. Secure in ground with 2 Pressure treated posts, 4’ minimum into grade with base of 24” of concrete from 4’-6’ deep. Provide decorative caps on posts. Top of sign shall be 5’ above grade. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.5 FABRICATION Highland Woods September 8, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 100% Conformed Set SIGNAGE 101400 - 6 A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. Highland Woods September 8, 2014 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 100% Conformed Set SIGNAGE 101400 - 7 1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 2. Provide threaded aluminum studs, set with non-staining cement. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101400 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 SECTION 102800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Private-use bathroom accessories. 3. Custodial accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for blocking required for mounting of accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. 2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 5224. 2. Description: Vandal resistant, double-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface. 4. Operation: Controlled delivery. 5. Capacity: Designed for 4-inch-diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Bright polished chrome plated steel. B. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 2252. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Semi-recessed. a. Designed for nominal 6-inch wall depth. 4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 400 C-fold. 5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 4.9 gal. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner: Reusable, molded plastic waste-receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle. C. Grab Bars: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 812. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. D. Mirror with Shelf Unit: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 7805. 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Integral Shelf: 5 inches deep. 4. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 5. Size: As indicated on Drawings. E. Robe Hook: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9118. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Polished chrome-plated brass. 2.4 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 510. 2. Description: Single-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Operation: Non-control delivery with standard spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for 4-inch-diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Bright polished chrome plated steel. B. Shower Curtain Rod: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9531. 2. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. 3. Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners. 4. Rod Material and Finish: 22 gauge stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Material and Finish: Bright polished chrome plated steel. C. Medicine Cabinet: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9661. 2. Mounting: Recessed, for nominal 4-inch wall depth. 3. Size: 18 by 24 inches. 4. Door: Plain front metal door concealing storage cabinet equipped with continuous hinge and spring-buffered, rod-type stop and magnetic door catch. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5 5. Shelves: Three, adjustable. 6. Material and Finish: a. Cabinet: Polystyrene. b. Door: Enameled steel. c. Hinge: Stainless steel. d. Shelves: Polystyrene. D. Robe Hook: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9118. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Polished chrome-plated brass. E. Towel Bars: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 908. 2. Description: 1-inch- round tube with circular end brackets. 3. Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners. 4. Length: As indicated on the Drawings. 5. Towel Bar Material and Finish: 18 gauge stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Support Posts Material and Finish: Heavy cast brass, chrome plated to satin finish. F. Frameless Mirror: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 747. 2. Mirror Glass: ¼” float glass, triple silver plated with electro-copper plated layer and thermosetting infrared cured paint backing. Edges ground and polished smooth. 3. Installation: Metal mounting clips screwed to wall, then mirror mounted to clips. 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products or comparable product in each room designated as Maintenance Room (one per floor) by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. B. Mop and Broom Holder: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 9934 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 6 3. Length: 44 inches. 4. Hooks: Five. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: 18 gauge stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULES A. Public Use Washrooms – Provide one of each of the following for the two (2) public restrooms in the Community Building: 1. Grab bars: (1) 36” and (1) 42” 2. Mirror with shelf. 3. Combination towel dispenser and waste disposal unit. 4. Robe hook. 5. Toilet paper dispenser. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 7 B. Private Use Bathrooms (Non-Handicapped Accessible) – Provide one of each of the following for the new units: 1. Mirror. 2. Robe hook. 3. Medicine cabinet. 4. Toilet paper dispenser. 5. Towel bars: (1) 30” and (1) 18” 6. Shower curtain rod C. New Private Use Bathrooms (Handicapped Accessible) – Provide one of each of the following handicapped accessible bathrooms: 1. Mirror. 2. Robe hook. 3. Medicine cabinet. 4. Toilet paper dispenser. 5. Towel bars: (1) 24” and (1) 36” 6. Grab bars: (1) 36” and (1) 42” 7. Shower curtain rod D. Maintenance Office and each room designated as Maintenance Room (one per floor): Provide one of each of the following: 1. Mop and broom holder with shelf. END OF SECTION 102800 ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 1 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10 55 00.13 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cluster Box Units. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal anchors. B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.3 REFERENCES A. United States Postal Service (USPS): 1. USPS-B-1118: United States Postal Service Standard, Cluster Box Units. 2. USPS PUBLICATION 16. B. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (ATBCB): Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and Facilities. C. IBC - International Building Code. D. ASTM A 666 - Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar. E. ASTM B 209 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM B 221 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions and finishes. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of mailboxes and interface with other products. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 2 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. A. Comply with USPS-B-1118 Specification. B. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect the materials upon delivery to ensure that specified products have been received. B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. C. Handle materials to prevent damage or marring of finish. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Salsbury Industries, 1010 East 62nd Street; Los Angeles, CA 90001-1598; Toll Free Tel: 800-MAILBOX (800-624-5269); Email: salsbury@mailboxes.com; Web: www.mailboxes.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 CLUSTER BOX UNITS A. Front-Loading Outdoor Mailboxes: USPS approved Cluster Box Unit (CBU); aluminum with one outgoing mail slot. 360 degree wrapped hinges on all doors. Tenant doors equipped with five-pin cylinder lock cam with dust and rain shield. F-Spec as manufactured by Salsbury Industries. 1. Model: 3300 Series (Provide Two) a. Model 3316, Type III: 16 compartments, 1 outgoing mail receptacle, 2 parcel lockers. 2. Cabinet: 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick welded aluminum sheet. 3. Doors: Minimum 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick aluminum, with stainless steel hardware and hinges. 4. Locks: 5-pin cylinder cam lock with spring-loaded cover on each unit, 3 keys each lock; USPS-1172 910B lock. 5. Pedestal: Model 3385 for Types III and IV; 14.5 inches (368 mm) high. 6. Finish: Powder coated. a. Color: As chosen by architect from full range of standard colors. 7. Box Identifications: Self-adhesive with black text on silver background; weather resistant. 2.3 ACCESSORIES ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 3 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. A. Key Cabinet : Wall-mounted, metallic-coated steel cabinet with pivoting, key-holding panels and side-hinged door equipped with five-pin tumbler, cylinder-door lock and concealed, full-length flush hinge. Finish cabinet, panels, and door with baked-enamel or powder-coated finish. Key-control system consisting of key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. Cabinet to be installed in Building Manager's Office. 1. Capacity: Keys for 150 percent of the number of mail-receptacle locks. 2. Cross-Index System: Consisting of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. 3. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment. B. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. C. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. D. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. E. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible without distorting or discoloring exposed surfaces. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces. F. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support loads. G. Where dissimilar metals contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 4 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that cast concrete pads are correctly located, aligned, and sized for mailboxes. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align, plumb, and level; anchor in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. C. Final acceptance of postal specialties served by the USPS depends on compliance with USPS requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces with mild dish detergent. Do not use harsh abrasive cleaners. Lubricate locks with graphite type lubricants only. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Take care to protect finishes during installation and construction process. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 1 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10 55 00.13 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cluster Box Units. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal anchors. B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.3 REFERENCES A. United States Postal Service (USPS): 1. USPS-B-1118: United States Postal Service Standard, Cluster Box Units. 2. USPS PUBLICATION 16. B. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (ATBCB): Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and Facilities. C. IBC - International Building Code. D. ASTM A 666 - Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar. E. ASTM B 209 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM B 221 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions and finishes. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of mailboxes and interface with other products. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 2 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. A. Comply with USPS-B-1118 Specification. B. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect the materials upon delivery to ensure that specified products have been received. B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. C. Handle materials to prevent damage or marring of finish. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Salsbury Industries, 1010 East 62nd Street; Los Angeles, CA 90001-1598; Toll Free Tel: 800-MAILBOX (800-624-5269); Email: salsbury@mailboxes.com; Web: www.mailboxes.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 CLUSTER BOX UNITS A. Front-Loading Outdoor Mailboxes: USPS approved Cluster Box Unit (CBU); aluminum with one outgoing mail slot. 360 degree wrapped hinges on all doors. Tenant doors equipped with five-pin cylinder lock cam with dust and rain shield. F-Spec as manufactured by Salsbury Industries. 1. Model: 3300 Series (Provide Two) a. Model 3316, Type III: 16 compartments, 1 outgoing mail receptacle, 2 parcel lockers. 2. Cabinet: 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick welded aluminum sheet. 3. Doors: Minimum 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick aluminum, with stainless steel hardware and hinges. 4. Locks: 5-pin cylinder cam lock with spring-loaded cover on each unit, 3 keys each lock; USPS-1172 910B lock. 5. Pedestal: Model 3385 for Types III and IV; 14.5 inches (368 mm) high. 6. Finish: Powder coated. a. Color: As chosen by architect from full range of standard colors. 7. Box Identifications: Self-adhesive with black text on silver background; weather resistant. 2.3 ACCESSORIES ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 3 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. A. Key Cabinet : Wall-mounted, metallic-coated steel cabinet with pivoting, key-holding panels and side-hinged door equipped with five-pin tumbler, cylinder-door lock and concealed, full-length flush hinge. Finish cabinet, panels, and door with baked-enamel or powder-coated finish. Key-control system consisting of key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. Cabinet to be installed in Building Manager's Office. 1. Capacity: Keys for 150 percent of the number of mail-receptacle locks. 2. Cross-Index System: Consisting of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. 3. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs and safe to touch. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment. B. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. C. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. D. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. E. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible without distorting or discoloring exposed surfaces. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces. F. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support loads. G. Where dissimilar metals contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by applying other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. ADDENDA #1 USPS-DELIVERY POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 55 00.13 - 4 82 Bridge Street Housing October 12, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that cast concrete pads are correctly located, aligned, and sized for mailboxes. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align, plumb, and level; anchor in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. C. Final acceptance of postal specialties served by the USPS depends on compliance with USPS requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces with mild dish detergent. Do not use harsh abrasive cleaners. Lubricate locks with graphite type lubricants only. 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Take care to protect finishes during installation and construction process. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-1 SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide appliances as specified herein. B. Provide appliances that meet Energy Star V5.0 specifications, only. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. Include labor and materials to repair or replace defective materials. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All appliances shall be Energy Star rated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Frigidaire Co., GE Appliances, KitchenAid Inc., Whirlpool Corp., Maytag Co., Avanti, as applicable or approved equal. B. Energy Efficiency: All appliances shall be EnergyStar rated. C. Kitchen Appliances – standard apartment unit: 1. Ranges, electric: Avanti ER24P1BG or approved equal. 24 inch width, four burners, coil type, glass oven door, oven light. 2. Range hoods/microwave: Haier, HMV1472BHS, 24" Over the Range Microwave with 300 CFM and Glass Touch Controls - Stainless Steel, set for recirculation. 3. Refrigerator/freezers: LG, Model: LTNC11121V, Large Capacity 24” Wide Compact Top-Mount Refrigerator, refrigerator/freezer. Capacity: 11.0 cu. Ft. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 31 00-2 D. Kitchen Appliances – ADA accessible units: 1. Cooktop: Summit, CR4B23T, smoothtop, 4 burner Cooktop, electric with front controls. 2. Range hood: Broan, F40000 Series, 24-inch 2-speed 4-way Convertible Under-cabinet Range Hood, set to recirculate, with controls mounted on counter edge by electrician. 3. Refrigerator/freezer: Whirlpool, Model# WRS325SDHB, 36” side by side. 4. Wall Oven: Whirlpool, Model # WOS11EM4EB, single electric wall oven, mounted in cabinet to meet MAAB regulation height for controls and bottom of oven. 5. Microwave: Counter top, Toshiba EM925A5A-BS Microwave Oven with Sound On/Off ECO Mode and LED Lighting, 0.9 Cu.ft, Black Stainless. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WINDOW TREATMENTS 12 21 13-1 SECTION 12 21 13 WINDOW TREATMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WINDOW TREATMENTS 12 21 13-2 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Basis of design is Delux Fabric Roller Shade by Blindster Inc with chain operated shade. B. Equivalents: Subject to compliance with all material and performance requirements outlined in these specifications, “or equal” products by other manufacturers will be considered for use subject to review by the Architect. The Architect’s decision regarding equivalency is final. 1. Hunter Douglas Inc. 2. Levolor; Levolor-Kirsch Window Fashions; a Newell Rubbermaid Company. C. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. D. Shade Operation: Manual; with spring roller lift operator. 1. Pull: Manufacturer's standard hand-grip or finger-ring engaged pull . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30-1 SECTION 12 35 30 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Summary of Work: 1. Wood faced kitchen cabinets 2. Wood faced vanity cabinets 3. Plastic laminate countertops 4. Plastic laminate backsplash between countertop and cabinets on kitchen sink wall 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Standards: KCMA A161.11. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Member of Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association. B. Manufacturer: Naples, Shaker Style cabinets, by Express Kitchens, or architect- approved equal. C. Casework: 1. Materials – exposed face: Solid wood, maple. 2. Materials – drawers and cabinet bodies: ½ inch thick veneer plywood. 3. Construction: Solid wood and plywood construction. 4. Face Style: Reveal overlay. 5. Frame Fabrication: Face frame. ¼” back panel acceptable. 6. Finish: Walnut stain, sealer coat, and two coats polyurethane topcoat. 7. Finish Application: Factory-finished. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12 35 30-2 8. Hardware: Contemporary style wire pulls. Six-way adjustable heavy duty steel concealed hinges. Undermount, epoxy-coated steel drawer glides with nylon rollers. D. Countertops: 1. Materials: Plastic laminate with marine grade plywood substrate. 2. Front Profile: Rolled. 3. Backsplash: Integral cove. 4. Sidesplash: Loose, square edge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 1 SECTION 12 36 23.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes plastic-laminate countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other items installed in plastic-laminate countertops. 1. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. Samples for Initial Selection: Plastic laminates. Samples for Verification: Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. A. Product Certificates: For each type of product. Plywood. 1. High-pressure decorative laminate. 2. Adhesives. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. A. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that countertops, including installation, comply with requirements of grades specified. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 3 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. Grade: Custom. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Abet Laminati, Inc. a. Formica Corporation. b. Lamin-Art, Inc. c. Panolam Industries International, Inc. d. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: Solid colors, matte finish. e. Patterns, matte finish. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. Edge Treatment: As indicated on drawings. C. Core Material: Exterior-grade Marine plywood. D. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 4 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 1. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 2. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 3. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2.4 FABRICATION Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 5 A. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. A. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. B. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. C. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 1. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.. 2. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. Do not surface apply sealant; set material into sealant bed and wipe clean. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. A. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 6 END OF SECTION 12 36 23.13 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 1 SECTION 12 36 23.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes plastic-laminate countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other items installed in plastic-laminate countertops. 1. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. Samples for Initial Selection: Plastic laminates. Samples for Verification: Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. A. Product Certificates: For each type of product. Plywood. 1. High-pressure decorative laminate. 2. Adhesives. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. A. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that countertops, including installation, comply with requirements of grades specified. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 3 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. Grade: Custom. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Abet Laminati, Inc. a. Formica Corporation. b. Lamin-Art, Inc. c. Panolam Industries International, Inc. d. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: Solid colors, matte finish. e. Patterns, matte finish. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. Edge Treatment: As indicated on drawings. C. Core Material: Exterior-grade Marine plywood. D. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 4 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 1. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 2. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 3. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2.4 FABRICATION Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 5 A. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. A. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. B. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. C. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 1. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.. 2. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. Do not surface apply sealant; set material into sealant bed and wipe clean. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. A. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 - 6 END OF SECTION 12 36 23.13 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 1 SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS - REVISED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: Solid surface material bathroom vanities with integral sinks. 1. Solid surface material window sills. Related Requirements: Section 06 20 23 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for installation of solid surface window sills. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. A. Sustainable Design Submittals: Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content. 1. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products: Countertop material, 6 inches square. 1. One full-size solid surface material countertop with integral sink, front edge and backsplash, of construction and in configuration specified. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. 1.7 COORDINATION Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS Solid Surface Material: Compression molded compound consisting of a blend of polymerresins, fillers and reinforcement additives. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Swanstone or comparable product by one of the following: Avonite Surfaces. a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. b. Formica Corporation. c. LG Chemical, Ltd. d. Meganite Inc. e. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc. f. Swan Corporation (The). g. Transolid Div of Trumbull Industries. h. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 3 2.2 COUNTERTOP AND INTEGRAL SINK FABRICATION Fabricate countertops with integral sinks according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Configuration: Front: 1-inch deep bullnose. 1. Backsplash: 3-inch high, straight, slightly eased at corner. 2. Side Splash: Matching backsplash. Countertops: 1-inch- thick, solid surface material. B. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material. C. Integral Sink: Provide Swanstone Contour style sink. D. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. Fabricate with loose sidesplashes for field assembly. 1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. Cutouts and Holes: Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 2.3 WINDOW SILL FABRICATION Material: HiMacs solid surface, 1/2 inch thick. Basis-of-Design: Window Sills Direct, sales@windowsillsdirect.com A. Locations: Provide at all window sills and at sills of storefront at Elevator Vestibule.. Configuration: Single round over with radiused top edge, straight bottom edge, with 1 inch extension from the face of wall finish and 1 inch radiused drop. Provide 1” dog ear extensions on either side of gypsum wallboard opening. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 4 Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. B. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. C. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. D. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. E. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 5 F. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. Set products in sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." Do not apply sealant after installation of countertops or windows sills. Set in sealant and field wipe excess sealant at junctions. END OF SECTION 12 36 61.16 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 1 SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS - REVISED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: Solid surface material bathroom vanities with integral sinks. 1. Solid surface material window sills. Related Requirements: Section 06 20 23 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for installation of solid surface window sills. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. A. Sustainable Design Submittals: Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content. 1. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products: Countertop material, 6 inches square. 1. One full-size solid surface material countertop with integral sink, front edge and backsplash, of construction and in configuration specified. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. 1.7 COORDINATION Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS Solid Surface Material: Compression molded compound consisting of a blend of polymerresins, fillers and reinforcement additives. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Swanstone or comparable product by one of the following: Avonite Surfaces. a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. b. Formica Corporation. c. LG Chemical, Ltd. d. Meganite Inc. e. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc. f. Swan Corporation (The). g. Transolid Div of Trumbull Industries. h. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 3 2.2 COUNTERTOP AND INTEGRAL SINK FABRICATION Fabricate countertops with integral sinks according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Configuration: Front: 1-inch deep bullnose. 1. Backsplash: 3-inch high, straight, slightly eased at corner. 2. Side Splash: Matching backsplash. Countertops: 1-inch- thick, solid surface material. B. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material. C. Integral Sink: Provide Swanstone Contour style sink. D. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. Fabricate with loose sidesplashes for field assembly. 1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. Cutouts and Holes: Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 2.3 WINDOW SILL FABRICATION Material: HiMacs solid surface, 1/2 inch thick. Basis-of-Design: Window Sills Direct, sales@windowsillsdirect.com A. Locations: Provide at all window sills and at sills of storefront at Elevator Vestibule.. Configuration: Single round over with radiused top edge, straight bottom edge, with 1 inch extension from the face of wall finish and 1 inch radiused drop. Provide 1” dog ear extensions on either side of gypsum wallboard opening. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 4 Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. B. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. C. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. D. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. E. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 22, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 - 5 F. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. Set products in sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." Do not apply sealant after installation of countertops or windows sills. Set in sealant and field wipe excess sealant at junctions. END OF SECTION 12 36 61.16 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-1 SECTION 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specified. Elevator work includes: 1. Standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators. 2. Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment. 3. Operation and control systems. 4. Jack(s). 5. Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons. 6. Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity. 7. Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 General Requirements: Meet or exceed all referenced sustainability requirements. 2. Division 3 Concrete: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete. 3. Division 4 Masonry: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in masonry. 4. Division 5 Metals: a. Providing hoist beams, pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and divider beams for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames. 5. Division 9 Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished and shop primed ferrous materials. 6. Division 16 Sections: a. Providing electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches. b. Emergency power supply, transfer switch and auxiliary contacts. c. Heat and smoke sensing devices. d. Convenience outlets and illumination in control room, hoistway and pit. 7. Division 22 Plumbing a. Sump pit and oil interceptor. 8. Division 23 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning a. Heating and ventilating hoistways and/or control room. C. Work Not Included: General contractor shall provide the following in accordance with the requirements of the Model Building Code and ANSI A17.1 Code. For specific rules, refer to ANSI A17.1, Part 3 for hydraulic elevators. State or local requirements must be used if 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-2 more stringent. The cost of this work is not included in the thyssenkrupp Elevator’s proposal, since it is a part of the building construction. 1. Elevator hoist beam to be provided at top of elevator shaft. Beam must be able to accommodate proper loads and clearances for elevator installation and operation. 2. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement. 3. Hatch walls require a minimum two hours of fire rating. Hoistway should be clear and plumb with variations not to exceed 1/2'' at any point. 4. Elevator hoistways shall have barricades, as required. 5. Install bevel guards at 75° on all recesses, projections or setbacks over 2'' (4'' for A17.1 2000 areas) except for loading or unloading. 6. Provide rail bracket supports at pit, each floor and roof. For guide rail bracket supports, provide divider beams between hoistway at each floor and roof. 7. Pit floor shall be level and free of debris. Reinforce dry pit to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and buffers. 8. Where pit access is by means of the lowest hoistway entrance, a vertical ladder of non-combustible material extending 42'' minimum, (48'' minimum for A17.1- 2000 areas) shall be provided at the same height, above sill of access door or handgrips. 9. Machine room to be enclosed and protected. 10. Machine Room temperature must be maintained between 55º and 90º F. 11. If machine room is remote from the elevator hoistway, clear access must be available above the ceiling or metal/concrete raceways in floor for oil line and wiring duct from machine room. 12. Access to the machinery space and machine room must be in accordance with the governing authority or code. 13. Provide an 8” x 16” cutout through machine room wall, for oil line and wiring duct, coordinated with elevator contractor at the building site. 14. All wire and conduit should run remote from the hoistways. 15. When heat, smoke or combustion sensing devices are required, connect to elevator control cabinet terminals. Contacts on the sensors should be sided for 12 volt D.C. 16. Install and furnish finished flooring in elevator cab. 17. Finished floors and entrance walls are not to be constructed until after sills and door frames are in place. Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. The general contractor shall supply the drywall framing so that the wall fire resistance rating is maintained, when drywall construction is used. 18. Where sheet rock or drywall construction is used for front walls, it shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractor to coordinate with elevator contractor. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-3 19. Before erection of rough walls and doors; erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames. After rough walls are finished; erect fascias and toe guards. Set sill level and slightly above finished floor at landings. 20. To maintain legal fire rating (masonry construction), door frames are to be anchored to walls and properly grouted in place. 21. The elevator wall shall interface with the hoistway entrance assembly and be in strict compliance with the elevator contractor's requirements. 22. General Contractor shall fill and grout around entrances, as required. 23. Elevator sill supports shall be provided at each opening. 24. All walls and sill supports must be plumb where openings occur. 25. For applications with jack hole, free and clear access to the elevator pit area for the jack hole-drilling rig is required. 26. Where jack hole is required, remove all spoils from jack hole drilling. 27. When not provided by Elevator Contractor, jack hole shall accommodate the jack unit. If required the jack hole is to be provided in strict accordance with the elevator contractor's shop drawings. 28. Locate a light fixture (200 lx / 19 fc) and convenience outlet in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door. 29. A light switch and fused disconnect switch for each elevator should be located inside the machine room adjacent to the door, where practical, per the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70). 30. For signal systems and power operated door: provide ground and branch wiring circuits, including main line switch. 31. For car light and fan: provide a feeder and branch wiring circuits, including main line switch. 32. Wall thickness may increase when fixtures are mounted in drywall. These requirements must be coordinated between the general contractor and the elevator contractor. 33. Provide supports, patching and recesses to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc.. 34. Locate telephone and convenience outlet on control panel. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: When requested, the elevator contractor shall provide standard cab, entrance and signal fixture data to describe product for approval. B. Shop drawings: 1. Show equipment arrangement in the corridor, pit, and hoistway and/or optional control room. Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location. 2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent information. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-4 3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work. 4. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device recommendations. C. Powder Coat paint selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes and materials. D. Plastic laminate selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes and materials. E. Metal Finishes: Upon request, standard metal samples provided. F. Operation and maintenance data. Include the following: 1. Owner’s manuals and wiring diagrams. 2. Parts list, with recommended parts inventory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the project. 1. The manufacturer of machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators cabs, entrances, and all other major parts of elevator operating equipment. a. The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured by the installing company, and not be an assembled system. 2. The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program. 3. ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified 4. ISO-14001:2004 Environmental Management System Certified B. Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not less than 15 years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local building code. 2. Building Code: National. 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 5. Americans with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) 6. Section 407 in ICC A117.1, when required by local authorities 7. CAN/CSA B44 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-5 D. Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware, and operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, CAN4-S104 (ULC-S104), UL10(b), and NFPA Standard 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1 1/2 hour label by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (2 hour label in Canada). E. Inspection and testing: 1. Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and fees for elevator installation. 2. Arrange for inspections and make required tests. 3. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work. F. Sustainable Product Qualifications: 1. Environmental Product Declaration: a. If Product Category Rules (PCR) are not available, produce a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that has at least a cradle to gate scope. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufacturing shall deliver elevator materials, components and equipment and the contractor is responsible to provide secure and safe storage on job site. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use: Elevators shall not be used for temporary service or for any other purpose during the construction period before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the purchaser unless agreed upon by Elevator Contractor and General Contractor with signed temporary agreement. B. Provide the hole for the jack unit (if required by the type of jack provided), based on excavation through normal soil or clay which can be removed by manual digging or by standard truck-mounted regular drilling unit. Provide a casing if required to retain the walls of the hole. General contractor shall remove excavation spoils deposited in the elevator pit. 1. If a physical obstruction or hindrance is encountered below the ground surface, including boulders, rock, gravel, wood, metal, pilings, sand, water, quick sand, caves, public utilities or any other foreign material, obtain written authorization to proceed with excavating using special excavation equipment. 2. Maintain a daily log of time and material costs involved. 3. Elevator contractor will be compensated on a time and material basis for additional costs incurred after encountering the physical obstruction or hindrance, including the cost of the special excavation equipment. 1.06 WARRANTY 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-6 A. Warranty: Submit elevator manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or replace defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use or care for 12 months after final acceptance. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 12 months for each elevator after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier, during normal working hours excluding callbacks. 1. Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation. Maintenance work, including emergency call back repair service, shall be performed by trained employees of the elevator contractor during regular working hours. 2. Submit parts catalog and show evidence of local parts inventory with complete list of recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original equipment. 3. Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 100 mile radius of the project site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Design based around thyssenkrupp Elevator’s Endura hydraulic elevator. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. All Elevator Cab materials including frame, buttons, lighting, wall and ceiling assembly, laminates and carpet shall have an EPD and an HPD, and shall meet the California Department of Public Health Standard Method V1.1–2010, CA Section 01350 as mentioned in 1.03.9 of this specification. B. Colors, patterns, and finishes: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns, and finishes. C. Steel: 1. Shapes and bars: Carbon. 2. Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish. 3. Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel for structural parts, powder coat for architectural parts. Color selection must be based on elevator manufacture’s standard selections. D. Plastic laminate: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA LD3, Type GP- 50 General Purpose Grade, nominal 0.050" thickness. Laminate selection must be based on elevator manufacture’s standard selections. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-7 E. Flooring by others. 2.03 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood sub-floor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. The car platform shall be designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity. B. Sling: Steel stiles bolted or welded to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from the car enclosure. C. Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets. D. Guides: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car. E. Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on continuous channels fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions. F. Jack: A jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless telescopic 2-stage. Two jacks piped together, mounted one on each side of the car with each having two telescopic sections designed to extend in a synchronized manner when oil is pumped into the assembly. Each jack section will be guided from within the casing or the plunger assembly used to house the section. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. Each jack assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing the two plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. The jack shall be designed to be mounted on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have a bleeder valve to discharge any air trapped in the section.. G. Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the car to the floor landings and correct for over travel or under travel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load. H. Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack unit. theoiltype 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-8 I. Pit moisture/water sensor located approximately 1 foot above the pit floor to be provided. Once activated, elevator will perform “flooded pit operation”, which will run the car up to the designated floor, cycle the doors and shut down and trip the circuit breaker shunt to remove 3 phase power from all equipment, including pit equipment. J. Motorized oil line shut-off valve shall be provided that can be remotely operated from the controller landing service panel. Also a means for manual operation at the valve in the pit is required. 2.04 POWER UNIT A. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit consisting of the following items: 1. An oil reservoir with tank cover. 2. An oil hydraulic pump. 3. An electric motor. 4. An oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro-magnetic controlling solenoids. B. Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car. C. Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating shall be selected for specified speed and load. D. Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line. 1. Relief valve shall be adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve. 2. Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops. 3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. 4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for down start speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-9 starts and stops. The leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is initiated. 5. Provided with constant speed regulation in both up and down direction. Feature to compensate for load changes, oil temperature, and viscosity changes. 6. Solid State Starting: Provide an electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents. 7. Oil Type: Provide a zinc free, inherently biodegradable lubricant formulated with premium base stocks to provide outstanding protection for demanding hydraulic systems, especially those operating in environmentally sensitive areas. 2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening bolted\knock down construction. 1. Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates (where required), sight guards, and necessary hardware. 2. Main landing door & frame finish: ASTM A1008 steel panels, factory applied powder coat finish. 3. Typical door & frame finish: ASTM A 366 steel panels, factory applied powder coat finish. B. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code. C. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door. 1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. 2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors during operation. 3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves. D. Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum. 2.06 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURE A. Car Enclosure: 1. Walls: Cab type a steel shell design, reinforced cold-rolled steel with an applied panel design. The applied panels design, shall be arranged vertically on wood core panels covered on both sides with high pressure plastic laminate. 2. Reveals and frieze: Factory applied powder coat 3. Canopy: Cold-rolled steel with hinged exit. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-10 4. Ceiling: Downlight type, metal pans with suspended LED downlights and dimmer switch. Number of downlights shall be dependent on platform size with a minimum of six. The metal pans shall be finished with a factory applied powder coat finish. 5. Cab Fronts, Return, Transom, Soffit and Strike: Provide panels faced with No. 4 brushed stainless steel 6. Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors on sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides. a. Door Finish: ASTM A1008 steel panels, factory applied powder coat finish. b. Cab Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish. 7. Handrail: Provide 2'' flat metal bar on side and rear walls on front opening cars and side walls only on front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless steel, No. 4 brushed finish. 8. Ventilation: Manufacturer’s standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top. 9. Protection pads and buttons: Not required B. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station shall give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly. 2.07 DOOR OPERATION A. Door Operation: Provide a direct or alternating current motor driven heavy duty operator designed to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. The door control system shall be digital closed loop and the closed loop circuit shall give constant feedback on the position and velocity of the elevator door. The motor torque shall be constantly adjusted to maintain the correct door speed based on its position and load. All adjustments and setup shall be through the computer based service tool. Door movements shall follow a field programmable speed pattern with smooth acceleration and deceleration at the ends of travel. The mechanical door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. AC controlled units with oil checks, or other deviations are not acceptable. 1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation: The car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a car or hall call, answering a car or hall call at the present position or selected as a dispatch car. 2. Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-11 3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel shall reverse and the door shall reopen to answer the other call. 4. Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is prevented for a field programmable time, a buzzer shall sound. When the obstruction is removed, the door shall begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra-red door protection system detects a person or object while closing on nudging, the doors shall stop and resume closing only after the obstruction has been removed. 5. Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra-red beam(s) is interrupted, the doors shall reverse and reopen. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors shall begin to close. 6. Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try and correct the fault. 7. Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and correct the fault. 8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close. 9. All doors shall be side-opening. Doors from the first, second and third floors shall be located symmetrically opposite from the ground floor door to allow for stretcher movement in and out of the cab. B. Door Protection Device: Provide a door protection system using microprocessor controlled infra-red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen. 2.08 CAR OPERATING STATION A. Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for specific operation mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no applied faceplate. Wrap return shall have a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LED’s shall be 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-12 included for each floor served, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for car light and accessories shall be provided. B. Emergency Communications System: Integral phone system provided. C. Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required D. Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and located in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel. The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close. 2.09 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Controller: The elevator control system shall be microprocessor based and software oriented. Control of the elevator shall be automatic in operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for registering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons at terminal landings. B. Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity and automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity. The settings shall be field programmable. C. Emergency Power Operation: (10-DOA) Upon loss of the normal power supply, building- supplied standby power is available on the same wires as the normal power supply. Once the loss of normal power is detected and standby power is available, the elevator is lowered to a pre-designated landing and the doors are opened. After passengers have exited the elevator, the doors are closed and the car is shut down. When normal power is restored, the elevator automatically resumes operation. D. Special Operation: Not Applicab 2.10 HALL STATIONS A. Hall Stations, General: Provide buttons with white-illuminating or blue-illuminating LED halos to indicate that a call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction. Provide 1 set of pushbutton risers. 1. Provide one pushbutton riser with faceplates having a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish. a. Phase 1 firefighter’s service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into the hall station at the designated level. B. Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-13 C. Hall Position Indicator: An electronic dot matrix position indicator shall be provided and mounted for optimum viewing. As the car travels, its position in the hoistway shall be indicated by the illumination of the alphanumeric character corresponding to the landing which the elevator is stopped or passing. When hall lanterns are provided, the position indicator shall be combined with the hall lanterns in the same faceplate. Faceplates shall match hall stations.Provide at main landing only. D. Hall lanterns: Not Applicable E. Special Equipment: Not Applicable 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS A. Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install multiple oil hydraulic silencers (muffler device) at the power unit location. The silencers shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof housing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and/or control room, as constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. 1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation. B. Jack unit excavation (if required by the type of jack provided): Drill or otherwise excavate below elevator pit construction as required to install the jack unit. 1. Install casing for jack unit. 2. Provide HDPE jack protection system for all in ground jacks. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-14 3. Set casing for jack unit assembly plumb, and partially fill with water set¬tled sand, eliminating voids. Back fill depth shall be sufficient to hold the bottom of the jack in place over time. C. Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of the elevator manufacturer's experienced foreman. D. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports, and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement. E. Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualification of welding operators. F. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work. G. Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a quiet, smoothly operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration. H. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing. I. Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect fascia and toe guards after rough walls finished. Set sill units accurately aligned and slightly above finish floor at landings. J. Lubricate operating parts of system, where recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use of elevator, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or agencies. B. Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on the elevator. 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-15 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and accurately. 3.05 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless steel shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; it shall not be cleaned with bleach-based cleansers. B. At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris. 1. Use environmentally preferable and low VOC emitting cleaners for each application type. Cleaners that contain solvents, pine and/or citrus oils are not permitted. 3.06 PROTECTION A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately before date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. 3.08 ELEVATOR SCHEDULE A. Elevator Qty. 1 1. Elevator Model: endura Above-Ground (2-Stage) 2. Elevator Type: Hydraulic Passenger 3. Rated Capacity: 3500 lbs. 4. Rated Speed: 80 ft./min. 5. Operation System: TAC32H 6. Travel: 21'-9'' 82 Bridge Street Housing October 25, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. Addendum #3 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00-16 7. Landings: 4 total 8. Openings: a. Front: 3 b. Rear: 1 9. Clear Car Inside: 6' - 8'' wide x 5' - 5 1/2'' deep 10. Cab Height: 8'-0'' standard 11. Hoistway Entrance Size: 3' - 6'' wide x 7'-0'' high 12. Door Type: Single Speed 13. Power Characteristics: 208 volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz. 14. Seismic Requirements: Zone 2 15. Hoistway Dimensions: 8' - 8'' wide x 7' - 10 3/4'' deep 16. Pit Depth: 4' - 0'' 17. Button & Fixture Style: Signa4 Signal Fixtures 18. Special Operations: None END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00-1 SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. For additional Fire Suppression Specifications, see Drawings FP 900 & FP-901. B. Provide sprinkler system: 1. Wet pipe system with automatic sprinklers. C. Provide standpipe and hose system: 1. Wet type with water supply valve open and pressure maintained. 2. NFPA 13R. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project. 2. Provide hydraulic calculations for pipe sizing. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Local Fire Department Requirements: Comply with requirements of the local Fire Department pertaining to sprinkler systems and standpipes. Obtain approval from local Fire Marshall, in writing, of proposed fire-protection system before proceeding with installation. C. Compliance: NFPA 13 for sprinkler system, NFPA 14 for standpipes; UL listed and labeled; FM approved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipes and Fittings: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00-2 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile-iron barrel with iron-alloy threaded flanges. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, threadable lightwall, black and galvanized. 3. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M. 4. Fittings: Suitable for service class and piping type; threaded, grooved-end, press-seal types. 5. Joining Materials: Welding and gasket materials suitable for design temperatures and pressures. Victaulic materials and couplings. B. Valves and Accessories: 1. General Duty Valves: Gate valves, swing check valves. 2. Specialty Valves: Alarm check valves, dry-pipe valves, deluge valves, detector check valves suitable for system use. 3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, pipe nipple and bronze ball valve. 4. Control Panels: Single area, two area, or single area cross-zoned as required, NEMA ICS 6 Type 1 enclosure. 5. Water Meters: AWWA C700 series as applicable. 6. Backflow Preventers: ASSE, sized for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss. 7. Excess Pressure Pumps: UL listed, positive-displacement, gear-type pump assembly. 8. Fire Department Connections: UL 405 unit. 9. Alarm Devices: Water-motor-operated alarms, waterflow indicators, pressure switches, supervisory switches. 10. Pressure Gages: UL 393. C. Sprinklers, Hose Racks and Accessories: 1. Automatic Sprinklers: Fusible link type; upright, pendant, and sidewall styles; concealed, flush, and recessed styles; wall-mounted sprinkler head cabinet and wrench, suitable for service required. 2. Sprinkler Fittings: UL listed and FM approved, UL 213. 3. Nonadjustable Hose Valves: UL 668. 4. Pressure Regulating Hose Valves: UL 1468. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Vent all fixtures. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Comply with applicable regulations and code requirements. Provide proper clearances for servicing. B. Support piping properly. Pitch to drain points. Install with pipe expansion loops, mechanical expansion joints, and anchors. C. Conceal piping and ductwork to the greatest extent practical. D. Center ceiling mounted elements in center of ceiling tiles as applicable. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00-3 E. Maintain indicated fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors at penetrations. Seal with firestopping to maintain fire rating. F. Clearly label and tag all components. G. Test and balance all systems for proper operation. H. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. I. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation of systems. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BUILDING SERVICES PIPING 22 10 00-1 SECTION 22 10 00 BUILDING SERVICES PIPING 2.01 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: P900 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. PLUMBING PUMPS 22 30 10-1 SECTION 22 30 10 PLUMBING PUMPS 2.01 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: P900 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00-1 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES 2.01 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: P900 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. HEATING PIPING 23 20 00-1 SECTION 23 20 00 HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: P900 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 20 10-1 SECTION 23 20 10 NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: P900 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 00-1 SECTION 23 30 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: M900 & M901. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 30 10-1 SECTION 23 30 10 DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: M900 & M901. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 80 00-1 SECTION 23 80 00 HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: M800, M900 & M901. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 00 00-1 SECTION 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. For additional Electrical Specifications, see Drawing Sheets E-900 & E-901. B. Electrical Systems for the Following Applications: Refer to individual specification sections following for detailed requirements. 1. Power and distribution. 2. Lighting, exterior and interior, including exit and emergency lighting. 3. Fire alarm, smoke detection, carbon monoxide detection, and life safety. 4. Security. 5. Lightning protection. 6. Telephone. 7. Computer/local area network. 8. Cable television. 9. Power connections for HVAC and plumbing equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Systems, products, and standards are listed in individual specification sections which follow. B. Provide Carbon Monoxide detector system in locations as required by code. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 MATERIALS A. Provide coordination with photovoltaic system, to be installed by others. 1. Provide 2 conduits from roof, through attic to basement Electrical Room. END OF SECTION 82 BRIDGE STREET DIETZ & CO ARCHITECTS Northampton, MA 01060 OCTOBER 13, 2018 Table of Contents Flat Roof Solar Array(s): 1. Solar Module, Sunpower SPR-X22-360-COM: pgs. 3-4 2. Solar Module Optimizer, Solaredge, P400: pgs. 5-6 3. Inverter, Solaredge, SE9K-US & SE14.4k-US: pgs. 7-8 4. Ballast Block, ASTM C1491 4X8X16: pg. 9 5. Optimzer Mount, Quick Mount Accessory Frame Bracket: pgs. 10-13 6. Solar Mounting Equipment, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5D: pgs. 14-36 a Overview, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5D: pgs. 14-17 b Installation Instructions: pgs. 18-36 c Base, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5D: pg. 20 d Ballast Tray, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5 Tray: pg. 20 e Wind Deflector, Ecolibrium: pg. 20 f Module Mounting Clamp, Ecolibrium Universal Clamp: pg. 20 END OF SECTION PV ARRAY Flat Roof Azimuths 146 Degrees X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Datasheet More than 22% Efficiency Captures more sunlight and generates more power than conventional panels. Maximum Performance Designed to perform in demanding real-world conditions of high temperatures, partial shade from overhead wires, and low light.1,2,4 Commercial Grade Intended for commercial sites where maximum energy production is critical. Maxeon® Solar Cells: Fundamentally better Engineered for performance, designed for reliability. Engineered for Peace of Mind Designed to deliver consistent, trouble-free energy over a very long lifetime. 3,4 Designed for Reliability The SunPower Maxeon Solar Cell is the only cell built on a solid copper foundation. Virtually impervious to the corrosion and cracking that degrade conventional panels. 3 Same excellent durability as E-Series panels. #1 Rank in Fraunhofer durability test.9 100% power maintained in Atlas 25+ comprehensive durability test.10 High Performance & Excellent Reliability Highest Efficiency5 Generate more energy per square foot X-Series commercial panels convert more sunlight to electricity by producing 38% more power per panel1 and 70% more energy per square foot over 25 years.1,2,3 Highest Energy Production6 Produce more energy per rated watt More energy to power your operations. High year-one performance delivers 8–10% more energy per rated watt.2 This advantage increases over time, producing 21% more energy over the first 25 years to meet your needs.3 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower X-Series Conventional 25-Year Energy Production / WattYears 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 110% 100% 120% 36% more, year 25 9% more, year 1 21% More Energy Per Rated Watt 0% 2% 4% 6% 8% 10% Maintains High Power at High Temps No Light-Induced Degradation High Average Watts High-Performance Anti-Reﬂective Glass Better Low-Light and Spectral Response Year 1 Energy Advantage / Watt SPR-X22-360-COM SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Tests And Certifications Standard Tests13 UL1703 (Type 2 Fire Rating), IEC 61215, IEC 61730 Quality Certs ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 EHS Compliance RoHS, OHSAS 18001:2007, lead free, REACH SVHC-163, PV Cycle Sustainability Cradle to Cradle CertifiedTM Silver (eligible for LEED points)14 Ammonia Test IEC 62716 Desert Test 10.1109/PVSC.2013.6744437 Salt Spray Test IEC 61701 (maximum severity) PID Test Potential-Induced Degradation free: 1000 V9 Available Listings UL, TUV, JET, CEC Operating Condition And Mechanical Data Temperature –40° F to +185° F (–40° C to +85° C) Impact Resistance 1 inch (25 mm) diameter hail at 52 mph (23 m/s) Appearance Class B Solar Cells 96 Monocrystalline Maxeon Gen III Tempered Glass High-transmission tempered anti-reflective Junction Box IP-65, MC4 compatible Weight 41 lbs (18.6 kg) Max. Load Wind: 50 psf, 2400 Pa, 244 kg/m² front & back Snow: 112 psf, 5400 Pa, 550 kg/m² front Frame Class 2 silver anodized; stacking pins 1559 mm [61.4 in] 1046 mm [41.2 in] 46 mm [1.8 in] FRAME PROFILE 46 mm [1.8 in]32 mm [1.3 in] LONG SIDE 22 mm [0.9 in] SHORT SIDE 4 X 398 mm [15.68 in] (A)(A) Stacking Pins Please read the safety and installation guide. Electrical Data SPR-X22-360-COM Nominal Power (Pnom)11 360 W Power Tolerance +5/-3% Avg. Panel Efficiency12 22.2% Rated Voltage (Vmpp) 59.1 V Rated Current (Impp) 6.09 A Open-Circuit Voltage (Voc) 69.5 V Short-Circuit Current (Isc) 6.48 A Max. System Voltage 1000 V UL & 1000 V IEC Maximum Series Fuse 15 A Power Temp Coef. –0.29% / o C Voltage Temp Coef. -167.4 mV / o C Current Temp Coef. 2.9 mA / o C REFERENCES: 1 All comparisons are SPR-X21-345 vs. a representative conventional panel: 250 W, approx. 1.6 m², 15.3% efficiency. 2 Typically 8–10% more energy per watt, BEW/DNV Engineering “SunPower Yield Report,” Jan 2013. 3 SunPower 0.25%/yr degradation vs. 1.0%/yr conv. panel. Campeau, Z. et al. “SunPower Module Degradation Rate,” SunPower white paper, Feb 2013; Jordan, Dirk “SunPower Test Report,” NREL, Q1-2015. 4 “SunPower Module 40-Year Useful Life” SunPower white paper, May 2015. Useful life is 99 out of 100 panels operating at more than 70% of rated power. 5 Highest of over 3,200 silicon solar panels, Photon Module Survey, Feb 2014. 6 1% more energy than E-Series panels, 8% more energy than the average of the top 10 panel companies tested in 2012 (151 panels, 102 companies), Photon International, Feb 2013. 7 Compared with the top 15 manufacturers. SunPower Warranty Review, May 2015. 8 Some restrictions and exclusions may apply. See warranty for details. 9 X-Series same as E-Series, 5 of top 8 panel manufacturers tested in 2013 report, 3 additional panels in 2014. Ferrara, C., et al. "Fraunhofer PV Durability Initiative for Solar Modules: Part 2". Photovoltaics International, 2014. 10 Compared with the non-stress-tested control panel. X-Series same as E-Series, tested in Atlas 25+ Durability test report, Feb 2013. 11 Standard Test Conditions (1000 W/m² irradiance, AM 1.5, 25° C). NREL calibration Standard: SOMS current, LACCS FF and Voltage. 12 Based on average of measured power values during production. 13 Type 2 fire rating per UL1703:2013, Class C fire rating per UL1703:2002. 14 See salesperson for details. SunPower Offers The Best Combined Power And Product Warranty Power Warranty Product Warranty 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 0 5 10 15 20 25 Years Traditional Warranty SunPower Conventional panel “linear” warranty 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower Traditional Warranty Years More guaranteed power: 95% for first 5 years, −0.4%/yr. to year 25 7 Combined Power and Product defect 25year coverage 8 Document # 514617 Rev B /LTR_US ©December 2016 SunPower Corporation. All rights reserved. SUNPOWER, the SUNPOWER logo, MAXEON, and SIGNATURE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SunPower Corporation. Specifications included in this datasheet are subject to change without notice. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM See www.sunpower.com/facts for more reference information. For more details, see extended datasheet: www.sunpower.com/datasheets. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM POWER OPTIMIZERPower Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 Specifically designed to work with SolarEdge inverters Up to 25% more energy Superior efficiency (99.5%) Mitigates all types of module mismatch losses, from manufacturing tolerance to partial shading Flexible system design for maximum space utilization Fast installation with a single bolt Next generation maintenance with module-level monitoring Compliant with arc fault protection and rapid shutdown NEC requirements (when installed as part of the SolarEdge system) Module-level voltage shutdown for installer and firefighter safety PV power optimization at the module-level www.solaredge.us OPTIMIZER MODEL (typical module compatibility) P320 (for high-power 60-cell modules) P370 (for higher-power 60 and 72-cell modules) P400 (for 72 & 96-cell modules) P405 (for thin film modules) P505 (for highercurrent modules) INPUT Rated Input DC Power(1)320 370 400 405 505 W Absolute Maximum Input Voltage (Voc at lowest temperature) 48 60 80 125 83 Vdc MPPT Operating Range 8 - 48 8 - 60 8 - 80 12.5 - 105 12.5 - 83 Vdc Maximum Short Circuit Current (Isc) 11 10.1 14 Adc Maximum DC Input Current 13.75 12.63 17.5 Adc Maximum Efficiency 99.5 % Weighted Efficiency 98.8 98.6 % Overvoltage Category II OUTPUT DURING OPERATION (POWER OPTIMIZER CONNECTED TO OPERATING SOLAREDGE INVERTER) Maximum Output Current 15 Adc Maximum Output Voltage 60 85 Vdc OUTPUT DURING STANDBY (POWER OPTIMIZER DISCONNECTED FROM SOLAREDGE INVERTER OR SOLAREDGE INVERTER OFF) Safety Output Voltage per Power Optimizer 1 ± 0.1 Vdc STANDARD COMPLIANCE EMC FCC Part15 Class B, IEC61000-6-2, IEC61000-6-3 Safety IEC62109-1 (class II safety), UL1741 RoHS Yes INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Maximum Allowed System Voltage 1000 Vdc Compatible inverters All SolarEdge Single Phase and Three Phase inverters Dimensions (W x L x H) 128 x 152 x 28 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.1 128 x 152 x 36 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.42 128 x 152 x 50 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.96 128 x 152 x 59 / 5 x 5.97 x 2.32 mm / in Weight (including cables) 630 / 1.4 750 / 1.7 845 / 1.9 1064 / 2.3 gr / lb Input Connector MC4(2) Output Wire Type / Connector Double Insulated; MC4 Output Wire Length 0.95 / 3.0 1.2 / 3.9 m / ft Operating Temperature Range -40 - +85 / -40 - +185 ˚C / ˚F Protection Rating IP68 / NEMA6P Relative Humidity 0 - 100 % (1) Rated STC power of the module. Module of up to +5% power tolerance allowed. (2) For other connector types please contact SolarEdge Power Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 PV SYSTEM DESIGN USING A SOLAREDGE INVERTER(3)(4) SINGLE PHASE HD-WAVE SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE 208V THREE PHASE 480V Minimum String Length (Power Optimizers) P320, P370, P400 8 10 18 P405 / P505 6 8 14 Maximum String Length (Power Optimizers)25 25 50 (5) Maximum Power per String 5700 (6000 with SE7600-US - SE11400- US) 5250 6000 12750 W Parallel Strings of Different Lengths or Orientations Yes © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 07/2018/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. (3) For detailed string sizing information refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/string_sizing_na.pdf.(4) It is not allowed to mix P405/P505 with P320/P370/P400/P600/P700/P800 in one string.(5) A string with more than 30 optimizers does not meet NEC rapid shutdown requirements; safety voltage will be above the 30V requirement Integrated Safety Swit INVERTERSSolarEdge Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS) The best choice for SolarEdge enabled systems Specifically designed to work with power optimizers Integrated arc fault protection and rapid shutdown for NEC 2014 and 2017, per article 690.11 and 690.12 UL1741 SA certified, for CPUC Rule 21 grid compliance Built-in module-level monitoring Internet connection through Ethernet or Wireless Small, lightweight, and easy to install outdoors or indoors on provided bracket Fixed voltage inverter for longer strings Integrated Safety Switch Supplied with RS485 Surge Protection Device, to better withstand lightning events 12-20 www.solaredge.usUSA-CANADA-GERMANY-UK-ITALY-THE NETHERLANDS-JAPAN-CHINA-AUSTRALIA-ISRAEL-FRANCE-BELGIUM-TURKEY-INDIA-BULGARIA-ROMANIA-HUNGARY-SWEDEN- SOUTH AFRICA-POLAND-CZECH REPUBLIC Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid(1) for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS SE9KUS SE14.4KUS OUTPUT Rated AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA Maximum AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA AC Output Line Connections 4-wire WYE (L1-L2-L3-N) plus PE or 3 wire Delta AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-N)105-120-132.5 Vac AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-L)183-208-229 Vac AC Frequency Min-Nom-Max(2)59.3 - 60 - 60.5 Hz Max. Continuous Output Current (per Phase) 25 40 A GFDI Threshold 1 A Utility Monitoring, Islanding Protection, Country Configurable Set Points Yes INPUT Maximum DC Power (Module STC) 12150 19400 W Transformer-less, Ungrounded Yes Maximum Input Voltage DC to Gnd 250 300 Vdc Maximum Input Voltage DC+ to DC- 500 600 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC to Gnd 200 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC+ to DC-400 Vdc Maximum Input Current 26.5 38 Adc Maximum Input Short Circuit Current 45 Adc Reverse-Polarity Protection Yes Ground-Fault Isolation Detection 1MΩ Sensitivity 350kΩ Sensitivity (3) CEC Weighted Efficiency 96.5 97 % Night-time Power Consumption < 3 < 4 W ADDITIONAL FEATURES Supported Communication Interfaces RS485, Ethernet, ZigBee (optional) Rapid Shutdown – NEC 2014 and 2017 690.12 Automatic Rapid Shutdown upon AC Grid Disconnect(4) RS485 Surge Protection Supplied with the inverter STANDARD COMPLIANCE Safety UL1741, UL1741 SA, UL1699B, CSA C22.2, Canadian AFCI according to T.I.L. M-07 Grid Connection Standards IEEE1547, Rule 21, Rule 14 (HI) Emissions FCC part15 class B INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS AC output conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG 3/4” minimum / 8-4 AWG DC input conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG Number of DC inputs 2 pairs 3 pairs (5) Dimensions (H x W x D)21 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 540 x 315 x 260 in / mm Dimensions with Safety Switch (H x W x D) 30.5 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 775 x 315 x 260 in / mm Weight 73.2 / 33.2 99.5 / 45 lb / kg Weight with Safety Switch 79.7 / 36.2 106 / 48 lb / kg Cooling Fans (user replaceable) Noise < 50 < 55 dBA Operating Temperature Range -40 to +140 / -40 to +60(6) ˚F / ˚C Protection Rating NEMA 3R (1) For 277/480V inverters refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/files/pdfs/products/inverters/se-three-phase-us-inverter-datasheet.pdf(2) For other regional settings please contact SolarEdge support(3) Where permitted by local regulations(4) P/N SE9K-US0xxxxxx has Manual Rapid Shutdown for NEC 2014 compliance (NEC 2017 compliance with outdoor installation)(5) Field replacement kit for 1 pair of inputs P/N: DCD-3PH-1TBK; Field replacement kit for 3 pairs of fuses and holders P/N: DCD-3PH-6FHK-S1(5) For power de-rating information refer to: https://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/se-temperature-derating-note-na.pdf © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 11/2017/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. 4x8x16 BALLAST BLOCK DRAWING: 4x8x16 BALLAST 4"x8"x16" Ballast Block NOTES: x WEIGHT: -34 lbs/ea. x COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, MIN P.S.I. (AVG. GROSS AREA) -AVG. OF 3 UNITS: 4500 -INDIVIDUAL UNITS: 4500 x :$7(5$%62537,210$;/%)7ñ -AVG OF 3 UNITS: 10% x DRY CAST BLOCK WITH 38" AGGREGATE x NO DIMENSION SHALL VARY MORE THAN 3 PERCENT OVER OR UNDER THE SPECIFIED DIMENSION FOR ANY FORM OF UNIT x ASTM C-139-05 EXCEPT THAT THE UNITS SHALL CONFORM TO THE DETAILS SHOWN HEREON AND THAT THEIR THICKNESS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 5" 7 58" 3 5 8" 15 58" Quick Rack™ Rail-Free System | Rooftop Racking Systems Ground Mounted Systems | Ballasted Systems R ESPECT T HE R OOF Accessory Frame Bracket For mounting module level electronics to standard module frames Works with: Oct-2018, Rev 3BI 7.2.3-37_1 2 1 3 ITEM NO.DESCRIPTION QTY. 1 ACCESSORY FRAME CLAMP, UNIVERSAL, 5052-H32, MILL 1 2 ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET, 5052-H32, MILL 1 3 CAP SCREW, SERRATED FLANGE, HEX HEAD, 5/16"-18 X 3/4", UNC-2A, 18-8SS 1 2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SHEET 1 OF 2 DFM SCALE: 2:3 WEIGHT: REVASIZE TITLE: DATE: DRAWN BY:DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHESTOLERANCES:FRACTIONAL 1/8TWO PLACE DECIMAL .19THREE PLACE DECIMAL .094 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIALTHE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF QUICK MOUNT PV. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF QUICK MOUNT PV IS PROHIBITED. COPYRIGHT © 2016 QUICK MOUNT PV 5 4 3 2 1 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: 0.19 QMAFBU: ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET, UNIVERSAL 5/16/2018 MODULE LEVEL ELECTRONIC ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET BRACKET CLAMP CAP SCREW GROUNDING PINS MODULE FRAME BRACKET CLAMP CAP SCREW MODULE LEVEL ELECTRONIC ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET MODULE FRAME 2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SHEET 2 OF 2 DFM SCALE: 1:2 WEIGHT: REVASIZE TITLE: DATE: DRAWN BY:DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHESTOLERANCES:FRACTIONAL 1/8TWO PLACE DECIMAL .19THREE PLACE DECIMAL .094 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIALTHE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF QUICK MOUNT PV. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF QUICK MOUNT PV IS PROHIBITED. COPYRIGHT © 2016 QUICK MOUNT PV 5 4 3 2 1 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: 3.81 QMAFBU: ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET, UNIVERSAL 5/16/2018 Oct-2018, Rev 3BI 7.2.3-37_1 Place the frame clamp over the edge of the module frame, and in front of the module level electronic mounting bracket. Slide the assembly up and to the left to engage cap screw into frame clamp slot. Tighten the cap screw with a half-inch socket and torque wrench to a torque of 15 foot-pounds. Neatly coil the wires and clip to module frame. Accessory Frame Bracket | QMAFBU Installation Tools Required: PV wire clips, 1/2" socket and torque wrench. In a standard landscape or portrait array, the Accessory Frame Bracket should be installed at least 5 inches from the edge of the module and at least 1 inch in from the edge of the module junction box. With the cap screw threaded into the bracket, slide the cap screw into the slot on the module level electronic mounting bracket with the bracket behind the module level electronic mounting bracket. Slide this assembly onto the module frame with the bracket behind the module frame, the module level electronic mounting bracket in front of the module frame. Quick Start Guide Notes: Be sure to comply with all state, local, and module level electronic requirements. Find UL 2703 Installation Instructions here: www.quickmountpv.com/pdfs/QMAFBU_UL.pdf For UL 2703 listing, see UL Constructional Data Report here: www.quickmountpv.com/quickrack/pdfs/QMAFB-UL2703-Listing.pdf Oct-2018, Rev 3BI 7.2.3-37_1 R ESPECT T HE R OOF 925-478-8269 | www.quickmountpv.com | info@quickmountpv.com 2700 Mitchell Dr. | Walnut Creek, CA 94598 UL STD 2703 ©2018 by Quick Mount PV. All rights reserved. The New High Density 5° Racking System Small Footprint. Big Power. Now you can build more powerful rooftop solar systems faster and easier than ever before with the new high density EcoFoot5DTM Racking System. Built on the Industry-Preferred EcoFoot® Platform, with More than 200MW Installed. 18.4% More Power Elegantly Simple Installation Cost-Saving Logistics & Support Small 7"x16.7" roof-friendly modular Base and dense 9.9" inter-row spacing enables a tightly packed solar array that delivers 18.4% more power than 10° systems. Whether your roof is small or large, EcoFoot5D provides more power, lowering cost-per-watt. EcoFoot5D delivers preassembled parts and an out-of-the-box, ready- to-go installation that is unlike any other flat-roof racking. The result is a seamless installation process from start to finish, saving on time and minimizing job-site impact. Stackable bases enable a huge per-pallet shipping capacity. Fewer pallets are required, minimizing shipping, storage and onsite crane use. Dedicated engineering support prevents issues before they happen and provides quick solutions if obstacles arise. 6 Simple Installation Steps. Technical Specifications.Validation Summary. • Certified to UL2703 Fire Class A • Certified to UL2703 Grounding • SEAOC seismic compliant Contact: 740.249.1877 | sales@ecolibriumsolar.com | www.ecolibriumsolar.com Install Wind Deflector. Place Wind Deflector Press the Upper and Contact us for a specific project bid, to schedule a product demo, or to learn more about The Simplest Way to Max Out Your Roof Elegant Installation, Right Out of the Box. 290kW of Bases Delivered on 1 Standard Pallet. Wire Management in a Snap. Organized Work Flow and Preassembled Parts When you’re on the roof, you need ready-to-go components and a simple install. That’s why installers prefer the EcoFoot Modular Platform: Bases self-align and parts are preassembled so no PV panel preparation is required, which enables non-stop installation from box to roof. Only with EcoFoot Modular Now, EcoFoot5D delivers the elegant installation process only EcoFoot modular systems provide and packs the array with 18.4% more power than a 10° system. Installer-centric design provides unsurpassed advantages: • Simple, preassembled parts • Self-aligning Bases fall in line as modules are placed • Low-effort roof layout, just two chalk lines required • No PV panel prep, non-stop install from box to roof • Six simple installation steps • No training required – 5-minute learning curve Efficient Logistics On and Off the Roof Increase Your Bottom Line From shipping to deployment, the EcoFoot5D System reduces your shipping, storage and roof-loading needs significantly. The result? More profit per job. • Stackable Bases and low part count streamline logistics • 290kW of Bases delivered on 1 standard pallet • Small footprint minimizes contact with roof • Slip sheet costs are low, drainage is excellent • Lightweight and roof-friendly • Ideal for residential and commercial flat roofs • Suited for mild or extreme roof undulations • No UV exposure: row-to-row wires covered by Ballast Tray the life of the system with removable Wind Deflector Built on the Industry Preferred, Innovative EcoFoot Modular Platform. Creating Unbeatable Solar Racking for Commercial and Residential Since 2010, Ecolibrium Solar has revolutionized Solar Racking with the FAST & SIMPLE EcoFoot Modular Platform for flat-roof arrays and EcoX Rail-less Racking for pitched roofs. With 600MW installed on flat and pitched roofs nationwide, we bring the beauty of simplicity to solar. Streamline logistics with up to 290kW of Bases per pallet. Deflector The Simplest Way to Max Out Your Roof Elegant Installation, Right Out of the Box. 290kW of Bases 5 Simple Components. 1 Sweet System. Wire Management in a Snap.Ballast Placement that Beats All.Efficient Logistics On needs significantly. The result? More profit per job. commercial flat roofs Accessible & Protected Simply snap wire clips into Base to route wires between rows. • No UV exposure: row-to-row wires covered by Ballast Tray • Easy access to wires during install and throughout the life of the system with removable Wind Deflector and in-row ballast placement Ergonomic, Cost-Saving and Fast Place ballasts between rows for easy reach. • No awkward under-module access • Rapid Ballast Tray install, sliding into Base retention clips • Ballast Tray strong enough to walk on, even when loaded with ballast blocks • Minimal roof contact means smaller slip sheets, lowering costs Preferred, Innovative EcoFoot Modular Platform. FAST & SIMPLE EcoFoot Modular Platform for flat-roof arrays and EcoX With 600MW installed on flat and Ballast Tray Mid-Support Wind DeflectorPreassembled Universal Clamp EcoFoot5D Base Platform, with More than 200MW Installed. other flat-roof racking. The result from start to finish, saving on time Unbeatable EcoFoot5D 6 Simple Installation Steps. Technical Specifications. Get the EcoFoot5D Advantage. Validation Summary. Clamping range: 32–50mm Dimensions: 16.7"L x 7"W x 6.2"H Typical system weight: 2.4–7.7 psf Module orientation: Landscape Tilt angle: 5° Landscape Module inter-row spacing: 9.9" Roof pitch: 0°–7° Ballast requirements: 4" x 8" x 16" Wind tunnel tested: 150 mph Warranty: 25 years Slip sheets: not required by Ecolibrium Solar. If required by roofer, use 7"x16.7" under Base; 2"x3" under Mid-Support. • Certified to UL2703 Fire Class A for Type I and II modules • Certified to UL2703 Grounding and Bonding • SEAOC seismic compliant 740.249.1877 | sales@ecolibriumsolar.com | www.ecolibriumsolar.com | Boulder, CO | Athens, OH ©2017 Ecolibrium Solar, Inc., EcoFoot5D is a trademark of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc. Registration pending. EcoFoot and Ecolibrium Solar are registered trademarks of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc. Step 1 Step 4 Step 2 Step 5 Step 3 Step 6 Install Clamps in Bases – No Tools Required. Install Mid-Support. Only Two Chalk Lines Needed. Install Ballast Tray and place ballast blocks. Secure PV modules onto Bases. Install Wind Deflector. Drop preassembled Clamps into Base, push in Clevis Pins, Base is ready to install. Measure & mark 2 chalk lines, Bases self-align as modules drop into place. Space modules using alignment marks on Clamps, torque Nut provided to 14 ft-lbs. Place Wind Deflector into slot on Base, attach using Rocker Nut provided. Slide Tray into retention clips on Base, east/west. Place ballast blocks without reaching using sturdy, walk-on tray. Press the Upper and Lower Mid-Supports onto the module frame. Ecolibrium Solar provides engineering support for your project from concept to completion. Contact us for a specific project bid, to schedule a product demo, or to learn more about simple, fast and cost-effective EcoFoot5D High Density 5° Racking. Call 740.249.1877 or email Sales@EcolibriumSolar.com v1.3 040918 Sales: 740-249-1877 Sales@EcolibriumSolar.com Field Support: 866-488-6794 FieldSupport@EcolibriumSolar.com www.ecolibriumsolar.com Installation Guide Installation Guide EcoFoot5D™ High Density 5-Degree Ballasted Racking System Document No. ES10560 Rev 1.1, January 2018 EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 2 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Revision History Revision Description of Changes Date 1.0 Initial EcoFoot5DTM Release 2017-September-05 1.1 Add Attachment Appendix B 2018-January-25 EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 3 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Table of Contents Revision History ..................................................................................................................................... 2 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................. 3 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 4 Field Support Contact Information .................................................................................................... 4 Installer Responsibility .......................................................................................................................... 4 Disclaimer of Liability ........................................................................................................................... 4 Warnings & Safety ................................................................................................................................. 5 EcoFoot5D General Application Notes ............................................................................................ 5 EcoFoot5D Core Components ............................................................................................................ 7 Install EcoFoot5D in 6 Simple Steps .................................................................................................. 8 Appendix A: Grounding & Bonding .................................................................................................. 11 Appendix B: Roof Attachment Methods ........................................................................................ 12 Legal Notices ©2017 Ecolibrium Solar®, Inc. Ecolibrium Solar® and EcoFoot2+® are registered trademarks of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc. EcoFoot5D™ is a trademark of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc., registration pending. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 4 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Introduction EcoFoot5DTM is a 5-degree ballasted racking system designed to fit more modules on a roof, maximizing power density. The modular design is built on the proven, industry-preferred, beautifully simple and fast-to-install modular technology of the EcoFoot platform and sister product, EcoFoot2+. EcoFoot5D consists of five simple components. Installation is accomplished in six simple steps. Much of the installation is tool-less. EcoFoot5D Bases self-align, requiring only two chalk lines. The PV module installation automatically moves the Bases into perfect placement. Inter-row ballast placement and easy-reach wire management provide superior accessibility during and after installation. Stackable Bases enable the transport of up to 290kW of Bases on 1 standard pallet, streamlining logistics. The combined effect of simplicity, maximum density, and minimized shipping, storage and transporting costs results in an ultra cost-effective racking solution. Field Support Contact Information Ecolibrium Solar proudly offers dedicated engineering expertise and superior customer support. For questions about the installation procedures or a specific application, please contact our Field Support Specialists at 866- 488-6794 or FieldSupport@EcolibriumSolar.com. Installer Responsibility The installer is solely responsible for: • Utilizing all necessary safety equipment, as required by applicable rules and regulations. • Complying with all applicable local and national building codes, including any that may supersede this manual. • Ensuring that Ecolibrium Solar® EcoFoot5DTM and other products are appropriate for the specific installation and are designed for the installation environment. • Ensuring that the roof, its rafters, connections, and other structural support members can support the array under all conditions. • Maintaining the waterproof integrity of the roof including selection of appropriate flashing if the system is being installed using attachments. • Ensuring safe installation of all electrical aspects of the entire system Disclaimer of Liability ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR® does not assume responsibility and expressly disclaims liability for loss, damage, or expense arising out of, or in any way connected with installation, operation, use, or maintenance by using this manual. ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR assumes no responsibility for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties, which may result from use of modules. No license is granted by implication or under any patent or patent rights. The information in this manual is believed to be reliable, but does not constitute an expressed and/or implied warranty. ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR reserves the right to make changes to the product, specifications, data sheets and this manual without prior notice. This document is not prescriptive regarding safety and does not purport to address all the safety concerns that may arise with its use. Contractors should become familiar with all applicable safety, health, and regulatory requirements before beginning work. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 5 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Unauthorized field modification of ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR components or assemblies may affect ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR warranty coverage. Provide written drawings for ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR’s review, comment and approval prior to attempting any field modifications. Warnings & Safety Both electrical and roofing knowledge are required to correctly and safely install a solar photovoltaic system. Only qualified and certified installation professionals should install EcoFoot5D. Failure to follow the methods and procedures outlined in this guide may result in injury and/or damage to property. Carefully read this guide before starting any work. Store a copy of this guide on the job site at all times and contact Ecolibrium Solar with any installation questions related to EcoFoot5D. Please note the following warnings when installing EcoFooot5D: • EcoFoot5D components fit together tightly and could cause pinch injuries. • EcoFoot5D components may be hot to the touch if left in the sun. Please follow the safety requirements below when installing EcoFoot5D: • Always keep children and unauthorized people away from work areas. • Always wear required OSHA approved Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). • Always use insulated tools when working with or near electrical systems. • Always provide OSHA approved fall protection for all installation personnel. • Never wear jewelry during mechanical and electrical installation work. • Never work in rain, snow or extremely windy conditions. • Never leave a module unsupported or unsecured on the roof. • Never install broken photovoltaic modules. EcoFoot5D General Application Notes Site-Specific System Design: Ecolibrium Solar provides drafting services on all EcoFoot5D projects. This service produces a site-specific design package with an Engineered Stamped Layout including detailed ballast plan and bill of materials. Roof Type: EcoFoot5D is designed to mount photovoltaic modules to a range of roof surfaces, including: EPDM, TPO, PVC, Mineral Cap Sheet (a.k.a. Rolled Asphalt), Tar and Gravel. Roof Slope Range: 0-7 degrees maximum, 3-degree limit for unattached seismic. Wind Zone: EcoFoot5D is designed to mount photovoltaic modules on flat roof surfaces with a maximum pitch of 7 degrees in areas with extreme wind conditions. Please contact Ecolibrium Solar for clarification or assistance. Installation Requirements: EcoFoot5D is a ballasted photovoltaic racking designed as a system. The system requires all EcoFoot5D components, the specific module, and ballast placement prescribed in the PE stamped design. The absence of any of these elements in any given sub-array could present a compromised condition on the roof. Arrays shall not be left unattended in such a state during an installation. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 6 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com This install guide officially documents the components used and proper methods for an EcoFoot5D installation. Bonding elements are incorporated into EcoFoot5D components. As the system is built on the roof, components and modules are bonded together. Specific steps to ensure a bonded system are described through the installation guide. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the system is safely and properly installed, and that the system is bonded back to a final ground point. When wiring the array, keep bare copper from contacting bare aluminum. Thermal and Seismic Design Requirements: EcoFoot5D is a flexible and expandable design that accommodates various array geometries. Maximum widths for arrays are as follows: • 60-cell modules, 26 modules in a row • 72-cell modules, 22 modules in a row Minimum spacing between sub-arrays is 6”. Site specifics may further limit array sizes and spacing. Seismic and Uplift Design Requirements: EcoFoot5D can be attached when required by seismic and uplift conditions as specified by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Addendums in this install guide document the components used and proper methods for an EcoFoot5D installation with attachments. Use the method required for the specific Fire Code Rating of the PV module. Re-Inspection: Ecolibrium Solar recommends periodic re-inspection of the installation for loose components, loose fasteners, and any corrosion, such that if found, the affected components are to be immediately replaced. Compatible Modules: Ecolibrium Solar has evaluated many photovoltaic modules for installation compatibility with the EcoFoot5D ballasted racking system. A list of compatible modules may be found in “EcoFoot5D Install Guide Appendix - Compatible Modules.pdf” on our website: www.ecolibriumsolar.com UL2703 Qualification: In cases where UL 2703 certification is required, the EcoFoot5D system conforms to the UL2703 Standard for grounding and bonding and fire ratings. The EcoFoot5D system may be used to ground and/or mount a PV module complying with UL1703 only when the specific module has been evaluated for grounding and /or mounting in compliance with the included instructions. EcoFoot5D Racking maintains a Class A fire rating when installed in landscape orientation according to the installation instructions, on a low slope roof Class A roof with Type 1 and Type 2 modules. When installing Type 2 modules a Ballast Tray is required. For roofs with lower fire ratings, the existing rating is maintained when EcoFoot5D is used. At this time, the EcoFoot5D system is undergoing further testing pertaining to mechanical loading with specific modules. Further information about Ecolibrium Solar’s UL2703 conformance may be found in “EcoFoot5D Install Guide Appendix - UL2703 Qualification.pdf” on our website: www.ecolibriumsolar.com UL2703 System Label: The label shown below is stamped into to the Wind Deflector (identified as component 5 in the installation guide). The Date Code ABCYZZ shown above will appear on production parts, letters defined as follows: • ABC shall be an acronym for identifying the source factory • Y shall be the Quarter of the year (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4) of manufacture • ZZ shall be the last 2 digits of the year of manufacture EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 7 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com EcoFoot5D Core Components 1 EcoFoot5D Base 2 Universal Clamp Lower 3 Universal Clamp Upper 4 Clevis Pins 5 Wind Deflector 6 Ballast Tray 7 Mid-Support Upper 8 Mid-Support Lower 9 5/16” Thread-Forming Screw Hardware Required All required hardware is included. Tools Required ½” Deep Socket Calibrated Torque Wrench Torque Settings 14 ft-lbs on all Fasteners EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 8 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Install EcoFoot5D in 6 Simple Steps Step 1 – Install Preassembled Universal Clamps into Bases 1.1 Place Lower and Upper Universal Clamp into EcoFoot5D Base as shown. Note: The Upper Clamp includes a post and nut to install the Wind Deflector as shown in Step 6. 1.2 Push Clevis Pins completely into EcoFoot5D Base to secure Rocker. Step 2 – Position Array 2.1 Snap two chalk lines on roof denoting outside edges of the EcoFoot5D Bases, per project drawing. Start from the north or south edge. Ensure chalk lines are square. 2.2 Place EcoFoot5D Bases in approximate position throughout the array. Installation Tips  Only install Clamps where modules will rest.  See Step 3 for correct placement and orientation of Clamps. Base Lower Clamp Upper Clamp Clevis Pin Clevis Pin Bases Chalk Lines Installation Tips  As you build the array, panels will space the Bases. Roughly place a few rows of Bases at a time so that they are within reach of final location. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 9 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 3 – Secure PV Modules onto Bases 3.1 Place PV module onto EcoFoot5D Base. 3.2 Space modules ½” apart using alignment marks located on the Clamps 3.3 Torque Nuts to 14 ft-lbs using a 1/2" deep socket. Nuts (F) to Warnings Step 4 – Install Mid-Support. 4.1 Locate module center point +/-1” using PV module cell lines. 4.2 Press the Upper and Lower Mid-Supports onto the module frame. Note: On the south row, the Upper Mid-Support will not be pressed onto a module frame. On the north row, the Lower Mid-Support will not be pressed onto a module frame. 4.3 Slide Upper and Lower Mid-Support together using the male/female features. If required, place optional, self-adhering EPDM pads on the bottom surface of the Upper and Lower Mid-Supports. Nut Base Module Nut PV Module Center Point Upper & Lower Mid-Support Press Upper Mid-Support on to Frame Press Lower Mid-Support on to Frame Slide together Upper & Lower Mid-Support Installation Tips  After Step 3, wiring can be routed and secured.  Standard wire clips or cable ties (not included) can be inserted into slots along Base edge. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 10 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 5 – Install Ballast Tray and place ballast blocks on Tray. 5.1 Slide tray into retention clips located on the Base by sliding the Tray along the east-west direction. 5.2 Secure tray to Mid-Support using 5/16” thread forming screw provided with Mid-Support Kit. Torque Screw to 14 ft-lbs. 5.3 Place ballast (not included) in a single layer evenly dispersed along the length of Ballast Trays. Apply ballast per the ballast plan specified in the PE Certified Ballast Plan – Sheet S-1.0. Step 6 – Install Wind Deflector. 6.1 Place Wind Deflectors into slot on EcoFoot5D Base and attach to Rocker using Nut provided. 6.2 Torque Nut to 14 ft-lbs using a ½” deep socket. Application of anti-seize on threaded post recommended. Ballast Tray Base Retention Clips Ballast Tray 5/16” Screw Rocker Nut Base Retention Clip Wind Deflector EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 11 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Appendix A: Grounding & Bonding The EcoFoot5D system has been tested by TüV Rheinland and conforms to UL 2703 for Grounding and Bonding when installed per the published installation instructions. EcoFoot5D carries module-to-module ground bond through the Wind Deflector and Mid-Support – Items 5 and Items 7 & 8 respectively, listed in the “EcoFoot5D Core Components” table in this document. Each row of modules/wind deflectors in an array of up to 400 modules must be grounded per the NEC and ANSI/NFPA 70 either through the designated ground hole in the Wind Deflector, or by drilling a ¼” ground hole into the Wind Deflector a minimum of ½” from any edge. One Ground Lug is required for every 400 modules connected within an array. Ecolibrium Solar recommends using #6 copper ground wire in conjunction with WEEB grounding devices such as the WEEB-LUG-6.7 or WEEB DSK516. Lugs are a single use component. Other grounding methods must be reviewed and approved by a licensed master electrician or electrical engineer and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Green lines represent ground bond path. Wind Deflectors carry module-to-module east/west ground bond. Mid-Supports carry row-to-row north/south ground bond. Grounding and Bonding Path Ground Lug Ground Hole with Lug Installed Ground Lug is installed in the Wind Deflector either in the designated ground hole or by drilling a ¼” ground hole into the Wind Deflector a minimum of ½” from any edge. One Ground Lug is required for every 400 modules within an array. Ground Lug ▲ N EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 12 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Appendix B: Roof Attachment Methods EcoFoot5D can be attached when required by seismic and uplift conditions or the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). There are 3 methods of attachment that satisfy seismic and uplift requirements for Type 1 and Type 2 modules. Use the method indicated for the specific Fire Code Rating of the PV module. The Ballast Tray is not required for attachment method for Modules with a Type 1 Fire Code Rating. The Ballast Tray is required for attachment method for Modules with a Type 2 Fire Code Rating. Attachment Methods Seismic and Uplift Attachment Seismic Attachment Modules with Type 1 Fire Code Rating Use Attachment with Strut Modules with Type 1 & 2 Fire Code Rating Use Attachment with Ballast Tray Modules with Type 1 & 2 Fire Code Rating Use Attachment with Ballast Tray and Strut Attachment with Strut Attachment with Strut – Components included in Kit 1 L-Bracket, 2”x3” – Qty 3 2 Elevator Bolt, 1/4"-20 x 1-1/2” Qty 2 2 Nut, Serrated Flange 1/4"-20 Qty 2 4 Nut, Strut 3/8"-16 x 1” Qty 3 3 Nut, Serrated Flange 3/8"-16 Qty 1 6 Bolt, Serrated Flange 3/8"-16 Qty 3 Components Not Included in Kit Strut, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” Roof Attachment (Flat Plate or Station Anchor) Tools Required 7/16” Deep Socket 9/16” Deep Socket 9/16” Open-End Wrench Calibrated Torque Wrench Torque Settings 8 ft-lbs for 1/4" fasteners, 14 ft-lbs. for 3/8” fasteners EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 13 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Attachment with Strut Instruction Step 1 – Attach L-Bracket to Bases and Roof Attachment 1.1 Bases - insert Elevator Bolt through square hole of Base. Place L-Bracket on Elevator Bolt and secure with ¼”-20 Serrated Flange Nut. 1.2 Roof Attachment - Place L-Bracket on Stud and secure with 3/8”-16 Serrated Flange Nut. Step 2 – Install Flat Plate or Station Anchor Roof Attachment 2.1 Align L-Bracket of Roof Attachment with L-Brackets on Bases and install Roof Attachment on either side of the Mid-Support. Install Roof Attachment per Roof Attachment manufacturer’s instructions. Elevator Bolt L-Bracket & Flange Nut Line between L-Brackets Roof Attachment (Flat Plate or Station Anchor) Mid-Support L-Bracket & Flange Nut Stud EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 14 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 3 – Attach Strut to L-Brackets and Tighten Hardware 3.1 Secure Strut to L-Brackets with 3/8”-16 Serrated Hex Bolt and 3/8”-16 Strut Nut. Engage grooves of Strut Nut with the two lips within Strut. 3.2 Tighten and torque all hardware. Torque ¼”—20 hardware to 8 ft-lbs. Torque 3/8”—16 hardware to 14 ft-lbs. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 15 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Attachment with Ballast Tray Attachment with Ballast Tray – Components included in Kit 1 Elevator Bolt, 1/4"-20 x 3/4” Qty 4 2 Nut, Coupling 1/4"-20 x 7/8” Qty 4 3 Washer, 7/16" ID x 1 OD Qty 6 4 Bolt, Serrated Flange 1/4”-20 Qty 4 5 Nut, Serrated Flange 3/8"-16 Qty 2 Not Included in Kit Roof Attachment (Flat Plate) Optional Addition of Strut to Ballast Tray – Components Included in Kit 1 Screw, Sheet Metal #12 x ¾” Qty 6 2 Washer, Fender ¼” ID x 1” OD Qty 6 Not Included in Kit Strut, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” Torque Settings 8 ft-lbs for 1/4" fasteners, 14 ft-lbs. for 3/8” fasteners, 5 ft-lbs for sheet metal screws Tools Required 7/16” Deep Socket 5/16” Hex Driver 9/16” Socket Calibrated Torque Wrench EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 16 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Attachment with Ballast Tray Instruction Step 1 – Install Attachment 1.1 Use Ballast Tray to Position Roof Attachment. Stud of Roof Attachment will extend through one of the slots in middle of Ballast Tray. 1.2 Mark Attachment location, remove Ballast Tray, install Roof Attachment per manufacturer’s instructions. Note: Position the attachment such that it can share the same slot with the Mid-Support as shown. Step 2 – Install Mid-Span Support 2.1 Refer to Step 4 of the Installation Guide to install Mid-Span Support. Step 3 – Install Hardware on Attachment Stud 3.1 Install 3/8”-16 Serrated Flange Nut and 7/16 ID x 1” OD Washer onto Roof Attachment stud. Level top of Washer with top of Mid-Span Support. Level Washer with top of Mid-Span Support Bracket Roof Attachment Washer and Flange Nut Stud EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 17 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 4 – Install Hardware on Bases 4.1 Install Elevator Bolts and Nut Coupling into EcoFoot 5D bases. Torque to 8 ft-lb. Repeat process on both Bases. Step 5 – Install Ballast Tray and secure to Mid-Span Support & Bases 5.1 Referring to Step 5 of the Installation Guide, install Ballast Tray. Line up slots with attachment stud, base hardware and Mid-Support. 5.2 Torque fastener into Mid-Span Support to 14 ft-lbs. through slot on Ballast-Tray. 5.3 Fasten Ballast Tray to base with Washers and Serrated Hex Bolts on both bases. Torque to 8 ft-lb. 5.4 Install Washer and Serrated-Flange Nut onto Preferred Roof Attachment in order shown below. Torque Serrated -Flange Nut to 14 ft-lbs. 5.5 Roof Attachment installation complete for Seismic Rated Attachment System. Nut Coupling and Elevator Bolts Washers and Serrated Hex Bolts Washer and Serrated Hex Nut Serrated Hex Bolt EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 18 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 6 - Optional Addition of Strut to the Attachment with Ballast Tray Adding strut to the Attachment with Ballast Tray provides additional rating for uplift strength to offset or eliminate ballast in a localized region around the attachment point. 6.1 Lay Strut along length of Ballast Trays, centering Strut over Roof Attachment. 6.2 Install two Sheet-Metal Screws and Fender Washers on either side and as close to the roof attachment stud as possible. Install additional screws along the length of the strut at no more than 24” intervals. Strut reinforcement attachment complete. Sheet-Metal Screws with Fender Washers installed along the length of the strut at no more than 24” intervals. One Screw on either side of Roof Attachment. Lay Strut on Ballast Trays Install Two Sheet-Metal Screws with Fender Washers close to Roof Attachment. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 19 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Strut Installation Note Strut may need to be cut and/or spliced to meet the attachment requirements in the project’s Ballast Layout Plan or engineering report. Splice Strut and install hardware as shown. All hardware is included in the Strut Kit. Splice Kit 82 BRIDGE STREET DIETZ & CO ARCHITECTS Northampton, MA 01060 OCTOBER 12, 2018 Table of Contents Sloped Asphalt Roof Solar Array(s): 1. Solar Module, Sunpower SPR-X22-360-COM: pgs. 3-4 2. Solar Module Optimizer, Solaredge, P400: pgs. 5-6 3. Inverter, Solaredge, SE9K-US: pgs. 7-8 4. Solar Mounting Equipment, Ironridge Pitched Roof: pgs. 9-26 a Overview, Ironridge Flush Mount: pg. 9 b Asphalt Roof Attachment, Ironridge Flashfoot2 (Mill Finish): pgs. 10-11 c Roof Attachment to Rail Connector, Ironridge T-Bolt Bonding Hardware: pgs. 12-13 d Solar Array Mounting Rail, Ironridge XR100: pgs. 14-15 e Solar Array Mounting Rail Splices, Ironridge XR100 Bonded Splices: pgs. 16-17 f Solar Array Mounting Rail Grounding Lugs, Ironridge Low Profile Lug: pgs. 18-19 g Solar Array Optimizer Mounting Hardware, Ironridge Bonding Hardware: pgs. 20-21 h Solar Module Mounting Hardware, Ironridge UFO Universal Clamp: pg. 22 i Solar Module Mounting End Clamp, Ironridge CAMO Module End Clamp: pgs. 23-25 j Solar Module Wire Management Clips, Ironridge Wire Clips: pg. 26 END OF SECTION PV ARRAY Sloped Asphalt Roofs Azimuths 146 & 236 Degrees X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Datasheet More than 22% Efficiency Captures more sunlight and generates more power than conventional panels. Maximum Performance Designed to perform in demanding real-world conditions of high temperatures, partial shade from overhead wires, and low light.1,2,4 Commercial Grade Intended for commercial sites where maximum energy production is critical. Maxeon® Solar Cells: Fundamentally better Engineered for performance, designed for reliability. Engineered for Peace of Mind Designed to deliver consistent, trouble-free energy over a very long lifetime. 3,4 Designed for Reliability The SunPower Maxeon Solar Cell is the only cell built on a solid copper foundation. Virtually impervious to the corrosion and cracking that degrade conventional panels. 3 Same excellent durability as E-Series panels. #1 Rank in Fraunhofer durability test.9 100% power maintained in Atlas 25+ comprehensive durability test.10 High Performance & Excellent Reliability Highest Efficiency5 Generate more energy per square foot X-Series commercial panels convert more sunlight to electricity by producing 38% more power per panel1 and 70% more energy per square foot over 25 years.1,2,3 Highest Energy Production6 Produce more energy per rated watt More energy to power your operations. High year-one performance delivers 8–10% more energy per rated watt.2 This advantage increases over time, producing 21% more energy over the first 25 years to meet your needs.3 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower X-Series Conventional 25-Year Energy Production / WattYears 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 110% 100% 120% 36% more, year 25 9% more, year 1 21% More Energy Per Rated Watt 0% 2% 4% 6% 8% 10% Maintains High Power at High Temps No Light-Induced Degradation High Average Watts High-Performance Anti-Reﬂective Glass Better Low-Light and Spectral Response Year 1 Energy Advantage / Watt SPR-X22-360-COM SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Tests And Certifications Standard Tests13 UL1703 (Type 2 Fire Rating), IEC 61215, IEC 61730 Quality Certs ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 EHS Compliance RoHS, OHSAS 18001:2007, lead free, REACH SVHC-163, PV Cycle Sustainability Cradle to Cradle CertifiedTM Silver (eligible for LEED points)14 Ammonia Test IEC 62716 Desert Test 10.1109/PVSC.2013.6744437 Salt Spray Test IEC 61701 (maximum severity) PID Test Potential-Induced Degradation free: 1000 V9 Available Listings UL, TUV, JET, CEC Operating Condition And Mechanical Data Temperature –40° F to +185° F (–40° C to +85° C) Impact Resistance 1 inch (25 mm) diameter hail at 52 mph (23 m/s) Appearance Class B Solar Cells 96 Monocrystalline Maxeon Gen III Tempered Glass High-transmission tempered anti-reflective Junction Box IP-65, MC4 compatible Weight 41 lbs (18.6 kg) Max. Load Wind: 50 psf, 2400 Pa, 244 kg/m² front & back Snow: 112 psf, 5400 Pa, 550 kg/m² front Frame Class 2 silver anodized; stacking pins 1559 mm [61.4 in] 1046 mm [41.2 in] 46 mm [1.8 in] FRAME PROFILE 46 mm [1.8 in]32 mm [1.3 in] LONG SIDE 22 mm [0.9 in] SHORT SIDE 4 X 398 mm [15.68 in] (A)(A) Stacking Pins Please read the safety and installation guide. Electrical Data SPR-X22-360-COM Nominal Power (Pnom)11 360 W Power Tolerance +5/-3% Avg. Panel Efficiency12 22.2% Rated Voltage (Vmpp) 59.1 V Rated Current (Impp) 6.09 A Open-Circuit Voltage (Voc) 69.5 V Short-Circuit Current (Isc) 6.48 A Max. System Voltage 1000 V UL & 1000 V IEC Maximum Series Fuse 15 A Power Temp Coef. –0.29% / o C Voltage Temp Coef. -167.4 mV / o C Current Temp Coef. 2.9 mA / o C REFERENCES: 1 All comparisons are SPR-X21-345 vs. a representative conventional panel: 250 W, approx. 1.6 m², 15.3% efficiency. 2 Typically 8–10% more energy per watt, BEW/DNV Engineering “SunPower Yield Report,” Jan 2013. 3 SunPower 0.25%/yr degradation vs. 1.0%/yr conv. panel. Campeau, Z. et al. “SunPower Module Degradation Rate,” SunPower white paper, Feb 2013; Jordan, Dirk “SunPower Test Report,” NREL, Q1-2015. 4 “SunPower Module 40-Year Useful Life” SunPower white paper, May 2015. Useful life is 99 out of 100 panels operating at more than 70% of rated power. 5 Highest of over 3,200 silicon solar panels, Photon Module Survey, Feb 2014. 6 1% more energy than E-Series panels, 8% more energy than the average of the top 10 panel companies tested in 2012 (151 panels, 102 companies), Photon International, Feb 2013. 7 Compared with the top 15 manufacturers. SunPower Warranty Review, May 2015. 8 Some restrictions and exclusions may apply. See warranty for details. 9 X-Series same as E-Series, 5 of top 8 panel manufacturers tested in 2013 report, 3 additional panels in 2014. Ferrara, C., et al. "Fraunhofer PV Durability Initiative for Solar Modules: Part 2". Photovoltaics International, 2014. 10 Compared with the non-stress-tested control panel. X-Series same as E-Series, tested in Atlas 25+ Durability test report, Feb 2013. 11 Standard Test Conditions (1000 W/m² irradiance, AM 1.5, 25° C). NREL calibration Standard: SOMS current, LACCS FF and Voltage. 12 Based on average of measured power values during production. 13 Type 2 fire rating per UL1703:2013, Class C fire rating per UL1703:2002. 14 See salesperson for details. SunPower Offers The Best Combined Power And Product Warranty Power Warranty Product Warranty 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 0 5 10 15 20 25 Years Traditional Warranty SunPower Conventional panel “linear” warranty 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower Traditional Warranty Years More guaranteed power: 95% for first 5 years, −0.4%/yr. to year 25 7 Combined Power and Product defect 25year coverage 8 Document # 514617 Rev B /LTR_US ©December 2016 SunPower Corporation. All rights reserved. SUNPOWER, the SUNPOWER logo, MAXEON, and SIGNATURE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SunPower Corporation. Specifications included in this datasheet are subject to change without notice. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM See www.sunpower.com/facts for more reference information. For more details, see extended datasheet: www.sunpower.com/datasheets. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM POWER OPTIMIZERPower Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 Specifically designed to work with SolarEdge inverters Up to 25% more energy Superior efficiency (99.5%) Mitigates all types of module mismatch losses, from manufacturing tolerance to partial shading Flexible system design for maximum space utilization Fast installation with a single bolt Next generation maintenance with module-level monitoring Compliant with arc fault protection and rapid shutdown NEC requirements (when installed as part of the SolarEdge system) Module-level voltage shutdown for installer and firefighter safety PV power optimization at the module-level www.solaredge.us OPTIMIZER MODEL (typical module compatibility) P320 (for high-power 60-cell modules) P370 (for higher-power 60 and 72-cell modules) P400 (for 72 & 96-cell modules) P405 (for thin film modules) P505 (for highercurrent modules) INPUT Rated Input DC Power(1)320 370 400 405 505 W Absolute Maximum Input Voltage (Voc at lowest temperature) 48 60 80 125 83 Vdc MPPT Operating Range 8 - 48 8 - 60 8 - 80 12.5 - 105 12.5 - 83 Vdc Maximum Short Circuit Current (Isc) 11 10.1 14 Adc Maximum DC Input Current 13.75 12.63 17.5 Adc Maximum Efficiency 99.5 % Weighted Efficiency 98.8 98.6 % Overvoltage Category II OUTPUT DURING OPERATION (POWER OPTIMIZER CONNECTED TO OPERATING SOLAREDGE INVERTER) Maximum Output Current 15 Adc Maximum Output Voltage 60 85 Vdc OUTPUT DURING STANDBY (POWER OPTIMIZER DISCONNECTED FROM SOLAREDGE INVERTER OR SOLAREDGE INVERTER OFF) Safety Output Voltage per Power Optimizer 1 ± 0.1 Vdc STANDARD COMPLIANCE EMC FCC Part15 Class B, IEC61000-6-2, IEC61000-6-3 Safety IEC62109-1 (class II safety), UL1741 RoHS Yes INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Maximum Allowed System Voltage 1000 Vdc Compatible inverters All SolarEdge Single Phase and Three Phase inverters Dimensions (W x L x H) 128 x 152 x 28 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.1 128 x 152 x 36 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.42 128 x 152 x 50 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.96 128 x 152 x 59 / 5 x 5.97 x 2.32 mm / in Weight (including cables) 630 / 1.4 750 / 1.7 845 / 1.9 1064 / 2.3 gr / lb Input Connector MC4(2) Output Wire Type / Connector Double Insulated; MC4 Output Wire Length 0.95 / 3.0 1.2 / 3.9 m / ft Operating Temperature Range -40 - +85 / -40 - +185 ˚C / ˚F Protection Rating IP68 / NEMA6P Relative Humidity 0 - 100 % (1) Rated STC power of the module. Module of up to +5% power tolerance allowed. (2) For other connector types please contact SolarEdge Power Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 PV SYSTEM DESIGN USING A SOLAREDGE INVERTER(3)(4) SINGLE PHASE HD-WAVE SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE 208V THREE PHASE 480V Minimum String Length (Power Optimizers) P320, P370, P400 8 10 18 P405 / P505 6 8 14 Maximum String Length (Power Optimizers)25 25 50 (5) Maximum Power per String 5700 (6000 with SE7600-US - SE11400- US) 5250 6000 12750 W Parallel Strings of Different Lengths or Orientations Yes © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 07/2018/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. (3) For detailed string sizing information refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/string_sizing_na.pdf.(4) It is not allowed to mix P405/P505 with P320/P370/P400/P600/P700/P800 in one string.(5) A string with more than 30 optimizers does not meet NEC rapid shutdown requirements; safety voltage will be above the 30V requirement Integrated Safety Swit INVERTERSSolarEdge Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS) The best choice for SolarEdge enabled systems Specifically designed to work with power optimizers Integrated arc fault protection and rapid shutdown for NEC 2014 and 2017, per article 690.11 and 690.12 UL1741 SA certified, for CPUC Rule 21 grid compliance Built-in module-level monitoring Internet connection through Ethernet or Wireless Small, lightweight, and easy to install outdoors or indoors on provided bracket Fixed voltage inverter for longer strings Integrated Safety Switch Supplied with RS485 Surge Protection Device, to better withstand lightning events 12-20 www.solaredge.usUSA-CANADA-GERMANY-UK-ITALY-THE NETHERLANDS-JAPAN-CHINA-AUSTRALIA-ISRAEL-FRANCE-BELGIUM-TURKEY-INDIA-BULGARIA-ROMANIA-HUNGARY-SWEDEN- SOUTH AFRICA-POLAND-CZECH REPUBLIC Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid(1) for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS SE9KUS SE14.4KUS OUTPUT Rated AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA Maximum AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA AC Output Line Connections 4-wire WYE (L1-L2-L3-N) plus PE or 3 wire Delta AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-N)105-120-132.5 Vac AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-L)183-208-229 Vac AC Frequency Min-Nom-Max(2)59.3 - 60 - 60.5 Hz Max. Continuous Output Current (per Phase) 25 40 A GFDI Threshold 1 A Utility Monitoring, Islanding Protection, Country Configurable Set Points Yes INPUT Maximum DC Power (Module STC) 12150 19400 W Transformer-less, Ungrounded Yes Maximum Input Voltage DC to Gnd 250 300 Vdc Maximum Input Voltage DC+ to DC- 500 600 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC to Gnd 200 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC+ to DC-400 Vdc Maximum Input Current 26.5 38 Adc Maximum Input Short Circuit Current 45 Adc Reverse-Polarity Protection Yes Ground-Fault Isolation Detection 1MΩ Sensitivity 350kΩ Sensitivity (3) CEC Weighted Efficiency 96.5 97 % Night-time Power Consumption < 3 < 4 W ADDITIONAL FEATURES Supported Communication Interfaces RS485, Ethernet, ZigBee (optional) Rapid Shutdown – NEC 2014 and 2017 690.12 Automatic Rapid Shutdown upon AC Grid Disconnect(4) RS485 Surge Protection Supplied with the inverter STANDARD COMPLIANCE Safety UL1741, UL1741 SA, UL1699B, CSA C22.2, Canadian AFCI according to T.I.L. M-07 Grid Connection Standards IEEE1547, Rule 21, Rule 14 (HI) Emissions FCC part15 class B INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS AC output conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG 3/4” minimum / 8-4 AWG DC input conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG Number of DC inputs 2 pairs 3 pairs (5) Dimensions (H x W x D)21 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 540 x 315 x 260 in / mm Dimensions with Safety Switch (H x W x D) 30.5 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 775 x 315 x 260 in / mm Weight 73.2 / 33.2 99.5 / 45 lb / kg Weight with Safety Switch 79.7 / 36.2 106 / 48 lb / kg Cooling Fans (user replaceable) Noise < 50 < 55 dBA Operating Temperature Range -40 to +140 / -40 to +60(6) ˚F / ˚C Protection Rating NEMA 3R (1) For 277/480V inverters refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/files/pdfs/products/inverters/se-three-phase-us-inverter-datasheet.pdf(2) For other regional settings please contact SolarEdge support(3) Where permitted by local regulations(4) P/N SE9K-US0xxxxxx has Manual Rapid Shutdown for NEC 2014 compliance (NEC 2017 compliance with outdoor installation)(5) Field replacement kit for 1 pair of inputs P/N: DCD-3PH-1TBK; Field replacement kit for 3 pairs of fuses and holders P/N: DCD-3PH-6FHK-S1(5) For power de-rating information refer to: https://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/se-temperature-derating-note-na.pdf © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 11/2017/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. Parts Catalog Flush Mount Page 16 v2.05 support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 The IronRidge Flush Mount System is a rail based system for mounting solar modules on pitched roofs. The system utilizes IronRidge XR Rails with a variety of roof attachments to support extreme wind and snow loads. The entire system uses only aluminum and stainless steel components to ensure complete corrosion resistance. Download AutoCAD File Download PDF Preview Flush Mount Overview AS REQUIRED BYMODULE MANUFACTURER F1.0 B1.0 D1.0 C1.0 1" VARIES IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE FLASHFOOT X W WC C H1.2 J1.2 R PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE UNIVERSALFASTENING OBJECT38" PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE UNIVERSAL FASTENING OBJECT PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE STOPPER SLEEVEIRONRIDGE UNIVERSAL FASTENING OBJECT 1" PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE STOPPER SLEEVE IRONRIDGE UNIVERSALFASTENING OBJECT1"IRONRIDGE RAIL PV MODULE L0.4xL MAX.L E1.0G1.0 J1.2 IRONRIDGE STOPPER SLEEVE IRONRIDGE UNIVERSAL FASTENING OBJECT IRONRIDGE FLASH FOOTIRONRIDGE UNIVERSALFASTENING OBJECT 1"SNOW LOAD, PSFEXPOSURE CATMODULE TYPERISK CATWIND SPEED, MPHMODULE W DCMODULE QTY----72-CELL, GENERIC --SHEET NAME JOB NO. ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. SHEET SIZE 24X361495 ZEPHYR AVE, HAYWARD, CA 94544800.227.9523 IRONRIDGE.COMNOT FO R CONST R U C TI O N REVISION HISTORY APPROVAL STATUS REV DESCRIPTION DATE 3.1 SR SLOPED ROOFPV SYSTEM DETAILS: FLASHFOOT XX FEB 2016IR 1.0CLIENT NAMEPROJECT NAMEPROJECTADDRESSSYSTEM KW DCIRONRIDGESLOPED ROOF MOUNT SYSTEMScale: 1"=1'-0"PLAN VIEW, FLASHFOOT MOUNT, PORTRAIT MODULEA Scale: 1"=1'-0" SIDE VIEW, FLASHFOOT MOUNT, PORTRAIT MODULEB Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, END CLAMP PLANF Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, END CLAMP FRONTG Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, MID CLAMP PLAND Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, MID CLAMP FRONTE Scale: 1"=1'-0"FRONT VIEW, FLASHFOOT MOUNT, PORTRAIT MODULEC Parts Catalog Flush Mount Page 17 v2.05 support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 FlashFoot2 IronRidge FlashFoot2 features a completely redesigned seal that is both elevated and fully encapsulated, protecting against water intrusion. The flashing has a 9” x 12” profile, which minimizes interference with roofing nails. FlashFoot2’s alignment markers help to quickly align the flashing with pilot holes. Twisting on the Cap makes FlashFoot2 ready to mount XR Rails. Comes with flashing, lag bolt, and Cap. Item Number Description FF2-01-M1 FlashFoot2, Mill FM-FF2-001 Kit, 4pcs, FlashFoot2, Mill FF2-01-B1 FlashFoot2, Black FM-FF2-001-B Kit, 4pcs, FlashFoot2, Black #A.IRONRIDGE ITEM NO. l 2 3 4 FLASHFOOT 2 Part Number FF2-0l-Ml FF2-0l-B l l)Bolt, Lag 5/16 x 4.75 (/).63:ft- 7/16" Head Property Material Finish FlashFoot2 DESCRIPTION BOLT LAG 5/16 X 4.75" ASSY, FLASHING ASSY, CAP WASHER, EPDM BACKED Description FLASHFOOT2, MILL FLASHFOOT2, BLACK Value 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear v1 .20 Parts Catalog Flush Mount Page 20 v2.05 support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Bonding Attachment Hardware Attachment bonding hardware available in both square bolt and t-bolt options, based on personal preference. Bonding hardware is used to attach and bond the rail to the FlashFoot2, Slotted L-Foot, or a third-party roof attachment. The step nut allows installers to use the same socket as the rest of the system. Item Number Description BHW-SQ-02-A1 Square Bolt Bonding Hardware FM-SQ-BHW-V2 Kit, 4pcs, Square Bolt Bonding Hardware BHW-TB-02-A1 1pc, T-Bolt Bonding Hardware FM-TB-BHW-V2 Kit, 4pcs, T-Bolt Bonding Hardware #A.IRONRIDGE Bonding Hardware ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION 1 BOLT, T CSTM, 3/8-16 2 BOLT, BONDING 3/8-16 SQ HEAD 3 NUT, BONDING STEP BONDING HARDWARE Part Number Description BHW-TB-02-A 1 T-BOLT, BONDING HARDWARE BHW-SQ-02-A 1 SQUARE-BOLT, BONDING HARDWARE 1)BOLT, T CSTM, 3/8-16 2)BOLT, BONDING 3/8-16 SQ HEAD 3/8-16 THD l_ .56 � 7 1.00 r 24� � .29 Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear 3)NUT, BONDING STEP 0.75 � 7/16"Head� Property Material Finish T 3/8-16 THD Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear 3/8-16 THD ---j .79 Value 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear v1 .30 Page 3 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 XR Rail The XR Rail Family offers the strength of a curved rail in three targeted sizes. Each size supports specific design loads, while minimizing material costs. Depending on your location, there is an XR Rail to match. XR1000 is a heavyweight among solar mounting rails. It’s built to handle extreme climates and spans 12 feet or more for commercial applications. XR100 is the ultimate residential mounting rail. It supports a range of wind and snow conditions, while also maximizing spans. XR10 is a sleek, low-profile mounting rail, perfectly matched to regions with light or no snow. It achieves 6 foot spans, while also staying light and economical. Item Number Description Item Number Description XR-1000-168A XR1000, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Clear XR-10-168A XR10, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Clear XR-1000-204A XR1000, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Clear XR-10-168B XR10, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Black XR-100-168A XR100, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Clear XR-10-204A XR10, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Clear XR-100-168B XR100, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Black XR-10-204B XR10, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Black XR-100-204A XR100, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Clear XR-100-204B XR100, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Black XR1000 XR100 XR10 Page 4 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Bonded Splices Multiple sections of XR Rails can easily be spliced and bonded together with our bonded splices. The internal splice bars do not interfere with clamping or mounting locations, and offer a seamless appearance. XR Rail Splices are made with extruded 6000 series aluminum. 12-14 x 5/8” self-drilling screws are included. Item Number Description XR-1000-SPLC-M1 XR1000 Bonded Splice (Incl. Self-tapping Screws) XR-100-SPLC-M1 XR100 Bonded Splice (Incl. Self-tapping Screws) XR-10-SPLC-M1 XR10 Bonded Splice (Incl. Self-tapping Screws) XR1000 XR100 XR10 Cut Sheet v1.0 12.0 1 2 XR-100-SPLC-M1XR100 BONDED SPLICE (INCL. SELF-TAPPING SCREWS) 2) Screw, Self Drilling 1.93 1.24 .93 1) Splice, XR100, Mill 12" long .31 .42 .63 .15 #12-14 TYPE “B” THREAD XR-100 RAIL Property Value Material 6000 Series Aluminum Finish Mill Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear XR100 Bonded Splice Page 11 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Grounding Lugs A single Grounding Lug connects an entire row of PV modules to the grounding conductor. Item Number Description XR-LUG-03-A1 Grouding Lug, Low Profile GD-LUG-003 Grounding Lug, Low Profile, 2pcs RS-GDLG-002 Grounding Lug, Integrated Grounding, T-Bolt, 2pcs Page 12 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Microinverter / Power Optimizer Bonding Hardware Use IronRidge’s Microinverter Bonding Hardware to bond compatible microinverters and power optimizers to the racking system. COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Enphase - M250-72, M250-60, M215-60, C250-72, S230, S280 Darfon - MIG240, MIG300, G320, G640 Solar Edge - P300, P320, P400, P405, P600, P700, P730, P800p, P800s Item Number Description BHW-M1-01-A1 Microinverter Bonding Hardware, T-Bolt MI-BHW Kit, 2pcs, 1/4 x 3/4 Microinverter Mounting, T-Bolt Cut Sheet v1.10 Microinverter Bonding Hardware .26 .61 .75 .24 1/4-20 THD .59 7/16" Head 1/4-20 THD .24 1 2 1) Bolt, T CSTM 1/4-20 x .75 2) Nut, Flange Hex 1/4-20 Item Number Description Qty. in Kit 1 Bolt, T CSTM 1/4-20 X .75" Lock SS 2 2 Nut, Flange, Hex 1/4-20 SS 2 Part Number Description BHW-M1-01-A1 Microinverter Bonding Hardware, T-Bolt Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear Microinverter Bonding Hardware Tech Brief Solar, Sleeker Than Ever Most solar installations use mounting rails and fasteners to secure modules to the building structure, but these critical components often protrude from the sides of the modules, giving arrays a coarse look. CAMO is an invisible fastener that secures solar modules flush to rail ends, creating a clean, sleek appearance. CAMO works with nearly all solar modules and installs without tools or torque specifications. It simply rotates into place to structurally secure and electrically bond with the module. Hidden End Cam Certified to comply with International Building Code, ASCE/SEI-7, and UL 2703 Mechanical and Bonding Requirements. Cam-Locking Design CAMO’s unique design allows for a completely tool-less installation. Simply slide CAMO into the rail track and rotate the ergonomic handle 90 degrees to lock onto the module frame. It’s that easy. Standard Fastener © 2018 IronRidge, Inc. All rights reserved. Visit www.ironridge.com or call 1-800-227-9523 for more information. Version 1.01 Tech Brief Easy, Tool-Less Installation A. PLACE CAMO Slide CAMO into rail track far enough to clear the module frame. CAMO requires 6” of clearance from end of rail. B. PLACE MODULE Place module on rails and align flush with rail ends (module cells not shown in image to provide clarity). The module can overhang the rail no more than 1/4”. C. SLIDE CAMO Pull CAMO towards rail end, at a 45 degree angle, so linear bonding pin contacts the module flange edge. D. SECURE CAMO Rotate handle with an upwards motion until CAMO snaps into rail track. Ensure CAMO bonding pins are fully seated on top of module frame. A Tested & Certified B C D UL 2703 CAMO conforms to STD UL 2703 (2015) requirements and fits modules with bottom flanges that meet specifications shown in the frame compatibility diagram on the left. See IronRidge Installation Manuals for full ratings and a list of certified compatible modules. Cut Sheet v1.0 4.31 1.4 .63 1 23 PART NO.DESCRIPTION CAMO-01-M1 HIDDEN END CAM (UNIVERSAL CLAMP) Item No.Description Material Finish 1 Handle Aluminum Mill2Bolt, Bonding Shoulder 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear3Bonding Pins, Linear 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear CAMO Page 10 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Wire Clips Wire Clips fit XR Rails, and accommodate up to ten 5mm panel wires, or one MC4, one Enphase wire and one dual Enphase wire. Molded from black polycarbonate with UV protection. Item Number Description 29-4000-077 Wire Clip, 20pcs SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/18/2018GENERAL NOTES: ·2017 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC) ·MASSACHUSETTS AMENDMENTS TO 2017 NEC ·9TH EDITION MASSACHUSETTS BUILDING CODE ·INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH THE APPROPRIATE PPE AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ·SOLAREDGE P800p OPTIMZERS WERE NOT SELECTED DUE TO STRINGING LIMITATIONS FOR INVERTERS ·ALL DC CONDUCTORS TO BE 600V COPPER ·PV MODULES AND MOUNTING SYSTEM GROUNDING & BONDING TO BE PERFORMED USING MOUNTING MANUFACTURER'S SUPPLIED GROUNDING COMPONENTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ·INSTALLATION SUBJECT TO THE CITY OF NORTHAMPTON AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION ROOF LOCATION TO CORRESPONDING INVERTER ROOF LOCATION # MODULES INVERTER # SOUTHEAST ROOF (SUB ARRAY 1) 32 1 SOUTHWEST ROOF (SUBARRAY 2) 26 2 FLAT ROOF (SUB ARRAY 3) 38 3 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/20/2018’ ’ SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/12/20182REVISED DESIGN V 210/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/12/20182 REVISED DESIGN V 2 10/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/12/20182 REVISED DESIGN V 2 10/21/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/13/20182REVISED DESIGN V 210/18/2018 3 2 116 STRING 2 3 2 116 STRING 1 2 (1) (G) MODULES PER (1) P400 (F) SOLAR EDGE OPTIMIZER STRING LENGTH IN OPTIMIZERS 3 (D) INVERTERS #1 & #2 SOLAR EDGE SE9K-US 3 2 112 STRING 1 DC DISCONNECT (C) AC COMBINER PANEL 50A-3Φ 4 STRING 2 STRING 332113 3 2 113 1 2 40A-3Φ 3 2 113 STRING 1 STRING 232113 40A-3Φ (E) INVERTERS #3 SOLAR EDGE SE14.4K-US M 150A-CB 1200A DISCONNECT SWITCH208V, 3Φ, 200A, NON-FUSED PRIMARY VOLTAGE 1 HP 3 LC3XXLC1XX HPB2 M 1 LC2XX HPB 150A-3Φ (B) SMART RGM METER 3 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/13/2018GENERAL NOTES: ·SYSTEM DESIGNED TO MEET 2019 REQUIREMENT OF MODULE LEVEL SHUTDOWN ·SOLAREDGE P800p OPTIMZERS WERE NOT SELECTED DUE TO STRINGING LIMITATIONS FOR INVERTERS 2 & 3·ALL DC CONDUCTORS TO BE 600V COPPER ·PV MODULES AND MOUNTING SYSTEM GROUNDING & BONDING TO BE PERFORMED USING MOUNTING MANUFACTURER'S SUPPLIED GROUNDING COMPONENTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.·INSTALLATION SUBJECT TO AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. PV POWER SOURCE LABELS LABEL: PHOTOVOLTAIC AC DISCONNECT AC OPERATING VOLTAGE (VOLTS) 208 AC OPERATING CURRENT (AMPS) 90 SOLAR MODULE (G) SUNPOWER SPR-X22-360-COM RATED VOLTAGE (Vmpp) RATED CURRENT (Impp) OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLATAGE (Voc) SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT (Isc) MAX. SYSTEM VOLTAGE 59.10 6.09 69.50 6.48 1000V EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE L MAKE/MODEL # NOTES A AC DISCONNECT 1 AC DISCONNECT, GENERAL DUTY, 3POLE-4WIRE, 200A, NEMA3R, 208V, NON-FUSED B REVENUE GRADE METER (SOURCE TBD BY UTILITY) & SOCKET 1 200A, 120/208V, 3-POLE, 4W, NEMA3R, SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS TBD UTILITY COMPANY C AC COMBINER PANEL 1 200A, 120/208V, 3Φ, PANEL BOARD, NEMA 1, (2) 40A 3-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER (1) 50A 3-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER (CAN USE A FUSED COMBINER WITH A DISCONNECT AS AN ALTERNATIVE) D SOLAR EDGE 9K-US 2 600 VDC, 120/208V AC, 3Φ, 4W UNGROUNDED, INTEGRATED AFCI, UL1741 SA, IEEE1547 E SOLAR EDGE 14.4K-US 1 600 VDC, 120/208V AC, 3Φ, 4W UNGROUNDED, INTEGRATED AFCI, UL1741 SA, IEEE1547 F SOLAR EDGE P400 OPTIMIZER 96 600VDC, 30A, NEMA6P, MAX 6,000 W PER STRING G Sunpower SPR-X22-360 96 1000VDC, FACTORY INSTALLED MC CONNECTORS CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE NO. LOCATION DESCRIPTION APPROXIMATE LENGTH CONDUIT SIZE 1 INTERCONNECTION CIRCUIT BREAKER TO (C) AC COMBINER PANEL (3) #20 Cu THWN-2 [1 BK,1 BL,1 RD] (2) #4 Cu THWN-2 [1 WT, 1 GR]200' 2" EMT 2 (C) AC COMBINER PANEL TO (D) INVERTER AC OUTPUT CIRCUIT (3)#8 THWN-2 Cu [1 BK,1 BL, 1 RD] (2)#10 THWN-2 Cu [1 WT, 1 GR]20' 1" EMT 3 (C) AC COMBINER PANEL TO (E) INVERTER AC OUTPUT CIRCUIT (3)#6 THWN-2 Cu [1 BK,1 BL, 1 RD] (2)#10 THWN-2 Cu [1 WT, 1 GR]20' 1" EMT 4 (D, E) INVERTER DC SOURCE CIRCUIT TO PASS THROUGH BOX (14)#10 THWN-2 Cu [2 BK, 2 RD] (1)#8 THWN-2 Cu [1 GR]150' 2" EMT INVERTER(S) SETTINGS Voltage Settings - Frequency Settings- ROOF LOCATION TO CORRESPONDING INVERTER ROOF LOCATION # MODULES INVERTER # SOUTHEAST ROOF (SUB ARRAY 1) 32 1 SOUTHWEST ROOF (SUBARRAY 2) 26 2 FLAT ROOF (SUB ARRAY 3) 38 3 34.56 kW DC 32.4 kW AC 2 REVISED DESIGN V 2 10/18/2018 82 BRIDGE STREET DIETZ & CO ARCHITECTS Northampton, MA 01060 OCTOBER 13, 2018 Table of Contents Flat Roof Solar Array(s): 1. Solar Module, Sunpower SPR-X22-360-COM: pgs. 3-4 2. Solar Module Optimizer, Solaredge, P400: pgs. 5-6 3. Inverter, Solaredge, SE9K-US & SE14.4k-US: pgs. 7-8 4. Ballast Block, ASTM C1491 4X8X16: pg. 9 5. Optimzer Mount, Quick Mount Accessory Frame Bracket: pgs. 10-13 6. Solar Mounting Equipment, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5D: pgs. 14-36 a Overview, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5D: pgs. 14-17 b Installation Instructions: pgs. 18-36 c Base, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5D: pg. 20 d Ballast Tray, Ecolibrium EcoFoot5 Tray: pg. 20 e Wind Deflector, Ecolibrium: pg. 20 f Module Mounting Clamp, Ecolibrium Universal Clamp: pg. 20 END OF SECTION PV ARRAY Flat Roof Azimuths 146 Degrees X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Datasheet More than 22% Efficiency Captures more sunlight and generates more power than conventional panels. Maximum Performance Designed to perform in demanding real-world conditions of high temperatures, partial shade from overhead wires, and low light.1,2,4 Commercial Grade Intended for commercial sites where maximum energy production is critical. Maxeon® Solar Cells: Fundamentally better Engineered for performance, designed for reliability. Engineered for Peace of Mind Designed to deliver consistent, trouble-free energy over a very long lifetime. 3,4 Designed for Reliability The SunPower Maxeon Solar Cell is the only cell built on a solid copper foundation. Virtually impervious to the corrosion and cracking that degrade conventional panels. 3 Same excellent durability as E-Series panels. #1 Rank in Fraunhofer durability test.9 100% power maintained in Atlas 25+ comprehensive durability test.10 High Performance & Excellent Reliability Highest Efficiency5 Generate more energy per square foot X-Series commercial panels convert more sunlight to electricity by producing 38% more power per panel1 and 70% more energy per square foot over 25 years.1,2,3 Highest Energy Production6 Produce more energy per rated watt More energy to power your operations. High year-one performance delivers 8–10% more energy per rated watt.2 This advantage increases over time, producing 21% more energy over the first 25 years to meet your needs.3 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower X-Series Conventional 25-Year Energy Production / WattYears 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 110% 100% 120% 36% more, year 25 9% more, year 1 21% More Energy Per Rated Watt 0% 2% 4% 6% 8% 10% Maintains High Power at High Temps No Light-Induced Degradation High Average Watts High-Performance Anti-Reﬂective Glass Better Low-Light and Spectral Response Year 1 Energy Advantage / Watt SPR-X22-360-COM SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Tests And Certifications Standard Tests13 UL1703 (Type 2 Fire Rating), IEC 61215, IEC 61730 Quality Certs ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 EHS Compliance RoHS, OHSAS 18001:2007, lead free, REACH SVHC-163, PV Cycle Sustainability Cradle to Cradle CertifiedTM Silver (eligible for LEED points)14 Ammonia Test IEC 62716 Desert Test 10.1109/PVSC.2013.6744437 Salt Spray Test IEC 61701 (maximum severity) PID Test Potential-Induced Degradation free: 1000 V9 Available Listings UL, TUV, JET, CEC Operating Condition And Mechanical Data Temperature –40° F to +185° F (–40° C to +85° C) Impact Resistance 1 inch (25 mm) diameter hail at 52 mph (23 m/s) Appearance Class B Solar Cells 96 Monocrystalline Maxeon Gen III Tempered Glass High-transmission tempered anti-reflective Junction Box IP-65, MC4 compatible Weight 41 lbs (18.6 kg) Max. Load Wind: 50 psf, 2400 Pa, 244 kg/m² front & back Snow: 112 psf, 5400 Pa, 550 kg/m² front Frame Class 2 silver anodized; stacking pins 1559 mm [61.4 in] 1046 mm [41.2 in] 46 mm [1.8 in] FRAME PROFILE 46 mm [1.8 in]32 mm [1.3 in] LONG SIDE 22 mm [0.9 in] SHORT SIDE 4 X 398 mm [15.68 in] (A)(A) Stacking Pins Please read the safety and installation guide. Electrical Data SPR-X22-360-COM Nominal Power (Pnom)11 360 W Power Tolerance +5/-3% Avg. Panel Efficiency12 22.2% Rated Voltage (Vmpp) 59.1 V Rated Current (Impp) 6.09 A Open-Circuit Voltage (Voc) 69.5 V Short-Circuit Current (Isc) 6.48 A Max. System Voltage 1000 V UL & 1000 V IEC Maximum Series Fuse 15 A Power Temp Coef. –0.29% / o C Voltage Temp Coef. -167.4 mV / o C Current Temp Coef. 2.9 mA / o C REFERENCES: 1 All comparisons are SPR-X21-345 vs. a representative conventional panel: 250 W, approx. 1.6 m², 15.3% efficiency. 2 Typically 8–10% more energy per watt, BEW/DNV Engineering “SunPower Yield Report,” Jan 2013. 3 SunPower 0.25%/yr degradation vs. 1.0%/yr conv. panel. Campeau, Z. et al. “SunPower Module Degradation Rate,” SunPower white paper, Feb 2013; Jordan, Dirk “SunPower Test Report,” NREL, Q1-2015. 4 “SunPower Module 40-Year Useful Life” SunPower white paper, May 2015. Useful life is 99 out of 100 panels operating at more than 70% of rated power. 5 Highest of over 3,200 silicon solar panels, Photon Module Survey, Feb 2014. 6 1% more energy than E-Series panels, 8% more energy than the average of the top 10 panel companies tested in 2012 (151 panels, 102 companies), Photon International, Feb 2013. 7 Compared with the top 15 manufacturers. SunPower Warranty Review, May 2015. 8 Some restrictions and exclusions may apply. See warranty for details. 9 X-Series same as E-Series, 5 of top 8 panel manufacturers tested in 2013 report, 3 additional panels in 2014. Ferrara, C., et al. "Fraunhofer PV Durability Initiative for Solar Modules: Part 2". Photovoltaics International, 2014. 10 Compared with the non-stress-tested control panel. X-Series same as E-Series, tested in Atlas 25+ Durability test report, Feb 2013. 11 Standard Test Conditions (1000 W/m² irradiance, AM 1.5, 25° C). NREL calibration Standard: SOMS current, LACCS FF and Voltage. 12 Based on average of measured power values during production. 13 Type 2 fire rating per UL1703:2013, Class C fire rating per UL1703:2002. 14 See salesperson for details. SunPower Offers The Best Combined Power And Product Warranty Power Warranty Product Warranty 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 0 5 10 15 20 25 Years Traditional Warranty SunPower Conventional panel “linear” warranty 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower Traditional Warranty Years More guaranteed power: 95% for first 5 years, −0.4%/yr. to year 25 7 Combined Power and Product defect 25year coverage 8 Document # 514617 Rev B /LTR_US ©December 2016 SunPower Corporation. All rights reserved. SUNPOWER, the SUNPOWER logo, MAXEON, and SIGNATURE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SunPower Corporation. Specifications included in this datasheet are subject to change without notice. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM See www.sunpower.com/facts for more reference information. For more details, see extended datasheet: www.sunpower.com/datasheets. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM POWER OPTIMIZERPower Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 Specifically designed to work with SolarEdge inverters Up to 25% more energy Superior efficiency (99.5%) Mitigates all types of module mismatch losses, from manufacturing tolerance to partial shading Flexible system design for maximum space utilization Fast installation with a single bolt Next generation maintenance with module-level monitoring Compliant with arc fault protection and rapid shutdown NEC requirements (when installed as part of the SolarEdge system) Module-level voltage shutdown for installer and firefighter safety PV power optimization at the module-level www.solaredge.us OPTIMIZER MODEL (typical module compatibility) P320 (for high-power 60-cell modules) P370 (for higher-power 60 and 72-cell modules) P400 (for 72 & 96-cell modules) P405 (for thin film modules) P505 (for highercurrent modules) INPUT Rated Input DC Power(1)320 370 400 405 505 W Absolute Maximum Input Voltage (Voc at lowest temperature) 48 60 80 125 83 Vdc MPPT Operating Range 8 - 48 8 - 60 8 - 80 12.5 - 105 12.5 - 83 Vdc Maximum Short Circuit Current (Isc) 11 10.1 14 Adc Maximum DC Input Current 13.75 12.63 17.5 Adc Maximum Efficiency 99.5 % Weighted Efficiency 98.8 98.6 % Overvoltage Category II OUTPUT DURING OPERATION (POWER OPTIMIZER CONNECTED TO OPERATING SOLAREDGE INVERTER) Maximum Output Current 15 Adc Maximum Output Voltage 60 85 Vdc OUTPUT DURING STANDBY (POWER OPTIMIZER DISCONNECTED FROM SOLAREDGE INVERTER OR SOLAREDGE INVERTER OFF) Safety Output Voltage per Power Optimizer 1 ± 0.1 Vdc STANDARD COMPLIANCE EMC FCC Part15 Class B, IEC61000-6-2, IEC61000-6-3 Safety IEC62109-1 (class II safety), UL1741 RoHS Yes INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Maximum Allowed System Voltage 1000 Vdc Compatible inverters All SolarEdge Single Phase and Three Phase inverters Dimensions (W x L x H) 128 x 152 x 28 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.1 128 x 152 x 36 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.42 128 x 152 x 50 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.96 128 x 152 x 59 / 5 x 5.97 x 2.32 mm / in Weight (including cables) 630 / 1.4 750 / 1.7 845 / 1.9 1064 / 2.3 gr / lb Input Connector MC4(2) Output Wire Type / Connector Double Insulated; MC4 Output Wire Length 0.95 / 3.0 1.2 / 3.9 m / ft Operating Temperature Range -40 - +85 / -40 - +185 ˚C / ˚F Protection Rating IP68 / NEMA6P Relative Humidity 0 - 100 % (1) Rated STC power of the module. Module of up to +5% power tolerance allowed. (2) For other connector types please contact SolarEdge Power Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 PV SYSTEM DESIGN USING A SOLAREDGE INVERTER(3)(4) SINGLE PHASE HD-WAVE SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE 208V THREE PHASE 480V Minimum String Length (Power Optimizers) P320, P370, P400 8 10 18 P405 / P505 6 8 14 Maximum String Length (Power Optimizers)25 25 50 (5) Maximum Power per String 5700 (6000 with SE7600-US - SE11400- US) 5250 6000 12750 W Parallel Strings of Different Lengths or Orientations Yes © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 07/2018/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. (3) For detailed string sizing information refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/string_sizing_na.pdf.(4) It is not allowed to mix P405/P505 with P320/P370/P400/P600/P700/P800 in one string.(5) A string with more than 30 optimizers does not meet NEC rapid shutdown requirements; safety voltage will be above the 30V requirement Integrated Safety Swit INVERTERSSolarEdge Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS) The best choice for SolarEdge enabled systems Specifically designed to work with power optimizers Integrated arc fault protection and rapid shutdown for NEC 2014 and 2017, per article 690.11 and 690.12 UL1741 SA certified, for CPUC Rule 21 grid compliance Built-in module-level monitoring Internet connection through Ethernet or Wireless Small, lightweight, and easy to install outdoors or indoors on provided bracket Fixed voltage inverter for longer strings Integrated Safety Switch Supplied with RS485 Surge Protection Device, to better withstand lightning events 12-20 www.solaredge.usUSA-CANADA-GERMANY-UK-ITALY-THE NETHERLANDS-JAPAN-CHINA-AUSTRALIA-ISRAEL-FRANCE-BELGIUM-TURKEY-INDIA-BULGARIA-ROMANIA-HUNGARY-SWEDEN- SOUTH AFRICA-POLAND-CZECH REPUBLIC Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid(1) for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS SE9KUS SE14.4KUS OUTPUT Rated AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA Maximum AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA AC Output Line Connections 4-wire WYE (L1-L2-L3-N) plus PE or 3 wire Delta AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-N)105-120-132.5 Vac AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-L)183-208-229 Vac AC Frequency Min-Nom-Max(2)59.3 - 60 - 60.5 Hz Max. Continuous Output Current (per Phase) 25 40 A GFDI Threshold 1 A Utility Monitoring, Islanding Protection, Country Configurable Set Points Yes INPUT Maximum DC Power (Module STC) 12150 19400 W Transformer-less, Ungrounded Yes Maximum Input Voltage DC to Gnd 250 300 Vdc Maximum Input Voltage DC+ to DC- 500 600 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC to Gnd 200 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC+ to DC-400 Vdc Maximum Input Current 26.5 38 Adc Maximum Input Short Circuit Current 45 Adc Reverse-Polarity Protection Yes Ground-Fault Isolation Detection 1MΩ Sensitivity 350kΩ Sensitivity (3) CEC Weighted Efficiency 96.5 97 % Night-time Power Consumption < 3 < 4 W ADDITIONAL FEATURES Supported Communication Interfaces RS485, Ethernet, ZigBee (optional) Rapid Shutdown – NEC 2014 and 2017 690.12 Automatic Rapid Shutdown upon AC Grid Disconnect(4) RS485 Surge Protection Supplied with the inverter STANDARD COMPLIANCE Safety UL1741, UL1741 SA, UL1699B, CSA C22.2, Canadian AFCI according to T.I.L. M-07 Grid Connection Standards IEEE1547, Rule 21, Rule 14 (HI) Emissions FCC part15 class B INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS AC output conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG 3/4” minimum / 8-4 AWG DC input conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG Number of DC inputs 2 pairs 3 pairs (5) Dimensions (H x W x D)21 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 540 x 315 x 260 in / mm Dimensions with Safety Switch (H x W x D) 30.5 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 775 x 315 x 260 in / mm Weight 73.2 / 33.2 99.5 / 45 lb / kg Weight with Safety Switch 79.7 / 36.2 106 / 48 lb / kg Cooling Fans (user replaceable) Noise < 50 < 55 dBA Operating Temperature Range -40 to +140 / -40 to +60(6) ˚F / ˚C Protection Rating NEMA 3R (1) For 277/480V inverters refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/files/pdfs/products/inverters/se-three-phase-us-inverter-datasheet.pdf(2) For other regional settings please contact SolarEdge support(3) Where permitted by local regulations(4) P/N SE9K-US0xxxxxx has Manual Rapid Shutdown for NEC 2014 compliance (NEC 2017 compliance with outdoor installation)(5) Field replacement kit for 1 pair of inputs P/N: DCD-3PH-1TBK; Field replacement kit for 3 pairs of fuses and holders P/N: DCD-3PH-6FHK-S1(5) For power de-rating information refer to: https://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/se-temperature-derating-note-na.pdf © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 11/2017/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. 4x8x16 BALLAST BLOCK DRAWING: 4x8x16 BALLAST 4"x8"x16" Ballast Block NOTES: x WEIGHT: -34 lbs/ea. x COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, MIN P.S.I. (AVG. GROSS AREA) -AVG. OF 3 UNITS: 4500 -INDIVIDUAL UNITS: 4500 x :$7(5$%62537,210$;/%)7ñ -AVG OF 3 UNITS: 10% x DRY CAST BLOCK WITH 38" AGGREGATE x NO DIMENSION SHALL VARY MORE THAN 3 PERCENT OVER OR UNDER THE SPECIFIED DIMENSION FOR ANY FORM OF UNIT x ASTM C-139-05 EXCEPT THAT THE UNITS SHALL CONFORM TO THE DETAILS SHOWN HEREON AND THAT THEIR THICKNESS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 5" 7 58" 3 5 8" 15 58" Quick Rack™ Rail-Free System | Rooftop Racking Systems Ground Mounted Systems | Ballasted Systems R ESPECT T HE R OOF Accessory Frame Bracket For mounting module level electronics to standard module frames Works with: Oct-2018, Rev 3BI 7.2.3-37_1 2 1 3 ITEM NO.DESCRIPTION QTY. 1 ACCESSORY FRAME CLAMP, UNIVERSAL, 5052-H32, MILL 1 2 ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET, 5052-H32, MILL 1 3 CAP SCREW, SERRATED FLANGE, HEX HEAD, 5/16"-18 X 3/4", UNC-2A, 18-8SS 1 2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SHEET 1 OF 2 DFM SCALE: 2:3 WEIGHT: REVASIZE TITLE: DATE: DRAWN BY:DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHESTOLERANCES:FRACTIONAL 1/8TWO PLACE DECIMAL .19THREE PLACE DECIMAL .094 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIALTHE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF QUICK MOUNT PV. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF QUICK MOUNT PV IS PROHIBITED. COPYRIGHT © 2016 QUICK MOUNT PV 5 4 3 2 1 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: 0.19 QMAFBU: ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET, UNIVERSAL 5/16/2018 MODULE LEVEL ELECTRONIC ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET BRACKET CLAMP CAP SCREW GROUNDING PINS MODULE FRAME BRACKET CLAMP CAP SCREW MODULE LEVEL ELECTRONIC ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET MODULE FRAME 2 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING SHEET 2 OF 2 DFM SCALE: 1:2 WEIGHT: REVASIZE TITLE: DATE: DRAWN BY:DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHESTOLERANCES:FRACTIONAL 1/8TWO PLACE DECIMAL .19THREE PLACE DECIMAL .094 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIALTHE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF QUICK MOUNT PV. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF QUICK MOUNT PV IS PROHIBITED. COPYRIGHT © 2016 QUICK MOUNT PV 5 4 3 2 1 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: 3.81 QMAFBU: ACCESSORY FRAME BRACKET, UNIVERSAL 5/16/2018 Oct-2018, Rev 3BI 7.2.3-37_1 Place the frame clamp over the edge of the module frame, and in front of the module level electronic mounting bracket. Slide the assembly up and to the left to engage cap screw into frame clamp slot. Tighten the cap screw with a half-inch socket and torque wrench to a torque of 15 foot-pounds. Neatly coil the wires and clip to module frame. Accessory Frame Bracket | QMAFBU Installation Tools Required: PV wire clips, 1/2" socket and torque wrench. In a standard landscape or portrait array, the Accessory Frame Bracket should be installed at least 5 inches from the edge of the module and at least 1 inch in from the edge of the module junction box. With the cap screw threaded into the bracket, slide the cap screw into the slot on the module level electronic mounting bracket with the bracket behind the module level electronic mounting bracket. Slide this assembly onto the module frame with the bracket behind the module frame, the module level electronic mounting bracket in front of the module frame. Quick Start Guide Notes: Be sure to comply with all state, local, and module level electronic requirements. Find UL 2703 Installation Instructions here: www.quickmountpv.com/pdfs/QMAFBU_UL.pdf For UL 2703 listing, see UL Constructional Data Report here: www.quickmountpv.com/quickrack/pdfs/QMAFB-UL2703-Listing.pdf Oct-2018, Rev 3BI 7.2.3-37_1 R ESPECT T HE R OOF 925-478-8269 | www.quickmountpv.com | info@quickmountpv.com 2700 Mitchell Dr. | Walnut Creek, CA 94598 UL STD 2703 ©2018 by Quick Mount PV. All rights reserved. The New High Density 5° Racking System Small Footprint. Big Power. Now you can build more powerful rooftop solar systems faster and easier than ever before with the new high density EcoFoot5DTM Racking System. Built on the Industry-Preferred EcoFoot® Platform, with More than 200MW Installed. 18.4% More Power Elegantly Simple Installation Cost-Saving Logistics & Support Small 7"x16.7" roof-friendly modular Base and dense 9.9" inter-row spacing enables a tightly packed solar array that delivers 18.4% more power than 10° systems. Whether your roof is small or large, EcoFoot5D provides more power, lowering cost-per-watt. EcoFoot5D delivers preassembled parts and an out-of-the-box, ready- to-go installation that is unlike any other flat-roof racking. The result is a seamless installation process from start to finish, saving on time and minimizing job-site impact. Stackable bases enable a huge per-pallet shipping capacity. Fewer pallets are required, minimizing shipping, storage and onsite crane use. Dedicated engineering support prevents issues before they happen and provides quick solutions if obstacles arise. 6 Simple Installation Steps. Technical Specifications. Validation Summary. • Certified to UL2703 Fire Class A • Certified to UL2703 Grounding • SEAOC seismic compliant Contact: 740.249.1877 | sales@ecolibriumsolar.com | www.ecolibriumsolar.com Install Wind Deflector. Place Wind Deflector Press the Upper and Contact us for a specific project bid, to schedule a product demo, or to learn more about The Simplest Way to Max Out Your Roof Elegant Installation, Right Out of the Box. 290kW of Bases Delivered on 1 Standard Pallet. Wire Management in a Snap. Organized Work Flow and Preassembled Parts When you’re on the roof, you need ready-to-go components and a simple install. That’s why installers prefer the EcoFoot Modular Platform: Bases self-align and parts are preassembled so no PV panel preparation is required, which enables non-stop installation from box to roof. Only with EcoFoot Modular Now, EcoFoot5D delivers the elegant installation process only EcoFoot modular systems provide and packs the array with 18.4% more power than a 10° system. Installer-centric design provides unsurpassed advantages: • Simple, preassembled parts • Self-aligning Bases fall in line as modules are placed • Low-effort roof layout, just two chalk lines required • No PV panel prep, non-stop install from box to roof • Six simple installation steps • No training required – 5-minute learning curve Efficient Logistics On and Off the Roof Increase Your Bottom Line From shipping to deployment, the EcoFoot5D System reduces your shipping, storage and roof-loading needs significantly. The result? More profit per job. • Stackable Bases and low part count streamline logistics • 290kW of Bases delivered on 1 standard pallet • Small footprint minimizes contact with roof • Slip sheet costs are low, drainage is excellent • Lightweight and roof-friendly • Ideal for residential and commercial flat roofs • Suited for mild or extreme roof undulations • No UV exposure: row-to-row wires covered by Ballast Tray the life of the system with removable Wind Deflector Built on the Industry Preferred, Innovative EcoFoot Modular Platform. Creating Unbeatable Solar Racking for Commercial and Residential Since 2010, Ecolibrium Solar has revolutionized Solar Racking with the FAST & SIMPLE EcoFoot Modular Platform for flat-roof arrays and EcoX Rail-less Racking for pitched roofs. With 600MW installed on flat and pitched roofs nationwide, we bring the beauty of simplicity to solar. Streamline logistics with up to 290kW of Bases per pallet. Deflector The Simplest Way to Max Out Your Roof Elegant Installation, Right Out of the Box. 290kW of Bases 5 Simple Components. 1 Sweet System. Wire Management in a Snap.Ballast Placement that Beats All.Efficient Logistics On needs significantly. The result? More profit per job. commercial flat roofs Accessible & Protected Simply snap wire clips into Base to route wires between rows. • No UV exposure: row-to-row wires covered by Ballast Tray • Easy access to wires during install and throughout the life of the system with removable Wind Deflector and in-row ballast placement Ergonomic, Cost-Saving and Fast Place ballasts between rows for easy reach. • No awkward under-module access • Rapid Ballast Tray install, sliding into Base retention clips • Ballast Tray strong enough to walk on, even when loaded with ballast blocks • Minimal roof contact means smaller slip sheets, lowering costs Preferred, Innovative EcoFoot Modular Platform. FAST & SIMPLE EcoFoot Modular Platform for flat-roof arrays and EcoX With 600MW installed on flat and Ballast Tray Mid-Support Wind DeflectorPreassembled Universal Clamp EcoFoot5D Base Platform, with More than 200MW Installed. other flat-roof racking. The result from start to finish, saving on time Unbeatable EcoFoot5D 6 Simple Installation Steps. Technical Specifications. Get the EcoFoot5D Advantage. Validation Summary. Clamping range: 32–50mm Dimensions: 16.7"L x 7"W x 6.2"H Typical system weight: 2.4–7.7 psf Module orientation: Landscape Tilt angle: 5° Landscape Module inter-row spacing: 9.9" Roof pitch: 0°–7° Ballast requirements: 4" x 8" x 16" Wind tunnel tested: 150 mph Warranty: 25 years Slip sheets: not required by Ecolibrium Solar. If required by roofer, use 7"x16.7" under Base; 2"x3" under Mid-Support. • Certified to UL2703 Fire Class A for Type I and II modules • Certified to UL2703 Grounding and Bonding • SEAOC seismic compliant 740.249.1877 | sales@ecolibriumsolar.com | www.ecolibriumsolar.com | Boulder, CO | Athens, OH ©2017 Ecolibrium Solar, Inc., EcoFoot5D is a trademark of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc. Registration pending. EcoFoot and Ecolibrium Solar are registered trademarks of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc. Step 1 Step 4 Step 2 Step 5 Step 3 Step 6 Install Clamps in Bases – No Tools Required. Install Mid-Support. Only Two Chalk Lines Needed. Install Ballast Tray and place ballast blocks. Secure PV modules onto Bases. Install Wind Deflector. Drop preassembled Clamps into Base, push in Clevis Pins, Base is ready to install. Measure & mark 2 chalk lines, Bases self-align as modules drop into place. Space modules using alignment marks on Clamps, torque Nut provided to 14 ft-lbs. Place Wind Deflector into slot on Base, attach using Rocker Nut provided. Slide Tray into retention clips on Base, east/west. Place ballast blocks without reaching using sturdy, walk-on tray. Press the Upper and Lower Mid-Supports onto the module frame. Ecolibrium Solar provides engineering support for your project from concept to completion. Contact us for a specific project bid, to schedule a product demo, or to learn more about simple, fast and cost-effective EcoFoot5D High Density 5° Racking. Call 740.249.1877 or email Sales@EcolibriumSolar.com v1.3 040918 Sales: 740-249-1877 Sales@EcolibriumSolar.com Field Support: 866-488-6794 FieldSupport@EcolibriumSolar.com www.ecolibriumsolar.com Installation Guide Installation Guide EcoFoot5D™ High Density 5-Degree Ballasted Racking System Document No. ES10560 Rev 1.1, January 2018 EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 2 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Revision History Revision Description of Changes Date 1.0 Initial EcoFoot5DTM Release 2017-September-05 1.1 Add Attachment Appendix B 2018-January-25 EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 3 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Table of Contents Revision History ..................................................................................................................................... 2 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................. 3 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 4 Field Support Contact Information .................................................................................................... 4 Installer Responsibility .......................................................................................................................... 4 Disclaimer of Liability ........................................................................................................................... 4 Warnings & Safety ................................................................................................................................. 5 EcoFoot5D General Application Notes ............................................................................................ 5 EcoFoot5D Core Components ............................................................................................................ 7 Install EcoFoot5D in 6 Simple Steps .................................................................................................. 8 Appendix A: Grounding & Bonding .................................................................................................. 11 Appendix B: Roof Attachment Methods ........................................................................................ 12 Legal Notices ©2017 Ecolibrium Solar®, Inc. Ecolibrium Solar® and EcoFoot2+® are registered trademarks of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc. EcoFoot5D™ is a trademark of Ecolibrium Solar, Inc., registration pending. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 4 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Introduction EcoFoot5DTM is a 5-degree ballasted racking system designed to fit more modules on a roof, maximizing power density. The modular design is built on the proven, industry-preferred, beautifully simple and fast-to-install modular technology of the EcoFoot platform and sister product, EcoFoot2+. EcoFoot5D consists of five simple components. Installation is accomplished in six simple steps. Much of the installation is tool-less. EcoFoot5D Bases self-align, requiring only two chalk lines. The PV module installation automatically moves the Bases into perfect placement. Inter-row ballast placement and easy-reach wire management provide superior accessibility during and after installation. Stackable Bases enable the transport of up to 290kW of Bases on 1 standard pallet, streamlining logistics. The combined effect of simplicity, maximum density, and minimized shipping, storage and transporting costs results in an ultra cost-effective racking solution. Field Support Contact Information Ecolibrium Solar proudly offers dedicated engineering expertise and superior customer support. For questions about the installation procedures or a specific application, please contact our Field Support Specialists at 866- 488-6794 or FieldSupport@EcolibriumSolar.com. Installer Responsibility The installer is solely responsible for: • Utilizing all necessary safety equipment, as required by applicable rules and regulations. • Complying with all applicable local and national building codes, including any that may supersede this manual. • Ensuring that Ecolibrium Solar® EcoFoot5DTM and other products are appropriate for the specific installation and are designed for the installation environment. • Ensuring that the roof, its rafters, connections, and other structural support members can support the array under all conditions. • Maintaining the waterproof integrity of the roof including selection of appropriate flashing if the system is being installed using attachments. • Ensuring safe installation of all electrical aspects of the entire system Disclaimer of Liability ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR® does not assume responsibility and expressly disclaims liability for loss, damage, or expense arising out of, or in any way connected with installation, operation, use, or maintenance by using this manual. ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR assumes no responsibility for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties, which may result from use of modules. No license is granted by implication or under any patent or patent rights. The information in this manual is believed to be reliable, but does not constitute an expressed and/or implied warranty. ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR reserves the right to make changes to the product, specifications, data sheets and this manual without prior notice. This document is not prescriptive regarding safety and does not purport to address all the safety concerns that may arise with its use. Contractors should become familiar with all applicable safety, health, and regulatory requirements before beginning work. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 5 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Unauthorized field modification of ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR components or assemblies may affect ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR warranty coverage. Provide written drawings for ECOLIBRIUM SOLAR’s review, comment and approval prior to attempting any field modifications. Warnings & Safety Both electrical and roofing knowledge are required to correctly and safely install a solar photovoltaic system. Only qualified and certified installation professionals should install EcoFoot5D. Failure to follow the methods and procedures outlined in this guide may result in injury and/or damage to property. Carefully read this guide before starting any work. Store a copy of this guide on the job site at all times and contact Ecolibrium Solar with any installation questions related to EcoFoot5D. Please note the following warnings when installing EcoFooot5D: • EcoFoot5D components fit together tightly and could cause pinch injuries. • EcoFoot5D components may be hot to the touch if left in the sun. Please follow the safety requirements below when installing EcoFoot5D: • Always keep children and unauthorized people away from work areas. • Always wear required OSHA approved Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). • Always use insulated tools when working with or near electrical systems. • Always provide OSHA approved fall protection for all installation personnel. • Never wear jewelry during mechanical and electrical installation work. • Never work in rain, snow or extremely windy conditions. • Never leave a module unsupported or unsecured on the roof. • Never install broken photovoltaic modules. EcoFoot5D General Application Notes Site-Specific System Design: Ecolibrium Solar provides drafting services on all EcoFoot5D projects. This service produces a site-specific design package with an Engineered Stamped Layout including detailed ballast plan and bill of materials. Roof Type: EcoFoot5D is designed to mount photovoltaic modules to a range of roof surfaces, including: EPDM, TPO, PVC, Mineral Cap Sheet (a.k.a. Rolled Asphalt), Tar and Gravel. Roof Slope Range: 0-7 degrees maximum, 3-degree limit for unattached seismic. Wind Zone: EcoFoot5D is designed to mount photovoltaic modules on flat roof surfaces with a maximum pitch of 7 degrees in areas with extreme wind conditions. Please contact Ecolibrium Solar for clarification or assistance. Installation Requirements: EcoFoot5D is a ballasted photovoltaic racking designed as a system. The system requires all EcoFoot5D components, the specific module, and ballast placement prescribed in the PE stamped design. The absence of any of these elements in any given sub-array could present a compromised condition on the roof. Arrays shall not be left unattended in such a state during an installation. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 6 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com This install guide officially documents the components used and proper methods for an EcoFoot5D installation. Bonding elements are incorporated into EcoFoot5D components. As the system is built on the roof, components and modules are bonded together. Specific steps to ensure a bonded system are described through the installation guide. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the system is safely and properly installed, and that the system is bonded back to a final ground point. When wiring the array, keep bare copper from contacting bare aluminum. Thermal and Seismic Design Requirements: EcoFoot5D is a flexible and expandable design that accommodates various array geometries. Maximum widths for arrays are as follows: • 60-cell modules, 26 modules in a row • 72-cell modules, 22 modules in a row Minimum spacing between sub-arrays is 6”. Site specifics may further limit array sizes and spacing. Seismic and Uplift Design Requirements: EcoFoot5D can be attached when required by seismic and uplift conditions as specified by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Addendums in this install guide document the components used and proper methods for an EcoFoot5D installation with attachments. Use the method required for the specific Fire Code Rating of the PV module. Re-Inspection: Ecolibrium Solar recommends periodic re-inspection of the installation for loose components, loose fasteners, and any corrosion, such that if found, the affected components are to be immediately replaced. Compatible Modules: Ecolibrium Solar has evaluated many photovoltaic modules for installation compatibility with the EcoFoot5D ballasted racking system. A list of compatible modules may be found in “EcoFoot5D Install Guide Appendix - Compatible Modules.pdf” on our website: www.ecolibriumsolar.com UL2703 Qualification: In cases where UL 2703 certification is required, the EcoFoot5D system conforms to the UL2703 Standard for grounding and bonding and fire ratings. The EcoFoot5D system may be used to ground and/or mount a PV module complying with UL1703 only when the specific module has been evaluated for grounding and /or mounting in compliance with the included instructions. EcoFoot5D Racking maintains a Class A fire rating when installed in landscape orientation according to the installation instructions, on a low slope roof Class A roof with Type 1 and Type 2 modules. When installing Type 2 modules a Ballast Tray is required. For roofs with lower fire ratings, the existing rating is maintained when EcoFoot5D is used. At this time, the EcoFoot5D system is undergoing further testing pertaining to mechanical loading with specific modules. Further information about Ecolibrium Solar’s UL2703 conformance may be found in “EcoFoot5D Install Guide Appendix - UL2703 Qualification.pdf” on our website: www.ecolibriumsolar.com UL2703 System Label: The label shown below is stamped into to the Wind Deflector (identified as component 5 in the installation guide). The Date Code ABCYZZ shown above will appear on production parts, letters defined as follows: • ABC shall be an acronym for identifying the source factory • Y shall be the Quarter of the year (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4) of manufacture • ZZ shall be the last 2 digits of the year of manufacture EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 7 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com EcoFoot5D Core Components 1 EcoFoot5D Base 2 Universal Clamp Lower 3 Universal Clamp Upper 4 Clevis Pins 5 Wind Deflector 6 Ballast Tray 7 Mid-Support Upper 8 Mid-Support Lower 9 5/16” Thread-Forming Screw Hardware Required All required hardware is included. Tools Required ½” Deep Socket Calibrated Torque Wrench Torque Settings 14 ft-lbs on all Fasteners EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 8 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Install EcoFoot5D in 6 Simple Steps Step 1 – Install Preassembled Universal Clamps into Bases 1.1 Place Lower and Upper Universal Clamp into EcoFoot5D Base as shown. Note: The Upper Clamp includes a post and nut to install the Wind Deflector as shown in Step 6. 1.2 Push Clevis Pins completely into EcoFoot5D Base to secure Rocker. Step 2 – Position Array 2.1 Snap two chalk lines on roof denoting outside edges of the EcoFoot5D Bases, per project drawing. Start from the north or south edge. Ensure chalk lines are square. 2.2 Place EcoFoot5D Bases in approximate position throughout the array. Installation Tips  Only install Clamps where modules will rest.  See Step 3 for correct placement and orientation of Clamps. Base Lower Clamp Upper Clamp Clevis Pin Clevis Pin Bases Chalk Lines Installation Tips  As you build the array, panels will space the Bases. Roughly place a few rows of Bases at a time so that they are within reach of final location. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 9 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 3 – Secure PV Modules onto Bases 3.1 Place PV module onto EcoFoot5D Base. 3.2 Space modules ½” apart using alignment marks located on the Clamps 3.3 Torque Nuts to 14 ft-lbs using a 1/2" deep socket. Nuts (F) to Warnings Step 4 – Install Mid-Support. 4.1 Locate module center point +/-1” using PV module cell lines. 4.2 Press the Upper and Lower Mid-Supports onto the module frame. Note: On the south row, the Upper Mid-Support will not be pressed onto a module frame. On the north row, the Lower Mid-Support will not be pressed onto a module frame. 4.3 Slide Upper and Lower Mid-Support together using the male/female features. If required, place optional, self-adhering EPDM pads on the bottom surface of the Upper and Lower Mid-Supports. Nut Base Module Nut PV Module Center Point Upper & Lower Mid-Support Press Upper Mid-Support on to Frame Press Lower Mid-Support on to Frame Slide together Upper & Lower Mid-Support Installation Tips  After Step 3, wiring can be routed and secured.  Standard wire clips or cable ties (not included) can be inserted into slots along Base edge. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 10 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 5 – Install Ballast Tray and place ballast blocks on Tray. 5.1 Slide tray into retention clips located on the Base by sliding the Tray along the east-west direction. 5.2 Secure tray to Mid-Support using 5/16” thread forming screw provided with Mid-Support Kit. Torque Screw to 14 ft-lbs. 5.3 Place ballast (not included) in a single layer evenly dispersed along the length of Ballast Trays. Apply ballast per the ballast plan specified in the PE Certified Ballast Plan – Sheet S-1.0. Step 6 – Install Wind Deflector. 6.1 Place Wind Deflectors into slot on EcoFoot5D Base and attach to Rocker using Nut provided. 6.2 Torque Nut to 14 ft-lbs using a ½” deep socket. Application of anti-seize on threaded post recommended. Ballast Tray Base Retention Clips Ballast Tray 5/16” Screw Rocker Nut Base Retention Clip Wind Deflector EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 11 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Appendix A: Grounding & Bonding The EcoFoot5D system has been tested by TüV Rheinland and conforms to UL 2703 for Grounding and Bonding when installed per the published installation instructions. EcoFoot5D carries module-to-module ground bond through the Wind Deflector and Mid-Support – Items 5 and Items 7 & 8 respectively, listed in the “EcoFoot5D Core Components” table in this document. Each row of modules/wind deflectors in an array of up to 400 modules must be grounded per the NEC and ANSI/NFPA 70 either through the designated ground hole in the Wind Deflector, or by drilling a ¼” ground hole into the Wind Deflector a minimum of ½” from any edge. One Ground Lug is required for every 400 modules connected within an array. Ecolibrium Solar recommends using #6 copper ground wire in conjunction with WEEB grounding devices such as the WEEB-LUG-6.7 or WEEB DSK516. Lugs are a single use component. Other grounding methods must be reviewed and approved by a licensed master electrician or electrical engineer and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Green lines represent ground bond path. Wind Deflectors carry module-to-module east/west ground bond. Mid-Supports carry row-to-row north/south ground bond. Grounding and Bonding Path Ground Lug Ground Hole with Lug Installed Ground Lug is installed in the Wind Deflector either in the designated ground hole or by drilling a ¼” ground hole into the Wind Deflector a minimum of ½” from any edge. One Ground Lug is required for every 400 modules within an array. Ground Lug ▲ N EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 12 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Appendix B: Roof Attachment Methods EcoFoot5D can be attached when required by seismic and uplift conditions or the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). There are 3 methods of attachment that satisfy seismic and uplift requirements for Type 1 and Type 2 modules. Use the method indicated for the specific Fire Code Rating of the PV module. The Ballast Tray is not required for attachment method for Modules with a Type 1 Fire Code Rating. The Ballast Tray is required for attachment method for Modules with a Type 2 Fire Code Rating. Attachment Methods Seismic and Uplift Attachment Seismic Attachment Modules with Type 1 Fire Code Rating Use Attachment with Strut Modules with Type 1 & 2 Fire Code Rating Use Attachment with Ballast Tray Modules with Type 1 & 2 Fire Code Rating Use Attachment with Ballast Tray and Strut Attachment with Strut Attachment with Strut – Components included in Kit 1 L-Bracket, 2”x3” – Qty 3 2 Elevator Bolt, 1/4"-20 x 1-1/2” Qty 2 2 Nut, Serrated Flange 1/4"-20 Qty 2 4 Nut, Strut 3/8"-16 x 1” Qty 3 3 Nut, Serrated Flange 3/8"-16 Qty 1 6 Bolt, Serrated Flange 3/8"-16 Qty 3 Components Not Included in Kit Strut, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” Roof Attachment (Flat Plate or Station Anchor) Tools Required 7/16” Deep Socket 9/16” Deep Socket 9/16” Open-End Wrench Calibrated Torque Wrench Torque Settings 8 ft-lbs for 1/4" fasteners, 14 ft-lbs. for 3/8” fasteners EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 13 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Attachment with Strut Instruction Step 1 – Attach L-Bracket to Bases and Roof Attachment 1.1 Bases - insert Elevator Bolt through square hole of Base. Place L-Bracket on Elevator Bolt and secure with ¼”-20 Serrated Flange Nut. 1.2 Roof Attachment - Place L-Bracket on Stud and secure with 3/8”-16 Serrated Flange Nut. Step 2 – Install Flat Plate or Station Anchor Roof Attachment 2.1 Align L-Bracket of Roof Attachment with L-Brackets on Bases and install Roof Attachment on either side of the Mid-Support. Install Roof Attachment per Roof Attachment manufacturer’s instructions. Elevator Bolt L-Bracket & Flange Nut Line between L-Brackets Roof Attachment (Flat Plate or Station Anchor) Mid-Support L-Bracket & Flange Nut Stud EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 14 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 3 – Attach Strut to L-Brackets and Tighten Hardware 3.1 Secure Strut to L-Brackets with 3/8”-16 Serrated Hex Bolt and 3/8”-16 Strut Nut. Engage grooves of Strut Nut with the two lips within Strut. 3.2 Tighten and torque all hardware. Torque ¼”—20 hardware to 8 ft-lbs. Torque 3/8”—16 hardware to 14 ft-lbs. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 15 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Attachment with Ballast Tray Attachment with Ballast Tray – Components included in Kit 1 Elevator Bolt, 1/4"-20 x 3/4” Qty 4 2 Nut, Coupling 1/4"-20 x 7/8” Qty 4 3 Washer, 7/16" ID x 1 OD Qty 6 4 Bolt, Serrated Flange 1/4”-20 Qty 4 5 Nut, Serrated Flange 3/8"-16 Qty 2 Not Included in Kit Roof Attachment (Flat Plate) Optional Addition of Strut to Ballast Tray – Components Included in Kit 1 Screw, Sheet Metal #12 x ¾” Qty 6 2 Washer, Fender ¼” ID x 1” OD Qty 6 Not Included in Kit Strut, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” Torque Settings 8 ft-lbs for 1/4" fasteners, 14 ft-lbs. for 3/8” fasteners, 5 ft-lbs for sheet metal screws Tools Required 7/16” Deep Socket 5/16” Hex Driver 9/16” Socket Calibrated Torque Wrench EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 16 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Attachment with Ballast Tray Instruction Step 1 – Install Attachment 1.1 Use Ballast Tray to Position Roof Attachment. Stud of Roof Attachment will extend through one of the slots in middle of Ballast Tray. 1.2 Mark Attachment location, remove Ballast Tray, install Roof Attachment per manufacturer’s instructions. Note: Position the attachment such that it can share the same slot with the Mid-Support as shown. Step 2 – Install Mid-Span Support 2.1 Refer to Step 4 of the Installation Guide to install Mid-Span Support. Step 3 – Install Hardware on Attachment Stud 3.1 Install 3/8”-16 Serrated Flange Nut and 7/16 ID x 1” OD Washer onto Roof Attachment stud. Level top of Washer with top of Mid-Span Support. Level Washer with top of Mid-Span Support Bracket Roof Attachment Washer and Flange Nut Stud EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 17 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 4 – Install Hardware on Bases 4.1 Install Elevator Bolts and Nut Coupling into EcoFoot 5D bases. Torque to 8 ft-lb. Repeat process on both Bases. Step 5 – Install Ballast Tray and secure to Mid-Span Support & Bases 5.1 Referring to Step 5 of the Installation Guide, install Ballast Tray. Line up slots with attachment stud, base hardware and Mid-Support. 5.2 Torque fastener into Mid-Span Support to 14 ft-lbs. through slot on Ballast-Tray. 5.3 Fasten Ballast Tray to base with Washers and Serrated Hex Bolts on both bases. Torque to 8 ft-lb. 5.4 Install Washer and Serrated-Flange Nut onto Preferred Roof Attachment in order shown below. Torque Serrated -Flange Nut to 14 ft-lbs. 5.5 Roof Attachment installation complete for Seismic Rated Attachment System. Nut Coupling and Elevator Bolts Washers and Serrated Hex Bolts Washer and Serrated Hex Nut Serrated Hex Bolt EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 18 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Step 6 - Optional Addition of Strut to the Attachment with Ballast Tray Adding strut to the Attachment with Ballast Tray provides additional rating for uplift strength to offset or eliminate ballast in a localized region around the attachment point. 6.1 Lay Strut along length of Ballast Trays, centering Strut over Roof Attachment. 6.2 Install two Sheet-Metal Screws and Fender Washers on either side and as close to the roof attachment stud as possible. Install additional screws along the length of the strut at no more than 24” intervals. Strut reinforcement attachment complete. Sheet-Metal Screws with Fender Washers installed along the length of the strut at no more than 24” intervals. One Screw on either side of Roof Attachment. Lay Strut on Ballast Trays Install Two Sheet-Metal Screws with Fender Washers close to Roof Attachment. EcoFoot5D Install Guide V1.1-FINAL Page 19 of 19 January 25, 2018, ES10560 ecolibriumsolar.com Strut Installation Note Strut may need to be cut and/or spliced to meet the attachment requirements in the project’s Ballast Layout Plan or engineering report. Splice Strut and install hardware as shown. All hardware is included in the Strut Kit. Splice Kit 82 BRIDGE STREET DIETZ & CO ARCHITECTS Northampton, MA 01060 OCTOBER 12, 2018 Table of Contents Sloped Asphalt Roof Solar Array(s): 1. Solar Module, Sunpower SPR-X22-360-COM: pgs. 3-4 2. Solar Module Optimizer, Solaredge, P400: pgs. 5-6 3. Inverter, Solaredge, SE9K-US: pgs. 7-8 4. Solar Mounting Equipment, Ironridge Pitched Roof: pgs. 9-26 a Overview, Ironridge Flush Mount: pg. 9 b Asphalt Roof Attachment, Ironridge Flashfoot2 (Mill Finish): pgs. 10-11 c Roof Attachment to Rail Connector, Ironridge T-Bolt Bonding Hardware: pgs. 12-13 d Solar Array Mounting Rail, Ironridge XR100: pgs. 14-15 e Solar Array Mounting Rail Splices, Ironridge XR100 Bonded Splices: pgs. 16-17 f Solar Array Mounting Rail Grounding Lugs, Ironridge Low Profile Lug: pgs. 18-19 g Solar Array Optimizer Mounting Hardware, Ironridge Bonding Hardware: pgs. 20-21 h Solar Module Mounting Hardware, Ironridge UFO Universal Clamp: pg. 22 i Solar Module Mounting End Clamp, Ironridge CAMO Module End Clamp: pgs. 23-25 j Solar Module Wire Management Clips, Ironridge Wire Clips: pg. 26 END OF SECTION PV ARRAY Sloped Asphalt Roofs Azimuths 146 & 236 Degrees X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Datasheet More than 22% Efficiency Captures more sunlight and generates more power than conventional panels. Maximum Performance Designed to perform in demanding real-world conditions of high temperatures, partial shade from overhead wires, and low light.1,2,4 Commercial Grade Intended for commercial sites where maximum energy production is critical. Maxeon® Solar Cells: Fundamentally better Engineered for performance, designed for reliability. Engineered for Peace of Mind Designed to deliver consistent, trouble-free energy over a very long lifetime. 3,4 Designed for Reliability The SunPower Maxeon Solar Cell is the only cell built on a solid copper foundation. Virtually impervious to the corrosion and cracking that degrade conventional panels. 3 Same excellent durability as E-Series panels. #1 Rank in Fraunhofer durability test.9 100% power maintained in Atlas 25+ comprehensive durability test.10 High Performance & Excellent Reliability Highest Efficiency5 Generate more energy per square foot X-Series commercial panels convert more sunlight to electricity by producing 38% more power per panel1 and 70% more energy per square foot over 25 years.1,2,3 Highest Energy Production6 Produce more energy per rated watt More energy to power your operations. High year-one performance delivers 8–10% more energy per rated watt.2 This advantage increases over time, producing 21% more energy over the first 25 years to meet your needs.3 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower X-Series Conventional 25-Year Energy Production / WattYears 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 110% 100% 120% 36% more, year 25 9% more, year 1 21% More Energy Per Rated Watt 0% 2% 4% 6% 8% 10% Maintains High Power at High Temps No Light-Induced Degradation High Average Watts High-Performance Anti-Reﬂective Glass Better Low-Light and Spectral Response Year 1 Energy Advantage / Watt SPR-X22-360-COM SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM X-Series Commercial Solar Panels Tests And Certifications Standard Tests13 UL1703 (Type 2 Fire Rating), IEC 61215, IEC 61730 Quality Certs ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 EHS Compliance RoHS, OHSAS 18001:2007, lead free, REACH SVHC-163, PV Cycle Sustainability Cradle to Cradle CertifiedTM Silver (eligible for LEED points)14 Ammonia Test IEC 62716 Desert Test 10.1109/PVSC.2013.6744437 Salt Spray Test IEC 61701 (maximum severity) PID Test Potential-Induced Degradation free: 1000 V9 Available Listings UL, TUV, JET, CEC Operating Condition And Mechanical Data Temperature –40° F to +185° F (–40° C to +85° C) Impact Resistance 1 inch (25 mm) diameter hail at 52 mph (23 m/s) Appearance Class B Solar Cells 96 Monocrystalline Maxeon Gen III Tempered Glass High-transmission tempered anti-reflective Junction Box IP-65, MC4 compatible Weight 41 lbs (18.6 kg) Max. Load Wind: 50 psf, 2400 Pa, 244 kg/m² front & back Snow: 112 psf, 5400 Pa, 550 kg/m² front Frame Class 2 silver anodized; stacking pins 1559 mm [61.4 in] 1046 mm [41.2 in] 46 mm [1.8 in] FRAME PROFILE 46 mm [1.8 in]32 mm [1.3 in] LONG SIDE 22 mm [0.9 in] SHORT SIDE 4 X 398 mm [15.68 in] (A)(A) Stacking Pins Please read the safety and installation guide. Electrical Data SPR-X22-360-COM Nominal Power (Pnom)11 360 W Power Tolerance +5/-3% Avg. Panel Efficiency12 22.2% Rated Voltage (Vmpp) 59.1 V Rated Current (Impp) 6.09 A Open-Circuit Voltage (Voc) 69.5 V Short-Circuit Current (Isc) 6.48 A Max. System Voltage 1000 V UL & 1000 V IEC Maximum Series Fuse 15 A Power Temp Coef. –0.29% / o C Voltage Temp Coef. -167.4 mV / o C Current Temp Coef. 2.9 mA / o C REFERENCES: 1 All comparisons are SPR-X21-345 vs. a representative conventional panel: 250 W, approx. 1.6 m², 15.3% efficiency. 2 Typically 8–10% more energy per watt, BEW/DNV Engineering “SunPower Yield Report,” Jan 2013. 3 SunPower 0.25%/yr degradation vs. 1.0%/yr conv. panel. Campeau, Z. et al. “SunPower Module Degradation Rate,” SunPower white paper, Feb 2013; Jordan, Dirk “SunPower Test Report,” NREL, Q1-2015. 4 “SunPower Module 40-Year Useful Life” SunPower white paper, May 2015. Useful life is 99 out of 100 panels operating at more than 70% of rated power. 5 Highest of over 3,200 silicon solar panels, Photon Module Survey, Feb 2014. 6 1% more energy than E-Series panels, 8% more energy than the average of the top 10 panel companies tested in 2012 (151 panels, 102 companies), Photon International, Feb 2013. 7 Compared with the top 15 manufacturers. SunPower Warranty Review, May 2015. 8 Some restrictions and exclusions may apply. See warranty for details. 9 X-Series same as E-Series, 5 of top 8 panel manufacturers tested in 2013 report, 3 additional panels in 2014. Ferrara, C., et al. "Fraunhofer PV Durability Initiative for Solar Modules: Part 2". Photovoltaics International, 2014. 10 Compared with the non-stress-tested control panel. X-Series same as E-Series, tested in Atlas 25+ Durability test report, Feb 2013. 11 Standard Test Conditions (1000 W/m² irradiance, AM 1.5, 25° C). NREL calibration Standard: SOMS current, LACCS FF and Voltage. 12 Based on average of measured power values during production. 13 Type 2 fire rating per UL1703:2013, Class C fire rating per UL1703:2002. 14 See salesperson for details. SunPower Offers The Best Combined Power And Product Warranty Power Warranty Product Warranty 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 0 5 10 15 20 25 Years Traditional Warranty SunPower Conventional panel “linear” warranty 0 5 10 15 20 25 SunPower Traditional Warranty Years More guaranteed power: 95% for first 5 years, −0.4%/yr. to year 25 7 Combined Power and Product defect 25year coverage 8 Document # 514617 Rev B /LTR_US ©December 2016 SunPower Corporation. All rights reserved. SUNPOWER, the SUNPOWER logo, MAXEON, and SIGNATURE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SunPower Corporation. Specifications included in this datasheet are subject to change without notice. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM See www.sunpower.com/facts for more reference information. For more details, see extended datasheet: www.sunpower.com/datasheets. SunPower® X-Series Commercial Solar Panels | X22-360-COM POWER OPTIMIZERPower Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 Specifically designed to work with SolarEdge inverters Up to 25% more energy Superior efficiency (99.5%) Mitigates all types of module mismatch losses, from manufacturing tolerance to partial shading Flexible system design for maximum space utilization Fast installation with a single bolt Next generation maintenance with module-level monitoring Compliant with arc fault protection and rapid shutdown NEC requirements (when installed as part of the SolarEdge system) Module-level voltage shutdown for installer and firefighter safety PV power optimization at the module-level www.solaredge.us OPTIMIZER MODEL (typical module compatibility) P320 (for high-power 60-cell modules) P370 (for higher-power 60 and 72-cell modules) P400 (for 72 & 96-cell modules) P405 (for thin film modules) P505 (for highercurrent modules) INPUT Rated Input DC Power(1)320 370 400 405 505 W Absolute Maximum Input Voltage (Voc at lowest temperature) 48 60 80 125 83 Vdc MPPT Operating Range 8 - 48 8 - 60 8 - 80 12.5 - 105 12.5 - 83 Vdc Maximum Short Circuit Current (Isc) 11 10.1 14 Adc Maximum DC Input Current 13.75 12.63 17.5 Adc Maximum Efficiency 99.5 % Weighted Efficiency 98.8 98.6 % Overvoltage Category II OUTPUT DURING OPERATION (POWER OPTIMIZER CONNECTED TO OPERATING SOLAREDGE INVERTER) Maximum Output Current 15 Adc Maximum Output Voltage 60 85 Vdc OUTPUT DURING STANDBY (POWER OPTIMIZER DISCONNECTED FROM SOLAREDGE INVERTER OR SOLAREDGE INVERTER OFF) Safety Output Voltage per Power Optimizer 1 ± 0.1 Vdc STANDARD COMPLIANCE EMC FCC Part15 Class B, IEC61000-6-2, IEC61000-6-3 Safety IEC62109-1 (class II safety), UL1741 RoHS Yes INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Maximum Allowed System Voltage 1000 Vdc Compatible inverters All SolarEdge Single Phase and Three Phase inverters Dimensions (W x L x H) 128 x 152 x 28 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.1 128 x 152 x 36 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.42 128 x 152 x 50 / 5 x 5.97 x 1.96 128 x 152 x 59 / 5 x 5.97 x 2.32 mm / in Weight (including cables) 630 / 1.4 750 / 1.7 845 / 1.9 1064 / 2.3 gr / lb Input Connector MC4(2) Output Wire Type / Connector Double Insulated; MC4 Output Wire Length 0.95 / 3.0 1.2 / 3.9 m / ft Operating Temperature Range -40 - +85 / -40 - +185 ˚C / ˚F Protection Rating IP68 / NEMA6P Relative Humidity 0 - 100 % (1) Rated STC power of the module. Module of up to +5% power tolerance allowed. (2) For other connector types please contact SolarEdge Power Optimizer P320 / P370 / P400 / P405 / P505 PV SYSTEM DESIGN USING A SOLAREDGE INVERTER(3)(4) SINGLE PHASE HD-WAVE SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE 208V THREE PHASE 480V Minimum String Length (Power Optimizers) P320, P370, P400 8 10 18 P405 / P505 6 8 14 Maximum String Length (Power Optimizers)25 25 50 (5) Maximum Power per String 5700 (6000 with SE7600-US - SE11400- US) 5250 6000 12750 W Parallel Strings of Different Lengths or Orientations Yes © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 07/2018/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. (3) For detailed string sizing information refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/string_sizing_na.pdf.(4) It is not allowed to mix P405/P505 with P320/P370/P400/P600/P700/P800 in one string.(5) A string with more than 30 optimizers does not meet NEC rapid shutdown requirements; safety voltage will be above the 30V requirement Integrated Safety Swit INVERTERSSolarEdge Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS) The best choice for SolarEdge enabled systems Specifically designed to work with power optimizers Integrated arc fault protection and rapid shutdown for NEC 2014 and 2017, per article 690.11 and 690.12 UL1741 SA certified, for CPUC Rule 21 grid compliance Built-in module-level monitoring Internet connection through Ethernet or Wireless Small, lightweight, and easy to install outdoors or indoors on provided bracket Fixed voltage inverter for longer strings Integrated Safety Switch Supplied with RS485 Surge Protection Device, to better withstand lightning events 12-20 www.solaredge.usUSA-CANADA-GERMANY-UK-ITALY-THE NETHERLANDS-JAPAN-CHINA-AUSTRALIA-ISRAEL-FRANCE-BELGIUM-TURKEY-INDIA-BULGARIA-ROMANIA-HUNGARY-SWEDEN- SOUTH AFRICA-POLAND-CZECH REPUBLIC Three Phase Inverters for the 208V Grid(1) for North America SE9KUS / SE14.4KUS SE9KUS SE14.4KUS OUTPUT Rated AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA Maximum AC Power Output 9000 14400 VA AC Output Line Connections 4-wire WYE (L1-L2-L3-N) plus PE or 3 wire Delta AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-N)105-120-132.5 Vac AC Output Voltage Minimum-Nominal- Maximum(2) (L-L)183-208-229 Vac AC Frequency Min-Nom-Max(2)59.3 - 60 - 60.5 Hz Max. Continuous Output Current (per Phase) 25 40 A GFDI Threshold 1 A Utility Monitoring, Islanding Protection, Country Configurable Set Points Yes INPUT Maximum DC Power (Module STC) 12150 19400 W Transformer-less, Ungrounded Yes Maximum Input Voltage DC to Gnd 250 300 Vdc Maximum Input Voltage DC+ to DC- 500 600 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC to Gnd 200 Vdc Nominal Input Voltage DC+ to DC-400 Vdc Maximum Input Current 26.5 38 Adc Maximum Input Short Circuit Current 45 Adc Reverse-Polarity Protection Yes Ground-Fault Isolation Detection 1MΩ Sensitivity 350kΩ Sensitivity (3) CEC Weighted Efficiency 96.5 97 % Night-time Power Consumption < 3 < 4 W ADDITIONAL FEATURES Supported Communication Interfaces RS485, Ethernet, ZigBee (optional) Rapid Shutdown – NEC 2014 and 2017 690.12 Automatic Rapid Shutdown upon AC Grid Disconnect(4) RS485 Surge Protection Supplied with the inverter STANDARD COMPLIANCE Safety UL1741, UL1741 SA, UL1699B, CSA C22.2, Canadian AFCI according to T.I.L. M-07 Grid Connection Standards IEEE1547, Rule 21, Rule 14 (HI) Emissions FCC part15 class B INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS AC output conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG 3/4” minimum / 8-4 AWG DC input conduit size / AWG range 3/4” minimum / 12-6 AWG Number of DC inputs 2 pairs 3 pairs (5) Dimensions (H x W x D)21 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 540 x 315 x 260 in / mm Dimensions with Safety Switch (H x W x D) 30.5 x 12.5 x 10.5 / 775 x 315 x 260 in / mm Weight 73.2 / 33.2 99.5 / 45 lb / kg Weight with Safety Switch 79.7 / 36.2 106 / 48 lb / kg Cooling Fans (user replaceable) Noise < 50 < 55 dBA Operating Temperature Range -40 to +140 / -40 to +60(6) ˚F / ˚C Protection Rating NEMA 3R (1) For 277/480V inverters refer to: http://www.solaredge.com/files/pdfs/products/inverters/se-three-phase-us-inverter-datasheet.pdf(2) For other regional settings please contact SolarEdge support(3) Where permitted by local regulations(4) P/N SE9K-US0xxxxxx has Manual Rapid Shutdown for NEC 2014 compliance (NEC 2017 compliance with outdoor installation)(5) Field replacement kit for 1 pair of inputs P/N: DCD-3PH-1TBK; Field replacement kit for 3 pairs of fuses and holders P/N: DCD-3PH-6FHK-S1(5) For power de-rating information refer to: https://www.solaredge.com/sites/default/files/se-temperature-derating-note-na.pdf © SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. SOLAREDGE, the SolarEdge logo, OPTIMIZED BY SOLAREDGE are trademarks or registered trademarks of SolarEdge Technologies, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Date: 11/2017/V01/ENG NAM. Subject to change without notice. Parts Catalog Flush Mount Page 16 v2.05 support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 The IronRidge Flush Mount System is a rail based system for mounting solar modules on pitched roofs. The system utilizes IronRidge XR Rails with a variety of roof attachments to support extreme wind and snow loads. The entire system uses only aluminum and stainless steel components to ensure complete corrosion resistance. Download AutoCAD File Download PDF Preview Flush Mount Overview AS REQUIRED BYMODULE MANUFACTURER F1.0 B1.0 D1.0 C1.0 1" VARIES IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE FLASHFOOT X W WC C H1.2 J1.2 R PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE UNIVERSALFASTENING OBJECT38" PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE UNIVERSAL FASTENING OBJECT PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE STOPPER SLEEVEIRONRIDGE UNIVERSAL FASTENING OBJECT 1" PV MODULE FRAME IRONRIDGE RAIL IRONRIDGE STOPPER SLEEVE IRONRIDGE UNIVERSALFASTENING OBJECT1"IRONRIDGE RAIL PV MODULE L0.4xL MAX.L E1.0G1.0 J1.2 IRONRIDGE STOPPER SLEEVE IRONRIDGE UNIVERSAL FASTENING OBJECT IRONRIDGE FLASH FOOTIRONRIDGE UNIVERSALFASTENING OBJECT 1"SNOW LOAD, PSFEXPOSURE CATMODULE TYPERISK CATWIND SPEED, MPHMODULE W DCMODULE QTY----72-CELL, GENERIC --SHEET NAME JOB NO. ISSUE DATE SHEET NO. SHEET SIZE 24X361495 ZEPHYR AVE, HAYWARD, CA 94544800.227.9523 IRONRIDGE.COMNOT FO R CONST R U C TI O N REVISION HISTORY APPROVAL STATUS REV DESCRIPTION DATE 3.1 SR SLOPED ROOFPV SYSTEM DETAILS: FLASHFOOT XX FEB 2016IR 1.0CLIENT NAMEPROJECT NAMEPROJECTADDRESSSYSTEM KW DCIRONRIDGESLOPED ROOF MOUNT SYSTEMScale: 1"=1'-0"PLAN VIEW, FLASHFOOT MOUNT, PORTRAIT MODULEA Scale: 1"=1'-0" SIDE VIEW, FLASHFOOT MOUNT, PORTRAIT MODULEB Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, END CLAMP PLANF Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, END CLAMP FRONTG Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, MID CLAMP PLAND Scale: 6"=1'-0"DETAIL, MID CLAMP FRONTE Scale: 1"=1'-0"FRONT VIEW, FLASHFOOT MOUNT, PORTRAIT MODULEC Parts Catalog Flush Mount Page 17 v2.05 support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 FlashFoot2 IronRidge FlashFoot2 features a completely redesigned seal that is both elevated and fully encapsulated, protecting against water intrusion. The flashing has a 9” x 12” profile, which minimizes interference with roofing nails. FlashFoot2’s alignment markers help to quickly align the flashing with pilot holes. Twisting on the Cap makes FlashFoot2 ready to mount XR Rails. Comes with flashing, lag bolt, and Cap. Item Number Description FF2-01-M1 FlashFoot2, Mill FM-FF2-001 Kit, 4pcs, FlashFoot2, Mill FF2-01-B1 FlashFoot2, Black FM-FF2-001-B Kit, 4pcs, FlashFoot2, Black #A.IRONRIDGE ITEM NO. l 2 3 4 FLASHFOOT 2 Part Number FF2-0l-Ml FF2-0l-B l l)Bolt, Lag 5/16 x 4.75 (/).63:ft- 7/16" Head Property Material Finish FlashFoot2 DESCRIPTION BOLT LAG 5/16 X 4.75" ASSY, FLASHING ASSY, CAP WASHER, EPDM BACKED Description FLASHFOOT2, MILL FLASHFOOT2, BLACK Value 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear v1 .20 Parts Catalog Flush Mount Page 20 v2.05 support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Bonding Attachment Hardware Attachment bonding hardware available in both square bolt and t-bolt options, based on personal preference. Bonding hardware is used to attach and bond the rail to the FlashFoot2, Slotted L-Foot, or a third-party roof attachment. The step nut allows installers to use the same socket as the rest of the system. Item Number Description BHW-SQ-02-A1 Square Bolt Bonding Hardware FM-SQ-BHW-V2 Kit, 4pcs, Square Bolt Bonding Hardware BHW-TB-02-A1 1pc, T-Bolt Bonding Hardware FM-TB-BHW-V2 Kit, 4pcs, T-Bolt Bonding Hardware #A.IRONRIDGE Bonding Hardware ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION 1 BOLT, T CSTM, 3/8-16 2 BOLT, BONDING 3/8-16 SQ HEAD 3 NUT, BONDING STEP BONDING HARDWARE Part Number Description BHW-TB-02-A 1 T-BOLT, BONDING HARDWARE BHW-SQ-02-A 1 SQUARE-BOLT, BONDING HARDWARE 1)BOLT, T CSTM, 3/8-16 2)BOLT, BONDING 3/8-16 SQ HEAD 3/8-16 THD l_ .56 � 7 1.00 r 24� � .29 Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear 3)NUT, BONDING STEP 0.75 � 7/16"Head� Property Material Finish T 3/8-16 THD Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear 3/8-16 THD ---j .79 Value 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear v1 .30 Page 3 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 XR Rail The XR Rail Family offers the strength of a curved rail in three targeted sizes. Each size supports specific design loads, while minimizing material costs. Depending on your location, there is an XR Rail to match. XR1000 is a heavyweight among solar mounting rails. It’s built to handle extreme climates and spans 12 feet or more for commercial applications. XR100 is the ultimate residential mounting rail. It supports a range of wind and snow conditions, while also maximizing spans. XR10 is a sleek, low-profile mounting rail, perfectly matched to regions with light or no snow. It achieves 6 foot spans, while also staying light and economical. Item Number Description Item Number Description XR-1000-168A XR1000, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Clear XR-10-168A XR10, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Clear XR-1000-204A XR1000, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Clear XR-10-168B XR10, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Black XR-100-168A XR100, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Clear XR-10-204A XR10, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Clear XR-100-168B XR100, Rail 168” (14 Feet) Black XR-10-204B XR10, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Black XR-100-204A XR100, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Clear XR-100-204B XR100, Rail 204” (17 Feet) Black XR1000 XR100 XR10 Page 4 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Bonded Splices Multiple sections of XR Rails can easily be spliced and bonded together with our bonded splices. The internal splice bars do not interfere with clamping or mounting locations, and offer a seamless appearance. XR Rail Splices are made with extruded 6000 series aluminum. 12-14 x 5/8” self-drilling screws are included. Item Number Description XR-1000-SPLC-M1 XR1000 Bonded Splice (Incl. Self-tapping Screws) XR-100-SPLC-M1 XR100 Bonded Splice (Incl. Self-tapping Screws) XR-10-SPLC-M1 XR10 Bonded Splice (Incl. Self-tapping Screws) XR1000 XR100 XR10 Cut Sheet v1.0 12.0 1 2 XR-100-SPLC-M1XR100 BONDED SPLICE (INCL. SELF-TAPPING SCREWS) 2) Screw, Self Drilling 1.93 1.24 .93 1) Splice, XR100, Mill 12" long .31 .42 .63 .15 #12-14 TYPE “B” THREAD XR-100 RAIL Property Value Material 6000 Series Aluminum Finish Mill Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear XR100 Bonded Splice Page 11 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Grounding Lugs A single Grounding Lug connects an entire row of PV modules to the grounding conductor. Item Number Description XR-LUG-03-A1 Grouding Lug, Low Profile GD-LUG-003 Grounding Lug, Low Profile, 2pcs RS-GDLG-002 Grounding Lug, Integrated Grounding, T-Bolt, 2pcs Page 12 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Microinverter / Power Optimizer Bonding Hardware Use IronRidge’s Microinverter Bonding Hardware to bond compatible microinverters and power optimizers to the racking system. COMPATIBLE PRODUCTS Enphase - M250-72, M250-60, M215-60, C250-72, S230, S280 Darfon - MIG240, MIG300, G320, G640 Solar Edge - P300, P320, P400, P405, P600, P700, P730, P800p, P800s Item Number Description BHW-M1-01-A1 Microinverter Bonding Hardware, T-Bolt MI-BHW Kit, 2pcs, 1/4 x 3/4 Microinverter Mounting, T-Bolt Cut Sheet v1.10 Microinverter Bonding Hardware .26 .61 .75 .24 1/4-20 THD .59 7/16" Head 1/4-20 THD .24 1 2 1) Bolt, T CSTM 1/4-20 x .75 2) Nut, Flange Hex 1/4-20 Item Number Description Qty. in Kit 1 Bolt, T CSTM 1/4-20 X .75" Lock SS 2 2 Nut, Flange, Hex 1/4-20 SS 2 Part Number Description BHW-M1-01-A1 Microinverter Bonding Hardware, T-Bolt Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear Property Value Material 300 Series Stainless Steel Finish Clear Microinverter Bonding Hardware Tech Brief Solar, Sleeker Than Ever Most solar installations use mounting rails and fasteners to secure modules to the building structure, but these critical components often protrude from the sides of the modules, giving arrays a coarse look. CAMO is an invisible fastener that secures solar modules flush to rail ends, creating a clean, sleek appearance. CAMO works with nearly all solar modules and installs without tools or torque specifications. It simply rotates into place to structurally secure and electrically bond with the module. Hidden End Cam Certified to comply with International Building Code, ASCE/SEI-7, and UL 2703 Mechanical and Bonding Requirements. Cam-Locking Design CAMO’s unique design allows for a completely tool-less installation. Simply slide CAMO into the rail track and rotate the ergonomic handle 90 degrees to lock onto the module frame. It’s that easy. Standard Fastener © 2018 IronRidge, Inc. All rights reserved. Visit www.ironridge.com or call 1-800-227-9523 for more information. Version 1.01 Tech Brief Easy, Tool-Less Installation A. PLACE CAMO Slide CAMO into rail track far enough to clear the module frame. CAMO requires 6” of clearance from end of rail. B. PLACE MODULE Place module on rails and align flush with rail ends (module cells not shown in image to provide clarity). The module can overhang the rail no more than 1/4”. C. SLIDE CAMO Pull CAMO towards rail end, at a 45 degree angle, so linear bonding pin contacts the module flange edge. D. SECURE CAMO Rotate handle with an upwards motion until CAMO snaps into rail track. Ensure CAMO bonding pins are fully seated on top of module frame. A Tested & Certified B C D UL 2703 CAMO conforms to STD UL 2703 (2015) requirements and fits modules with bottom flanges that meet specifications shown in the frame compatibility diagram on the left. See IronRidge Installation Manuals for full ratings and a list of certified compatible modules. Cut Sheet v1.0 4.31 1.4 .63 1 23 PART NO.DESCRIPTION CAMO-01-M1 HIDDEN END CAM (UNIVERSAL CLAMP) Item No.Description Material Finish 1 Handle Aluminum Mill2Bolt, Bonding Shoulder 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear3Bonding Pins, Linear 300 Series Stainless Steel Clear CAMO Page 10 Parts Catalog v2.05 Rail Assembly support | ironridge.com | (800) 227-9523 Wire Clips Wire Clips fit XR Rails, and accommodate up to ten 5mm panel wires, or one MC4, one Enphase wire and one dual Enphase wire. Molded from black polycarbonate with UV protection. Item Number Description 29-4000-077 Wire Clip, 20pcs SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/18/2018GENERAL NOTES: ·2017 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC) ·MASSACHUSETTS AMENDMENTS TO 2017 NEC ·9TH EDITION MASSACHUSETTS BUILDING CODE ·INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH THE APPROPRIATE PPE AND QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ·SOLAREDGE P800p OPTIMZERS WERE NOT SELECTED DUE TO STRINGING LIMITATIONS FOR INVERTERS ·ALL DC CONDUCTORS TO BE 600V COPPER ·PV MODULES AND MOUNTING SYSTEM GROUNDING & BONDING TO BE PERFORMED USING MOUNTING MANUFACTURER'S SUPPLIED GROUNDING COMPONENTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ·INSTALLATION SUBJECT TO THE CITY OF NORTHAMPTON AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION ROOF LOCATION TO CORRESPONDING INVERTER ROOF LOCATION # MODULES INVERTER # SOUTHEAST ROOF (SUB ARRAY 1) 32 1 SOUTHWEST ROOF (SUBARRAY 2) 26 2 FLAT ROOF (SUB ARRAY 3) 38 3 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/20/2018’ ’ SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN LAYOUT V 12REVISED DESIGN LAYOUT V 210/12/201810/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/12/20182REVISED DESIGN V 210/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/12/20182 REVISED DESIGN V 2 10/18/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/12/20182 REVISED DESIGN V 2 10/21/2018 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/13/20182REVISED DESIGN V 210/18/2018 3 2 116 STRING 2 3 2 116 STRING 1 2 (1) (G) MODULES PER (1) P400 (F) SOLAR EDGE OPTIMIZER STRING LENGTH IN OPTIMIZERS 3 (D) INVERTERS #1 & #2 SOLAR EDGE SE9K-US 3 2 112 STRING 1 DC DISCONNECT (C) AC COMBINER PANEL 50A-3Φ 4 STRING 2 STRING 332113 3 2 113 1 2 40A-3Φ 3 2 113 STRING 1 STRING 232113 40A-3Φ (E) INVERTERS #3 SOLAR EDGE SE14.4K-US M 150A-CB 1200A DISCONNECT SWITCH208V, 3Φ, 200A, NON-FUSED PRIMARY VOLTAGE 1 HP 3 LC3XXLC1XX HPB2 M 1 LC2XX HPB 150A-3Φ (B) SMART RGM METER 3 SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1SHEETNO.REVISION DATE1PRELIMINARY DESIGN V 110/13/2018GENERAL NOTES: ·SYSTEM DESIGNED TO MEET 2019 REQUIREMENT OF MODULE LEVEL SHUTDOWN ·SOLAREDGE P800p OPTIMZERS WERE NOT SELECTED DUE TO STRINGING LIMITATIONS FOR INVERTERS 2 & 3·ALL DC CONDUCTORS TO BE 600V COPPER ·PV MODULES AND MOUNTING SYSTEM GROUNDING & BONDING TO BE PERFORMED USING MOUNTING MANUFACTURER'S SUPPLIED GROUNDING COMPONENTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.·INSTALLATION SUBJECT TO AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. PV POWER SOURCE LABELS LABEL: PHOTOVOLTAIC AC DISCONNECT AC OPERATING VOLTAGE (VOLTS) 208 AC OPERATING CURRENT (AMPS) 90 SOLAR MODULE (G) SUNPOWER SPR-X22-360-COM RATED VOLTAGE (Vmpp) RATED CURRENT (Impp) OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLATAGE (Voc) SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT (Isc) MAX. SYSTEM VOLTAGE 59.10 6.09 69.50 6.48 1000V EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE L MAKE/MODEL # NOTES A AC DISCONNECT 1 AC DISCONNECT, GENERAL DUTY, 3POLE-4WIRE, 200A, NEMA3R, 208V, NON-FUSED B REVENUE GRADE METER (SOURCE TBD BY UTILITY) & SOCKET 1 200A, 120/208V, 3-POLE, 4W, NEMA3R, SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS TBD UTILITY COMPANY C AC COMBINER PANEL 1 200A, 120/208V, 3Φ, PANEL BOARD, NEMA 1, (2) 40A 3-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER (1) 50A 3-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER (CAN USE A FUSED COMBINER WITH A DISCONNECT AS AN ALTERNATIVE) D SOLAR EDGE 9K-US 2 600 VDC, 120/208V AC, 3Φ, 4W UNGROUNDED, INTEGRATED AFCI, UL1741 SA, IEEE1547 E SOLAR EDGE 14.4K-US 1 600 VDC, 120/208V AC, 3Φ, 4W UNGROUNDED, INTEGRATED AFCI, UL1741 SA, IEEE1547 F SOLAR EDGE P400 OPTIMIZER 96 600VDC, 30A, NEMA6P, MAX 6,000 W PER STRING G Sunpower SPR-X22-360 96 1000VDC, FACTORY INSTALLED MC CONNECTORS CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE NO. LOCATION DESCRIPTION APPROXIMATE LENGTH CONDUIT SIZE 1 INTERCONNECTION CIRCUIT BREAKER TO (C) AC COMBINER PANEL (3) #20 Cu THWN-2 [1 BK,1 BL,1 RD] (2) #4 Cu THWN-2 [1 WT, 1 GR]200' 2" EMT 2 (C) AC COMBINER PANEL TO (D) INVERTER AC OUTPUT CIRCUIT (3)#8 THWN-2 Cu [1 BK,1 BL, 1 RD] (2)#10 THWN-2 Cu [1 WT, 1 GR]20' 1" EMT 3 (C) AC COMBINER PANEL TO (E) INVERTER AC OUTPUT CIRCUIT (3)#6 THWN-2 Cu [1 BK,1 BL, 1 RD] (2)#10 THWN-2 Cu [1 WT, 1 GR]20' 1" EMT 4 (D, E) INVERTER DC SOURCE CIRCUIT TO PASS THROUGH BOX (14)#10 THWN-2 Cu [2 BK, 2 RD] (1)#8 THWN-2 Cu [1 GR]150' 2" EMT INVERTER(S) SETTINGS Voltage Settings - Frequency Settings- ROOF LOCATION TO CORRESPONDING INVERTER ROOF LOCATION # MODULES INVERTER # SOUTHEAST ROOF (SUB ARRAY 1) 32 1 SOUTHWEST ROOF (SUBARRAY 2) 26 2 FLAT ROOF (SUB ARRAY 3) 38 3 34.56 kW DC 32.4 kW AC 2 REVISED DESIGN V 2 10/18/2018 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 26 50 00-1 SECTION 26 50 00 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide interior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories. See additional specifications and Fixture Schedules on Drawings: E701, E702, E703, E900, E901. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Compliance: NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Interior Lighting Components: 1. LED Fixtures: Fixtures, UL 935, energy-saving, electronic type. Ceiling mounted. 2. Exit Signs: UL 924, self-powered battery type and self-powered luminous source type. 3. Emergency Lighting Units: UL 924, LED fixtures. 4. Lamps: LED only at all household fixtures. LED bulbs to be used at all emergency exit signs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Provide proper clearances for servicing. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 26 50 00-2 B. Maintain indicated fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors at penetrations. Seal with firestopping to maintain fire rating. C. Test all systems for proper operation. Label circuits in electrical panels. D. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. E. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation of systems. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES 26 50 10-1 SECTION 26 50 10 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide exterior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, poles, standards, and accessories. See additional specifications and Fixture Schedules on Drawings: E701, E702, E703, E900, E901. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Compliance: NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." C. Light Pollution: All exterior light fixtures shall be directed toward the ground plane to minimize night sky light pollution. All exterior light fixtures shall be directed such that there is no light spillage onto adjacent properties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior Lighting Components: 1. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Fixtures: In all locations. 2. Lamps: ANSI Standards, C8750 series. 3. Fixture Support Poles, Mast Arms and Brackets: a. Steel tubing. 4. All exterior lighting shall be night sky compliant. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES 26 50 10-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Comply with applicable regulations and code requirements. Provide proper clearances for servicing. B. Clearly label and tag all components. C. Test and balance all systems for proper operation. D. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. E. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation of systems. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TELEPHONE AND INTERCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT 27 00 00-1 SECTION 27 00 00 TELEPHONE AND INTERCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide telephone and intercommunication equipment as follows: 1. Interior telephone distribution system. B. See additional specifications and Fixture Schedules on Drawings: E701, E702, E703, E900, E901. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Compliance: FCC regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Telephone System Components: 1. Telephone wiring, cabling, and jacks. 2. Control and signal transmission media. 3. Switching systems. 4. Modems. 5. Line drivers. 6. Terminals. 7. Integrated voice/data switches. 8. Ancillary equipment: B. Telephone Distribution System Components: 1. Terminal Blocks: Type 66 or 100, stand-off brackets. 2. Jack Assemblies: 8-position modular, latching, plug type. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TELEPHONE AND INTERCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT 27 00 00-2 3. Cable: 4 pair, No. 24 AWG, solid copper, ICEA S-80-576. 4. Cable Trays, Raceways, Boxes, Cabinets: Comply with project standards. 5. Backboard: Interior grade plywood, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Comply with applicable regulations and code requirements. Provide proper clearances for servicing. B. Maintain indicated fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors at penetrations. Seal with firestopping to maintain fire rating. C. Clearly label and tag all components. D. Test and balance all systems for proper operation. E. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. F. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation of systems. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TELEVISION EQUIPMENT 27 05 13-1 SECTION 27 05 13 TELEVISION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: A. Provide cable television distribution system for single-source distribution to distributed televisions. See additional specifications and Fixture Schedules on Drawings: E701, E702, E703, E900, E901. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cable System Components: 1. Power Supplies: NRTL listed, regulated, modular units. 2. Line Taps: Signal power splitters and isolation taps. 3. Signal Traps: Packaged filters tuned to interference frequencies. 4. Attenuators: Adjustable to eliminate overload. 5. Terminating Resistors: Enclosed units rated 1/2 watts. 6. Outlets: Flush type, wall plates with female type connectors. 7. Coaxial Cable Connectors: Type F, 75 ohms. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. TELEVISION EQUIPMENT 27 05 13-2 Comply with applicable regulations and code requirements. Provide proper clearances for servicing. B. Maintain indicated fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors at penetrations. Seal with firestopping to maintain fire rating. C. Clearly label and tag all components. D. Test and balance all systems for proper operation. E. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. F. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation of systems. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 21 38 00-1 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide fire detection and alarm systems: A. Zoned, noncoded, addressable, microprocessor-based fire detection alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation. See additional specifications and Fixture Schedules on Drawings: E701, E702, E703, E900, E901. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. Include labor and materials to repair or replace defective materials. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data, including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Compliance: NFPA 70, 71, 72, 72E, 72G, 72H. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fire Alarm System Operational Characteristics: 1. Signal Transmission: Dedicated multiplex signal transmission. 2. Audible Alarm Indication: Horns. B. Fire Alarm System Components: 1. Manual Pull Stations: Double-action type, metal or plastic. 2. Smoke Detectors: UL 268, self-restoring type with visual indicator, photoelectric and ionization-types. 3. Thermal Detectors: Fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise type. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 21 38 00-2 4. CO Detectors: In compliance with NFPA-54, Chapter 10. 5. Flame Detectors: Ultraviolet type with delay. 6. Fire Alarm Horns: Electric vibrating polarized type. 7. Visual Alarm Devices: Dual-voltage strobe lights. 8. Device Location-Indicating Lights: System-voltage-indicating light. 9. Fire Alarm Control Panel: UL 864 with lockable steel enclosure and alphanumeric display and system controls. 10. Transmitter: Auto-dialer type. 11. Emergency Power Supply: Battery operated, 24-hour operation capacity. 12. Line-Voltage and Low-Voltage Circuits: Solid copper conductors with rated insulation, color coded. 13. Conduit: Rigid steel, hardened, fire-rated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Provide proper clearances for servicing. B. Comply with National Electrical Code and building code requirements. Maintain continuity of circuits required to supply new or existing equipment in service. C. Provide core drilling as required for new work. D. Conceal conduit to the greatest extent practical. E. Center ceiling-mounted elements in center of ceiling tiles as applicable. F. Maintain indicated fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors at penetrations. Seal with firestopping to maintain fire rating. G. Test all systems for proper operation. Label circuits in electrical panels. H. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. I. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation of systems. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 1 31 00 00 - 1 SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK (SITE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 - General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation (See Article 1 of the General and Supplementary Conditions). 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section. B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. C. The Contractor may, at his own expense, conduct additional subsurface testing as required for his own information. 1.05 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface condi- tions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this in- formation is not guaranteed. B. Plans, surveys, measurements, and dimensions under which the work is to be per- formed are believed to be correct, but the Contractor shall have examined them for himself during the bidding period, as no additional compensation will be made for errors and inaccuracies may be found therein. 1.06 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating, filling and grading required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Clearing and preparation of site. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 2 31 00 00 - 2 2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 3. Protection of embankments, environmental controls. 4. Excavation: a. General excavation to lines and grades indicated. b. Excavation and backfill of utilities. c. Excavation and backfill of rock and boulders in areas of construction. 5. General exterior rough grading, cutting and filling required. 6. Filling and backfilling as required for walls, pile caps, and columns including furnishing of any extra material required. 7. Base and subbase course materials under structures, pavements, slabs and footings, including compaction. 8. Structural backfill at over-excavated areas. 9. Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable material. Excavation shall include removal and satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encoun- tered throughout the site. 10. Removal, hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for subse- quent use in the work. 11. All rehandling, hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling, filling, backfilling, grading and other such operations. 12. Pumping and dewatering of excavation as may be required. 1.07 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-In-Place Concrete ...................................................... Section 03 30 00 B. Cast-In-Place Concrete (Site) ............................................. Section 03 30 55 C. Site Demolition ................................................................... Section 31 15 00 D. Sediment and Erosion Control ............................................ Section 31 25 00 E. Bases, Ballasts and Paving ................................................ Section 32 10 00 F. Planting ........................................................................ Section 32 90 00 G. Seeding ........................................................................ Section 32 95 00 H. Water Utilities ..................................................................... Section 33 10 00 I. Sanitary Sewerage Utilities................................................. Section 33 20 00 J. Storm Drainage Utilities ...................................................... Section 33 40 00 1.08 SUBMITTALS Submit a 50 lb. sample of each type of fill (off-site and on-site) to testing laboratory in an air tight container at least seven (7) days prior to use. Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change in source through- out the project requires written approval by the architect or engineer. 1.09 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to control dust on and near the work and on and near all off-site borrow areas, if such dust is caused by the Contractor's op- erations during performance of the work or if resulting from the condition in which the Contractor leaves the site. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nui- sance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance or other work on the site. B. Protection of Existing Structure and Utilities 1. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to ad- jacent property and any other property and existing improvements such as, 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 3 31 00 00 - 3 but not limited to: streets, curbs, paving, trees, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private property, and to pro- tect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral earth movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his cost, existing bench marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed. 3. Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 inches above grade, which are subject to damage from construction equip- ment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until completion of project. 1.10 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or footing and slab subgrades. B. The Contractor shall grade and pitch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage (minimum 1.0% slope) shall be maintained at all times. C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be routed through the temporary sedi- ment basins in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, not to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, not cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation. D. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and appurtenances in excavations containing free water. E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to remove water. F. Where, in the opinion of the Architect, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry, firm subgrade, other acceptable dewatering methods shall be employed. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to per- form on-site observation and testing during the following phases of the construc- tion operations. The services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be lim- ited to, the following: 1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under paved or slab areas. 2. Observation of compaction of paved and slab area subgrades. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 4 31 00 00 - 4 3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills. 4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as re- quired. 5. Observation of subgrade preparation for paved or slab areas. 6. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and compaction tests at a frequency and at locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these tests will be submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contrac- tor, on a timely basis so that the Contractor can take such action as is re- quired to remedy indicated deficiencies. 7. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weath- er. B. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the ac- tual work by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing agency, nor any observations and testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work. C. Compaction Control Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified, it shall be the in-place dry density divided by the maximum dry density and multiplied by 100. D. The maximum dry density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM Standard Methods of Test for Moisture - Density Relations of Soil Using 10-lb. Rammer and 18-inch Drop, Designation D1557-78. Where all of the materi- al passes a No. 4 sieve, Method A shall be used, and where material is retained on the No. 4 sieve, Method D shall be used. E. The in-place dry density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method, Designation D1556-82 or ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods, Designation D2922-81. 1.12 FROST PROTECTION Frozen, excessively moist or material containing snow shall not be placed as fill or backfill. Special care should be taken when placing fill material when the tem- perature is below 32oF. 1.13 SHORING AND SHEETING A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to prevent collapse of earth at site of excavations. B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations and provisions of the Occupational Safety and Heath Act (OSHA). C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, tak- ing all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides. 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. Subgrade - shall be that portion of the soil or rock which remains after stripping of topsoil, excavation, and prior to filling, or placement of roadway subbase. In pro- posed building area, subgrade shall be soil or rock which remains after stripping of top soil and subsoil. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 5 31 00 00 - 5 B. Embankment - shall be defined as any area on the site filled to raise grades to proposed subgrade elevations. Embankments are placed in layers to a predeter- mined elevation and cross-section. C. Utility Trench Backfill - is the area bounded by the proposed finished subgrade and the cover material over the respective pipe or conduit. This material shall conform to applicable requirements for embankment, structural backfill or utility company requirements depending on the area or zone into which the utility is installed. D. Unsuitable Material - material which is classified as "unsuitable" shall be material having at least one of the following properties: 1. Material with a maximum unit dry weight per cubic foot less than 90 lb. as determined by ASTM D 1557. 2. Material containing visible organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, con- struction debris, roots and stumps. 3. Material which has a Liquid Limit greater than 50. 4. Material designated in the field by the Geotechnical Consultant. E. Topsoil - The upper layer of the soil profile which is supporting the growth of vege- tation as evidenced by the existence therein of numerous roots and other organic matter. F. Subsoil - loose silt and fine and layer located directly below the topsoil. G. Rock and Boulder Excavation – shall be defined as removal of sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge, or ledge of mineral matter as follows. 1. Rock excavation shall mean the removal of bedrock (ledge) which, in the opinion of the Architect, requires for its removal, drilling and blasting, wedg- ing, sledging or barring and boulders which, in the opinion of the Architect, require blasting for removal. Rock excavation shall be made to the widths and depths as described for pay lines or as directed by the Architect in the field. 2. Boulder excavation shall mean the removal of rock fragments exceeding 3 cubic yards in volume which can be removed without resorting to blasting. 1.15 COORDINATION A. Prior to start of earthwork, the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Architect for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements. B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Ar- chitect prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection, shall be at the Contractor's risk. 1.17 DISTURBANCE OF EXCAVATED OR FILLED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 6 31 00 00 - 6 A. The contractor shall take all necessary steps to avoid disturbance of subgrade, underlying natural soils and compacted fill during excavation and filling operations. Methods of construction shall be revised as necessary to avoid disturbance de- scribed above, including restricting construction access and types of vehicles or equipment, dewatering, or other acceptable control measures. Disturbance shall be construed to include deterioration of soils due to the contractor's operations, such as moving equipment, hauling, etc. The contractor shall cooperate with the engineer to modify operations as necessary to minimize disturbance and protect bearing soils. B. All excavated or filled areas that are disturbed during construction, including all loose or saturated soils, fill that cannot be compacted within 48 hours due to satu- ration and other areas that will not meet compaction requirements as specified herein shall be removed and replaced with compacted Granular Fill Sand-Gravel, or Crushed Stone at the Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIAL, GENERAL A. Approval Required All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIAL, ORDINARY BORROW A. Common fill / ordinary borrow material shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil, approved by the Engineer and meeting the following requirements: 1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials, and of stones larger than six inches maximum dimensions. 2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the spec- ified densities. 3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay, decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping or other metal. 4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot. B. Re-use of excavated on site common fill is dependent upon meeting com- paction criteria. 2.03 GRANULAR FILL Granular Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Granular Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 4” 100 No. 10 30 - 90 No. 40 10 - 70 No. 200 *0 - 15 (*0 - 8 where used behind walls) 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 7 31 00 00 - 7 2.04 SAND AND GRAVEL Sand and Gravel shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleteri- ous or organic matter. Sand and Gravel shall conform to the following gradation require- ments: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 4 inch 100 1/2 inch 50 - 85 # 4 40 - 75 # 40 10 - 35 # 200 0 - 8 2.05 CRUSHED STONE Crushed Stone shall consist of durable crushed rock or durable crushed gravel stone and shall be free from ice and snow, clay, loam and other deleterious or organic matter. Crushed Stone shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 1 inch 100 3/4 inch 90 - 100 1/2 inch 10 - 50 3/8 0 - 20 # 4 0 – 5 2.06 GRAVEL BASE COURSE Gravel base course for roadway and sidewalk construction shall comply with the relevant sections of Section 02600 Bituminous Pavement and MHD requirements, Section M1, sub-section M1.03.0, Type "b". PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior Familiarization Prior to all work of this Section, become thoroughly familiar with the site, the site conditions, and all portions of the work falling within this Section. B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out all improvements related thereto. All work and control points shall be pre- served by a system of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent destruction. Eleva- tions shall be established from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans. C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 8 31 00 00 - 8 1. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of Section prior to all required inspections, tests and approvals. 2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been ap- proved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested, inspected and ap- proved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no addi- tional cost to the Owner. D. Stripping of Topsoil Any topsoil within "Limits of Work" and where excavation or filling will occur shall be stripped, cleaned of all rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in finish grading. 3.02 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES A. Contractor shall be responsible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines, to the required tolerances. Carefully preserve all data and all monuments set and, if displaced or lost, immediately replace to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 EXCAVATING A. Excavate site as shown on the drawings. All suitable material must be stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed of off the site. B. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions Where depressions result from, or have resulted from, the removal of surface or subsurface obstructions, open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft material as directed by the Architect. C. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times dur- ing placing of concrete, utility lines, and fill/backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only. D. Sheeting shall be installed, where required, to maintain safe and workable condi- tions in excavations and where adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without damaging the trees. Sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law and/or OSHA Standards. E. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from ex- cavation operations shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage and movement. F. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 9 31 00 00 - 9 G. Excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill material. H. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding material. I. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over-excavation), shall be filled to those levels with compacted Granular Fill. J. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure, or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable mate- rial at no additional cost to the Owner. Subgrade shall then be protected from fur- ther disturbance until construction item is placed. K. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, place, and remove forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench shall be sloped in accordance with OSHA standards. In materials where sloping walls are not stable, or tree damage may occur, trench walls shall be supported by sheeting or trench box. 1. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Drawings because of existing pipes or structures, the excavation below nor- mal grade shall be made to such widths and depths as the Engineer may di- rect. L. If rock is encountered, rock shall be excavated in accordance with applicable sec- tions of the Massachusetts Highway Department, (MHD) Specifications Section 120.63, Presplitting Rock and Section 140.62 Class B Trench Excavation. Use of explosives shall conform to MHD Specifications Section 7.12 and as specified herein, and shall be in strict accordance with applicable laws and ordinances. Ex- plosives shall be stored on-site only when blasting is in progress. When the need for explosives has passed, they shall be removed from the site. 1. Surfaces of rock foundation shall be sufficiently rough to bond well with the concrete and embankments to be built and, if required, shall be cut to rough benches or steps. 2. Before concrete is built upon rock, the rock shall be freed from all vegetation, dirt, clay, shale, excessively cracked rock, water, ice, snow and other objec- tionable substances. Picking, wedging, streams of water under high pres- sure, stream jets, ad other effective means shall be used to clean exposed rock. 3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, rock shall be excavated to a depth 6 inches or more below bottom of structures. M. Below-ground Demolition 1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Oth- er items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished and/or removed only with the approval of the Architect. 2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at end. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured par- 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 10 31 00 00 - 10 allel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter, for pipe less than 18 inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged. Abandoned pipes within proposed building (if exist) shall be re- moved or if left in place, they shall be properly grouted. 3.04 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade preparation for spread and continuous wall footings shall be conducted in such a way as to minimize disturbance of the silty/clayey subgrade. Dewater as necessary to provide stable subgrade. B. Prior to any fill placement, proofroll/compact the exposed subgrade with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory drum roller having a minimum weight of 5,000 pounds (static weight). If soft and unstable material is observed, it should be over-excavated and replaced with Granular Fill, compacted as specified herein at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Where test pit excavations extended below the future proposed footing subgrade level, they should be re-excavated and backfilled with properly compacted Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel Fill prior to foundation construction or fill placement. 3.05 PLACING EMBANKMENTS A. Filling shall be done any area only after the Architect or Geotechnical Consultant has reviewed subgrade. B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical shall be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than 5 feet to prevent the formation of slippage planes. C. Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end of the work day to seal and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration dur- ing the night. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas shall be + 2 inches from true grade indicated. Variations from indicated tolerance shall ap- proximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 8” lift maximum. 3.06 BEDDING A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be in- stalled on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, Sand-Gravel shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding material. 1. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation. B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade, contour, and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it. C. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed, and compacted under the appropriate utility specification section. Bedding materi- al to be Crushed Stone. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 11 31 00 00 - 11 3.07 BACKFILL A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timber- ing, forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed. B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Architect or Geotech- nical Consultant have inspected and approved subgrade, foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations. C. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill ad- jacent to utility lines, foundation walls and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfill- ing progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling, the dif- ference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 inches. 1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items. 2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the structure to withstand the loads they will bear in completed project; they have not been designed to withstand construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be + 2 inches from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 1. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 2 inches. 2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 1 inch. E. Where rock is removed below foundations in accordance with this Section, the ar- ea above the remaining rock subgrade and the bottom of footing shall be filled with Sand and Gravel within 6” of floor slabs and footings and with Granular Fill at depths greater than 6” below floor slabs and footings. F. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over-excavation), shall be filled to those levels at no additional cost to the Owner. Over-excavation in rock shall be filled with either gravel bedding as defined in paragraph 2.02B of this section or concrete having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi with compacted granular fill, if in earth. 3.08 COMPACTION A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C. B. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness. C. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as spec- ified in the following table: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 12 31 00 00 - 12 Fill Area % of Maximum Dry Density Pavement base course 95 Beneath pavement base course 92 Backfill for athletic field embankments 92 Beneath landscape areas 90 D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated sup- port item (base course, footing, or structure), and to all material above the undis- turbed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes: 1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course, footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item. 2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall apply. E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that re- quired of the surrounding area fill. F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be sub- ject to the approval of the Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained. G. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started. H. Grading tolerance Rough Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.10 ft. Finish Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.005 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. I. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe, and similar item, and in other areas where wheeled equipment cannot safely be employed, shall be placed in 4-inch thick lay- ers, to the specified compaction, using mechanical tampers. 3.09 COMPACTION METHODS The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort that is necessary. GRANULAR FILL: SAND-GRAVEL FILL Compaction Method Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum # passes Against Less Against Less Maximum Walls & Critical Walls & Critical Stone Size* Pavement Areas Pavement Areas Hand-operated vibratory plate or light roller in confined areas 3" 6" 8" 4 4 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. EARTHWORK (SITE) 03 30 55 - 13 31 00 00 - 13 Hand-operated vibratory drum rollers weighing at least 1,000# in confined areas 4" 10" 12" 4 4 Light vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 12" 18" 4 4 weight dynamic at drum force 5000# 10,000# Medium vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 18" 24" 6 6 weight dynamic at drum force 10,000# 20,000# *And no more than two-thirds (2/3) loose lift thickness. 3.10 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Moisture (-1% to +3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as prac- ticable within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the speci- fied densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method approved by the Architect. 1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compac- tion. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose. C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be re- moved and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plow, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements. D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability. E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which, in the opinion of the Architect become inundated or excessively moistened, shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above. F. Backfill stock piles shall be protected from adverse weather conditions. 3.11 CLEANING UP Upon completion of the work of this Section, immediately remove all debris and excess earth materials from the site. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Work by General Contractor Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to removal and disposal, removal and delivery to the Owner, or removal and reuse of the following: 1. Bituminous pavement 2. Subsurface utilities 3. Signs 4. Trees, shrubs, vegetation 5. Debris and rubble within project 6. Other items as noted on the drawings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OTHER MATERIALS A. All materials, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notification Notify the Architect at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section. B. Site Inspection Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects designated to be removed and to be preserved. C. Clarification 1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. 2. Before commencing the work of this Section, verify with the Architect all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. D. Scheduling 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the Owner. Before commencing any work, submit a schedule for review to the Architect showing the commencement, the order and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. 2. Avoid interference with use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. 3. Prior to any work performed on the site, the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe at the following number, 1-800-322- 4844. E. Disconnection of Utilities Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the duration of the work, as shown in the drawings, performing all such work in accordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved. F. Protection of Utilities Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not designated to be disconnected. G. Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of local, State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the performance of the demolition work. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage them. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no extra charge to the Owner. The contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials not scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same. 3.03 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS A. Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval of the Architect. 3.04 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR RE-USE A. Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner or for salvage and re-use shall be carefully removed as to not damage, scratch or otherwise mar the object in any way, and then shall then be stored by the Contractor until such time as the Contractor is ready for installation of the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include footings or any other necessary installation procedures required for the complete, safe use of the item installed. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 3 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SITE DEMOLITION 03 30 55 - 1 31 15 00 - 1 SECTION 31 15 00 SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Attention is directed to the requirements of the printed form of Contract and to General Requirements of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Work by Contractor Demolition, clearing and grubbing required for this work includes, but is not neces- sarily limited to removal and disposal, removal and delivery to the Owner, or re- moval and reuse of the following: 1. Bituminous pavement, curbing 2. Utilities 3. Trees, shrubs, vegetation 4. Concrete slabs and footings 5. Other items as noted on the drawings 6. Debris and rubble within the project limits 7. Protection of trees and items to remain B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Earthwork (Site) ................................................................. Section 31 00 00 Sediment and Erosion Control ............................................ Section 31 25 00 Storm Drainage Utilities ...................................................... Section 33 40 00 C. Definitions The term "demolition, clearing and grubbing," as used herein, includes the removal of all existing objects (except for those objects designated to remain) down to the existing ground level, including their underground root systems, plus such other work as is described in this Section of these Specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during demolition op- erations and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the procedures involved and who shall direct and coordinate the operation and ensure coordination with the ap- plicable utility agencies. B. Codes and Standards 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SITE DEMOLITION 03 30 55 - 2 31 15 00 - 2 In addition to complying with all pertinent code and regulations, comply with the re- quirements of those insurance carriers providing coverage for this work. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust and Mud Control Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust and mud during perfor- mance of the work of the Section; thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent mud and dust from being a nuisance to the site residents and the neigh- bors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OTHER MATERIALS All materials, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notification Notify the Architect at least two full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section. B. Site Inspection Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the entire site and all objects des- ignated to be removed and to be preserved. C. Clarification 1. The drawings do not purport to show all objects existing on the site. 2. Before commencing the work of this Section, verify with the Architect all ob- jects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. D. Scheduling 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for the Owner. Before commencing any work, submit a schedule for review to the Architect showing the commencement, the order and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. 2. Avoid interference with use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SITE DEMOLITION 03 30 55 - 3 31 15 00 - 3 3. Prior to any work performed on the site, the Contractor shall notify Dig Safe at the following number, 1-800-322- 4844. Notification of Dig Safe is a re- quirement prior to construction. E. Disconnection of Utilities Before starting site operations, disconnect or arrange for disconnection of all utility services designated to be removed or that require temporary discontinuance for the duration of the work, as shown in the drawings, performing all such work in ac- cordance with the requirements of the utility company or agency involved. F. Protection of Utilities Preserve, in operating condition, all active utilities traversing the site and not des- ignated to be disconnected. G. Perform demolition work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of local, State and Federal Authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of Public Utility Corporations having jurisdiction over the work. Ob- tain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the performance of the demolition work. H. Protection of Existing Trees 1. All trees noted on construction documents as to be preserved, shall be pro- tected during construction. 2. Tree protection shall consist of enclosing the tree with temporary snow fenc- ing. The diameter of the fencing shall have a minimum diameter of 5’ beyond the tree’s dripline. 3. All equipment and stockpiles shall be kept off of the enclosed area. 4. If any construction is required through the area of protection, all efforts shall be made to minimize disturbance to the tree trunk, branches and root sys- tem. Any roots encountered during construction shall be either trenched around or avoided if possible and/or hand pruned. 5. Trees should receive a root fertilization treatment. I. Tree Pruning Contractor shall prune existing trees as required for completion of work described in project plans and specifications. J. Topsoil Testing Contractor shall be responsible for testing of existing topsoil by approved testing agency. 3.03 DEMOLITION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SITE DEMOLITION 03 30 55 - 4 31 15 00 - 4 All items designated to be salvaged shall be carefully removed from the site so as not to damage them. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no ex- tra charge to the Owner. The contractor shall take possession of all demolished materi- als not scheduled for reuse and completely remove from site and legally dispose of same. 3.04 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS Remove all debris from the site and leave the site in a neat and orderly condition to the approval of the Architect. 3.05 SALVAGE OF ITEMS FOR RE-USE Any items that are designated for salvage and delivery to Owner or for salvage and re- use shall be carefully removed as to not damage, scratch or otherwise mar the object in any way, and then shall then be stored by the Contractor until such time as the Contrac- tor is ready for installation of the item. Installation of salvaged items shall include foot- ings or any other necessary installation procedures required for the complete, safe use of the item installed. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-1 SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating, filling and grading required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Clearing and preparation of site. 2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 3. Protection of embankments, environmental controls. 4. General excavation to lines and grades indicated. 5. Excavation and backfill of utilities. 6. General exterior rough grading, cutting and filling required. 7. Base and sub-base course materials under structures, pavements, slabs and footings, including compaction. 8. Excavation and disposal of excess or unsuitable material. Excavation shall include removal and satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encountered throughout the site. 9. Removal, hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for subsequent use in the work. 10. All re-handling, hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling, filling, backfilling, grading and other such operations. 11. Pumping and dewatering of excavation as may be required. 12. Dust control 1.03 SHORING AND SHEETING A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to prevent collapse of earth at site of excavations. B. Comply with federal, state and local regulations and provisions of the Occupational Safety and Heath Act (OSHA). C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, taking all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIAL, GENERAL A. Approval Required All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. B. Fill material under paved areas 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-2 All fill material utilized in the construction of the bituminous pavement cross section beneath the asphalt pavement shall comply with relevant conditions as stipulated in Section 02743 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT. C. All fill materials imported to the site by the Contractor for on-site use shall be free of recycled concrete and bituminous concrete, and shall not contain oil and/or hazardous materials. 2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIAL, ORDINARY BORROW A. Common fill / ordinary borrow material shall be well graded, natural inorganic soil, approved by the Engineer and meeting the following requirements: 1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials, and of stones larger than six inches maximum dimensions. 2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be compacted to the specified densities. 3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay, decomposition, or dissolution and from cinders or other material which will corrode piping or other metal. 4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot. B. Re-use of excavated on site common fill is dependent upon meeting compaction criteria. 2.03 GRANULAR FILL A. Granular Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Granular Fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 2/3 of the loose lift thickness 100 No. 10 30 - 95 No. 40 10 - 70 No. 200 *0 – 15 (*0 - 8 where used behind walls) 2.04 SAND - GRAVEL A. Sand-Gravel shall consist of durable sand and gravel and shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other deleterious or organic matter. Sand- Gravel shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 3 inch 100 1/2 inch 50 - 85 No. 4 40 - 75 No. 40 10 - 35 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-3 No. 200 0 - 8 2.05 FINE GRANULAR FILL A. Fine granular fill shall consist of well-graded sand. Fine granular fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 3/4 inch 100 1/2 inch 90 - 100 No. 4 60 - 100 No. 30 20 – 90 No. 50 10 - 70 No. 100 0 - 20 No. 200 0 - 8 2.06 CRUSHED STONE A. Crushed Stone shall consist of durable crushed rock or durable crushed gravel stone and shall be free from ice and snow, clay, loam and other deleterious or organic matter. Crushed Stone shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 1 inch 100 3/4 inch 90 - 100 1/2 inch 10 - 50 3/8 0 - 20 # 4 0 - 5 2.07 FILL MATERIAL UNDER AND ADJACENT TO BUILDING SLABS AND WALLS A. Fill material under building slabs shall consist of 2 layers of minimum 6” thickness each after compaction, of Sand-Gravel, as described in the Geotechnical Report, placed over the existing sub-grade with vapor barrier, as shown on the structural drawings, provided that existing topsoil and subsoil are removed from within the building footprint. Any filling necessary to attain base course subgrade elevation shall consist of Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel. Backfill placed on top of footing drains and within at least three foot lateral distance out from building walls shall be Sand-Gravel or Granular fill (provided that it has less than 8 percent (8%) passing Sieve No. 200). 2.08 VAPOR BARRIER A. Vapor barrier beneath slabs, as shown on structural drawings, shall be 8 mil polyethylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior Familiarization Prior to all work of this Section, become thoroughly familiar with the site, the site conditions, and all portions of the work falling within this Section. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-4 B. The Contractor shall establish the baseline shown on the drawings and accurately lay out all improvements related thereto. All work and control points shall be preserved by a system of offsets and/or ties in order to prevent destruction. Elevations shall be established from the project benchmark shown on the Contract Plans. C. Backfilling Prior to Approvals 1. Do not allow or cause any of the work performed or installed to be covered up or enclosed by work of Section prior to all required inspections, tests and approvals. 2. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved, uncover all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. After the uncovered work has been completely tested, inspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements necessary to restore the work to the condition in which it was found at the time of uncovering, all at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Stripping of Topsoil Any topsoil within "Limits of Work" and where excavation or filling will occur shall be stripped, cleaned of all rocks and debris and stockpiled on site for use in finish grading. E. The existing vegetation, topsoil, and subsoil should be removed from below the proposed building areas to the top of the undisturbed glacial till. Lateral limits of the excavation of unsuitable soils are defined by a one horizontal to one vertical (1H:1V) line sloping down from 2 feet outside the bottom edges of footings to top of suitable natural soils. 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Excavate site as shown on the drawings and cross-sections. All suitable material must be stored on site and utilized as backfill or in embankments. Surplus or unsuitable material shall be removed and disposed of off the site. B. Depressions Resulting from Removal of Obstructions Where depressions result from, or have resulted from, the removal of surface or subsurface obstructions, open the depression to equipment working width and remove all debris and soft material as directed by the Architect. C. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concrete, utility lines, and fill/backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only. D. Sheeting shall be installed, where required, to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations and where adjacent tree protection zones prohibit sloped trench walls without damaging of the tree. Sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law and/or OSHA Standards. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-5 E. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation operations shall be braced, underpinned, and supported as required to prevent damage and movement. F. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made. G. As excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill material. H. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding material. I. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels (over-excavation), shall be filled to those levels with compacted Granular Fill. J. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure, or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material at no additional cost to the Owner. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is placed. K. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, place, and remove forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 inches above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit plus 3 feet. Sides of trench shall be sloped in accordance with OSHA standards. In materials where sloping walls are not stable, or tree damage may occur, trench walls shall be supported by sheeting or trench box. 1. Should it be necessary to lower the utilities below the grade indicated on the Drawings because of existing pipes or structures, the excavation below normal grade shall be made to such widths and depths as the Engineer may direct. L. Rock excavation shall conform to MHD Specifications Section 120.63, Presplitting Rock. Use of explosives shall conform to MHD Specifications Section 7.12 and as specified herein, and shall be in strict accordance with applicable laws and ordinances. Explosives shall be stored on-site only when blasting is in progress. When the need for explosives has passed, they shall be removed from the site. 1. Surfaces of rock foundation shall be sufficiently rough to bond well with the masonry and embankments to be built and, if required, shall be cut to rough benches or steps. 2. Before masonry is built upon rock, the rock shall be freed from all vegetation, dirt, clay, shale, excessively cracked rock, water, ice, snow and other objectionable substances. Picking, wedging, streams of water under high pressure, stream jets, ad other effective means shall be used to clean exposed rock. 3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, rock shall be excavated to a depth 6 inches or more below bottom of structures, 12 inches below building slabs, and 18 inches below finished grade in athletic fields. M. Below-ground Demolition 1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-6 Other items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished and/or removed only with the approval of the Architect. 2. Pipe that is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at end. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter, for pipe less than 18 inches in diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 inches in diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 inches in diameter need not be plugged. Abandoned pipes within proposed building (if exist) shall be removed or if left in place, they shall be properly grouted. 3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION A. Subgrade preparation for spread and continuous wall footings and retaining wall footings shall be conducted in such a way as to minimize disturbance of the subgrade. The final six inches of excavation should be performed with a smooth edged blade attached to the bucket of the excavator, or alternatively, hand shovel loose, disturbed material such that the subgrade is essentially undisturbed. If necessary, pour a 3-inches working mate of lean concrete, or 6 to 12 inches of compacted Crushed Stone wrapped in non-woven filter fabric (Mirafi N140 or approved equivalent), or 12 inches of compacted Sand-Gravel Fill. Construction operations shall be planned to mitigate and minimize disturbance to the final subgrade. Disturbed subgrade should be over excavated to firm and stable ground and replaced by compacted Crushed Stone or Sand - Gravel Fill at no additional cost to the Owner. B. If the natural soil subgrade is dry, densify the exposed bearing subgrade with four passes of a minimum 250 pound vibratory plate compactor. Protect footing subgrades from frost at all times. Fill should not be placed over frozen soil. C. In proposed fill areas, after the removal of topsoil and subsoil and prior to any fill placement proofroll/ compact the exposed subgrade with a minimum of 4 passes of a vibratory drum roller having a minimum weight of 5,000 pounds (static weight). If soft and unstable material is observed, it should be overexcavated and replaced with Granular Fill, compacted as specified herein at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Where test pit excavations extended below the future proposed footing subgrade level, they should be re-excavated and backfilled with properly compacted Granular Fill or Sand-Gravel Fill prior to foundation construction or fill placement. 3.04 PLACING EMBANKMENTS A. Filling shall be done in any area only after the Architect or Geotechnical Consultant has reviewed the subgrade. B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical shall be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than 5 feet to prevent the formation of slippage planes. C. Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end of the work day to seal and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration during the night. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas shall be + 2 inches from true grade indicated. Variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-7 3.05 BEDDING A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, Sand-Gravel shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding material. 1. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation. B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade, contour, and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it. C. Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed, and compacted under the appropriate utility specification section. Bedding material to be Crushed Stone. 3.06 BACKFILL A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timbering, forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed. B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or Architect or Geotechnical Consultant have inspected and approved subgrade, foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations. C. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to utility lines, foundation walls and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling, the difference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 inches. 1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items. 2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the structure to withstand the loads they will bear in completed project; they have not been designed to withstand construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be + 2 inches from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100-foot area. 1. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 2 inches. 2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus 1/2 inch and minus 1 inch. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method C. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-8 B. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness. C. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in the following table: Fill Area % of Maximum Dry Density Beneath building foundations and slab 95 Pavement base course 95 Beneath pavement base course 92 Backfill for athletic field embankments 92 Beneath landscape areas 90 D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated support item (base course, footing, or structure), and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes: 1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course, footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2 feet beyond the exterior face or edge of item. 2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at a 45 degree angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall apply. E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding area fill. F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained. G. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started. H. Grading tolerance Rough Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.05 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.10 ft. Finish Grade Pavement areas plus/minus 0.25 ft. Grass areas plus/minus 0.10 ft. 3.08 COMPACTION METHODS A. The Compaction alternative given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way relieves the Contractor of his/her obligation to achieve the specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort that is necessary. B. GRANULAR FILL: SAND-GRAVEL FILL Compaction Method Maximum Loose Lift Thickness Minimum # passes Below Below Less 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-9 Maximum Structures Less Critical Structures Critical Stone Size* and Pavement Areas & Pavement Areas Hand-operated vibratory plate or light roller in confined areas 4" 6" 8" 4 4 Hand-operated vibratory drum rollers weighing at least 1,000# in confined areas 6" 10" 12" 4 4 Light vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 12" 18" 4 4 weight dynamic at drum force 5000# 10,000# Medium vibratory drum roller minimum minimum 8" 18" 24" 6 6 weight dynamic at drum force 10,000# 20,000# 3.09 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill material shall be limited to Optimum Moisture (-1% to +3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practicable within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. B. Material that does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method approved by the Architect. 1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose. C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plow, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements. D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earthmoving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability. E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which, in the opinion of the Architect become inundated or excessively moistened, shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above. F. Backfill stock piles shall be protected from adverse weather conditions. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 31 23 00-10 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL 03 30 55 - 1 31 25 00 - 1 SECTION 31 25 00 SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Con- ditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's in- terpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Doc- ument not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to construct a complete erosion and sediment control program for minimizing erosion and sedi- ment control provisions detailed on the Drawings and specified herein are the min- imum requirements for an erosion control program. The Contractor shall provide additional erosion sediment control materials and methods as required to imple- ment the erosion and siltation control principles specified herein. B. Erosion control and maintenance program, shall include, but not be limited to, in- stallation and maintenance of silt fences, hay bale check dams, and installation schedules of erosion control structures. C. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the NPDES GCP for this pro- ject, and shall prepare and submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) that meets the requirements of the United States Environmental Protec- tion’s (EPA) National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for Storm Water Discharges From Construction Activities (GCP). The Con- tractor shall also submit the EPA “Notice of Intent for Storm Water Discharges As- sociated with CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY Under a NPDES General Permit” (NOI) form (see Part 3.05 for additional information). D. Related work specified elsewhere Site Demolition ................................................................... Section 31 15 00 Earthwork (Site) ................................................................. Section 31 00 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL 03 30 55 - 2 31 25 00 - 2 1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges B. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD) Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges C. Massachusetts General Laws, Wetlands Protection Act 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed methods, materials to be employed, and schedule for effecting erosion and siltation control and preventing erosion damage shall be submitted for approv- al. Submittals shall include: 1. List of proposed material including manufacturer's product data. 2. Schedule of erosion control program indicating specific dates for implement- ing programs in each major area of work. B. The following samples shall be submitted: Sample Size Silt fence fabric 12 x 12 in. C. Seed mixture for temporary seed cover shall be submitted for approval of the Ar- chitect. 1.07 EROSION CONTROL PRINCIPLES A. The following erosion control principles shall apply to the land grading and con- struction phases: 1. Stripping of vegetation, grading, or other soil disturbance shall be done in a manner which will minimize soil erosion. 2. Whenever feasible, natural vegetation shall be retained and protected. 3. Extent of area which is exposed and free of vegetation and duration of its exposure shall be kept within practical limits. 4. Temporary seeding, mulching, or other suitable stabilization measures shall be used to protect exposed critical areas during prolonged construction or other land disturbances. 5. Drainage provisions shall accommodate increased runoff resulting from modifications of soil and surface conditions during and after development or disturbance. Such provisions shall be in addition to existing requirements. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL 03 30 55 - 3 31 25 00 - 3 6. Sediment shall be retained on-site. 7. Erosion control devices shall be installed as early as possible in the con- struction sequence prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations and ex- cavation work. B. Cut and fill slopes and stockpiled materials shall be protected to prevent erosion. Slopes shall be protected with permanent erosion protection when erosion expo- sure period is expected to be greater than or equal to six months, and temporary erosion protection when erosion exposure period is expected to be less than six months. 1. Permanent erosion protection shall be accomplished by seeding with grass and covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevail- ing conditions. 2. Temporary erosion protection shall be accomplished by covering with an erosion protection material, as appropriate for prevailing conditions. 3. Except where specified slope is indicated on Drawings, fill slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1 (horizontal:vertical), cut slopes shall be limited to a grade of 2:1. 1.08 EMERGENCY OPERATION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall have on-call at all times capable, responsible representatives who, when authorized, will mobilize the necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, and otherwise provide the required action when notified of any impend- ing emergency situation. B. The Contractor shall supply a telephone number to the Owner with which the Con- tractor may be contacted in the evenings and on weekends. The Contractor shall prepare a 24-hour "duty roster" for this purpose and submit it in writing to the Ar- chitect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE A. Silt fence shall be preassembled silt fence structure to be Mirafi Envirofence, American Engineering Fabrics, Inc. Pre-assembled silt fence, or Everett J. Pres- cott 800-EJP-24 HR pre-assembled sit fence. 1. Overall length of each fence section shall be minimum 100 ft.; fabric width minimum of 3 ft., post length minimum of 4 ft.; and post spacing maximum of 8.3 ft. 2. Posts shall be tapered for ease of installation, and beveled at top to resist splitting. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL 03 30 55 - 4 31 25 00 - 4 2.02 HAY BALES Hay bales for construction of hay bale check dam and catch basin filter dam shall be new, firm wire or nylon-bound livestock feed-grade. 2.03 CRUSHED STONE Crushed stone for hay bale check dam, catch basin filter dam and sediment pond riser pipe filters shall conform to MDPW Specifications Section M2.01.3 2.04 TEMPORARY SEED COVER A. Seed mixture for temporary cover by hydroseeding application shall conform to the following: Quantity per 1000 sq. ft coverage Material 27-1/2 lb. Wood fiber mulch 4 lb. Seed 1/2 lb. Annual Ryegrass 22 lb. 10-6-4 Fertilizer 69 gal. Water 1. Wood fiber mulch shall conform to MHD Specifications. 2. Seed shall conform to MHD Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY SEED COVER A. Grass seed shall be spread by mechanical spreader at a rate of 4.0 lb./1000 sq. ft. B. Following seeding, area shall be tightly raked to mingle seed with the top 1/8 to 1/4 inch of soil. Areas shall then be smoothed and rolled. C. Following rolling, entire shall be watered until equivalent of a 2-inch depth of water shall have been applied to entire seeded surface, at a rate which will not dislodge seed. Water shall be repeated thereafter as frequently as required to prevent dry- ing of surface, until grass attains an average height of 1 1/2 inches. D. At the Contractor's option, seed may be spread by the hydroseeding methods, uti- lizing power equipment commonly used for that purpose. Seed and mulch shall be mixed and applied to achieve application quantities specified herein for the con- ventional seeding method, with mulch applied at the rate of 2700 lb. dry weight of mulch per acre. A mulching machine, acceptable to the Architect, shall be equipped to eject the thoroughly wet mulch material at a uniform rate to provide the mulch coverage specified. Other provisions specified above for conventional seeding shall apply to hydro seeding. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL 03 30 55 - 5 31 25 00 - 5 1. If the results of hydroseeding application are unsatisfactory, the mixture and/or application rate and methods shall be modified to achieve the re- quired results. 2. After the grass has appeared, all areas and parts of areas which fail to show a uniform stand of grass, for any reason whatsoever, shall be reseeded and such areas and parts of areas seeded repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of grass. 3.02 SILT FENCE A. Silt fencing shall be placed around existing drainage channels and at the no-cut and no fill lines before commencement of any earthwork. Silt fencing shall be in- stalled prior to all upgradient earthwork. B. Silt fence shall be installed around the stockpiled topsoil and other aggregate ma- terial. 3.03 HAY BALE DAM Bales shall be placed in a row with ends tightly abutting the adjacent bales. Each bale shall be embedded in the soil a minimum of 4 inches. Bales shall be securely anchored in place by stakes or re-bars driven through the bales. The first stake in each bale shall be angled toward the previously laid bale to force the bales together. 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL OF EROSION CONTROL DEVICES A. The Contractor shall inspect the effectiveness and condition of the erosion control devices during storm events, after each rainfall of one-inch magnitude or greater, prior to weekends, and prior to any forecasted storm events. B. Wetland areas, water courses, and drainage swales adjacent to construction ac- tivities shall be monitored twice each month for evidence of silt intrusion and other adverse environmental impacts, which shall be corrected immediately upon dis- covery. C. Culverts and drainage ditches shall be kept clean and clear of obstructions during construction period. 1. Cleaning: Sediment build-up at silt fencing and hay bale structures shall be removed when the sediment accumulation is 1/2 the design height. Sedi- ment basin shall be cleaned when the sediment accumulates to one foot of depth. 2. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged erosion control devices im- mediately, and, in no case, more than four hours after observing such defi- ciencies, and as directed by the Architect. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL 03 30 55 - 6 31 25 00 - 6 3. The Contractor shall be prepared to implement interim drainage controls and erosion control measures as may be necessary during the course of con- struction, and as directed by the Architect. 4. The Contractor shall make available on-site, equipment, materials and labor necessary to effect emergency erosion control and drainage improvements within four hours of any impending emergency situation. 5. The Contractor shall comply with recommendations of the Architect to make repairs or supplement erosion control procedures during the course of con- struction. 6. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the sequencing of operations, condition of erosion control devices, and turbidity level of runoff are unsatisfactory, the Architect will direct the Owner to order the Contractor to cease work and or- der the Contractor to make corrections within 24 hours, at no expense to the Owner. 7. The Contractor shall make a final inspection, clean all cross culverts and sweep off roadways as approved by the Architect before Contract closeout. 8. Condition of erosion control device shall be checked twice each month or more frequently as required. Damaged and/or deteriorated items shall be replaced. Erosion control devices shall be maintained in place and in effec- tive condition. 9. Hay bales shall be inspected frequently and maintained or replaced as re- quired to maintain both their effectiveness and essentially their original con- dition. Underside of bales shall be in close contact with the earth below at all times, as required to prevent water from washing beneath bales. 10. Sediment deposits shall be disposed of off-site, in a location and manner which will not cause sediment nuisance elsewhere. E. Removal of Erosion Control Devices 1. Erosion control devices shall be maintained until all disturbed earth has been paved or vegetated, at which time they shall be removed. After removal, ar- eas disturbed by these devices shall be re-graded and seeded. 2. Erosion protection material shall be kept securely anchored until acceptance of completed slope or entire Project, whichever is later. 3.05 NPDES CONSTRUCTION GENERAL PERMIT COMPLIANCE A. Contractor to comply with requirements for the Federal EPA National Pollution Dis- charge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for Storm Water Discharges from Construction Activities. Compliance by the Contractor shall include, but is not limited to the following: 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL 03 30 55 - 7 31 25 00 - 7 • Contractor shall prepare and submit the EPA Notice of Intent as required by provisions of the general permit. • Contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) that adheres to the requirements contained in the general permit. • Contractor shall adhere to permit requirements in regard to site inspections and record-keeping. • Contractor shall submit Notice of Termination documentation to the EPA at the end of the construction period. B. General information in regard to the Construction General Permit, as well as in- formation relating to permit compliance, can be found at the NPDES website (http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes). C. A failure by the Contractor to comply with provisions of the General Permit for Storm Water Discharges from Construction Activities in a timely manner shall not constitute grounds for an extension of the contract period. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 1 SECTION 32 10 00 BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous concrete pavement required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Roadway and walkway pavement 2. Bituminous concrete berm 3. Patching 4. Line painting and striping 1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department (MHD): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges D. Comply with standards specified in accordance with Town of Greenfield Department of Public Works. 1.06 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE Earthwork (Site) ........................................................................... Section 31 00 00 Water Utilities ............................................................................. Section 33 10 00 Storm Drainage Utilities ............................................................... Section 33 40 00 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 2 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise specified, work and materials for construction of the asphaltic con- crete paving shall conform to the applicable portions of the following: 1. MHD specifications Section 460 for pavement and Section 405 for gravel base course and Section 500 for "curb and edging". 2. MHD specifications Section 860 for fast drying traffic paint. B. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work which might injure them has been completed. Damage caused during con- struction shall be repaired before acceptance. All trenches for utility installation shall be completed and backfilled for a period of 30 days prior to paving over these trenches unless approved by the Architect. C. Repair and replace existing paving areas damaged and removed during this Project. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement shall match those em- ployed in existing work, except as otherwise noted. D. Pavement subbase shall not be placed on a muddy or frozen subgrade. E. Existing pavement under state or local jurisdiction shall, if damaged or removed dur- ing the course of this project, be repaired or replaced under this section of the speci- fication in conformance with applicable codes, standards, and practices. 1.08 SUBMITTALS Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. 1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Use all means necessary to protect bituminous concrete pavement materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all oth- er trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this Section. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 3 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust being a nuisance to the public, neighbors and concurrent performance of other work on the job site. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS A. Architectural Coatings 1. All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as pub- lished in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: “a coating recommended for field application to sta- tionary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings, to pave- ments, or to curbs.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. Gravel base and/or sub-base courses for areas beneath new pavement as herein- before defined and indicated on the drawings, shall consist of gravel borrow com- posed of hard durable stone, and coarse sand, free of loam, clay or silt, uniformly graded and containing no stone having any dimension greater than the gradation shown on the plans. When spread and rolled on the prepared surface, it shall form a stable surface. The gradation shall conform to State Specifications, Section M1, sub-section M1.03.0, Type "b", and attention is directed to the selected gravel size limitation. Samples of gravel and results of gradation tests performed by an ap- proved testing laboratory shall be submitted for approval of the Architect. No stone greater than 4" in any dimension. 2.02 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. All courses of the bituminous concrete paving shall consist of hot-mix asphalt con- forming to the requirements of Section 460, Subsection M3.11.00 of MHD Specifica- tions. 1. Binder or bottom course paving shall have a maximum aggregate size passing 1 in. sieve, and bitumen content = 5 1/2% + 1/2% by weight. 2. Top or wearing course paving shall have maximum aggregate size passing 1/2 in. sieve, and bitumen content = 6 1/2% + 1/2% by weight. Complete job mix formula, listing quantities and pertinent ingredient properties, shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect at least two weeks before work is scheduled to begin. B. Bituminous tack coat shall be applied as required. Bituminous material for tack coat on the existing surface, where required or specified, shall be emulsified asphalt, grade RS-1 conforming to Subsection M3.03.0 of MDPW Specifications. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 4 2.03 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE BERM A. Bituminous concrete shall be Class I, conforming to applicable requirements of MHD Specifications M3.11.03 Table “A” for “Dense Mix”. B. Berm shall be as detailed on the plans. 2.05 TRAFFIC PAINT Parking space pavement striping and reflective glass beads shall conform to Section M7.01.10 and M7.01.07 of the MHD Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installa- tion may properly commence. 2. Verify that bituminous concrete pavement be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent por- tions of the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrep- ancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. Compacting Equipment All equipment for compacting shall be steel-tired power rollers having a minimum weight of 10 tons, except that hand held vibrator compactors may be used in areas not accessible to rollers where specifically approved in advance by the Architect. B. Paving Equipment All equipment for paving shall be spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machine capable of maintaining line, grade and minimum surface course thickness specified, with laser grading sensors for tolerance accuracy. 3.03 GRADING 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 5 A. Areas to be paved will be compacted and brought approximately to subgrade eleva- tion under Section 310000, EARTHWORK, before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of subgrade to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section. B. Existing subgrade materials which will not readily compact as required shall be re- moved and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material re- moved shall be material conforming to this Section. C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be recompacted as required to bring top 8 in. of material immediately below gravel base course to a compaction of at least 90% of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Subgrade compac- tion shall extend for a distance of at least 1 ft. beyond pavement edge. D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be per- formed in completed subgrade or subbase, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed as directed by the Architect as specified in Section 02200, EARTHWORK. Completed subgrade after filling such areas shall be uniformly and properly graded. E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during con- struction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and recompacted before placing pavement. F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade. G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and/or stripped under this section, and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site. H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Architect. Subgrade shall be approved by the Architect before installation of paving base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specifi- cation. 3.04 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL BASE COURSE A. The gravel shall be furnished, hauled, deposited and spread in layers as specified in applicable provisions of Section 40, and 405 of the State Specifications and com- pacted as specified for the formation of embankments, for sub-base, shoulders etc., and as specified herein. B. The gravel shall be spread in layers from self-spreading vehicles, or with power graders of approved types, or by hand upon the prepared subgrade. Gravel shall be spread in layers no more than six (6") inches thick, compacted measure. Compac- tion requirements shall be to 95% maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method D. Stone greater than 2 in. shall be excluded from course. . The 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 6 method of compaction proposed by the Contractor shall be approved by the Archi- tect and the approved method and procedure, once established and providing the required results, shall be used throughout the entire operation. Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density. Trucks shall not be used for compaction purposes. C. Width of base course shall be greater than or equal to the width of pavement sur- face, if continuous lateral support is provided during rolling, and shall extend at least 2 x base thickness beyond edge of the course above, if not so supported. D. Width of Base 1. Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other structures only after they have been set to required grade and level. 2. Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas. Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller wheels. 3. Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 in. measured by means of a 10 ft. long straightedge shall be replaced and properly compacted. E. Subgrade and base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials shall not be permitted to become mixed with gravel. Materials spilled out- side pavement lines shall be removed and area repaired. F. Portions of subgrade or of construction above which become contaminated, sof- tened, or dislodged by passing of traffic, or otherwise damaged, shall be cleaned, replaced, and otherwise repaired to conform to the requirements of this specification before proceeding with next operation. 3.05 PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACING A. Preparation Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be laid only when surface is free of foreign mat- ter and when the weather is not foggy or rainy, and further these operations shall be carried on only when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40 degrees F in the shade. Actual mix delivery temperature shall adhere to Section 460.61. Under no circumstances shall mix temperature exceed 325 degrees F upon arrival at the site. Temperature exceeding 325 degrees F will result in rejection of the entire load. B. Placement Bituminous concrete pavements shall be furnished, handled and laid in accordance with Section 460 and Section 701 of the State Specifications, except as herein modified. 1. Binder and wearing surface courses for sidewalks may each be applied indi- vidually, in single lifts of full thickness indicated on the Drawings. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 7 2. All joints at old pavement shall be sawed vertical butt joints which shall receive a light coating of asphalt emulsion a short time before paving commences, as directed by the Architect. 3. Adjacent concrete work, curb, etc., shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation. Damage and stained areas shall be replaced or re- paired to equal their original condition. 4. Construction methods shall conform to the Massachusetts Highway Depart- ment Specifications, Section 460, Bituminous Concrete Pavement. 5. Submission of the job-mix formula for the bituminous concrete surface course shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and it shall be submitted to the Architect for approval 10 days prior to the pavement construction. Deliveries shall be timed to permit spreading and rolling all material during daylight hours, unless artificial light, satisfactory to the Architect, is provided. Loads which have been wet by rain or otherwise will not be accepted. Hauling over freshly laid or rolled material will not be permitted. 6. Establishment of grades, grade control, and conformance to finished pave- ment surface grade tolerances required shall be the responsibility of the Con- tractor in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 7. Placing and rolling of mixture shall be as nearly continuous as possible. Breakdown rolling shall begin as soon after placing as mixture will bear the operation without undue displacement. Delays in rolling shall be completed while the mix temperature exceeds 150 degrees F. Rolling shall proceed lon- gitudinally, starting at edge of newly placed material and proceeding toward previously rolled areas. Rolling overlap on successive strips shall be greater than or equal to width of roller rear wheel. Alternate trips of roller shall be of slightly different lengths. Corrections required in surface shall be made by removing or adding materials before rolling is completed. Skin patching of ar- eas where rolling has been completed will not be permitted. Course shall be subjected to diagonal rolling, crossing lines of the first rolling while mixture is hot and in compatible condition. Displacement of mixture or other fault shall be corrected at once by use of rakes and application of fresh mixture or re- moval or mixture, as required. Rolling of each course shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated. Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of course only when paving is to be discontinued for sufficient time to permit mixture to become cold. 8. In places not accessible to roller, mixture shall be compacted with hand tam- pers. Hand tampers shall weight at least 50 lb. and shall have a tamping face less than or equal to 100 sq. in. Mechanical tampers capable of equal com- paction will be acceptable in areas in which they can be employed effectively. 9. Portions of pavement courses which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be removed, replaced with fresh mixture and compacted to density of surrounding areas. Asphaltic material spilled outside 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 8 lines of finished pavement shall be immediately and completely removed. Such material shall not be employed in the work. 10. Joints shall present same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the course. Continuous bond shall be obtained between portions of existing and new pavements and between successive placements of new pavement. Any longitudinal or transverse joint which has cooled below 150 degrees F prior to placement of adjacent mix, shall be treated with a coat of tack coat prior to new mix placement. New material at joints shall be thick enough to al- low for compaction when rolling. Compaction of pavement, base, and sub- grade at joints shall be such that there is no yielding of new pavement relative to existing pavement when subjected to traffic. 11. Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement (if greater than or equal seven days since binder placed), parking lot overlay areas, manholes, con- crete collars and similar structures shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a thin uniform coating of bitumen immediately before fresh mixture is placed. Tack coat shall be applied at rate which will leave asphaltic residue of 5-7 gal./100 s.y. after evaporation of vehicle. Base surface shall be dry and clean when tack coat is applied. Asphaltic paving material shall not be placed until vehicle has completely evaporated from tack coat. Adjoining new paving shall be placed before tack coat has dried or dusted over. 12. Earth or other approved material shall be placed along pavement edges in such quantity as will compact to thickness of course being constructed, allow- ing at least 1 ft. of shoulder width to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with rolling and compacting surface. Pavement edge shall be trimmed neatly to line before placing earth or other approved material along edge. 13. Variations in smoothness of finished surface shall be less than or equal to 1/4 in. when tested with a 10 ft. straight edge, applied both parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved area. At joints with existing pavement, and at other locations where an essentially flush transition is required, pavement ele- vation tolerance shall not exceed 0.01 feet. At other areas pavement eleva- tion tolerance shall not exceed + 0.05 ft. Irregularities exceeding these amounts or which retain water on surface shall be corrected by removing de- fective work and replacing with new material conforming to this section. 3.06 CONNECTION TO EXISTING BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. All cold joints shall be heated with infra-red heater prior to connecting to new pave- ment. 3.07 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB A. Bituminous curb shall be extruded over paving. Paving shall receive a bituminous tack coat over entire contact surface of curb and pavement immediately before curb is extruded over it. Curb shall have a uniform surface texture, color, and profile. Bottom edge shall meet bituminous paving to form a neat, uniform cove. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 9 B. Where new bituminous curbing joins existing bituminous curbing, contact surface shall receive a bituminous tack coat. Existing bituminous curbing shall be neatly trimmed to provide a clean, straight end to abut the new curb against. C. Portions of bituminous curb which become mixed with foreign material or are in any way defective shall be removed and replaced with fresh mixture. Bituminous mate- rial spilled outside finished pavement lines shall be immediately and completely re- moved. Such material shall not be employed in work. D. Areas in the existing parking lot that are to be restriped and/or expanded shall con- form to paving requirements of this section. 3.08 TRAFFIC STRIPING A. Traffic paint materials, equipment, methods of placement, and precautions to be ob- served as to weather, condition of surface, etc., shall conform to MDPW Specifica- tions for traffic striping first class road work. Striping shall not begin until all asphalt surfaces have cured for a minimum of 14 days. B. Striping patterns shall conform to the layout shown on the Drawings. Transverse striping of handicap pathways shall be on 4 in. x 12 in. stripe to space ratio. C. Strip width shall be the standard 4 inches except wheelchair symbols which shall be as detailed in the 1978 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. The wheelchair symbols shall be painted in spaces shown on the drawings. 3.09 REMEDIAL MEASURES A. Upon direction of the Architect, cut out, and/or rework all surfaces and subgrade ar- eas which do not meet the requirements of this Section; perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Work shall be properly coordinated with the work of other trades. Other trades shall be consulted in advance so that proper provisions may be made for installation of their work and so that the work of this Section may be properly finished and con- nected to the work of other trades. 3.11 GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 3.12 INSTALLATION POROUS ASPHALT A. Porous Media Beds Protection of native materials from over compaction is important. Proper com- paction of select subbase materials is essential. Improper compaction of sub- 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. BASES, BALLASTS AND PAVING 32 10 00 - 10 base materials will result in either 1) low pavement durability from insufficient compaction, or 2) poor infiltration due to over-compaction of subbase. Care must be taken to assure proper compaction as detailed below. 1. Grade Control a. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. The Engineer shall be notified for review and approval of final stake lines for the work before construction work is to begin. Finished surfaces shall be true to grade and even, free of roller marks and free of puddle- forming low spots. All areas must drain freely. Excavation elevations should be within +/- 0.1 ft (+/- 3 cm). b. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, based upon reports of the testing ser- vice and inspection, the quality of the work is below the standards which have been specified, additional work and testing will be required until satisfactory results are obtained. c. The Engineer shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to all porous media bed and porous pavement work. 2. Subgrade Preparation a. Native subgrade refers to materials beyond the limit of the excavation. The existing native subgrade material under all bed areas shall NOT be compacted or subject to excessive construction equipment traffic prior to geotextile and stone bed placement. Compaction is acceptable if an impermeable liner is used at the base of the porous asphalt system and infiltration is not desired. b. Where erosion of the native material subgrade has caused accumula- tion of fine materials and/or surface ponding, this material shall be re- moved with light equipment and the underlying soils scarified to a min- imum depth of 6 inches with a York rake or equivalent and light tractor. c. Bring subgrade to line, grade, and elevations indicated. Fill and lightly regrade any areas END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-1 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide cast-in-place concrete paving over prepared subbase. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Design Mixes: Submit for approval design mixes, including adjustments for variations in project conditions. C. Test Reports: Submit for approval test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Construction Tolerance: 1/8" in 10' for grade and alignment of top of forms; 1/4" in 10' for vertical face on longitudinal axis. C. Testing: Independent testing laboratory. D. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: ASTM C 150, Type I, Portland cement; ASTM C 33, normal weight aggregates; potable water. 1. Design Mix: ASTM C 94, 3000 psi, 28 day minimum compressive strength. 2. Slump Limits: 8 inches minimum with superplasticizer, 3 inches otherwise. 3. Air Content: 5 to 8 percent. 4. Finish: Broom finish, perpendicular to direction of travel. 5. Finish: Exposed aggregate. B. Wire Mesh Reinforcement: Welded plain steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. C. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. D. Fabricated Bar Mats: Steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A 184, using ASTM A 615, Grade 60 steel bars. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-2 E. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. F. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A threaded bolts. G. Liquid-Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. H. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. I. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Proof roll subbase and check for unstable areas. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning paving work means acceptance of subbase. B. Comply with concrete section for concrete mix, testing placement, joints, tolerances, curing, repairs and protection. C. Dispose of over-mixed concrete off-site in a legal manner. D. Protect concrete paving until weight of a person will not leave any impression. Remove and replace concrete paving which shows impressions or other defects. Skim coating defects is not acceptable. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . UNIT PAVING 32 14 00-1 SECTION 32 14 00 UNIT PAVING PART 1.00 – GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality of greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included Work includes all labor, materials, equipment and incidental items necessary to complete the installation of Brick Paver Units and granite paving in all areas noted and detailed in the drawings and/or indicated in the drawings. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere 1. Excavation and Fill ......................................................... Section 312300 2. Bituminous Concrete Pavement ..................................... Section 321216 3. Site Concrete .................................................................. Section 321313 4. General LEED® Requirements ........................................ Section 013329 5. LEED® Product Requirements ....................................... Section 018113 6. Waste Management and Disposal .................................. Section 017419 7. IAQ Management ........................................................... Section 018119 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . UNIT PAVING 32 14 00-2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications of Workmen A. Provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, completely familiar with the design and application of the work described in this section, be present at all times during progress of work of this section, and direct all work performed under this section. B. For actual installation and finishing of brick pavement surfaces and operation of the required equipment, use only personnel that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required. C. Masonry units shall conform to the physical requirements of the local building code and the current applicable ASTM specifications applying to particular use for the construction in which units are employed. 1.06 SUBMITTALS Materials List After award of Contract and before any unit paving materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a complete materials list of all masonry materials. A. Show manufacturers' name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation. B. Upon approval of the Architect, the manufacturers' recommendations shall become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation used in the work. C. The paver supplier shall submit 6 copies of all necessary shop drawings to the Landscape Architect for his approval. These drawings shall show all bedding, bonding, jointing and anchoring details. The contractor shall also prepare and submit a 1/8” scale plan for the layout of all brick unit paving on the site. D. Samples: The Installing Contractor shall submit to the Architect four production units of each color and style selected. This submission is made for final approval and establishes job site criteria for quality and color uniformity. All surface texture shall be uniform within the normal color range established between the manufacturer and Architect. Submit affidavits stating that brick pavers to be used on the job complies with all applicable ASTM specifications. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . UNIT PAVING 32 14 00-3 1. Use all means necessary to protect the brick pavers and materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 2. Brick pavers shall be protected against wetting prior to laying. 3. Do not use, and immediately remove from the project site all materials in broken containers or in packages showing water marks or other evidence of damage. 4. Do not use any chipped, broken, or otherwise damaged or defective brick pavers. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Dust Control 1. Use all means necessary to prevent the spread of dust during performance of the work of this section. 2. Thoroughly moisten all surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other work on the job site. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions When temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling, or same is forecast to occur within 48 hours, provide fireproof protection covering of work and heat materials with UL approved flame heaters, as approved. Maintain materials and work above 50 degrees F for 72 hours. Do not use any admixture to prevent freezing. Do not lay frozen materials or build upon frozen surfaces. Lay brick pavers dry. Any completed work found to be affected by frost shall be taken down and rebuilt, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS A. Architectural Coatings All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as published in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coatings are defined as: “a coating recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings, to pavements, or to curbs.” PART 2.00 - PRODUCTS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . UNIT PAVING 32 14 00-4 2.01 BRICK PAVERS The brick pavers shall meet or exceed ASTM C936 paving standards and freeze- thaw testing per section 8 of ASTM C-67: No effect due to freeze-thaw, Maximum of 5% water absorption rate, and Minimum of 8,500 psi compressive strength. A. The contractor shall submit sample pavers for color and texture approval. The specified color may be changed by the Architect prior to Contractor ordering of the pavers. For the purpose of establishing a style, color and texture for submission of sample, the 4”x 8” pavers by Interstate Brick available from Olander Brick, Northampton, MA 01060 (413) 586-5608 have been selected. Colors are as noted on the plans. B. Brick pavers are to be manufactured from extruded fireclay or shale and shall be fired to produce a dense paver with an average absorption of less than 1.3% (in a 24 hour cold water absorption test) and have an average compressive strength of not less than 17,980 lbs. per square inch for any five bricks tested. The pavers must be capable of withstanding at least the equivalent of 100 cycles of freeze-thaw conditions. C. All masonry units shall be dimensionally stable in regard to height, width and length, and be rated for H-20 loading. D. Units shall be laid according to the details shown on the plan either on a sand base or a bituminous set bed. All brick pavers shall be dimensionally stable in regard to height, width and length. E. All units shall be free of organic impurities that will cause rusting, staining, etc. F. Regional Content: All brick paver products should be manufactured locally and all raw materials should be extruded/recovered locally (within 500 miles of the project site) as specified in Section 018113 LEED® Product Requirements Paragraph 2.02A. 2.02 NEOPRENE - MODIFIED ASPHALT ADHESIVE A. Neoprene - Modified Asphalt Adhesive shall consist of two percent (2%) neoprene (Grade WM1) oxidized asphalt with a 155 degree softening point (80 penetration) and ten percent (10%) long fibered asbestos. 2.03 JOINTING AND BEDDING SAND FOR BRICK PAVERS A. Provide jointing sand and bedding sand as follows: 1. Clean, well graded, sand free from soluble salts and other deleterious or foreign matter. Sand shall be natural silica or sand manufactured from crushed rock. 2. Do not use screenings or stone dust for jointing sand or bedding sand. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . UNIT PAVING 32 14 00-5 B. Joint Sand Material Requirements: Comply with [ASTM C 144] [ASTM C 33]. ASTM C 144 Grading Requirements Percent Passing, by Weight Sieve Size Natural Sand Manufactured Sand No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 to 100 95 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 to 100 70 to 100 No. 30 (0.600 mm) 40 to 75 40 to 75 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 35 20 to 40 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 15 10 to 25 No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0 to 5 0 to 10 ASTM C 33 Grading Requirements Sieve Size Percent Passing, by Weight 3/8” (9.5 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 80 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (0.600 mm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 5 to 30 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 0 to 10 No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0 to 3 C. Bedding Sand Material Requirements 1. Comply with ASTM C 33 requirements for fine aggregates. 2. Do not use mason’s sand, or sand conforming to ASTM C 144 for bedding sand. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that pavers may be installed in strict accordance with the original design and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards. B. Discrepancies 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . UNIT PAVING 32 14 00-6 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION All masonry work is to be done by masons who are skilled in their trade in a neat and workmanlike manner. A. Gravel Base After subgrade has been completed as described in Section 02200 of these Specifications, and has been approved by the Architect, roll the surface to a smooth and uniform texture to free from lumps, rock pockets, soft spots, and spongy areas. B. Setting Bed 1. Setting bed shall be mason’s sand or bituminous set bed, as per the details on the plans. Sand shall be size 0, clean masons sand. C. Placement of Pavers 1. All pavers shall be laid plumb and true to line with level accurately spaced courses, bond, comers, and reveals. Lay full thickness without stepping or toothing in mortar beds, spread smooth and rake out to 1" depth as shown on the plans and specified herein. 2. The pattern shall be as noted on the plans. 3. Newly laid pavers must be protected at all times by panels of plywood on which the installer stands. The panels can be advanced as work processes, but the plywood protection must be maintained in areas which will be subjected to continued movement of materials and equipment. These precautions must be taken in order to avoid depressions and protect paver alignment. If additional leveling of the pavers is required, the surface shall be rolled with a power roller after sufficient heat has been built up from several days of hot weather. D. Joint Treatment 1. Joint treatment shall be sand swept as noted on the detail plans. Joints shall be hand-tight to a maximum of ¼”. Joints may vary slightly to adjust the bond and minimize cutting, closures, or jumping of bond. Closure pieces shall be large enough to be in proportion with the paving pattern. No small closure pieces are permitted. Saws shall do all cutting. 2. Expansion joints in the plaza shall be continuous through the base and pavers according to the structural drawings drawings. At all other locations, expansion joints shall be located at all building walls. Recess expansion joint filler a minimum of 1/2" in brick paving. Sealant shall then be 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. . UNIT PAVING 32 14 00-7 applied to joints continuously and uniformity to a depth of 1/2" or as required. Care must be taken that sealant bonds properly to both sides of the joint. Sealant shall be flush with joint. All adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned immediately of sealant in a manner recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 3.03 REMEDIAL MEASURES Upon direction of the Landscape Architect, cut out and/or re-work all surfaces and subgade areas which do not meet the requirements of this section. Perform all remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 CLEAN-UP Sweep surface of pavers thoroughly, removing all dust and foreign materials. Hose with water to ensure a clean, unsoiled surface. Sweep and hose all adjoining areas to remove all mortar and paver debris. Remove all debris from area in accordance with Section 017419 Waste Management and Disposal. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc SITE IMPROVEMENTS 03 30 55 - 1 32 30 00 - 1 SECTION 32 30 00 SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 - General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and perform all operations necessary for completion of the work of this section as shown on the Drawings, as herein specified and as evidently required to properly complete the following items: 1. WOOD DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE 2. BIKE RACKS 3. SOLID CELLULAR VINYL FENCE 1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE A. Cast-in-place Concrete ........................................... Section 03 30 00 B. Cast-in-place Concrete (Site) ................................. Section 03 30 55 C. Bases, Ballasts and Paving .................................... Section 32 10 00 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Forty-five days prior to installation and before any site furnishings are delivered to the job site, submit samples, specification cuts or shop and erection drawings for all items in Section 02950 indicating materials size and weight of steel, number, location and type of connection, welding sequence and hardware. B. Product literature/specifications cuts required: 1. All items listed in 1.02 above 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM Standards 1. A307- Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners 2. A424-Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling 3. A500-Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes 4. B209-Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OF MATERIALS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc SITE IMPROVEMENTS 03 30 55 - 2 32 30 00 - 2 A. Architectural Coatings All architectural coatings shall comply with the National Volatile Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings, (EPA 40 CFR Part 59, as pub- lished in the Friday, September 11, 1998 Federal Register). Architectural coat- ings are defined as: “a coating recommended for field application to stationary structures and their appurtenances, to portable buildings, to pavements, or to curbs.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE A. Wood dumpster screen shall be constructed of first grade cedar as shown on de- tail. 6” x 6” posts shall be cedar. All hardware to be galvanized with black painted epoxy finish, 2 coats minimum. B. Corner posts and gateposts shall be 6” x 6” cedar with cedar cap. C. Shop drawings and hardware shall be submitted to landscape architect for aproval. 2.02 BIKE RACK A. Bike Rack for 11 Bikes; color to be selected by owner. Bike rack SPR-DBL-11-SF- MS by Madrax 1080 Uniek Drive, Waunakee, WI 53597 (800) 448-7931 2.03 SOLID CELLULAR VINYL FENCE A. Solid cellular vinyl picket fence to be 3.5’ High Alternating Height Jamestown Pick- et with rails posts and caps, as manufactured by Colonial Fence CO 32 Pine Street Norfolk, MA. 02056 1(800)696-8934. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General The work related to each of the site improvement items shall be fabricated, con- structed and finished in every respect in a good, workmanlike and substantial manner, to the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. All parts necessary for the proper and complete execution of the work, whether the same may have been specifically mentioned or not, or indicated on the drawings, shall be done or furnished in a manner corresponding with the rest of the work as if the same were specifically herein described. B. The workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and neat in appearance. All work shall meet the requirements of applicable federal, state and local codes and other authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FENCES AND GATES 32 31 00-1 SECTION 32 31 00 FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide chain link security fencing and gates for site perimeter and areas requiring separation during construction. B. Provide wood fence as shown on site drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. FENCES AND GATES 32 31 00-2 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL 1. All wood materials shall be treated wood, or wood of a natural resistance to decay. Materials shall be free from loose knots, cracks, and other imperfections. 2. Cast-in-place Concrete: Class 3000 minimum, Section 03 30 00. B. WOOD BOARDS OR SLATS 1. Wood boards or slats shall be of cedar, redwood, combed spruce or similar wood acceptable to Architect. 2. Wood boards or slats shall be between 3/8 inches and 5/8 inches thick and be no greater than 6 inches wide. C. POSTS 1. Fence and Man Gate posts shall be 4-inch by 4-inch. 2. Posts shall be pressure treated redwood, douglas fir-larch, cedar or similar wood acceptable to Architect. 3. Buried post ends should be treated with an approved wood preservative product. 4. Gate designs shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Comply with ASTM F 567. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Install posts to depth to avoid frost heave. B. Restore or replace damaged components. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 1 32 90 00 - 1 SECTION 32 90 00 PLANTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Attention is called to the requirements of the printed Form of Contract and to Division 1 - General Requirements, of which this section is hereby made a part. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT A. In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. (See Article 1 of the General and Supplementary General Conditions.) 1.04 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.05 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED A. If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.06 SECTION INCLUDES A. Planting required for the Work is indicated on the Drawings and, in general, includes planting of trees and/or shrubs and/or groundcovers throughout the Work including furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for root protection, and tree guards where applicable. 1.07 RELATED WORK A. Earthwork (Site) .................................................................... Section 31 00 00 B. Seeding…………………………………………………………..Section 32 95 00 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 2 32 90 00 - 2 A. Qualifications of Workmen Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods of their installation, and direct all work performed under this Sec- tion. B. Standards 1. All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect con- trol. 2. Quality and size shall conform with the current edition of “American Standard for Nursery Stock" for number one grade nursery stock, as adopted by the American Nursery & Landscape Association. 3. All plants shall be true to name and one of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the name and size of the plants, in accordance with the latest standards of practice of the American Nursery & Landscape Association. In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common names. 4. All Plants to be grown from stock hardy in USDA Plant Hardiness Zones 2 through 5. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List Thirty days before any planting materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect a complete list of all plants and other items proposed to be installed: 1. Include a complete data on source, size, and quality. 2. Demonstrate complete conformance with the requirements of this section. 3. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described in the Drawings or these Specifications unless the substitution has been approved in advance by the Architect. B. Certificates 1. All certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. 2. Upon completion of the installation, deliver all certificates to the Architect. C. All submittals shall follow the Provisions of Section 01330-Submittal Procedures. 1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 3 32 90 00 - 3 A. Delivery and Storage 1. Deliver all items to the site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of Architect's inspection. 2. Immediately remove from the site all plants that are not true to name and all materials that do not comply with the provisions of this Section of these Speci- fications. 3. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Planting Season 1. Planting shall be done within the following dates: Deciduous material: March 1 - May 15 October 25 - December 1 Evergreen Material: March 1 - June 1 August 15 - October 15 Seeding, Sodding: April 1 - June 1 August 15 - September 30 2. If special conditions exist which may warrant a variance in the above planting dates, a written request shall be submitted to the Project Architect stating the special conditions and the proposed variance. Permission for the variance will be given if warranted in the opinion of the Architect. Variances permitted will not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages caused by planting out of season. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FERTILIZER A. Plant fertilizer packets shall be installed as per the drawings. 2.02 SOIL AMENDMENT A. All soil amendment shall be peat; a domestic product consisting of partially decom- posed vegetable matter of natural occurrence. It shall be brown, clean, low in con- tent of mineral and woody material, mildly acid and granulated or shredded, and for- tified with organic nitrogen or an equal commercial soil amendment approved in ad- vance by the Architect. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 4 32 90 00 - 4 2.03 BARK MULCH A. Shredded cedar bark mulch shall consist of a standard size, free of chunks and pieces of wood thicker than 1/4" and approved by the Architect. The mulch must be partially decomposed and dark brown in color. 2.04 PEAT MOSS A. Brown; acid reaction about 4 to 5 pH; low in content of wood material and free of mineral matter harmful to plant life; water absorbing capacity, 1100 to 2000 percent; moisture content 30 percent natural, shredded or granulated. 2.05 WATER A. Contractor shall make, at his expense, whatever arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs of this contract. He shall al- so furnish all necessary hose, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the ad- equate irrigation of lawns and planted areas as may be required to complete the work as specified. 2.06 PLANTING SOIL A. All fill material for excavations for plants shall conform to 2.06-Planting Soil. B. The Contractor shall supply loam which shall be prepared by the Contractor so as to be free from subsoil, stumps, roots, stones over one half inch (1/2) inch diameter and other extraneous materials. Materials removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Soil shall not be used for planting while in a frozen or muddy condition. C. Planting soil mix shall be mixed to consist of seven parts loam and one part peat moss by volume. It shall have pH value between pH 5.0 to pH 6.0. Amend with lime as necessary to achieve required pH. D. Mix all materials at the proportions or amounts specified herein. Mixing shall be done by an approved method. Under no conditions shall mixing be done if materials are wet or in otherwise unsatisfactory condition, as determined by the Architect. 2.07 PLANT MATERIALS A. Plant materials shall be true to species and variety specified and shall be nursery grown in accordance with good horticultural practice under climatic conditions simi- lar to those in the locality of the project for at least two years. They shall have been root-pruned within the last two years. All plants B+B or container grown. No heeled-in plants or plants from cold storage will be accepted. B. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all plants shall be of specimen quality; excep- tionally heavy; and symmetrical, so trained or favored in development and appear- ance as to be unquestionable and outstandingly superior in form, compactness and symmetry. They shall be sound; healthy; vigorous; well-branched and densely foli- 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 5 32 90 00 - 5 ated when in leaf; free of disease; insects; eggs or larvae; and shall be free from physical damage or conditions that would prevent thriving growth. C. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees with multiple leaders, unless spec- ified, will be rejected. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, abrasion of bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, insect damage, or cuts of limbs over 3/4" in diameter, not completely calloused, will be rejected. D. Plants shall conform to measurements specified in the Plant Lists, except that plants larger than specified may be used if approved by the Architect. Use of such plants shall not increase the Contract price. If larger plants are approved, the root ball shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. E. Caliper measurement shall be taken on the trunk 6" above natural ground line for trees up to 4" in caliper and 12" above the natural ground line for trees over 4" in caliper. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant and not from branch tip to tip. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size, and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. Measurements specified are minimum size, acceptable after pruning where pruning is required. Plants that meet measurements but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected. F. All plants shall be labeled with correct plant name and size. Labels shall be at- tached securely to all plants, bundles, and containers of plant materials delivered with care that those attached directly to plants will not restrict growth. G. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted, unless authorized in writing by the Architect. If proof is submitted and substantiated in writing that any plant speci- fied is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest available size or similar variety with a corresponding adjustment of Contract price. H. Type of Protection to Roots 1. Balled and Burlapped Plants Plants designated "B&B" in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. Where necessary to prevent breaking or cracking of the ball during the process of planting, the ball may be secured to a platform. 2. Protection After Delivery The balls of "B&B" plants and container grown plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be covered with moist soil or mulch, or other pro- tection from drying winds and sun. All plants shall be watered as necessary until planted. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 6 32 90 00 - 6 2.09 INSPECTIONS A. Certificates of inspection shall accompany invoices for each shipment of plants as may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with the Architect prior to acceptance of the material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at the work site. 2.10 SELECTION AND TAGGING A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect at their place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such ap- proval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during the progress of the work. A Contractor's representative shall be present at all inspections. B. Written requests for inspection of plant material at their place of growth shall be submitted to the Architect at least 10 calendar days prior to digging. Written re- quests shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. The Architect may refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants are not available for inspection. C. Plants identified as "selection specimen" shall be approved and tagged at their place of growth. For distant material, submit photographs for pre-inspection review. 2.11 PLANT LABELS A. Plant labels shall be durable, legible stating the correct plant name and size in weather-resistant ink or embossed process lettering. 2.12 ANTI-DESICCANT A. Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion, which provides a protective film over plant sur- faces, permeable enough to permit transpiration. It shall be delivered in containers of the manufacturer and mixed according to the manufacturer's directions ("Wiltpruf" manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products Inc., Stubbings Road, Groton Falls, New York, or approved equal). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installa- tion may properly commence. 2. Verify that planting may be completed in accordance with the original design and the referenced standards. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 7 32 90 00 - 7 B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrep- ancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 EXCAVATION OF PLANTING AREAS A. Stake out the ground locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted and obtain approval of the Architect before excavation is begun. A minimum of 30 per- cent of total planting must be staked before inspection will be made. B. Excavate tree and shrub pits as shown on the Drawings. C. Separate subgrade soils from the upper topsoil portions and remove immediately wherever encountered during planting operations. D. Notify the Architect in writing of all soil condition that the Contractor considers detri- mental to growth of plant material. State condition and submit proposal in writing to the Architect for correcting condition. Notify the Architect in writing of all soil or drainage conditions that the Contractor considers detrimental growth of plant material. E. Test drainage of suspect plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succes- sion. Conditions permitting the retention of water in planting beds for more than 12 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. F. If rock, underground construction work, tree roots, or obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be considered by the Archi- tect. Where location cannot be changed, as determined by the Architect, submit cost required to remove the obstructions to a depth of not less than 6" below the re- quired pit depth. Proceed with work after approval of the Architect. 3.03 PLANTING OPERATIONS A. Digging and Handling of Plant Materials to be Relocated 1. Immediately before digging, spray all evergreen or deciduous plant material in full leaf with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs, and/or foliage. 2. Dig, ball and burlap ("B&B") plants with firm, natural balls of earth with diame- ter not less than that recommended by American standard for Nursery Stock and of sufficient depth to include the fibrous and feeding roots. Plants moved with a ball will not be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 8 32 90 00 - 8 soil, wet moss, or other acceptable materials and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. 4. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. B. Planting Trees and Shrubs 1. Protect plants at all times from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable material and shall be kept well watered. Plants shall not remain unplanted for longer than three days after delivery. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball only. 2. Set plants at same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in position until prepared topsoil has been tamped solidly around ball and roots. 3. Cut and remove ropes, strings and wrappings from top 1/3 of ball after plant has been set. Leave balance of wrappings intact around ball. If wrapping is plastic, remove top 2/3. 4. Backfill plant pits with prepared planting soil. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly, eliminating all air pockets. After watering, install planting soil to top of pit and repeat watering. 5. Form saucer around tree as indicated on the Drawings. 6. Finish grade planting areas to conform to grades on Drawings. 7. Mulch all pits and beds with a 4" layer of shredded bark mulch immediately after planting. 8. Immediately after planting, water all plants thoroughly. C. Pruning 1. Prune plants only at time of planting and according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning to be done un- der supervision of the Project Architect. Pruning and trimming shall include the following: a) Remove all dead wood, suckers, and broken or badly bruised branches, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. Contractor shall not cut main leader of tree. b) Use only clean sharp tools. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 9 32 90 00 - 9 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF TREES AND SHRUBS A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until acceptance of the project by the Owner after final inspection or 60 days, which- ever is longer. B. Maintenance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, re- setting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and furnishing and applying such sprays or other items as are necessary to keep the planting free of insects and disease and in thriving condition. C. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage of all kinds for the duration of the maintenance period. If any plants be- come damaged or injured, they shall be treated or replaced as directed by the Archi- tect at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide all equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas not equipped with an irrigation system. 3.05 INSPECTION In addition to normal progress inspection, schedule and conduct the following formal inspections, giving the Architect at least 24 hours prior notice of readiness for in- spection: A. Inspection of plants in containers prior to planting. B. Inspection of plant locations to verify compliance with the Drawings. C. Schedule the final inspection sufficiently in advance and in cooperation with the Ar- chitect so that the final inspection may be conducted within 24 hours after comple- tion of planting. D. Final inspection will be at the end of the maintenance period, provided that all previ- ous deficiencies have been corrected. 3.06 ACCEPTANCE A. The Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Con- tractor. The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the antici- pated date of inspection. 1. Acceptance of plant material by the Architect shall be for general conformance to specified size, character, and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of re- sponsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct spe- cies. 2. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgment of the Architect, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the ac- ceptance of the work. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 10 32 90 00 - 10 B. Acceptance in Part 1. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's best interest to do so and when approval is given to the Contractor in writing to com- plete work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this Contract. 3.07 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS A. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance. B. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one year from the date of Acceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition. C. When work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods extend from each of the par- tial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guaran- tee periods terminate at one time. D. The Contractor shall replace, without cost to the Owner and as soon as possible as weather conditions permit and within a specified planting period, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous thriving condition, as determined by the Architect during and at the end of the guarantee period. Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips and shall bear foliage of a normal density, size, and color. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Re- placements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification. E. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a re- placement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended guaran- tee period, the Owner may elect subsequent replacement or credit for each item. F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspection at no extra cost to the Owner during the guarantee period to determine what changes, if any, should be made to the Owner's maintenance program. Submit in writing to the Architect any recommend- ed changes. 3.08 CLEANUP A. When any of this work is done while buildings are occupied, pavements shall be kept clear at all times, broom cleaned to prevent tracking dirt into buildings. B. After completion of all planting operations, dispose of all debris and excess material to the satisfaction of the Architect. All pavements shall be broomed and hosed clean. 3.09 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. PLANTING 03 30 55 - 11 32 90 00 - 11 A. At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work for final acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be re- ceived at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection. B. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judg- ment of the Architect at that time, he shall certify in writing to the Contractor as to the final acceptance of the Project. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 33 11 00-1 SECTION 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: P900 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 33 20 00 – 1 SECTION 33 20 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the Work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to: 1. Installation of water distribution system consisting of excavation, piping, valves and boxes, pipe fittings, thrustblocks, manhole, vaults and all necessary and required accessory items and operations including sheeting, bracing, pumping and coordination with interior plumbing and electrical contractors. 2. Connection of building water service lines to the water distribution system. 3. Testing and disinfection. 4. Installation of water lines within the Public R.O.W. and/or Easements, including connections to existing water supply facilities. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 33 20 00 – 2 5. Work performed under the Water Distribution System Scope of Services shall be limited to work outside of, and up to a point of ten (10) feet outside of the building(s) foundation wall as shown on the Drawings. Work inside the building and connection to new water service piping installed under this section shall be included under the scope of services described in the various sections of Section 15400 PLUMBING and Section 15300 FIRE PROTECTION of these Specifications. 6. The Contractor shall pay for all costs and fees related to connecting water system to existing services and shall file all applications, details, and drawings, required by the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Site Demotion Clearing and Grubbing……… .............................. Division 31 Earthwork ................................................................................. Division 31 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Local Municipality Requirements 1. The Contractor shall notify the local Water Department sufficiently in advance of connecting new or relocated water services to existing water main. All work and materials shall be subject to approval of the Water Department. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with the municipal and State personnel and paying all fees associated with the water system installation and testing. 3. All water distribution materials and installation shall conform to the requirements of the local DPW Waterworks Standards. Should discrepancies exist between the local Standards and this Specification, the local Standards shall prevail. For materials or methods of installation not included in the local Standards, but specified herein, the Contractor shall submit this material or methodology to the local DPW for approval prior to purchase and/or execution. B. Inspection and Testing 1. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to which the material is manufactured. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect in duplicate sworn certificates of such tests. 2. The Owner reserves the right to have any or all pipe, fittings and special castings inspected and/or tested by an independent testing 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 33 20 00 – 3 agency at either the manufacturer's plant or elsewhere. Such inspection and tests shall be at the Owner's expense. 3. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and a hammer test just before being installed. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List After the award of the Contract and before any water system materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Architect, a complete list of materials proposed to be furnished and installed. 1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturers' recommendations as to method of installation. 2. Upon approval of the Architect, the manufacturers' recommendations shall become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual methods of installation used in the work. 3. Do not permit any water system component to be brought onto the job site until it has been approved by the Architect. B. Record Drawings 1. During the course of installation, carefully shown in red line on a print of the utility plan all changes made to the water system during installation. 2. Upon completion of the water system installation, these marked plans shall be supplied to the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. TYPE K COPPER PIPE All service connection piping shall be Type K copper. All pipe shall conform to AWWA standards for potable water. All pipe must be rated for 1.5 times the operation pressure or 150 PSI, whichever is greater. 2.02 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A. Gate valve shall be iron body, New York Style (Metropolitan Patter) conforming to AWWA C500. Gate Valve shall have mechanical joint ends, interior epoxy coated, 2 in. square operating nut. Valve shall open to right 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 33 20 00 – 4 (clockwise). Gate valve shall be designed to be bottle-tight for a minimum working pressure of 200 lb. per sq. in. B. Each valve shall be provided with a valve box. Box shall be 2 pieces slip- style cast iron and shall be an adjustable telescoping, heavy pattern type. 1. Box shall be designed and constructed to prevent the direct transmission of traffic loads to the piping or valve. 2. Upper section of box shall have a flange with sufficient bearing area to prevent undue settlement. Lower section of box shall be designed to enclose the valve operating nut and stuffing box, and rest on the backfill. 3. Boxes shall be adjustable by 6 in. vertically without reduction of the lap between sections to less than 4 in. 4. Inside diameter of box shall be at least 5 1/4 inch and length of box shall be as required to suit finish ground elevation. 5. Box cover shall be close fitting and substantially dirt-tight. Top of cover shall be flush with top of box rim. Cover shall have a word "WATER" cast into top. 6. Box shall be equal to that as manufactured by the Tyler Corporation. C. For valves installed with depth of cover substantially greater than that specified, extensions, including centering spacers, shall be added to the operation nut assembly to raise the operating nut to a depth below grade equal to that with the normal required depth of cover. 2.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide underground-type plastic line markers, manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service. B. Size: Min. 6 in wide x 4 mils thick C. Provide blue tape with black printing reading "CAUTION WATER LINE BURIED BELOW". D. During backfilling/top-soiling of sanitary sewage systems, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 in. to 8 in. below finished grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 33 20 00 – 5 A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that water utilities may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the referenced local Water Department Standards. Where exact locating dimensions of piping are not indicated on the Drawings, the Architect's approval shall be obtained for proposed locations before installation. B. Ductile iron pipe fittings shall be installed in accordance with the local Water Department Standards. 1. Bottom of trench excavation shall be kept dry and free of water during pipe installation. Adequate measures including dewatering as required shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipe in the trench. 2. Each pipe length shall be installed to form a close joint with the next adjoining length and bring inverts to the required grade. 3. Each pipe length shall have a firm bearing along its entire length. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 4. Where indicated, new system shall be connected to existing Municipal Water Distribution System in accordance with the local Water Department Requirements. C. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation, and shall be maintained free from foreign matter during installation. 1. Where necessary, tight-fitting temporary wood bulkheads shall be employed to close ends of pipeline at end of each day's work. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. WATER DISTRIBUTION SERVICE 33 20 00 – 6 2. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. D. In any pipe showing a distinct crack and in which it is believed there is no incipient fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, the cracked portions, if so approved, may be cut off by and at the expense of the Contractor before the pipe is laid so that the pipe used will be perfectly sound. The cut shall be made in the sound barrel at a point at lest 12 in. from the visible limits of the crack. 1. Except as otherwise approved, all cutting shall be done with a machine suitable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Hydraulic squeeze cutters are not acceptable for cutting ductile iron pipe. Travel type cutters and guillotine or rotary type abrasive saws may be used. All cut ends shall be examined for possible cracks caused by cutting. 2. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that damage to the lining of pipe or fittings will render them unfit for use; he shall use the utmost care in handling and installing lined and coated pipe and fittings to prevent damage. Protective guards shall not be removed until the pipe is to be installed. E. Concrete Thrust Blocks 1. Changes in direction, both vertical and horizontal shall be braced with concrete thrust blocks. 2. Where pipe is being capped for future connection, cap shall be braced with concrete thrust block. 3. Concrete shall meet requirements of Section 03300, CAST-IN- PLACE CONCRETE. 4. Thrust block sizing and installation shall be in accordance with local Water Department Standards. 3.04 WATER SERVICE ABANDONMENT A. Where a water service is to be abandoned as shown on the plans, the Contractor shall disconnect the lateral from the corporation stop and the corporation stop shall be closed, or, as directed by the local Water Department to properly abandon the water lateral. B. Abandoned serivce pipe shall be completely removed and disposed of. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. SANITARY SEWER 33 30 00 – 1 SECTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this Section of the Specifications shall consist of providing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and required to install all of the water distribution and service facilities in accordance with Contract Documents. This work shall include but not be limited to Specifications found on Drawings: P900 END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 1 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SPECIFIED If an item or material of this trade is indicated in the Drawings but not specifically listed in this Section, provide such item or material at a standard of quality equal to the standard established for the balance of the work specified, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.03 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality of greater quantity of Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: - storm drainage pipe and subdrains - catch basins, manholes, storm drains and interconnecting lateral lines - required fittings and bends - testing B. Related Work Described Elsewhere Site Demotion Clearing and Grubbing………………….……..………...…Division 31 Excavation, Backfill, Earthwork, and Grading.. ....................................... Division 31 Cast in Place Concrete Paving…….……………..……….……….………..Division 32 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 2 B. Standards 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete - 318 3. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA): Concrete Pipe Design Manual 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A615 Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C139 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units C140 Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings C425 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets C443 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole C478 Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated C700 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers C789 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10- lb. (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. 457 mm) Drop D1157 5. Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Transporation (MDOT): Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges 6. National Clay Pipe Institute (NCPI): Clay Pipe Engineering Manual C. Codes-The work shall be completed in accordance with standards of the local municipality and the Massachusetts Department of Transportation. D. Permits-The Contractor shall pay for all permits and licenses as required. E. Inspection-All drainage system installations shall be inspected and approved by Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements with inspectors from the local municipality and paying all fees associated with the drainage system installation. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List After award of Contract and before any storm drainage system materials are delivered to the job site, manufacturer's product data shall be submitted. 1. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to method of installation. 2. Do not permit any storm drainage or sewerage component to be brought onto the job until it has been approved by the Architect. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 3 B. Record Drawings 1. During the course of installation, carefully show, in red line, on a print of the grading plan, all changes made to the storm drainage system during installation. 2. Upon completion of the storm drainage system installation, these marked plans shall be supplied to the Engineer. 1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect storm drain system materials before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Delivery and Storage Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers, with all labels legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CASTINGS A. Catalog listings on the plans indicated are from the Neenah Foundry Company catalogs. Subsections may be submitted for the approval of the Project Engineer, provided they are equivalent to those indicated and conform to State Specifications.The catch basin frame and grate shall be Model R-5901A or approved equal. B. The manhole frames and covers shall conform to MDOT Specifications C. Traps shall conform to MDOT requirements. 2.02 HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE This pipe shall conform to MDOT Standard Specifications Section M5.03.01. The pipe shall be constructed of high-density polyethylene. The pipe shall be seamless with corrugations on the exterior and shall have a smooth interior waterway. Corrugated plastic pipe shall not be used for flared ends or in other applications where the pipe will be exposed to vandalism and ultraviolet radiation. Cost of pipe shall include connections to flared ends of other material. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 4 2.03 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe PVC pipe and fittings for drainage and subdrainage applications shall meet ASTM D 1785 Standard Specifications for PVC plastic pipe, Type I Schedule 80. Joints shall be made in acordance with ASTM D 2855 Recommended Practice for Making Solvent- cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings. 2.04 MANHOLES A. Precast reinforced concrete manholes shall consist of precast reinforced riser sections, a concentric or eccentric to and a base section conforming with the typical manhole details. Precast manhole section shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections, designation C 478. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete for 4-foot diameter and for 5-foot diameter manholes for all sections shall be 4,000psi. The circumferential steel reinforcement for riser pipe, cone sections and base walls for the various sized manholes shall be as required by ASTM Standard Specification for welded Steel Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement, Designation A 185 and shall be as follows: B. Reinforcing in the bottom bases shall be of the same design as that required for the various sized manholes. Reinforcing shall extend into the tongue and groove of each manhole section. C. Manhole steps shall be aluminum drop-front type as manufactured by Alcoa Aluminum Company (or approved equal). All steps shall be cast into walls of the precast sections so as to form a continuous ladder with a distance of twelve (12") inches between steps. D. Each section of the precast manhole shall have two holes for the purpose of handling and laying. These holes shall be tapered and shall be plugged with mortar after installation. E. Monolithically pressure cast base sections shall be as shown on the drawings or as ordered by the Owner's Representative. Holes for pipes shall be case in the base section so that there is a clear distance of four (4) inches minimum between the inside bottom of the base section and the pipe invert. F. The joint for the pipe at the base section shall consist of a cast iron compression flange together with cast iron inserts (imbedded in the wall of the base section) and an "O" Ring (or approved equal) to provide a water tight seal and to allow a flexible joint capable of deflecting a maximum of 9 degrees from center line of pipe. 2.05 CLASS OF CONCRETE 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 5 Class A Concrete shall be used for all reinforced and plain concrete not otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Class A concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi, at 28 days with aggregates proportioned to produce a dense and watertight concrete. Class B concrete may be used wherever low-strength concrete can be allowed, including concrete fill under foundations and elsewhere as specified or indicated on the drawings. Class B concrete shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi, at 28 days. 2.06 STORMWATER TREATMENT CHAMBER A. The contractor shall furnish and install a complete stormwater treatment chamber at the location shown on the plans. The stormwater treatment chamber shall be a Stormceptor model STC 450i (specific model as noted on the plans), distributed by Rinker Materials, Houston, TX, or approved equal. The stormwater treatment chamber shall include any by-pass structures, inlet structures, or any other appurtenances necessary to provide the required treatment and intended function as shown on the plans. Any variation from the proposed locations, dimensions, inverts, or other parameters shall be detailed on a plan and submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. B. The stormwater treatment chamber shall provide the required treatment for the runoff and be capable, at a minimum, of conveying stormwater at a flow rate equal to the full-flow capacity of the inlet pipe (or combined full-flow capacities where multiple pipes are specified). The system shall be designed such that stormwater can enter the structure directly through the use of a catch basin type frame and grate and/or through piped connections, or as shown on the plans. The stormwater treatment chamber shall not resuspend trapped sediments or re-entrain floating contaminants under any condition. Direct access shall be provided to the sediment and floatable contaminant storage chambers to facilitate maintenance. There shall be no mechanisms that use direct screening as part of the treatment process. C. The stormwater treatment chamber unit shall consist of a concrete structure with inlet frame and grates/covers designed for HS-20 traffic loading with all other components being constructed of high strength, non-corrosive material such as fiberglass, PVC, and stainless steel that meet applicable ASTM design criteria. All material specifications are subject to the review and approval of the Engineer. The stormwater treatment chamber unit shall be installed on a compacted ¾” crushed stone foundation a minimum of six (6) inches in depth or as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Each stormwater treatment system shall be of a type that has been installed and successfully operating for a minimum of 5 years. The stormwater treatment system must be recognized by the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection and/or The Massachusetts Strategic Envirotechnology Partnership (STEP). 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 6 2.07 INFILTRATION CHAMBERS A. Stormwater infiltration chambers shall be Recharger 330XLHD chambers, manufactured by Cultec, Inc. or approved equal. B. Substitutions shall equal or exceed the proposed storage volume at each elevation of the stormwater infiltration chamber, as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that storm drainage system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to the requirements for trenching described in Section 02200 of these Specifications. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. General Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the local and state DPW Standards. Concrete pipe installation shall conform to Class B, Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA Manual. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 7 PVC pipe installation shall conform to NCPA Manual for Figure 8, Class C Bedding Condition. B. Approvals No pipe shall be laid without prior notification of the Architect. Each pipe shall be subject to inspection by the Architect immediately before it is laid, and defective pipe will be rejected. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated on the drawings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. C. Controls The grade and alignment of all pipe laid in trenches shall be controlled by batterboards, laser equipment, or parallel offset lines with accurate horizontal and vertical control checkout points spaced not greater than 25 feet. Grades and lines between points shall be set and checked with grade and alignment squares. Layout of controls shall be established by a Registered Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor. Alignment tolerances shall be 1 in 1,000 vertical and 1 in 500 horizontal. Pipe shall be inspected for alignment, and approval shall be obtained from the Architect before backfilling work commences. D. Procedure 1. Before being laid, each pipe length shall be inspected and tested to verify that it is not cracked, permanently dented or deformed. Pipe of the required size shall be laid to conform to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or given by the Contracting Officer. 2. Pipe shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Bell shall rest over a shallow excavation in pipe bedding to prevent pipe weight from bearing on bell. 3. Each pipe shall be so laid as form a close joint with the next adjoining pipe and bring the inverts continuously to required grade. Each pipe shall be supported with compacted crushed stone, graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch, to obtain a substantially unyielding bed. 4. Unless recommended by the ASTM standards and by the manufacturers of the various kinds and types of pipe, the Contractor shall not joint pairs of pipe before laying them. 5. No pipe or fitting shall be permanently supported on saddles, blocking, or stones. 6. Where a concrete cradle is used, the pipe shall be laid on concrete saddles so constructed as to provide lateral support for the pipe while the cradle is being placed. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 8 7. Pipe shall not be backfilled until joints have been fully inspected, and approved. 8. Entire length of pipe shall be thoroughly flushed clean following completion of backfill. 9. Lifting holes in concrete pipe shall be at top of pipe as installed. Holes shall be sealed with precast concrete plugs. Before plugs are installed, entire contact surface between plug and pipe shall be coated with asphalt mastic. Plug shall be driven home before mastic has set up. 3.05 PIPING Pipe joints shall be made with rubber gaskets, Portland cement mortar, nonshrink grout, or asphalt mastic compound. A. Rubber gasketed joint: Pipe gasket shall be installed using lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other accessories and methods recommended by the gasket manufacturer. Pipe and gasket surfaces shall be kept clean until pipe has been properly drawn up and the joint closed. Gaskets and other jointing material shall be placed on the pipe immediately before joint is made up. Jointing materials shall be inspected and defects repaired before joint is completed. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CATCH BASINS & MANHOLES A. General All drainage structures to be constructed within this contract shall be as indicated on the drawings and location shall be in strict accordance with the plans. Manholes and catch basins shall be plumb and vertical, with each section in true alignment. Materials shall be as listed herein and exceptions shall not be taken without prior approval. 1. Lifting holes in precast sections shall be thoroughly plugged with mortar and finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. 2. Drain pipe shall extend, around its entire circumference, to inside surface of wall of structure into which it is inserted. Pipe shall be joined to manhole wall using either a flexible manhole sleeve or nonshrink grout. For grouted joints, surface between pipe and wall shall be filled with nonshrink grout. B. Castings Casting frames shall be set on a full bed of mortar, true to grade and concentric with the masonry. All voids beneath the bottom flange shall be completely filled to make a watertight fit. A ring of mortar at least 1 inch thick shall be placed around the outside of the bottom flange extending to the outer edge of the masonry all around the frame. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz and Company Architects Inc. STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 41 00 – 9 Mortar surface shall be smooth and shall be sloped to shed water away from the frame. F. Where required, new piping shall be connected to existing manholes and catch basins by cutting or breaking into existing structures. Completed work shall be adequately patched and finished with nonshrink grout to the satisfaction of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STORM DRAINAGE 33 44 00-1 SECTION 33 44 00 STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The storm drainage system required for this work is indicated on the drawings and includes, but is not necessarily limited to: - concrete riser sections over existing storm lines per MHD Detail 202.5.0 - storm drainage pipe and subdrains - catch basins, manholes, storm drains, & interconnecting lateral lines - required fittings and bends - testing 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List-Shop Drawings B. Record Drawings 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Existing Utilities Protect existing utilities as specified in these Specifications. Use all means necessary to protect storm drain system materials before, during and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Construct drainage structures in accordance with Town of Northampton Department of Public Works standards. 2.02 CASTINGS A. The manhole frames and covers shall conform to MHD Specifications. B. Traps shall conform to MHD requirements. 2.03 CONCRETE PIPE A. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) shall conform to MHD Specifications Section M5.02.1. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STORM DRAINAGE 33 44 00-2 2.04 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe A. PVC pipe and fittings for drainage and sub-drainage applications shall meet ASTM D 1785 Standard Specifications for PVC plastic pipe, Type I Schedule 80. Joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 2855 Recommended Practice for Making Solvent-cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings. 2.05 MANHOLES A. Precast reinforced concrete manholes shall consist of precast reinforced riser sections, a concentric or eccentric to and a base section conforming to the typical manhole details and MHD specifications. 2.06 CATCH BASINS A. Catch basins shall be constructed of the materials, size, form thickness and in the manner shown detail on plans and conform to MHD standard drawings and specifications. Precast concrete basins shall consist of pre-cast reinforced riser sections, haunched concentric cone top section, and a base section conforming to the typical catch basin details. Where required by shallow installations or directed by the Engineer, provide a flat slab top constructed to support HS-20 wheel loading. B. Red Sewer Brick shall be used in the catch basins. Limits of rock excavation will be minimum of six (6) inches below and twelve (12) inches outside the base. Traps, frames, grate and inlets shall be furnished and installed as specified under their respective items. A minimum of 12 inches red sewer brick shall be used under the frames. The grates shall fit so as to prevent rocking or unnecessary space at the joints. 2.07 BRICK, MORTAR, EMBEDMENT MATERIALS, & CASTINGS A. Brick, mortar, embedment materials, and castings shall conform to the applicable sections of MHD Specifications and ASTM standards. 2.08 ADJUSTING AND REMODELING OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Existing manhole and catch basin structures to be adjusted or remodeled shall be adjusted and remodeled in conformance to MHD Specifications Section 210. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STORM DRAINAGE 33 44 00-3 B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the original design. 3.02 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all trenching and backfilling necessary for this portion of the work, strictly conforming to the requirements for trenching described in Section 02200 of these Specifications. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. General 1. Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the local and state DPW Standards. 2. Concrete pipe installation shall conform to Class B, Bedding Condition as specified in the ACPA Manual. 3.04 PIPING 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CATCH BASINS & MANHOLE 3.06 CERTIFICATES A. Affidavits shall be furnished from the manufacturer of pipe and appurtenances furnished and installed under this Section, certifying that such materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of these Specifications. 3.07 TESTING A. Tests for outside stormwater drainage piping shall be paid for by this Contractor as requested by the Engineer and approved before acceptance. All tests shall be performed after installation is completed including all backfilling, compaction and cleaning. B. Leakage 1. The sewers and appurtenant structures shall be made as nearly watertight as practicable and leakage measurements shall be made as directed by the Engineer. 3.08 PROTECTION OF EXISTING INFRATRUCTURE A. The existing infrastructure, including but not limited to; storm drainage components, sanitary sewer components, electric and telephone lines, gas lines, building foundations, etc. shall be fully protected from damage or disruption at all 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. STORM DRAINAGE 33 44 00-4 times. All work shall be coordinated with the TOWN OF NORTHAMPTON DPW and all utility companies as required. END OF SECTION 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 33 51 00-1 SECTION 33 51 00 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide natural gas distribution system piping, specialties, and accessories outside the buildings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance: NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code and local utility having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Piping System Minimum Working Pressures: 1. Gas Main: 150 psig. 2. Gas Service: 60 psig. B. Piping and Specialties: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B, Schedule 40, black. 2. Pipe Fittings and Joining Materials: Suitable for pipe and service. 3. Gas Valves: Manual valves, ANSI Z21.15 and ANSI Z21.15a. 4. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron 2-section box. 5. Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.21 or ANSI Z21.21a with mechanical operation. 6. Earthquake Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.70, mechanical operation. 7. Solenoid Valves: UL labeled, FM approved. 8. Gas Meters: Provided by utility company. 9. Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18 or ANSI Z21.18a, single stage, steel-jacketed pressure regulators. 10. Valve and Meter Pits: Concrete, 3000 psi; with ladder, manhole frame and cover, drain. 11. Piping Specialties: Dielectric fittings, service line risers, flexible connectors, strainers. 12. Protective Coating: Factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, polyethylene coating for corrosive atmospheres. 13. Identification: Metal engraved nameplates; metallic-core plastic underground warning tapes. 82 Bridge Street Housing September 28, 2018 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 33 51 00-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with local utility company requirements, pipe manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION